GIFT OF 
 
 C, 
 
 S>7/8 
 

A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 
 
 OF 
 
 PORTUGUESE AND ENGLISH, 
 
 EXHIBITING, IN A SERIES OF EXERCISES IN DOUBLE 
 TRANSLATION, 
 
 THE IDIOMATIC STRUCTURE OF BOTH LANGUAGES, 
 FOR THE USE OF BOTH NA TJONS. 
 
 REV. ALEX. J. D. D'ORSEY, B.D, 
 
 CHANCELLOR'S ENGLISH MEDALLIST, 
 
 LATE ENGLISH LECTURER AT CORPUS CHRISTI COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, 
 
 PROFESSOR IS THE THEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT OF KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON, 
 
 KNIGHT COMMANDER OF THE ROYAL PORTUGUESE ORDER OF CHRIST. 
 
 JFourtf) (Edition, 
 
 CORRECTED AND IMPROVED 
 
 LONDON: 
 TKUBNEB & CO., LUDGATE HILL. 
 
 1887. 
 
 [All rights reserved.] 
 
BALLANTYNE, HANSON AND CO. 
 EDINBURGH AND LONDON 
 
 vr 
 
HIS MOST FAITHFUL MAJESTY, 
 
 DOM PEDRO 7., 
 
 KING OF PORTUGAL, 
 
 ETC., ETC., ETC., 
 THIS GRAMMAR IS, BY EXPRESS PERMISSION, 
 
 .Most ceepectfuHg Befcfcatefc, 
 
 BY HIS MAJESTY'S 
 
 VERY GRATEFUL SERVANT, 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 
 LISBON, 1853. 
 
 445895 
 
PREFACE 
 
 TO THE FIEST LONDON EDITION. 
 
 THE peculiar plan on which this Grammar * is constructed 
 will be so evident to the habitual student, from a mere inspec- 
 tion of any of its pages, that it seems hardly necessary 
 to introduce it with the now almost stereotyped formality 
 of a preface. It is, however, possible that some persons 
 may feel the want of a few explanatory remarks as to the 
 system, sources of information, method of study, and kindred 
 topics ; and I may, therefore, venture to offer one or two 
 observations. 
 
 The plan may be called a copy or adaptation of OllendorfFs 
 and Arnold's, for there is certainly enough of resemblance 
 to justify the comparison ; but, from having iised the text- 
 books of both authors in teaching classics and foreign 
 languages, I can safely say that this little work is not a 
 servile imitation. It aspires to follow the excellences, 
 without adhering to the blemishes, peculiar to the popular 
 models in question. For instance, it does not indulge in 
 the tedious repetition of the same words and phrases, which 
 some consider the distinguishing merit of Ollendorff ; nor 
 does it enter into those minute details and unimportant 
 philological discussions with which Arnold often perplexes 
 
 * The first edition, compiled in Madeira in 1852, was printed in 
 Lisbon. This, the first London edition, is greatly improved and 
 enlarged. 
 
PREFATORY NOTE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. 
 
 MY friend and colleague, Senhor Peixoto, Knight Com- 
 mander of the Koyal Portuguese Order of Christ, Profes- 
 sor of Portuguese at King's College, and Mademoiselle 
 Yerdier Winteler de Weindeck, have most kindly assisted 
 in correcting this edition, so that it is hoped no material error 
 will be found in the work. 
 
 A. J. D. D. 
 
 13 PRINCE'S SQUARE, KENSINGTON GARDENS, 
 1< September 1887. 
 
A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 
 
 POETUGUESE AND ENGLISH. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 pae, a mae, a filha. 
 
 Do sol, da liia. 
 Ao cavallo, a egua. 
 Pelo* soldddo, pela igreja. 
 No jardim, na rua. 
 De, em, a, para, por. 1 
 
 The father, the mother, the 
 
 daughter. 
 
 Of the sun, of the moon. 
 To the horse, to the mare. 
 By the soldier, by the church. 
 In the garden, in the street. 
 Of, in, to, for, by. 
 
 s61. A liia. cavallo. A igreja. Do soldado. Da 
 filha. Da e"gua. Do jardim. Ao pae. A filha do soldado. 
 A mae do governador. Ao tempo. No fim do mez. A'gua 
 na bacia. Na mesa. No campo. Pelo caminho de fe"rro. 
 Ao principio. No inve'rno. No mar e na t^rra. Ao ar. Ao 
 presente. A casa do governador. fim do anno. Para a 
 cama. cavallo do soldado. Ao sul do rio. exemplo 
 do bispo. Na fl6r oto idade. Ao tempo do dominio romano. 
 A hist6ria do paiz. A boca da grUta. J. vinda do conde 
 com um exe"rcito. A influencia da rainha. Para o progresso. 
 da civilisa^ao. Na cama. Ao mercado. No chao. 
 
 The horse. The mare. The garden of the father. At 
 the beginning of the year. On the table. O/ the door. 
 TTze history o/ the country. The influence of the governor. 
 The progress of civilisation in the Roman empire. The 
 railroad in the country. To the entrance of the grotto. 
 In the garden of the soldier. The father of the gover- 
 nor. The church in the street. At present. The count 
 and the soldier. The sun and the moon. At market. Or 
 the ground. The end of the year. The governor's horse 
 In the garden of the soldier. The progress of the railroad. 
 
 * Ptto is a contraction for por o, no for em, o, na for em a. 
 
 A 
 
LESSON II. 
 
 DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 GENERAL RULE. TVie Plural is formed, as in English, by 
 
 Os livros, as cartas. 
 Dos amigos, das casas. 
 A os irmaos, as irmas. 
 Pelos campos, pelas portas. 
 No servi90, nas guerras. 
 
 The books, the letters. 
 Of the friends, of the houses. 
 To the brothers, to the sisters. 
 Through the fields, by the doors. 
 In the service, in the wars. 
 And, is. 
 
 Os livros. Os cavallos. Os sold&dos. Os amigos. As 
 casas. As p6rtas. As guerras. As nias. As igrejas. Dos 
 livros. Dos cavallos. Dos soldados. Aos amigos. Aos 
 campos. Os livros dos Rom&nos. As janellas das casas. 
 As ondas ; nas profundezas do mar ; as montanhas ; os habi- 
 tantes da te*rra. No servi90 dos reis. Para a gloria da 
 patria. Nos br^os dos irmaos. Pelas jan^llas. As h6ras 
 da vida. Nas universidades, nas esc61as, e nos mosteiros. 
 Nas gav^tas. A lista dos erros. As h^rvas do campo. 
 arco dos f6rtes. Pelos Romanes. As faculdades do entendi- 
 m^nto. Pelo valor nos combates. Os castellos dos reb^ldes. 
 As fortiinas dos proprietaries. 
 
 The horses. Tlie friends of the soldiers. The house of 
 the sisters. In the castles of the kings. The inhabitants 
 of the fields. By the arms of the kings. The proprietors, 
 and the inhabitants of the cities. By Grecian civilisation. 
 The waves of the seas. The caprices of the friends. By 
 the faculties of the mind. By the valour of the brother. 
 In the wars of the Romans. In the fields of the country. 
 Tlie friends of the sisters. The list of the kings. The 
 inhabitants of the empires. The wars of counts. The for- 
 tunes of the Romans. By the doors of the houses. 
 
 Note. The accents in these pages are merely to guide the English 
 student, and are not to be copied in writing. For rules as to accents 
 see Ci Colloquial Portuguese," p. 2. 
 
( 3 ) 
 LESSON III. 
 
 INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 Um* homem, uma* mulher. 
 D'um rei, d'uma rainha. 
 A um numero, a uma coroa. 
 Por um tempo, por uma se- 
 
 m&na. 
 
 N'um logar, n'uma hora. 
 Com um sorriso, um vapor. 
 
 A man, a woman. 
 Of a king, of a queen. 
 To a number, to a crown. 
 For a time, for a week. 
 
 In a place, in an hour. 
 With a smile, a steamer. 
 
 Vm pai. Um soldado. Um cavallo. Uma filha. 
 Uma e"gua. Uma riia. D'um t jardim. D'um anno. D'um 
 rio. A uma filha. A tima igreja. A uma mulher. D'um 
 vap6r. Uma coiner e um garfo. Um chape"o de palha. 
 Uma delici6sa frescura, Com um te'rno am6r. Uma 
 rev61ta dos p6vos nas provlncias. Um c6rpo de tr6pas. 
 Um escudo, um elmo, uma espada, e uma Ian9a. Uma 
 chavena de chd. Uma garrafa de Malaga. Um profundo 
 silencio. Um grande mist^rio. A vida de um homem. 
 Um membro da famllia. Uma profunda melancholia. 
 Umas * b6tas. Com uns * Hvros nas maos. Por uns vdlles. 
 Por um dos notaries. 
 
 A friend. A house. A queen. A crown. Of a friend. 
 Of a house. To a man. To a crown. The horse of a 
 king. A voyage to FunchaL A cup of coffee. The bell 
 of a church. A shield of gold. A member of the family. 
 In a thought. With a smile. The glance of a moment. 
 The tender love of a sister. To a king. To a queen. In 
 the midst of a life of combats. An invitation from the 
 king. A bruise by a fall. A revolt of the soldiers. A 
 bottle of wine. A member of the council. Residence 
 in a family. A view of the plains. A small part of 
 Portugal One of the castles. A sword and a lance. A 
 straw-hat. In an hour. 
 
 * Used in the plural uns, umas, some. Um, uma, were formerly 
 always spelled hum, huma or hua. 
 
 t D'um is a contraction for de um, as n'um is for em um ; but the 
 uncontracted forms are often used. 
 
LESSON IV. 
 
 WITHOUT ARTICLE. 
 
 Joao, Inglaterra.* 
 De Maria, de Pedro. 
 A Jose, a Lisboa. 
 For Guilherme, por Anna. 
 Um sce*ptro de ouro. 
 forma. 
 
 John, England. 
 Of Mary, of Peter. 
 To Joseph, to Lisbon. 
 By William, by Anna. 
 A sceptre of gold. 
 Without form. 
 
 O filho de Ulysses. A guerra de Tr6ia. No territorio 
 de Coimbra.t Na corte do rei de Leao. Varios ramos 
 de instrucfao. No campo de batalha. Filho de Robe'rto 
 e irmao de Henrique. Aos fins de Abril. tumulo de 
 Anchises. Sem f6rma de templo. Uma nuvem de poeira. 
 Uma ra$a de gigantes. Os limites dos estados de Fer- 
 nando Magno. Pela conquista de Badaj6z. A guerra nas 
 fronteiras de Portugal Administrador do * Funchal na 
 Ilha da * Madeira. caminho por terra para Jerusalem. 
 Um lengo de cambrdia. Os idolos de ouro, de prata, de 
 c6bre, de p^dra, e de pau. Grande reducjao em precos. 
 Em grande escala. 
 
 The tomb of the king of Portugal. In the court of 
 Ulysses. By the wars of Anchises. In the territories of 
 Robert The son of the king of Leon. On the frontiers 
 of the states. A province of Spain. Son of John and 
 brother of Peter. A silver spoon. The tomb of Henry. 
 The way by land to Lisbon. A straw-hat. A cloud of 
 dust. By the conquest of Coimbra. In consequence of 
 the cloud. At the end of May. Idols of gold and silver. 
 In the territory of Austria. John's brother. Henry's mother. 
 The Island of Madeira. 
 
 * Proper names sometimes take articles. (1.) Countries : A Lom- 
 bardla, A Franga. (2.) Rivers : O Te*jo, O Mlncio. (3.) Great men : 
 O Camoes, O Virgilio. (4.) Familiarly : O Phelps, O Castelbranco. 
 (5.) For distinction : A Madeira, when it means the island of that 
 name ; because Madeira, without the article, means wood or timber. 
 
 t Almost as if Queem-bra. 
 
LESSON V. 
 
 ARTICLES USED IN ENGLISH, NOT IN PORTUGUESE. 
 
 Eamsgate, porto maritime. 
 Elleemddico.* 
 Que bello cavallo ! 
 Henrique primeiro. 
 Hist6ria de Portugal. 
 Nao ha dia. 
 Em tal caso. 
 
 Eamsgate, a seaport. 
 He is a doctor. 
 What a fine horse ! 
 Henry the First. 
 A History of Portugal. 
 There is not a day. 
 In such a case. 
 
 De viva v6z. Em p6ucas palavras. Em terc&ro logar. 
 Lisb6a, capital do reino, reside'ncia do ri. Setubal, villa 
 muito notavel, com vasto e seguro p6rto, exp6rta grande 
 quantidade de sal. Coimbra, em feliz situagao, tern estabele- 
 cimentos de primira ordem. Sou me'dico. N6ite calm6sa 
 de jiinho. Seu tio 6 hespanh61. Em meio dos grandes 
 riscos. Brist61, patria de L6cke, phi!6sopho illiistre. su 
 amigo 6 tenente. Que bello navio ! Que acgao tao infame ! 
 Este e um paiz bellissimo. Tanto melh6r. E animal amphi- 
 bio. Em beneficio dos habitantes. 
 
 Madrid, the capital of Spain. Your brother is a lawyer. 
 What a fine horse ! So much the less. In the fourth place. 
 George the Third. A history of Madeira. The frog is an 
 amphibious animal. Not a day passed in which, etc. In 
 spite of a brave resistance. In what we now call the pro- 
 vince of Estremadura. Up to a certain point. What a 
 night ! It is a fact, that, etc. The church is a beautiful 
 fabric. He had a good heart. His brother is a general. 
 What a beautiful town ! London, the capital of England. 
 In a little time. 
 
 * The article is invariably omitted in Portuguese before names of 
 professions, trades, etc., except when a special case is meant, as " 
 vigaiio nao estjl em casa. " 
 
 f Article omitted in titles of books. 
 
( 6 ) 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 ARTICLES USED IN PORTUGUESE, NOT IN ENGLISH.* 
 
 h6mem 6* o senhor da te~rra. 
 preto, o branco, e o verde. 
 A imagem da m6rte. 
 A virt&de e amavel. 
 Sobre tddos os assiimptos. 
 Desde as 9 as 3 h6ras. 
 For toda a Eur6pa. 
 
 Man is the lord of the earth. 
 Black, white, and green. 
 The image of death. 
 Virtue is amiable. 
 On all subjects. 
 From 9 to 3 o'clock. 
 Through all Europe. 
 
 fim da hist6ria 6" a verdade. No progre"sso da sciencia. 
 Todas as h6ras da vida. seu nome ^ celebrado por toda a 
 Asia, plo seu valor nos combates. Venho da igreja. 
 alm690 esU prompto. A hist6ria antiga e mod^rna. Os 
 soldados mo^os e os v^lhos. A r6sa 6 a mais be"Ua das flores. 
 A grandeza do nascimento. As virtudes dos seus mai6res. 
 A g!6ria militdr. A influencia do 6uro. As re"deas do 
 governo. melhoramento da educate. Em t6das as 
 classes do povo. As principaes nasoes da Europa. No 
 deciiiso da yida. Das cdrtas em geral. 
 
 Ancient and modem history. The constant exercise of 
 virtue. The weight of authority. The voice of independ- 
 ence, reason, and truth. The energy of social life. All sorts 
 of letters. The community of language. The old and new 
 scholars. The elephant is the largest of quadrupeds. The 
 administration of justice. To the north of Cape St. Vincent 
 In spite of all separations. The vast dominions of history. 
 In the empire of Brazil. Some o/whom. In truth. At least. 
 In case of alteration. The islands of Europe. Xavier, the 
 apostle of India. The influence of gold. 
 
 * The article is used in Portuguese before nouns in their widest 
 sense, e.g., man for mankind; and before abstract nouns, virtue, 
 beauty, etc. 
 
( 7 ) 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 ARTICLES OMITTED OR TRANSPOSED.* 
 
 Com uma, tal carta. 
 
 Em tap vasta escala. Tamanho. 
 
 Por via de re"gra. 
 
 Materias de facto. 
 
 Sem ceremonia. 
 
 Uma meia chicara. 
 
 With such a letter. 
 
 On so vast a scale. So great. 
 
 By way of rule. 
 
 Matters of fact. 
 
 Without ceremony. 
 
 Half a cup. 
 
 Esta colleccao de cartas. Em pouco tempo. TJm ge"nero 
 d'escriptura. Tao louvavel proposito. Em tal mat^ria. De 
 tal m6do. Niinca Ihe disse tdl cousa. Tdl n6me. Sem 
 restricgao. Em tdl caso. Em v6z baixa. Mais de meia 
 hora. A causa de tdl mudanga. Em segrMo. Em fumo. 
 Urn tamdriho privil^gio. Sem diivida. Com elegancia. 
 Com mais frequencia. Com 6rdem e m^thodo. Em pratica. 
 Em sil^ncio. Em parte. Por falta de espdgo. Em p6ucas 
 semanas. Em grande parte da Asia. motivo de simil- 
 hante proceder. 
 
 With energy. In a severe tone. In general. Without 
 pity. Such a man is praiseworthy. In short. This collec- 
 tion of books. In a little time. In such a case. In a low 
 voice. In a few days. Such a king. More than half an 
 hour. Eor want of time. In a great part of Europe. In 
 practice. With such a collection of letters. Such a title. 
 The reason of such a smoke. In a few months. A kind of 
 writing. The cause of such a change. Without doubt. In 
 secret. In such a way. Without restraint. Half a cup. 
 On so vast a scale. Such a thing. 
 
 * Observe the difference of idiom. The Portuguese place the articles 
 first in many cases, as if it were " with a such letter," and " a half 
 cup." 
 
( 8 ) 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 PECULIARITIES OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Quatro xelins o arratel. 
 Duas patacas a vara. 
 Com as chives na mao. 
 ver-te, e o abra^ar-te. 
 Levou as maos a cabec^u 
 bom do monge. 
 
 Four shillings a pound. 
 Two dollars an ell. 
 With the keys in his hand. 
 Seeing thee and embracing thee. 
 Raised his hands to his head. 
 The good monk. 
 
 Em todos os tempos. Pagar tanto por cabega. Boa gente 
 de ambos os se"xos. Fa9a-me outro par. Cdo que ladra nao 
 m6rde. A todos os respeitos. Instruido por tdo memoravel 
 acontecimento. No leito da m6rte. Apresentado por mao 
 de Fernando. Eram* p^rto das s6is h6ras da tarde do dia 
 seis de niaio do anno de 1389. Cdo que vive com 16bos, 
 acaba por ser fer6z. Com ambas as maos. abiiso da liber- 
 dade de imprensa. Por espd$o de cinco ^nnos. Mao dia 
 para comegar vidgem. Metade de uma semana. No domingo 
 de tarde. 
 
 I was Charles's comrade. "With the stick in his hand. 
 Make me another hat. On his death-bed. With both hands. 
 A bad day for beginning an enterprise. The liberty of the 
 press is precious. The good soldier raised his hand to his 
 mouth. This is three dollars a pound. I gave four bits a 
 yard for it. In all respects, I think it good. The money 
 was presented by the hand of Frederick. Half a week On 
 Saturday evening. On Monday afternoon. Another pair. 
 For the space of five days. He pays so much a head. Both 
 sexes. 
 
 * All preterites are now written with am instead of ao, and also the 
 3rd pers. plural of the ind. pres. of all verbs, except when do is the pre- 
 dominant sound, as sdo, estdo, ddo. 
 
( 9 ) 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 ARTICLES COMBINED WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 No, na, nos, nas, in the. 
 Pelo, pela, pelos, pelas, by the. 
 N'um, n'uma, in a. 
 
 Nos temos, we have. 
 Elles tern, they have. 
 Est&, is* 
 
 Bacia, basin; almoo, breakfast; mesa, table; quarto, room; 
 loja, shop ; igreja, church; escdda, staircase. 
 
 Na cama. Ao almogo. N'um quarto. Nas lojas. A 
 bacia nao estd no quarto. Pelo filho. Pela filha. Pelos 
 h6mens. Na bacia. Nas igrjas. Na escada. No uso 
 da lingua. Uma differena no syst&na. dominio dos 
 Rom&nos. almdgo esta na mesa. progre'sso da socie- 
 dade. Na verdade. Na infancia da hist6ria. Nos tempos 
 da revolu^ao. A restauragao das letras. No meio. Nas 
 universidades e nas esc61as. As ruinas da liberdade. Pelas 
 influencias dos tempos. N6s temos agua na bacia. Elles 
 tern livros nos quartos. 'Na 16ja. 
 
 In the beds. In the rooms. By the progress of truth. 
 In a shop. In the church and in the school. In the infancy 
 of society. The restoration of the Romans. In the midst 
 of the ruins. We have the use of the tongue. The basin 
 is in the room. By the influence of liberty. We have a 
 difference in the schools. Breakfast is on the table. In the 
 ruins of the church. The son is in bed. In the room of the 
 man. In the times of the Romans. The progress of truth. 
 The restoration of liberty. A difference in the use of the 
 book. In the boy's bed. 
 
 * Estd is used for is, when time, place, and circumstances are spoken 
 of ; but 6 is employed when a permanent quality is referred to. " A 
 dgua estd quente," the water is hot temporarily ; but "A agua do mar 
 e salgdda," sea-water is salt always. 
 
LESSON X. 
 
 NUMBER OF NOUNS REGULAR PLURALS. 
 
 Livro, look; uva, grape; irmao, brother; irma, sister; meia, 
 stocking ; sapato, shoe; navalha, razor; senhor,* lord, sir; estao, 
 are; eu tinha, I had; ella tinha, she had; nos tinhamos, we 
 had; elles tinham, they had; de-me, give me; meu, my (m.) ; 
 minha, my (f.) ; meus (m. p.) ; minhas, (f. p.) ; todo, a, os, as, 
 all ; mestre, master; nao, not. 
 
 Eu tinha livros. As disc6rdfas dos ties irmdos. DeVme 
 as navdlhas. Urn corpo de tropas. Os irmaos tern sapdtos 
 e meias. Elle tinha todas as meias. De-me os Uvros. Nas 
 fronteiras de PortugaL As dioceses dos lispos. Os senhores 
 nao tern navdlhas. Giterras e conquistas. Os membros da 
 congregagao. Os estddos dos re/s. De-me as minhas meias. 
 Os meus irmaos estao na fior da idade. As fronteiras dos 
 estddos. As traicves dos inimigos. Todos os livros. Os 
 descolrimentos dos navegdntes. Os Ziz^os sao os mestres 
 mudos. 
 
 She had not foo&s. I had a^oes. I had not a body of 
 f roops. The brothers of the bishops. The wars of the tt^s. 
 My brother has not razors. Had I books? I had not 
 sftoes. The sAoes and stockings of my brothers. We had 
 the stockings of the son. My brothers are in the rooms. 
 My sisters are in the midst of the rwzTzs. The s&ops of the 
 towns. The w?ars and conquests of the &m<7. The &e'ft<7s had 
 troops. We had &00&s. The king had a body of troops. 
 My sisfers had enemies. Give me the s&oes and stockings. 
 She had three sisters. They had my 
 
 * Nouns in r always take es to form the plural, senhor, senhorea. 
 Nouns in z likewise take es, \6z, \6zes. 
 
( 11 ) 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 NOUNS NUMBER.* 
 
 Cartas, peimas, folhas. 
 jas, desejos, copos. 
 
 Senhoras, deveres, moscas. 
 Dias, rapazes, jogos. 
 Caixas, rapozas, impostos. 
 
 Letters, pens, sheets. 
 Churches, wishes, glasses. 
 Ladies, duties, ih'es. 
 Days, boys, plays. 
 Boxes, foxes, taxes. 
 
 Mil agradecimentos. Grd$as a Deus. As cdrtas do amigo. 
 Os lirios do campo. A grandeza dos deuses. As cdrtas do 
 Padre Vieira. As leis da h6nra e do miindo. As mtisas 
 6ram as deusas das sciencias e das dries. PSnnas e tlnta. 
 As garrdfas e os cfipos. As senhdras e os rapdzes. Os dias 
 do anno. Ginjas, mordngos, amfiras, e pecegos. Vestidos 
 d'h6mem. Um s^culo de descobertas. As igrejas das 
 cidddes. Recddos & familia. Nos cantos das ruas. Os 
 ramos das /ams. As cdixas de cha. As rapozas nos 
 desertos. 
 
 The Ze^ers of the man. The Zeaves of the trees. The 
 wishes of the &o?/s. The dresses of the ladies. The brushes 
 of the ?wew. The bottles and the glasses. The duties of 
 the families. The glories of the discoveries. The ^Za^/s of 
 the fo?/s. Birches, beeches, and larches are fine frees. The 
 beauties of nature. The ladies of the family. The voices 
 of the goddesses. The houses and churches of the czfoes. 
 The fo?/s have peaches, nuts, and cherries. The dai/s of 
 the week. The dwfo'es of the Mz'es. Zrtfo'es and daisies. 
 The 600&S in the churches. A thousand thanks. The 
 of the &00&s. The w^s/ies of the mew and 
 
 * This page being intended to show Portuguese students the mode of 
 forming English plurals, may be passed over by Englishmen. 
 
( 12 ) 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 NOUNS NUMBER. * 
 
 Mulheres, paes, facas. 
 
 Tectos, pffanos, chefes. 
 
 Heroes, pretos, echos. 
 
 Nuncios. 
 
 Volcoes, bufalos, batatas. 
 
 Wives, loaves, knives. 
 
 Roofs, fifes, chiefs. 
 
 Heroes, negroes, echoes. 
 
 Nuncios. 
 
 Volcanoes, buffaloes, potatoes. 
 
 As folhas das /ores. Noe* com seus filhos, sua mulhe'r, e 
 as mulheres de s&is filhos. Mil copos de prata, vinte e n6ve 
 fdcas, trinta ideas d'ouro. Uma t6rta de cerejas. A virtiide 
 dos heroes. Os lobos sao animdes fer6zes. Os pifanos dos 
 pretos. As mulheres dos heroes. Os ladroes da Syria. Os 
 nuncios sao embaixad6res do papa. Os negros n'uma r6a da 
 America. Lencinhos do pescogo. Veus de r^nda. Seis 
 lenqos de seda. Gouves, espindfres, eritilhas e batdtas. Os 
 volcoes, os terremotos, as alluvioes. Os bufalos da America. 
 Os cawfos dos Lusiadas. 
 
 The ?^z;es of the men. The loaves of the thieves. The 
 Tcnives of the negroes. The ro0/s of the houses. The tfooes 
 of the province. The quarries of marble. " Paradise Lost," 
 a poem in twelve cantos. The tfrees on the margins of the 
 m'ers. Four silk handkerchiefs. The echoes of the wooefe. 
 The red and white potatoes are the most common roots now 
 in use. The punctilios of public ceremonies. The cool 
 grottoes. Ponderous folios. I sing of heroes and of fe'w^s. 
 American buffaloes. Knives, forks, and spoons. The cantos 
 of Childe Harold." 
 
 * For the Portuguese student. 
 
( 13 ) 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 NOUNS NUMBER.* 
 
 H6mens, mulheres, crea"nca6. 
 Pes, dentes, g&nsos. 
 Bois, p6rcos ; vinte"ns. 
 Katos,t murganhos; cunhos, 
 
 dados. 
 Tafdes, fachos, gddo. 
 
 Men, women, children. 
 Feet, teeth, geese. 
 Oxen, swine ; pennies, pence. 
 Mice, dies, dice. 
 
 Beaux, flambeaux, cattle. 
 
 Os homens, as mulheres e as credngas da cidade. Os rdtos 
 c6mem as hervilhas. Dois vintens o arratel. Os pes das 
 senhoras. T&iho bois, jumentos, ovelhas, servos, e servas. 
 Os se~us dentes 4ram c6mo os dentes dos leoes. Uma grande 
 vara de p6rcos. Ctirihos sao p^9as d'dgo pdra cunhar nas 
 mo^das ou meddlhas. O vlnho a seis vintens a garrafa. As 
 plantas dos pes. A luz dos fdchos. Dddos falsos. Fdchas 
 sao t6chas ou feixes de varas. As patas dos gdnsos. Os 
 dentes dos murgdnhos. As preten9oes dos tafues. Os azdres 
 dos dddos. Os pes dos bois. 
 
 The men are thieves. The women have knives. The 
 children have bottles and glasses. Abraham had sheep, 
 oxen, and asses. The hair of cats, rats, and mice. A 
 gamester and the dice. Two pence a pound. The coachmen 
 and footmen. The soles of the feet. Turkeys, geese, and 
 ducks. A herd of swine. The teeth of the lions. The 
 thieves have dies. Three pence a yard. Four silver pennies. 
 Dies used in stamping money. Four pence a pound. The 
 men's children are with the women. The feet of the swine 
 and the feet of the 
 
 * Chiefly for the Portuguese student. 
 
 t Rdtos means rats and often mice; but murgdnhos always mice in 
 Madeira. 
 
LESSON XIV. 
 
 NOUNS NUMBER. 
 
 Carneiro, veddos. 
 Apparelho, hiato, especie. 
 I>leios, riquezas. 
 Povo, gente ; hortalicas, al- 
 
 gemas. 
 
 Bellas-letras, as gazetas, ar- 
 chives. 
 
 Sheep, deer. 
 
 Material, hiatus, species. 
 
 Means, riches. 
 
 People ; vegetables, manacles. 
 
 Belles-lettres, the papers, ar- 
 chives. 
 
 Os h6mens c6mem os bois, os carneiros, os gdnsos, e os 
 veddos. A data do reinado de Affonso VI. do nome na serie 
 dos reis de Oviedo. bom pastor da a pr6pria vlda pelas 
 siias ovelhas. apparelho de gu^rra. Um hidto 6 lima 
 abertiira da b6ca occasionada pela prontincia das vogaes. 
 povo portuguez, c^lebre na hist6ria. Gente, mnltidao de 
 pessoas. As noticias sao boas. Hortalfya, couves, alfdces, 
 legumes nas h6rtas. Kiquezas, bens, e g!6ria. Uma multidao 
 de pdvo. Balantes ovelhas com os te"rnos cordeiros. Luiz 
 XIV. <ra o protector das bellas-letras. 
 
 The sheep and the oxen are in the fields. News of your 
 "brother. The crocuses and narcissuses are beautiful. A fine 
 bed of asparagus. The deserted archives of Portugal. Deer, 
 stags, and buffaloes. In the long series of kings. The 
 Spanish people. The academy of ihefine arts. The apparatus 
 of the chemist. A series of vowels. Sheep, deer, and oxen. 
 An obscure population. The papers are full of news. The 
 archives of the kingdom. The riches of the shepherd are the 
 sheep. The vegetables are good. The tender lambs of the 
 bleating sheep. The manacles of the thieves. The king is 
 the protector of the fine arts. 
 
LESSON XV. 
 
 PLURALS.* 
 
 Citizens, Christians, hands. 
 Captains, dogs, loaves. 
 Actions, nations, hearts. 
 Dwarfs, countrymen. 
 
 Cidadaos, Christies, maos. 
 Capitals, cdes, paes. 
 Acc06s, naqoes, coraqoes. 
 Andes, villaos, -6es. 
 
 Os cidaddos de Lisb6a. ^as mdos do inimigo. Capitdes 
 de ladroes. Cinco pdes e d6is peixes. A formagao dos 
 plurdes. A fiiria dos cidaddos. Coin violentas convulsoes. 
 As accoes do homem. Os medicos, os cirurgioes, e os boti- 
 carios. As intengoes sao excellentes. As dissensoes do 
 impe"rio. As paixoes das turbas. Christdos e sarracenos. 
 Os capitdes do exe"rcito. Os chefes das na9oes. As oroides 
 dos arcebispos. Uma das mdos. Os altares dos Christaos. 
 As pretences do rei. A exist^ncia das geraqoes. As col- 
 lecqoes de monumentos. alternado das estajoes. 
 
 In the hands of the citizens. The captains of the Chris- 
 tians. The thieves in the ci'fo'ea, The actions of the c/w'e/s. 
 The fury of the countrymen. The intentions of the surgeons. 
 The dissensions and convulsions of the empires. The genera- 
 tions of Moses. The relations of the king. The invasions 
 of the Christians. The conditions of the treaties. The 
 council of the ancients. The compositions of the poefe. The 
 cfo^s of the countrymen. The confessions of the hearts. The 
 definitions, the opinions, and the questions. The orphans of 
 the brothers. The passions of the pagans. The citizens of 
 Paris are in the Aawds of the enemy. 
 
 * There are tf^ree ways of forming the plural of nouns in ab, foi 
 which see Appendix, p. 257. 
 
LESSON XVI. 
 
 NOUNS PLURALS.* 
 
 Mares, colhem, cruzes. 
 Animdes, &6es, faroes. 
 Papeis, tonnm, fusz's. 
 H6me?zs, firis, hews, atuns. 
 Consules, males, panes. 
 
 Seas, spoons, crosses. 
 Animals, suns, lighthouses. 
 Papers, casks, firelocks. 
 Men, ends, goods, tunnies. 
 Consuls, evils, marshes. 
 
 Os tufoes dos mares da China. Anneis e brincos d'6uro. 
 O azeite das luzes. As plantas dao sdes. Cabeddes sao 
 dinhelros, haveres e materides. Os homens sao officides de 
 justisa. Milhdres de pergaminhos. Os repffe da t^rra. 
 Pescadores de homens. A harmonla das vdzeg. clarao nas 
 ntivens. Pecegos, figos e Tio^es. As mdrgens do rio. Os 
 principals da cidade. Os cart6rios das cathedrdes. Os 
 hfimens de letras. Os caracteres dos persondgens. Broqueis 
 de madeira ou de metal. Os minerdes do paiz. As ftrdem 
 do rei. As vezes. Nosfins do seculo. 
 
 The twees of the officers. In the seas of Asia. The 
 y?s/ies in the seas. The oil of the lights in the cathedrals. 
 The salts of the plants. Thousands of papers. The chief 
 wiew of the city are men of letters. The minerals of the 
 countries. The harmony of the voices of the fishermen. 
 In the archives of the cathedrals. Rings of gold. (7s&s 
 of wine. Silver spoons. Suns, moons, and stars. The 
 virgins of the house. The firelocks of the soldiers. Tlie 
 words are the S^TZS of the tdeos. The consuls in the c#zes. 
 The woses of the men. The rz'wps of the citizens. The 
 wafers of the seas. The sounds of the animals. The 
 of the women. 
 
 * See rules in Appendix. 
 
LESSON XVII. 
 
 NOUNS PLURAL. 
 
 Bases, eixos, crises. 
 Dados, meios, camddas. 
 Raios, genios, magos. 
 Redomoinhos, genios, indigenas. 
 Laminas, borralho. 
 
 Bases, axes, crises. 
 Data, media, strata. 
 Radi'i, geuii, magi 
 Vortices, geniuses, aborigines. 
 Laminae, scoriae. 
 
 Os eixos das curvas. As crises das doengas. As bases 
 das columnas. As crises sao as mudangas notaveis nas 
 mole"stias. Dados sao nogoes, razoes, fundam^ntos ou prin- 
 cipios. Os rdios sao semi-diametros. Byron e Scott fordo 
 genios. Os genios das lendas das Mil e uma n6ites. Re- 
 demomhos sao movimentos em giro nos rios on mares. Nos 
 appendices das 6bras. Os arcdnos da monarchia. Os magos 
 e"ram os sdbios dos orientaes. Hypotheses e systemas. Os 
 phenomenos da natureza. 
 
 The bases of the pyramids. The axes of the planets. The 
 crises of the histories. The scoriae of the volcanoes. Strata 
 of lime and coal. I have not data. The genii of death. 
 The radii or semi-diameters of the circle. The aborigines of 
 Spain. The vortices in the river. The magi of the East. 
 The Dons of Castile. The gifts of nature and grace. Laminae 
 in the minerals. The phases of the moon are phenomena. 
 Cantharides are insects. The foci of the ellipses. The Lares, 
 amongst the Romans, were domestic gods, protecting genii, 
 and guardians of the house. Errata in the theses. The 
 apices of the pyramids. 
 
( 18 ) 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 PLURALS. 
 
 Esm61a, annaes, cinzas. 
 Optica, politica, colete. 
 Tesoura, espivitaddr, tenazes. 
 Bofes, folle, calcas. 
 Oculos, ceroulas, as damas. 
 
 Alms, annals, ashes. 
 Optics, politics, stays. 
 Scissors, snuffers, tongs. 
 Lungs, bellows, trousers. 
 Spectacles, drawers, draughts. 
 
 Os annaes das racas. Miiitas esmdlas ao p6vo. As cinzas 
 de Isaac. No p6 e na dnza. Luce"rnas com sens espimta- 
 dores* Lampadas e tenazes d'ouro. Os miolos do h6mem, 
 A optica e uma parte da physica. A aveia e o trlgo. As 
 dbas do telhado. Aprendeu as mathemdticas com Pedro 
 Niines. Os tropicos. Os poros das plantas. Os b6fes sao 
 os 6rgaos da respira5ao. A politico, 4 a sciencia do govdrno. 
 Uma tesoura e um instrumento de diias p^gas. Dai-me as 
 meias e as calf as. Onde esU o folle t As tendzes estao no 
 canto. 
 
 The alms of the Christians. The annals of the cities. 
 The ashes of the dead. Optics is a branch of science. The 
 politics of the governors. The stays are new. Give me the 
 scissors and the snuffers. The lungs of the countrymen. 
 Golden tongs. The regimentals are on the table. Soots, 
 half -boots, shoes, pumps, and slippers. The shovel and the 
 tongs. The drawers are in the bed-room. The eaves of the 
 roofs. The tropics are parallel to the equator. He learned 
 Mathematics and Physics. The spectacles of the Dean. A 
 game at draughts. The brains of the hermits. 
 
 * Tesdura, or tesduras, espivitadtira, cal$a espivitadSr, tesdura das 
 are all terms in use for snuffers. 
 
( 19 ) 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 PLURALS. 
 
 P6rtico, portico; casco, hoof; menino, child; homem, man; 
 mulher, woman; pe,foot; morganho, mouse; rap6sa, fox; g&nso, 
 goose; mugido, lowing; boi, ox; dente, tooth: lobo, wolf; vitella, 
 calf; ovelha, sheep; pdrco, pig; folha, leaf; heroe, hero ; veado, 
 deer; e"cho, echo ; gloria, glory; cereja, cherry. 
 
 Os porticos dos tmplos. Os meninos dos heroes. Os 
 cdscos dos cavallos. Os homens e as mulheres estao nas igrejas. 
 Os pes dos ratmhos. As raposas tern os gdnsos. Os mugidos 
 dos &^5. Os denies dos /ofos. Os ^?es dos porcos. As se?z- 
 Aor5 tern vitellas, ovelhas, bdis e porcos. Os mordngos estao 
 nasfdlhas. Os ladroes tern os vestidos. Os genios da ^poca. 
 Os genios da Lampada. As folhas das arvores. Os zunidos 
 das moscas. Os meninos tern pecegos e cerejas. Os cavdllos 
 dos homens. Os dewtes dos meninos. Os gdnsos. 
 
 The porticoes of the churches. The Aoq/k of the 
 The children of the mew and women. The ee#i of the mice. 
 The /ee of the #eese. The echoes of the roofs. The glories 
 of the heroes. The wwes of the chiefs. He has calves, sheep, 
 swine, and c?eer. The peaches and cherries are in the leaves. 
 The cZo^es of the thieves. The rw/s of the Zadzes. The 
 geniuses of the age. The ^emz of the lamp. The buzzing of 
 jfo'es. The mera had /<%ees and wolves. The wves and children 
 of the heroes. The /ee of the mice. He has cherries and 
 
( 20 ) 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 PLURALS. 
 
 CidadS,o, citizen; Christao, Christian; mao, hand; orgHo, 
 organ; c3,o, dog; capitao, captain; escrivao, clerk; guardiao, 
 guardian; ac9ao, action ; cora9ao, heart; opiniao, opinion ; mar, 
 sea ; cruz, cross; animal, animal ; papel, paper y fossil, fossil y 
 paz, peace; miiito, a, os, as, many. 
 
 No territ6rio dos Christdos. Nas mdos dos Allemdes. Os 
 61hos sao orgdos. As opinioes dos capitdes. latldo dos 
 cdes. Os mdres da China. Os coracoes dos animdes. Os 
 papeis dos escrivdes. As moos dos guardides. As cruzes dos 
 Christdos. Os cidaddos de Lisboa. Os irmdos dos capitdes. 
 As benfdos dos ^>aes. As condicoes da vida. Os limoes do 
 jardlm. As affei$oes dos parentes. Li$6es de moral. As 
 cita$6es dos auctdres. As impressoes, do clima, das Z^, dos 
 dive"rsos estddos da civilisa9ao. As producfoes de todos esses 
 sublimes ewio& 
 
 The captains have three c?0#s. The opinions of the C7m's- 
 In the hands of the citizens. The organs in the 
 churches. The actions of the writers. The instinct of 
 animals. The new division. The conditions of the citizens. 
 By the actions of the citizens. In the Tiearfo of many animals. 
 The signals of invasions. By the^a><?rs of my parents. The 
 voices of the captains. The captains are the brothers of the 
 citizens. In the papers of the writers. In the regions of 
 poetry. Different editions of Zw&s. The poetical produc- 
 tions. 
 
( 21 ) 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS (MASCULINE), p. 258. 
 
 Pedro, rei, bispo, leiio. 
 Cafe, pe, valle, enxo. 
 Sal, fim, dom, ardor, prazer. 
 Javali, livro, peru, nau. 
 (f.) S^ fe, chaining 
 
 Peter, king, bishop, lion. 
 Coffee, foot, valley, adze. 
 Salt, end, gift, heat, pleasure. 
 Boar, book, turkey, ship. 
 Cathedral, faith, chimney. 
 
 Pedro & medico, e seu mdno lispo. Os desefos do rei. 
 rugido do ledo. ladrido do cdo. cafe e" bom. pe do 
 monte. vdlle de lagrimas. leite da vaca. cdnde e 
 do sangue dos ris. Idcre est& quente. A mare* e* ofluxo 
 e refluxo do mdr, A se de Coimbra. A fe e lima das tres 
 virtiides. Os ferros da chamin^. sdl da t^rra. fim da 
 rua. dom da natureza. ardor do conflicto. Os col- 
 mzlhos d' um javali Um catdlogo de livros. Uma ndu. 
 
 A king, the father of his people. The gift of the Arch- 
 bishop. The roaring of the lions. The clamour of men and 
 boys and dogs. The coffee is strong. The foot of the tree. 
 The heat of the valley. The Cathedral of Funchal. The 
 milk is good. The blood of the sacrifices. Tlie wax is soft. 
 The tide is favourable. The faith of the Christians. The 
 chimney of the chamber. TJie salt of the sea. At the end 
 of the book. The heat of the climate. The feet of the boar. 
 The wing of the turkey. The ships of the line. Thy 
 grandmother Lois. A cooper's adze. A crowd of people. A 
 barber's whet-stone. 
 
( 22 ) 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS (FEMININE). 
 
 Eainha Maria, criada, egua. 
 Liia, gua, calma. 
 
 Mai j-^ao, opiniao. 
 Amizdde, virtude. 
 (m.) Planeta, syste"ma, dia. 
 LS, merce, lei. 
 
 Queen Mary, servant, mare. 
 Moon, water, beat. 
 
 Mother, lesson, opinion. 
 
 Friendship, virtue. 
 Planet, system, day. 
 Wool, grace, law. 
 
 Victoria, rainha da Inglaterra, e Maria, rainha de Por- 
 tugal. Uma cridda e lima mulher que se"rve. Um cavallo 
 e \irna egua. A lua n6va. A dgua do mar. A cdlma e" o 
 calor do s61, e a fdlta de vento. A mde de Joao. tima li$ao 
 e lima leitura, ou lima evposifdo de doutrina. tlma nova 
 opinido. Pela sua erudi$ao. A invasao dos Francezes. Na 
 infdncia da historia. A monarcMa hespanh61a. A restau- 
 ra$ao das letras Gregas. A verdadeira amizdde 6 miiito rara. 
 Os fragmentos dos planetas do systema soldr. As 6rlas do 
 mar. 
 
 The Queen of Spain. The servant-maze? of the Countess. 
 A new society. The Z^7i of the moon in the water. The 
 opinions of the mother. The experience of the past. The 
 immediate consequence. The glorious traditions of the nation. 
 The history is in the Latin language. The geography of the 
 Peninsula. A remote antiquity. The genealogy of the 
 Portuguese nation. The French monarchy. The restoration 
 of Roman literature. The planets and comets of the system. 
 The reign of the monarch. The forse and the mare. Public 
 instruction. A complete victory. 
 
Herdeiro, herdeira. 
 Tutor, tutora. 
 Bode, cabra. 
 Pavao, pavoa. 
 Peru, periia. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS. 
 
 Heir, heiress. 
 Tutor, tutoress. 
 JEZe-goat, she-goat. 
 Pea-cock, ^pea-hen. 
 Turkey-coc&, turkey-fan. 
 
 Herdeiros e herdeiras sao pessoas que reeebem herar^as em 
 virtude da lei. A duqueza e herdeira dos seus bens. Tutdr 
 de seus filhos. Nomeava a rairiha por tutora do principe. 
 Duzentas cdbras e vinte b6des. pavao 6 ufano da siia 
 plumdgem. actor e a actriz sao excellentes. Uma jdven 
 cantora. Urn lobo, uma loba, e um lobinho. embaixador 
 e a embaixatriz estao em L6ndres. bardo e a baroneza de 
 Goldsmid. conde e a condessa de Castello-Melh6r. A 
 pavoa & a femea do pavao. j>en e a perua estao no 
 jardlm. 
 
 The heiress of the crown. An abbess is the superior or 
 governess of a nunnery. The Countess of Glasgow. Kachel 
 is a Jewess. A turkey-cock and turkey-hen. A prophetess. 
 The dog-fox. A Zacft/ and gentleman. A shepherd and 
 herdess. A fo'cw and lioness. A %er and a tigress. A 
 and sJie-bear. Vixen is the name of a she-fox. A jack-ass 
 and a jenny-ass. The w/awtf Don Miguel. The infanta of 
 Portugal. Presumptive heiress of the throne. The .Dw&e 
 and Duchess of Wellington. The Empress of the French. 
 The Qweera is the friend of the Countess. A maZe monkey 
 and a female monkey. A Tom-cat. 
 
( 24 ) 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 IRREGULAR GENDERS. 
 
 Rapaz, rapariga ; mano, mana. 
 Rei, rainha ; senhor, senhora. 
 Viuvo, viiiva ; aino, ama. 
 
 Heroe, heroina ; 131690, mo$a. 
 Cavallo, egua ; touro, vacca. 
 
 Boy, girl ; brother, sister. 
 King, queen ; lord, lady. 
 Widower, widow ; master, mis- 
 tress. 
 
 Hero, heroine ; lad, lass. 
 Horse, mare ; bull, cow. 
 
 O irmdo deu um. Hvro ao rapdz e lima bone"ca a rapariga. 
 rei e a rainha da Prussia. Meu tio 6 meu tutor. touro 
 e a vdcca. Minha tia esta doSnte. Uma v^lha vitiva. A 
 senhora K6sa. gdllo e a galliriha estao no gallinh^iro. 
 frdngo e a frdnga estao gordos. p&ru, e a perua. Um 
 gdmo e uma gdma. Um carneiro e lima ovelha. Uma fttha, 
 form6sa rapariga, chamada Bernardlna. macdco e a 
 macdca chegam do Brazil. veddo e a cdr$a. leao e a 
 leoa estao presos. O heroe e a heroina estao no templo da 
 g!6ria. 
 
 The streets of the city are full of boys and girls. The 
 brothers and sisters are in the house. The King and Queen 
 of Portugal. The ladies and gentlemen are ill. The lion and 
 lioness are wild. A hero is an illustrious man ; a heroine, a 
 heroic woman. The lords and ladies have horses and mares. 
 The &wWs and ccws are in the fields. The old widower is the 
 brother of the Qweera. Many kinds of horses. The female- 
 monkey is in the garden. The -STzV^ of Portugal. The Queen 
 of Prussia. The milk o/ #te cow. The horns of the ram. 
 The wool of the sJieep. She is a fine girl. I have a young 
 mare. 
 
( 25 ) 
 LESSON XXY. 
 
 GENITIVE CASE (COMPLEMENT). 
 
 Um piano d'educapdo. 
 
 As possessoes da monarchic. 
 
 Digno d'attenpdo. 
 
 A cidade de Ldndres. 
 
 duque de Wellington. 
 
 A plan of education. 
 
 The possessions of the monarchy. 
 
 Worthy of attention. 
 
 The city of London. 
 
 The Duke of Wellington. 
 
 Os ramos de sciencia. Alfandega grande de Lisboa. 
 Theatre de D. Maria II. Sabbado 6 de Mdrco. Os jornaes 
 do Rw de Janeiro. A camara dos Pares. ^ Sessao de 9 de 
 de 1852. As diias h6ras da tdrde. A for^a d'drmas. 
 radios de trigo. For meio defigtiras. A arte de escrever. 
 Lengos de seda. Um proj^cto de lei. grao-diique de 
 Baden. Os camfnhos de ferro. Em n6me do rei de Dina- 
 mdrca. Um esquadrao de lanceiros. Um testemiinho de 
 respeito. prelado da diocese. Uma carta datada de 6 do 
 corrente. 
 
 The Marquis of Rezende. The importance of this sort of 
 exposition. A glance of the eye. The Duke of Braganza. 
 The council of state. The rest of his days. The improve- 
 ment of education. The true spirit of patriotism. Different 
 qualities of oil. With the rank of lieutenant-colonel. The 
 municipal guard of Lisbon. A body of 5000 men. The 
 names of the subscribers. The various branches of commerce. 
 The first method of icriting. He is worthy of praise. The 
 theatre of D. Fernando. Monday, 4th of April. On the 
 2 2nd of the current month. Silk handkerchiefs. The Bishop 
 of the diocese. 21st September 1853. 
 
( 26 ) 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE.* 
 
 Celebrdr uma victdria. 
 Tomdr o commando. 
 Concilidr o respeito de 
 Publicar noticias. 
 Tomdr urn castello. 
 Seguir o c&rso. 
 
 To celebrate a victory. 
 Take the command. 
 Conciliate the respect of- 
 Publish news. 
 Take a castle. 
 Follow the course. 
 
 Eu nao tenho sse despdcho. Guardamos as n6ssas posi- 
 coes. Nao declinamos a responsdbiliddde. Precisa explicar 
 as cdusas. Os meios de melhorar o estddo das n6ssas co!6nias. 
 Fazemos algiimas consideracoes. Recommendamos a cultura 
 do caf^. Para beneficiar opovo. Seu irmao ganhou a latdlha. 
 Ismail accommetteu e tomou o castello de Leiria. Segulndo 
 o ctirso do Tejo. Tomamos agasdlho. Lobo nao mata a 
 Idbo.* Como vejo fazer a tdntos autores. As abelhas fabri- 
 cam osfdvos. leao inspira medo. Castigar o inimigo. 
 
 Its mission is to diminish our losses, soothe our pains, dry 
 our tears. He neither loves God nor his neighbour. To 
 communicate our ideas. He has read the despatch. He 
 keeps his place. I decline the responsibility. To better the 
 condition of our friends. To benefit the people. The Duke 
 gained the battle. The Count took the castle. Bees make 
 honey. The way of dating letters. I took shelter. My 
 brother read the book. John calls Peter. I have not read 
 the news. The Duke has taken the command. I recommend 
 the cultivation of coffee. The Count declines the responsi- 
 bility. 
 
 * The accusative is marked by the particle a prefixed only when the 
 omission would cause an ambiguity : " Joao ama a Pedro." 
 
LESSON XXVII. 
 
 VOCATIVE CASE. 
 
 <y mdfo, traga um copo de 
 
 cerveja. 
 
 Adeus, senhfir capitdo. 
 A? sua saude, mdu, senhdr. 
 Nao, senhdr, n,o posso. 
 Sim, senhor. 
 Ja, vossa Excellencia. 
 
 Boy, bring a glass of beer. 
 
 Good-bye, Captain. 
 
 Your good health, Sir. 
 
 No, Sir, I cannot. 
 
 Yes, Sir. 
 
 Directly, your Excellency. 
 
 En s6 te escolho a ti, 6 virtuosa Lydia / Pdgens, ajudae- 
 me. 0' mdfo, traga-me lima chavana de cafd e um pao 
 francez. Nao temaes, 6 valor6sos Portugueses. 0' mdfo, 
 l^mbre-se que queremos partir as seis h6ras. 0' rapdz, venha 
 ca. Cocheiro a~nde ligeiro. Aonde estds, minha filha? 
 Est6u aqui, miriha mde. Bern as entendo, minhas senMras. 
 Ouga, senhdra, o m^u recddo. Oh, Corydon, C6rydon ! 0' 
 Jodo, venha ca. Postilhdo, pare. Miiito obrigado, senhdr. 
 Mil agradecimentos, senMra. Mapdz, leve a minha mala. 
 
 Where are you, father ?* I understand you, gentlemen. 
 Good-bye, Colonel. I hear you, ladies. Boy, bring me a 
 glass of wine and a biscuit. Fear not, valiant Romans. 
 Where art thou, my son? Boy, carry my trunk. Many 
 thanks, Sir. Where are you, my friend ? Here I am, Sir. 
 No, my Lady, I cannot. grave, where is thy victory? 
 Coachman, stop. Your good health, Madam. My lad, bring 
 me a cup of tea and a roll. Boy, take this letter. Girl, 
 come here. John, give me the money. Pages, open the 
 doors. 
 
 * The Portuguese use the possessive pronoun in such cases ; the 
 English not. 
 
LESSON XXVIIL 
 
 ABLATIVE CASE. 
 
 Estabelecido por lei 
 Causado pSlas r6chas. 
 Cercado de montanhas. 
 Kesultante da victoria. 
 Passado p3lo parocho. 
 
 Established by law. 
 Caused by the rocks. 
 Surrounded by mountains. 
 Kesulting from the victory. 
 Certified by the parish priest 
 
 O documento produzido por Jodo Pedro. imperador f 6i 
 acompanhado por Adridno. De certo, nao 6 por culpa stia. 
 Banhado pelo mdr. Uma subscrip^ao promovfda pelo digno 
 governador civil. Certos livros recentemente publicados por 
 alguns dos professores do lyceu. Proclamado imperador pelos 
 soldados. O systema pecca por exc^sso e por falta. Uma 
 arvore conhecida pela excellencia, dos seus 61eos. JSagoes 
 espalhadas por t6da a terra. Uma nau assaltdda por con- 
 traries ventos. As tr6pas commandadas pelo diique. 
 
 Caused by the waves. A city surrounded by mountains. 
 The paper produced by William. The King was accom- 
 panied by the Duke. Certain documents published by Her- 
 culano. John was proclaimed by the soldiers. The troops 
 commanded by the Count. The castle bathed by the sea. 
 The tree known by the goodness of its fruits. The steamer 
 assailed by contrary winds. The ruin of the city caused by 
 the rocks. A book published by the professor. The paper 
 signed by me. Certified by the doctor. Caused by tlw. dog. 
 The city surrounded by the sea. 
 
( 29 ) 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 PROPER NOUNS. 
 
 A Eur6pa, a A'sia, a Africa. 
 A Madeira,* o Funchal, o Porto. 
 Londres, Paris, Lisboa. 
 O Alga"rve, a Beira, a Castella. 
 Os Lusiadas, o Milton, Carlos. 
 
 Europe, Asia, Africa. 
 Madeira, Funchal, Oporto. 
 London, Paris, Lisbon. 
 Algarve, Beira, Castile. 
 The Lusiad,the Milton,Charles. 
 
 Os costiimes da Europa moderna. As margens do Lima, do 
 Miriho e do Douro. As vastas regioes da Africa e da Asia. 
 As novellas do Cid. governador civil do districto do 
 Funchdl. No servi90 de Hannibal. A barra de Lisboa. 
 As gue'rras civfs de Cesar e Pompeu. No throno dos Cesares. 
 Em Burgos, capital da Castella. A guarr^ao de Santarem. 
 A exporta9ao de cereaes para a Madeira. Camoes nos 
 Lusiadas dedicados ao descobrimento da India. Os crimes 
 do Arardt. mosteiro da Serra do Pildr. Imperador 
 de 
 
 The laws of Asia. The banks of the Tagus. The gover- 
 nor of Castile. In the service of Napoleon. In London, 
 the capital of England. The port of Funchal. In the uni- 
 versity of Oxford. The Goto of Addison. The taking of 
 Lisbon. The summits of the Alps. Territory bounded on 
 the north by the Douro. The vast regions of modern 
 Europe. The city of Oporto. Charles XII. was the Alex- 
 ander of the north. The Virgils of the century. 
 
 * When the name of a place is also the name of a thing, the proper 
 noun takes the article; thus, "Madeira" means "wood," in its ori- 
 ginal sense. 
 
 t Fran9a, Italia, Portugal, Hespanha, with or without the article. 
 
( 30 ) 
 LESSOR XXX. 
 
 COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 Chapeo de paiha, colhe"r de 
 
 prata. 
 
 Peixe de rio, agua do ma"r. 
 Secretaria da guerra, corrgio. 
 Homem d'annas, mestre de 
 
 canto. 
 Dentes d'alhos, friita de caroo. 
 
 Straw-hat, silver-spoon. 
 
 River-fish, sea-water. 
 War-office, post-office. 
 Man-at-arms, siDging-master. 
 
 Cloves of garlic, stone-fruit 
 
 Os brincos d'duro. tFma mesa de carvdlho. O arsenal 
 da marinha. tfma colher de chd. tfma ddr de cabeqa. 
 Duas cadeiras de brd^os. Uma bandeja magnifica. Official 
 da alfdndega. A cdsa da moeda. A cdsa de jantdr. Os 
 dedos dos pes. Um rdmo de fldres. tfrna todlha de mesa. 
 O cantdr do gdllo. Um cdvdllo de sella. gudrda-livros. 
 tfrna esta$ao de policia. Um espelho. Acpdo de grdpas. 
 Fivellas d'd$o. Manteiga de pdrco. Molho de peixe. 
 nascer do sol. Teia de ardnha. hfimem do leme. Os 
 moirihos de vento ^ram gigantes. tlma estdnte pdra livros. 
 
 A tea-cup. A singing-master with a straw-hat. Two arm- 
 chairs are in the dining-room. The gunpowder in the box. 
 A custom-house officer. A railway. Sunset. Windmills. 
 Cloves of garlic. A tooth-brush. A churchyard. A war- 
 horse. A counting-house. Whale-fishery. Gunpowder. The 
 Foreign Secretary. A straw hat within a hat-box. The tea- 
 pot, sugar-basin, and milk-pot. The pen-knife and the sealing- 
 wax. A leg of mutton. A round of beef. Fish-sauce. A 
 book-case. Stone-fruit. A sheet of paper. A linen-draper's 
 shop. Dancing-shoes. 
 
LESSON XXXI. 
 
 ABSTRACT NOUNS. 
 
 Natureza, virtiide, vicio. 
 Amizade, crueldade, heroismo. 
 Val6r, altivez, e?perdn9a. 
 Diligencia, dociira, alegria. 
 Clareza, simplicidade. 
 
 Nature, virtue, vice. 
 Friendship, cruelty, heroism. 
 Bravery, haughtiness, hope. 
 Diligence, meekness, mirth. 
 Clearness, simplicity. 
 
 Pela natureza das cousas. A amizdde e um sentimento 
 duradouro. Os motivos de respeito e de gratiddo. go- 
 verno. As influencias da inveja. Deus aborrece avarezas. 
 A tyranma do rei de Galliza. Os maidres bens sao a so/tide, 
 a forpa, o dnimo, a pdz, a unido das familias, a liberddde dos 
 cidadaos, a dbunddncia das c6usas necessarias, o desprezo das 
 superfluas, a applica$ao ao trabalho, e o horror da ociosidade, 
 a emula$ao da virtude, a submissdo as leis, e o temor dos 
 Deuses. Pobreza nao 6 vileza. 
 
 The friendship of the king. The poverty of the families. 
 The respect and gratitude of the citizens. The nature of 
 man. The authority of the prince. The n^7* of the maxim. 
 The designs of the enemy. The term of life. Dignity with- 
 out j>n'cfe, a/ability without meanness, elegance without affec- 
 tation. The appearance of raenY. The influences of tyranny. 
 The foundation of ?0ea?#& and prosperity. The frw?e of the 
 English colonies. The sanctity of the day. The solemnity 
 of the scene. The nothingness of humanity. Two centuries 
 of ingratitude. The simplicity of the work. Iks friendship 
 of the Queen. 
 
( 32 ) 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 COLLECTIVES. 
 
 Exe"rcito, marinha, frota. 
 Par, parelha, tropel. 
 Reuniao, partida, cardiime. 
 Manada, rebanho, bando. 
 Se"rra, cordilheira. 
 Pilha, rima. 
 
 Army, navy, fleet. 
 Pair, yoke or team, troop. 
 Assembly, party, shoal. 
 Herd, flock, flight. 
 Chain of hills. 
 Pile, heap. 
 
 exercito do rei da Prussia. As delibera5oes da assem- 
 bled. Um pdr de meias. Uma parttha de bestas. Um 
 pdr de botas flnas. Uma mdta de coelhos. Um bdndo 
 d'aves. Uma ninlidda de pintos. A infanteria Celtibe'ra e 
 a cavdllaria Andaluza.* Um rebdnho de ovelhas, um fdto de 
 c&bras, uma vdra de p6rcos. Cinco grtipos principaes de 
 tribus barbaras. Um grosso c&rpo de soldad^sca. Um 
 purihddo de Y6dos. Um tropo de cavall^iros. Um cardume 
 de peixes. Um cacho d'uvas. Uma mandda de gado. Os 
 rebdnhos de carneiros, exercitos de inimlgos. 
 
 The army of the Queen. The navy of England. The 
 fleet in the Tagus. Two pairs of gloves. Six pairs of 
 stockings. A cloud of locusts. The Portuguese infantry. 
 A shoal of fish. Flocks of sheep. A pair of boots. A 
 flight of birds. A swarm of bees. A large body of cavalry. 
 A. pair of shoes. A multitude of people. Two pairs of 
 sheets. A collection of flowers. A bunch of grapes. The 
 acting committee. A forest of masts. An assortment of 
 books. Herds of cattle and ponies. Rows of houses. Tlie 
 Congress of Vienna. An assembly called the diet* 
 
 * Andaluz is often used as the feminine form, instead of Anda- 
 luza. 
 
( 33 ) 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 TITLES, TRADES, ETC. 
 
 Diique, marquez, c6nde. 
 Banqueiro, barbeiro, barqueiro. 
 Mercador, ferrador, pescaddr. 
 Boticario, oculista, perfumlsta. 
 Bibliothecdrio, empregddo. 
 Mestre, official, trabalhador. 
 Porteiro, portador, gallego.* 
 
 Duke, marquis, earl. 
 Banker, barber, boatman. 
 Shopkeeper, farrier, fisher. 
 Druggist, optician, perfumer. 
 Librarian, official. 
 Tradesman, workman, labourer. 
 Gatekeeper, messenger, porter. 
 
 Um banqueiro tern banco de comme'rcio. Seu pai e bar- 
 beiro. Os baroes de Portugal. Com o titulo de cdnde. 
 casam&ito do infdnte. Trabalhadores para a vinha. Eu 
 e"ra mercador e pescador. chronista da idade media. 
 barco do pescaddr. gudrda mor. Cada h6mem e* fa- 
 bricaddr da sua fortuna. Os segadores sao os &njos. Os 
 peoes da terra. Um ourives de prata, por n6me Demetrio. 
 presidente interlno. Ajuddnte de c^mpo do rei com o 
 grau de coronel Joa"o 6 medico^ e Pedro negoddnte. Por- 
 teiro, h6mem que gudrda a p6rta. Portador, pessda quo 
 leva carta ou carga. 
 
 The officer of the law. The mind of the statesman. The 
 fishermen and the reapers. George the Third was King of 
 England. The gardener, the miller, and the cowherd. The 
 woodcutter, labourer, and ploughman. The Queen of Sweden. 
 Marquis of Pombal. The Earl of Derby. The merchants 
 of Scotland. The Counts of Barcelona. The Duke of 
 Saldanha. The Minister of the Interior. The Grand Master 
 of the Order. The treasurer of the palace. Ministers and 
 Secretaries of State. The Professor of Portuguese Grammar. 
 The second lieutenants. The librarian is not at home. The 
 gatekeeper of the quinta. 
 
 * " Gallego " literally means a Gallician ; but the Gallicians in 
 Lisbon are the water-carriers and porters of the city. " Maridla" 
 translated " porter " (!) in the dictionaries really means " black- 
 guarcL" 
 
 G 
 
( 34 ) 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 NAMES OF PLACES.* 
 
 Officina, fabrica. 
 Tinturaria, cordoarla. 
 Moinho de vento, mofuho 
 
 d'dgua. 
 
 Pombal, laranjal, pomar. 
 Tapdda, achada, ramada. 
 Oratorio, observat6rio. 
 
 Workshop, manufactory. 
 Dye-house, rope-yard. 
 Windmill, water-mill 
 
 Dovecot, orangery, orchard 
 Park, level, bower. 
 Oratory, observatory. 
 
 As officinas de imprimir. pdldcio da marinha. 
 escriptorio dos passap6rtes. Fundicdo de typos, tlma se, 
 lima igreja, e lima capMla. pdco episcopal tlma cdsa 
 de trabalho. asylo dos surdo-miidos. tlma tinturaria 6 
 lima cfficina de tinglr. A torre de L6ndres. Os arsendes, 
 estaleiros, e officinas onde se fabricam as ndus. Um pom- 
 bdl 6 lima casa de criacSo de p6mbos. Um laranjdl 6 urn 
 pomar de laranjeiras. A qfficina typographica. Um dis- 
 tillatorio. tlma loja. tfrna cdsa de pdsto. Apesca do 
 arenque. 
 
 The war -office, the custom-house, and the mint. A fish- 
 market. An eating-house. Windmills and water-mills are 
 in the country. An eagle in a dovecot. A Tcitclien-garden 
 is a more pleasant sight than the finest orangery. Baths, 
 orchards, and fish-pools. The palace of Holyrood. The 
 observatory of Greenwich. An orchard and a kitchen-garden. 
 The museum of natural history. The Koyal library. A 
 lunatic asylum. Paper-mills. Carpet-manufactory. A can- 
 non-foundry. An oratory is a private place for prayer. 
 Steam-engine' manufactory. Type-foundry. The Ajuda 
 palace. A printing-office. 
 
 * The usual terminations indicating whe>'e a thing is, is done, or a 
 trade carried on, are al, ada, ia, ina, orio. 
 
( 35 ) 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 DIMINUTIVES.* 
 
 Fiibeirinfto, braceletinho, fo- 
 
 Ihinha. 
 
 Gansinho, patmho, pSesinhos. 
 Cordeirinho, anaosinho. 
 Gatinho, caehorrinho, caosinho. 
 Particula, corpiisculo. 
 Monticulo, Guilherminho. 
 Coitadinho ! 
 
 Kivulet, little bracelet, leaflet. 
 
 Gosling, duckling, rolls. 
 Lambkin, inannikin. 
 Kitten, puppy, whelp. 
 Particle, corpuscle. 
 Hillock, "Willie." 
 Poor little thing ! 
 
 As arrecadas e braceletes nas xnaos de sua irma. A mdrgem 
 do ribeirinho. bracelete d'Annfcas. O pattnho do p60. 
 O gansinho da cria9ao. O cordeirmho da manjad6ura. O 
 anao do pdgo. O gatinho do pastoririho. Os cachorrmhos 
 da moceta. Uma partwula da cartmha. Urn corpusculo do 
 escudete. Os livrinhos da esc61a. velliaquete do criado. 
 As maosmhas da menina. Os cavallmhos do circo. l!lma 
 ilh6ta des^rta. A luziriha da aur6ra. A coroasiriha da con- 
 dessa. Uma febrinha 6 uraa peqnena febre. Coitadinho / 
 
 By fountain or by shady rivulet. Bracelets of gold. An 
 odorous chaplet of sweet buds. Drakes, ducks, and ducklings. 
 The coronets of the dukes. The islets in the river. Eaglets. 
 The leverets were in the field. A brood of goslings. Clean 
 as young lambkins. Whelps or kittens. The gilded puppets. 
 Young puppies are blind. Particles of bodies. Corpuscles 
 are atoms or small fragments. The mountain and a few 
 hillocks. Here are rolls. The poor puppy. The little steamer. 
 Little William was the youngest son. My little son. The 
 little brother was in the house. The dwarf is in the rivulet. 
 A leaflet is a little leaf. 
 
 * Diminutives are much used in Portuguese, and the correct em- 
 ployment of them is no slight test of a foreigner's proficiency. They 
 do not always imply diminutiveness, but very often express compassion 
 or affection. 
 
( 36 ) 
 
 LESSOR XXXVI. 
 
 AUGMENTATIVES (often slang). 
 
 Homemzarrao, sabichao. 
 
 Doutorago. 
 
 Toleirao, mocetao, casacao. 
 
 Eapagao, papelao,* ratao.t 
 
 Velhacao, mulherao. 
 
 Mocetona, mulherona. 
 
 Large man, wiseacre. 
 
 A mighty doctor. 
 
 Great fool, bumpkin, greatcoat. 
 
 Big boy, pasteboard. 
 
 Old rake, amazon. 
 
 Stout lass, big woman. 
 
 homemzarrao da Patag6nia. doictordco de Coimbra. 
 O toleirdo do eatremSz. mocefdo do criado. Papelao de 
 desenho. vdhacdo do boielro. O rapazdo do arrieiro. O 
 ciira e"ra bonacheirdo. Os mestrdfos de direito. As mocetonas 
 da feira. As mulheronas do arraial. Os papeloes do theatro. 
 Os paspalhoes da pr&9a piiblica. Os rapazoes da freguezfa. 
 Os toleiroes da plate"ia. Os bonacheiroes da republica. Os 
 AUemaes sao homemzarroes. velhacdz do porteiro. Sa- 
 bichdo em direito. casacao do meu amigo. toleirdo tern 
 o teu casacao. 
 
 The wiseacres have general ideas on the question. He is 
 a mighty doctor of Oxford. The inhabitants of Patagonia 
 are immense men. The blockhead of a boy has not learned 
 his lessons. The great fool was in the theatre of D. Fer- 
 nando. Your greatcoat is in your room. The curate is a 
 "right-good fellow" The big lads of the parish. The good 
 fellows of the city. The Germans are jolly men. This is 
 my old greatcoat. John is a queer fellow. 
 
 * Papelao also means " a fop," " a braggart." 
 
 t Ratao is a term of contempt, equal to "queer fellow," "odd fish/' 
 etc. 
 
( 37 ) 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Delici6so, doloroso. 
 Perigoso, precioso. 
 Terre"stre, celeste, planetario. 
 Brutal, pessoal, formal. 
 Branqufnho, negrinho. 
 
 Delightful, painful. 
 Dangerous, precious. 
 Earthly, heavenly, planetary. 
 Brutal, personal, formal. 
 Whitish, blackish. 
 
 Urn jardim delicidso. iJma operagao dolorfisa. N'ura 
 logar perigdso. Vinho brdnco. Um perigoso vislnho. Um 
 momento de cruel incerteza. Um velho soldado de valor. 
 Apr^ciosa piirpura do seu vestido comprido. Os esplritos 
 celestes. A gue"rra divide-se em terrestre e maritima. Mogo 
 estrangeiro. Um g^nio brutdl. Um servfgo pessodl. Um 
 cavallo Arabe. tlma declara^ao formal. negro est& calddo 
 e immfivel. Uma ref6rma gerdl no gov^rno. progr^sso do 
 ensino publico. Obriga^ao pessodl. Um chap^u de veliido 
 preto. Os preciosos restos da antiguidade. 
 
 A rustic simplicity. Warm water. In a delicious place. 
 A personal service to the young stranger. The war by land. 
 The precious wine. The operation is dangerous. The man 
 is silent. In the variety of contradictory opinions. The 
 planetary system. A dangerous disease. The white hat. A 
 furious horse is a dangerous neighbour. In the military 
 college. Good counsel is the first duty of a true friend. A 
 view of the principal city. In an historical work. A de- 
 lightful climate. Delightful music. A painful loss. A 
 dangerous enterprise. The precious gifts of nature. Celestial 
 blue. 
 
( 38 ) 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Active, antigo, fugitive. 
 Horrivel, agraddvel, singuldr. 
 Amddo, vestido, continuado. 
 Domestico, humane, moderno. 
 Constants, decente, differente. 
 
 Active, ancient, fugitive. 
 Horrible, agreeable, singular. 
 Beloved, dressed, continued. 
 Domestic, human, modern. 
 Constant, decent, different. 
 
 O miindo antigo. Um h6mem activo. Uma m6rte hor- 
 rivel. Uma v6z agraddvel. O rei fugitivo. Uma coinci- 
 d^ncia singuldr. Um animal domestico. Um vento constdnte. 
 altar vestido de brocado. tlma continudda primav^ra. 
 poder independence. O g^nero humdno. O poder absoltito. 
 Sdbbado passddo. A gu^rra incessdnte com o beUioftso ri. 
 O sentimento de independencia naciondl. Com gerdl ap- 
 plauso. Na seguinte noite. tlma guerra domestica. O 
 valente rei de Leao. prado vestido de relva, Portugal 
 moderno. tlma trra dbunddnte de f nictaa, 
 
 An active king. The horrible death of the Arabian horse. 
 The agreeable voice of the queen. Domestic affairs. A steady 
 wind. The power of national independence. The new world. 
 The fugitive animal. The royal palace is an irregular edifice. 
 A fatal and horrible presentiment. The singular aspect. 
 A short period. Natural history. A terrible example. The 
 public authority. An active life. Ancient customs. Fugitive 
 years. A horrible monster. The singular number. A man 
 clothed with honour. The fugitive slave. Continued labours. 
 Discoveries continued by new explorers. A domestic animal. 
 Human weakness. 
 
( 39 ) 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 ADJECTIVES (GENDER), p, 258. 
 
 Novo, n6va; perfeito, a; velho, 
 
 a. 
 
 Chris- ( a ) ; "bom, b6a ; 
 
 tao, \ dn J va, mao, ma". 
 Portuguez, a; Hespanhol, a; 
 
 mi, mia. 
 Breve, final, feliz, fiel. 
 
 New, perfect, old. 
 Christian, good, vain, bad, 
 Portuguese, Spanish, naked. 
 Short, final, happy, faithful. 
 
 Em perfeita saude. altar da velha cathedral. Um ndvo 
 meio. Os tempos da restauracfco christd. tfma noite Unda. 
 Em Ida occasiao. Pedro o cru. Carae crua. Um mdo 
 jantdr. tfma gravata brdnca. A minha casaca nfiva.^ A 
 tiltima m6da. Cerveja Irdnca. Um h6mem sdo. Uma 
 doutrlna sd: Agua /rCa. tlma espada nua. Em segiinda 
 mdo. Muita moeda fdlsa. A ctirta distancia. vdsto 
 c&rpo da monarchia Hespanh6la. Um ca!6r excessivo. tlma 
 6oa e Jowfto carrudgem. grdo Tiirco. A 6rra-Bretanha. 
 tlma frondfisa drvore. fille e vdo. Um bello dia. 
 
 My faithful friend is in perfect health. Vain ambition. 
 The girl is young and vain. Sound advice. A volcanic 
 eruption. The populous city of Turin. Books in the Spa- 
 nish and Portuguese languages. In the principal street of 
 Burgos. The coat is new, in the last fashion. The man has 
 a beautiful voice. At a short distance from the old cathedral. 
 A new and excellent bridge. The premature death of the 
 king. A town pretty, well-built, and clean. It is not a new 
 thing. A naked sword. His bare foot. A perfect work. 
 A good climate. Good fruit. Good air. 
 
( 40 ) 
 
 LESSON XL. 
 ADJECTIVES (SINGULAR). 
 
 Um dfa*bonito. 
 Cerveja branca. 
 Um trgm especial. 
 Um quarto retirado. 
 Bom anno ; anno 
 Seis pea de largo. 
 
 A beautiful day. 
 Ale (white beer). 
 A special train. 
 A retired room. 
 Abundant year; new year. 
 Six feet broad. 
 
 Neste empenho patri6tico. correio estrangeiro. A 
 caruara municipdl. tlma fe"bre aguda. Nenhuma descobe"rta 
 importdnte. A primeira necessidade. O unico meio. Mappa 
 geogrdphico do theatre da gu^rra. Nossa bella provincia. 
 tlma communicagao reguldr. tlma mulh^r casdda. S^u 
 mdo procedimento. No dia seguinte. A grdnde ciddde in- 
 dustridl de Birmingham. Um Undo tapete de verdiira. Um 
 famoso dia.* Um prato limpo. Agua quente. Manteiga 
 fresco. Meu s6mpre cliorddo sobrinho. m^u culpdvel 
 esque"cimento. seu obsequioso convlte. 
 
 A strong defensive position. A severe fever. The beau- 
 tiful province. Cold water. An irregular communication. 
 The first discovery. Last year. The kind proposal of the 
 governor. The large commercial city of Bristol His ever- 
 lamented sister. The civil governor of the province. The 
 bad behaviour of the captain-general. Fresh butter and a 
 clean plate. A married man. On the following day. By 
 the first ship. The patriotic general. The culpable forget- 
 fulness of the captain. In such a case. In this important 
 employment. Our "beautiful house. 
 
 * A few nouns in d are masculine. 
 
 t The adjective generally follows the noun in Portuguese, but 
 sometimes precedes. Usage determines ; but the sense is altered by 
 the relative position, as above; like "petit homme," and "homme 
 petit." 
 
LESSON XL! 
 ADJECTIVES (PLURAL*). 
 
 Noticias estrangeiras. 
 As concedes seguintes. 
 Arvores fructiferas. 
 Actos immordes. 
 Os redes hospedes. 
 As auctoridades civte. 
 
 Foreign intelligence. 
 The following conditions. 
 Fruitful trees. 
 Immoral acts. 
 The royal guests. 
 The civil authorities. 
 
 Sus servf$os pessodes. Os m6us agradecimentos sinceros. 
 Os capit&QS-generdes de differ entes distrfctos. Os officiaes 
 superiores t<3m tido fibres epidemicas. As esquadras com- 
 binddas. Cronstadt t^m immensas fortificagoes abundante- 
 mente artilhddas. Cdrtas fechddas. As Idas maneiras do 
 command^nte, e o bom arranjo de tddas as cdusas. Func- 
 ciondrios ptiblicos bem escolhidos e bem pdgos. Nos prime iros 
 dias do corrente m^z de Julho. Guerras civis. Estes ex- 
 celUntes pianos. As vinhas dontes. Corajoes insensiveis. 
 Pagam^ntos igudes. 
 
 The following proposals. Important news. The civil 
 and military authorities. The personal services of the public 
 functionaries. The first days of the week. The English 
 officers in the combined squadrons. The pleasant manners 
 of the French generals. The immense fortifications of Sebas- 
 topoL The naval and military resources. Useful letters. 
 The royal generals. The excellent hearts of the princes. 
 Two English steam-frigates of the combined squadrons. The 
 foreign generals have serious apprehensions. The three 
 great powers. His sincere thanks. 
 
 * Adjectives form their plurals as nouns do. For Rules, see 
 Appendix, p. 257-8. 
 
( 42 ) 
 
 LESSON XLH 
 
 ADJECTIVES (PLURAL), continued. 
 
 Eons, b6as ; dois, diias ; maus, 
 
 mas. 
 
 Saos, s&s ; deliciosos-osas. 
 Allemaes, as ; nacionaes, sudves. 
 Faceis, araaveis, difficeis. 
 Civls, urgentes. 
 
 Good ; two ; bad. 
 
 Sound, delicious. 
 German, national, sweet. 
 Easy, amiable, difficult. 
 Civil, urgent. 
 
 Raro como os b&ns dias. A piiblicacao dos primeiros dois 
 volumes. As duos grandes e'pochas. Os peri6dlcos Alle- 
 maes. Ares sdos. Cidades sds. As divisoes territorides. 
 Ovos quentes. As cores naciondes. Os lineam^ntos princi- 
 pdes da idade. Os sudves accentos da siia v6z. Estes de- 
 liciosos sitios. tlma latdda de tenras vides. As nias sao 
 limpas e as casas bem edifaddas. As condicoes fdceis. 
 H6mens amdveis. Estiidos difficeis. Privil^gios pessodes. 
 Keg6cios urgentes. As senhoras Allemds. Pennas metdllicas. 
 As mem6rias christds. Os successes posteriores. 
 
 Civil wars. The days are short. The paintings are 
 admirable. Cities large and small. The roads are good. 
 Two volumes of the German book. The two great cities. 
 The national privileges. The civil righta Streets good 
 and bad. The sweet accents of the 'beautiful voices. The 
 difficult affairs. The German institutions. The principal 
 streets of the new cities are clean. Terrible difficulties. 
 Irreconcilable enemies. The remarkable buildings. Happy 
 men. Royal persons. Fertile fields. The adjacent pro- 
 vinces. The streets are narrow. Fossil riches. 
 
( 43 ) 
 
 LESSON XLIIL 
 'ADJECTIVES (COMPARATIVE), p. 259. 
 
 Mais esclarecido que 
 Minos agradavel que 
 Tao alto e tao branco. 
 Nao tao quente cdmo 
 Melhor, peior, men or, maior. 
 Tanto melhor j muito.* 
 
 More enlightened than 
 
 Less agreeable than 
 
 So tall and white. 
 
 Not so hot as 
 
 Better, worse, less, greater. 
 
 So much the better ; very. 
 
 b6m resultado 6" menos duviddso. Esse descuido 6 
 muito mdis notdvel. Um logar e*ra menos importdnte e 
 menos pingue, outro mdis importdnte e mdis rendoso. f 1m 
 foi mdis agraddvd que o principle. Mdis ctirto na saia. 
 Que"ro as calgas mdis compridas. Xcho a cama muito dura. 
 Porque estd a carne mdis cdra ? cab^llo d^ve estar mdis 
 islo e Iustr6so. clima nao 4 too quente cdmo na Inglate"rra 
 no verao, nem too frio cdmo la no inv^rno. Aqu^llas mu- 
 Ihe'res nao sao tao boas cdmo estes h6mens. Eases mdis 
 solidas que as da f6ra material 
 
 The hand is more exposed than the foot. The battle 
 was less doubtful. The woman was more remarlcable than 
 the man. The climate is less agreeable than that of Madeira. 
 My brother is better to-day. The place was more important 
 but not so lucrative. The winter is more agreeable than 
 the summer. Henry is not so tall as James. I want the 
 trousers not so long, but wider. The water is not so cold as 
 it is in the hills. Longer in the waist. This bed is harder 
 than yours. His health is worse than mine. So much the 
 worse. Europe is more enlightened than Asia. These girls 
 are better than those boys. 
 
 * " M'Aito " used adverbially in comparisons means both vei*y and 
 too; e.g., "Muito grande" may mean "very large" or "too large," 
 according to the context. "Mdis melhor" is, though common, an 
 odious vulgarism. 
 
LESSON XLIV. 
 ADJECTIVES (COMPARATIVES), continued. 
 
 Tdo infeliz como grande. 
 
 S. 4 mdisformdsa que eu. 
 
 O mdis bravo dos dois. 
 
 Maiorzmho. 
 
 Menos preguijoso que eu. 
 
 As unhappy as great. 
 S. is handsomer than L 
 The braver of the two. 
 A little larger. 
 Less lazy than I. 
 
 Joao e* mdis generdso que Carlos. Nada ha tao contagi6so 
 como o exemplo. fllho e" melh6r me"dico que o pae. Mdis 
 ddro que o s61. Mdis brdnco que a ne"ve. Muito mdis 
 sujeitos a fadigas. sdl 4 mdis brilhdnte que as estrSllas. 
 Com muita mdis furia e pr6ssa do que, etc. tfma casa 
 mdis illustre do que rlca. Um tratamento menos duro do 
 que ^ra usual As mulhe'res p6bres com paci6ncia mdis pro- 
 pria d'Allemas que de Portuguezas. Mdis que provdvel. 
 Uma toalha mdis fina. Joao e* too sdbio c6mo seu irmao. 
 
 My patience is as great as yours. Mary is more generous 
 than Jane. The swain is happier than his monarch. Iron 
 is harder than wood. Mary is lazier than Anna. Nothing 
 is so white as snow. The son is as learned as the father. 
 The queen is more beautiful than the countess. The sun is 
 much more brilliant than the moon. Homer was the greater 
 genius, Virgil the better artist. The shorter road of the 
 two. The poor women are more subject to fatigue than the 
 men. The bread is better than ever. The more dangerous, 
 the more honourable. 
 
LESSON XLV. 
 ADJECTIVES (SUPERLATIVES). 
 
 As mdis lellas sao as que 
 
 Com o mdis prof Undo respeito. 
 
 Bax&tissimo ; optimo. 
 
 Os paizes mdis ciiltos. 
 
 Nem o men6r favor. 
 
 A maidr opposiao possiveL 
 
 The handsomest are those 
 
 which 
 
 With the greatest respect. 
 Very cheap ; very good. 
 The most civilised lands. 
 Not the least favour. 
 The greatest possible opposition. 
 
 As mdis vivas sympathfas. Os p6ntos mdis exp6stos ao 
 s61. Com a maior afiabilidade. Fazendo os maiores mas os 
 mdis hem merecidos. Reinava a melh6r intelligncia entre 
 os Franceses e Inglzes das diias esquMras. O principe tern 
 mos^do grandissima actividade. Em t6dos os paizes mdis 
 adiantddos, na carr&ra da civilisa^ao ha o maior desvelo, etc. 
 Admiraveis exemplos do mdis esclarecido zMo. governador 
 6 sem duvida pessda da maior respeitabilidade. Tem havido 
 sempre a melhdr vontade de acabdr com o trafico da escra- 
 vatiira. 
 
 The greatest possible favour. The most civilised country. 
 The most lively sympathy. Your friend is doubtless a person 
 of the greatest respectability. She was my best pupil. This 
 wine is very cheap. The house most exposed to the sun. He 
 is my best friend. Show me the best cloth you have. The 
 best deserved praises. The most polite attentions. Not the 
 least opposition. The best understanding between the pupils. 
 The tiger is very cruel. The Queen has exhibited very great 
 activity. The country is the most advanced in civilisation. 
 The handsomest flowers. 
 
LESSON XLYL 
 ADJECTIVES (SUPERLATIVE), continued. 
 
 A guerra a mdis feliz, 
 mdis sdbio de todos. 
 Os inimigos mdis perigosos. 
 Virgilio 6 mui grdnde poeta. 
 Home"ro 4 um poeta grandis- 
 simo. 
 
 The most fortunate war. 
 The wisest of all. 
 The most dangerous foes. 
 Virgil is a very great poet 
 Hoiner is an exceedingly great 
 poet. 
 
 Capitolio e'ra o mdis celebre ediffcio de R6ma. Na parte 
 mdis orientdl da cidade. s61 est brilhantissimo. sol 
 6 o mdis brilhdnte dos astros. Yarrao foi o mdis dduto dos 
 RomaTios. A mdis importdnte noticia. modo mdis fdcil 
 para os cultivadores. As durissimas gu^rras. Ne*sta gravis- 
 sima hist6ria. tlma das qualidades mdis notdveis. Um 
 cavalleiro mtii illustre, chamado Ermigio. tTma c6usa certis- 
 sima. A sciSncia dos mdis hdbeis cirurgioes. As prof und^zas 
 mdis obscuras do unive'rso ideal. Utilissimos servi9os. 
 
 The newest works in the language. The most skilful 
 engraver. The newest patterns. The most beautiful flowers. 
 The most eminent authority. The civilisation of India is 
 the most ancient of the old civilisations of Asia. In the 
 most western part of the city. The moon is very bright. 
 Cicero was the most eloquent of the Komans. The most im- 
 portant service. The nearest way. The fields are very 
 fertile. One of the most illustrious cavaliers. The eyes of 
 the Portuguese are very Hack. The most remarkable quali- 
 ties of the poet. The most certain proofs. 
 
( 47 ) 
 
 LESSON XLVII. 
 (ADJECTIVES IRREGULAR IN COMPARISON). 
 
 Grdnde,mai6r, 
 
 o maior, md- 
 ximo, 
 grandissimo. 
 
 Great, greater, 
 
 ( greatest, 
 ( very great. 
 
 Pouco, menos, 
 
 pouquissimo, 
 o men6r. 
 
 Few, fewer, 
 Small, 
 
 C fewest, 
 { very few. 
 
 Quente, mdis 
 quente, 
 
 quentissimo, 
 o mdis quente. 
 
 Hot, hotter, 
 
 \ hottest, 
 \ very hot. 
 
 Com grandissima difficuldade. A mai6r das pr^as e* a de 
 Luiz XV. Menos orgulho. Grandissimo gosto. Um ini- 
 migo acerrimo. Pr6ximo 4 ruina. Um asptrrimo castigador. 
 Um po6ta celeberrimo. V6ssa Magestdde Christianissima. 
 Paldvras dulcissimas. Um clima frigidissimo. Hurnillima 
 miseria. De pouquissima importancia. Perp^tua <^ra pdbre, 
 pobrissima. tfma porQao tenuissima. tlma ciddde antiga. 
 l!fma antiqufesima vflla. Os ultimos mementos do artista. 
 r^i fidelissimo. Os Romanes magnificentissimos nas 6bras 
 piiblicas. 
 
 The greatest soldier. The largest of the cities. Byron 
 was a very celebrated poet. The climate of Canada is very 
 cold. A most ancient castle. A very bloody battle. A most 
 cruel punishment. With very great eloquence. A very bitter 
 enemy. A most noble intellect. The largest of the trees. 
 The greatest danger. The Greeks were very magnificent in 
 temples. . This holds less liquid than that. Very near death. 
 The next century. A very cold climate. The house next to 
 the castle. Less vanity. A very celebrated author. She is 
 very poor. 
 
( 48 ) 
 
 LESSON XLYIII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (IRREGULAR BOTH IN ENGLISH AND 
 PORTUGUESE). 
 
 o melh6r, 
 o 6ptimo. 
 o peior, 
 o pe"ssimo. 
 
 Bom, melh6r, 
 
 Pequeno, men6r, 
 
 o mais pe- 
 
 queno, 
 o minimo. 
 
 Good, better, best 
 Bad, worse, worst 
 
 Little, less, least 
 
 sol 6* maior que a te*rra. Indo na melhor 6rdem. Que 
 melh6res documentos ? As terras negras sao as melhores. 
 Este instrumento e" melhor que o outro. filho e" peior que 
 o pae. vinho commtim 6* pouco bom. Alguma cousa pei6r 
 Men6r quantidade, A Eur6pa 6 menor que a Asia. Com a 
 maior clareza. A plebe pela maior parte 4 pobre. melhor 
 meio de ser f eliz. Com pequenas excepcoes. Faz muitissimo 
 frio. melMr de meus amlgos. Com mtiita pressa. Da 
 melhor qualidade. fille tinha mdis que os 6utros. As me- 
 lhores hospedarias. 
 
 Last, best, and greatest. In the worst inn's worst room. 
 The earth is greater than the moon. The house is in the 
 best order. A greater service. Freedom's best and bravest 
 friend. With the least difficulty. The streets of the city 
 are in the best order. Black soil is the best. The wine is of 
 the best quality. The best things are in the city. The houses 
 are very bad. The streets are very good and clean. One of 
 the most amiable men. The first of his class. One of the 
 most lamentable instances. Patriotism is the worst counsellor 
 of the historian. These are good and bad. A planet is 
 greater than a satellite. A smaller number. 
 
( 49 ) 
 
 LESSON XLIX. 
 ADJECTIVES (NUMERAL). 
 
 tfrn livro, lima carta. 
 
 Dois 
 Dous 
 
 > livros, 
 
 duas cartas. 
 
 O primeiro dia, a segiinda vez. 
 So, o diiplo, o triple. 
 12 de Maio de 1852. 
 
 One book, one letter. 
 Two books, two letters. 
 
 The first day, the second time. 
 Single, double, treble. 
 12th May 1852. 
 
 Cento e um. Trezentos e cincoenta e cinco. Em segundo 
 logar. Livro primeiro, Capitulo quinto. J6rge Qudrto. 
 Luiz Quatorze. Em cinco de Jiilho. As duas primeiras 
 cArtas. ter$o. Um dos primiros dev^res do h6mem. 
 Em vinte e nove dias. Dous mil guirihentos trinta e qudtro 
 homens. Mil e quinhentas cdsas. A carta 6 datada de 
 vinte e ddus de Mar90. Em quinze de Maio. E tima hora. 
 Sao duas h6ras menos um quarto. A r s qudtro. Tres arra- 
 teis. Setenta e ddus francos. De tres braas de comprido e 
 duas e meia de largo, tlma decima septima. 
 
 Four hundred and fifty men. William the Fourth. In 
 the third place. Chapter the sixth. In the fourth place. 
 The letter is dated the twenty-second of January. On the 
 fourth of July. Three pounds of coffee. Monday at two 
 o'clock. Three leagues long and two broad. Four thousand 
 two hundred and forty houses. It is a quarter to three 
 o'clock. Twelve to fourteen leagues. The fourth. The 
 seventh of March. In three minutes. 7th January 1850. 
 In the year 1824. Peter the First. Two-thirds of the 
 nation. Five thousand persons. Not a single word of truth. 
 Two hundred and ten soldiers. The 6th of January 1854. 
 
( 50 ) 
 
 LESSON L. 
 ADJECTIVES (INDEFINITE, DECLINABLE). 
 
 Todo, total, ambos. 
 Os mais, todos os rnals. 
 Algum,* nenhiim. 
 
 C4rto, miiito, qualquer. 
 
 All (or the whole), total, both. 
 
 The rest, all the rest. 
 
 Some, any ; no one, no, none, 
 not any. 
 
 A certain ; much, many ; who- 
 ever, any. 
 
 T6dos os dias. Todos os povos. Alguns navios da es- 
 quadra. Toda a tarde. Tddas as novidades. A rufna 
 totdl. Alguns defeitos. Algumas peras. Nerihum dos 
 julzes. Certo h6mem diz. N6s tddos. Todos ^lles. Miiita 
 gente. Muitos Hvros. Alguma pessoa. Pessoa algtima. 
 A sdmma totdl. Tdl amo, tdl criado. Kern dm, nem 6utro. 
 Algiins c^m soldados. Ambos c6ntam o mesmo caso. Nao 
 fa9as tdl. For outra man^ira. dutro dia. Os bfspos 
 Anglicanos sao ricos, os outros ecclesiasticos pobres. Mtittas 
 razoes. Osmdis. Nenhum dos d6us. Sem nenhtim vestlgio. 
 
 All the family. Every day. Another time. So much 
 work. Something. All of us. Many letters and many 
 books. The sum total is 400 dollars. M. Sttch-a-one says. 
 One brother is in Canada, the other in Madeira. Some geo- 
 graphers. Any man. No man. Not much warmth of 
 imagination. The^rstf of all the Roman kings. Some time. 
 As the parent, so the child. Others say. To such a woman. 
 All the rest. They are all our friends, as-many-as you see. 
 Some of the men. I do not remember such. Some inscrip- 
 tion. Some letters. Without any vestige. 
 
 * It has a negative force after the noun. " Arvore alfftima se enc6n- 
 tra nos deseVtoa d' Africa." "No tree is met within the deserts of 
 Africa." 
 
( 51 ) 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 ADJECTIVES (INDEFINITE, INDECLINABLE). 
 
 Cada ; mais, c&da um. 
 Nada,* tiido. 
 Ninguem, outrem. 
 Alguem ; queinquer. 
 
 Each, every ; more, every one. 
 Nothing ; everything, all. 
 None, nobody, no one ; another. 
 Anybody; whoever, whatever. 
 
 Cdda dia. Mdis crimes que virtudes. Tudo esta perdido. 
 Cdda um para si. M6u ttido ! Mdis vinho que agua. Nin- 
 guem & feliz. Aquillo que pertdnce a outrem. Ninguem 
 d'elles. Se alguem vie"r . Pla resp6sta de cdda pergunta. 
 Cdda vez mais. Quantos mdis medicos, mdis molestias. 
 Nao e ndda. Ndda menos. H6mem capaz de ttido. Ndda 
 de n6vo. Cada perlodo da vida tern prazeres. Mdis gloria 
 que prov&to. Em cdda julgado ha um juiz. Outro q&al- 
 quer m^io. Quemquer que est^ ahi, falle. Alguem diz o 
 que nao sabe. Quer ir ? Ndda* 
 
 Every night. More money than wit. All is done. Every 
 man for himself. John is my all. No one in this world 
 is happy. Nothing new in the papers. Every man. Every 
 tenth soldier. She had more knowledge than the others. 
 Will you go ? By no means.* All was going well in the 
 ship. He is a nobody. In generosity he yields to no one. 
 In every city of the kingdom. More water than wine. 
 More and more. Every language has its defects. Every 
 word and action. If any one comes. My all. Any other 
 way. It is nothing. Every period of life. All is lost. 
 
 * Often used, in denying emphatically, for "nao," "por m6do ncn- 
 Mm," "not at all," "'by no means." 
 
( 52 ) 
 
 LESSON LII. 
 ADJECTIVES (PROPER).* 
 
 O piiblico PortuSnse. 
 A na9&o Portugueza. 
 
 Siia magestade Britdnnica. 
 O general Austriaco. 
 O governo Saxonio. 
 Um commissario Turco. 
 
 Opwto public. 
 Portuauese nation. 
 
 The 
 
 The Portuguese 
 
 Her Britannic Majesty. 
 
 The Austrian general. 
 
 The Saxon government. 
 
 A Turkish commissioner. 
 
 tlma pe"ca de panno Hesparihol. Hiate Portuguez Oli- 
 veira. Brlgue Inglez Alpha, tfma fragata Ingleza. Barca 
 Prussidna Liicifer. tlma gale6ta Hollandeza. Duas escii- 
 nas Inglezas. Um barco de vapor de gu^rra Brasileiro. A 
 associac^Lo industriAl Portuense. As tr6pas Austriacas. As 
 potencies Allemds. embaixador Russo. piiblico Lis- 
 bonense. Siia magestade Belga. As malas Portuguezas. 
 Os generaes Russos. governo Francez. As cortes Al- 
 lemas. Os generaes sao todos emigrados Poldcos, Hun- 
 garos e Italidnos. Brlgue Sueco Marianna. A bandeira 
 Americdna. 
 
 The Saxon general. The Spanish mails. The English 
 government. The Portuguese ambassador. The Prussian 
 troops. The Hungarian generals. The Brazilian parlia- 
 ment. The Russian flag. Three French schooners and an 
 American war-steamer. The German generals and the 
 French ambassadors. The British nation and the Portu- 
 guese government. The Danish public. The Greek lan- 
 guage. A French brig and three English frigates. Many 
 Hungarian and Italian refugees are (estao) in the Tur- 
 kish armies. A Danish family is (esta) in the American 
 steamer. 
 
 * Portuguese authors sometimes write proper adjectives with capital 
 letters ; sometimes not. The former practice is more Portuguese, the 
 latter more French. 
 
( 53 ) 
 
 LESSON LIII. 
 ADJECTIVES (PROPER), continued. 
 
 As ilhas Britdnnicas. 
 Cinco reis Mduros. 
 A dynastia Austriaca. 
 O imperio Grego. 
 Varias tribus Indias. 
 
 The British Islands. 
 Five Moorish kings. 
 The Austrian dynasty. 
 The Greek empire. 
 Various Indian tribes. 
 
 arsenal do exercito Portuguez. Exposiao da indiistria 
 Madeirbnse. Urn rlco fidalgo Genovez. A monarchia Hes- 
 panhola. A conquista Romdna. A lingua Hebrdica. A 
 miisa Homerica. govrno Britdnnico. A igreja Angli- 
 cdna. A i&qa, Eottentote. verdadeiro camello Arobe. 
 Nas Indias Orientdes. Chandernagor, capitdl dos estabele- 
 cimentos Francezes no territ6rio de Bengala. Rubens, grnde 
 artista Flamengo. A lingual torn. Os caract^res do alpha- 
 beto Germdnico. Na provincia Russidna, de Ozenburgo. 
 Esta cdsta Africdna. publico LisbonGnse. 
 
 The British army. The Madeira people. The Latin 
 language. The Arabian horse. The English establishments 
 in India. The Russian forces. The Caspian Sea. A great 
 Roman bridge. A superb Gothic cathedral. The French 
 empire. The German confederation. The Teutonic knights. 
 The German states of Austria. English horses. The Lisbon 
 cathedral. Some Greek monks. The Portuguese flag. The 
 French republic of 1848. The Lisbon press. The Danish 
 territory. The Judaic law. He is a Flemish painter. The 
 Hebrew text. 
 
( 54 ) 
 
 LESSON LIY. 
 ADJECTIVES (COMPOUND). 
 
 Recem-chegddo, recem-vindo. 
 Bm-aventurado, bem-dito,bm- 
 
 nascido. 
 
 Supra-citado, bem-vindo. 
 Abdixo-assignado. 
 Mal-creado, mal-dizente, mal- 
 
 feito. 
 Sempre-viva, sempre-verde. 
 
 Newly-arrived, newly-come. 
 Fortunate, blessed, well-born. 
 
 Above-quoted, welcome. 
 Undersigned. 
 
 Ill-bred, evil - speaking, ill- 
 made. 
 Ever-living, ever-green. 
 
 Guide para e*sta cella o recem-chegddo. Diante dos fre*- 
 guezes recem-vindos. Os fflhos recem-nascidos. Aquellas 
 ilhas bem-aventurddas. Os camplnos ficarao cabis-bdixos. 
 O author da carta supra-citdda. Os abdixo-assignddos. 
 G16ria sempre-viva. Fructa sem-sabor. manto ciuri 
 fulgente. h6mem 4 recem-defuncto. Bem-dito sja D^os. 
 miiito mal-creddo. H^rva sempre-verde. Alma bem-fazeja. 
 Bene-m'erito de p^na. tJma pldnta sempre-viva 6 uma 
 planta que se conserva verde todo o anno. & urn fructo 
 sem-sabor. 
 
 The child is newly-dead. The new-comer is my brother's 
 friend. The new-born child is very strong. Insipid wine. 
 In a fortunate hour. A benevolent heart. Deserving well of 
 his country. The words of the above-quoted letter. The 
 tricolor flag. Animals carnivorous and herbivorous. The 
 young man is very ill-bred. The ante-penultimate syllable. 
 The benevolent soul of the old man. Blessed be God. Thoso 
 happy lands. The trees ever-green. The poor sailor was 
 half-dead. The under-signed members of the society. Well- 
 deserving of punishment He is welcome. 
 
LESSON LV. 
 ADJECTIVES (AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES). 
 
 Sosinho, friosinho, bomzinho. 
 Innocentinho, fraquinho, doen- 
 
 tinho. 
 
 Baixinho, tenrinho, acabadinho. 
 Soberbao. 
 
 Cabeudo, nervudo. 
 Doutorao. 
 
 All alone, cold, good. 
 Innocent, weakly, poorly. 
 
 Short, tender, done. 
 
 Proud. 
 
 Blockhead, strong-nerved. 
 
 Wiseacre. 
 
 Um cavalleiro cheg6u sosinJw & p6rta. A filha innocen- 
 tinha. A velha comegou a fallar balxinho. Sua mesquinha 
 irma. Os cavalliros f6ram saindo do pa90 tristonhos. 
 tlma roseirinha pequenina, bonitinha. H6mem cabequdo. 
 Ha limas c^rtas boquinhas gravesinlias e espremidmlias pela 
 doutorice . . . Estamos sosinhas n6s diias n6ste nmndo. 
 Elle bateu devagaririho. Elle tem olhar de soberldo. Tem- 
 se em conta de doutord$o. tlma edsa lindiriha. coelho e 
 miiito tenrinho. velhinho estd muito acabadinho. Tem 
 nervudos. 
 
 He is a good little fellow. We were all alone in the 
 house. She is a sweet little innocent. The daughter of the 
 little man is pretty. The child is weakly. Little John is 
 naughty. The poor little Hind girl. The little negress is 
 poorly. His little feet are cold. Your frock is new and 
 clean. The boy began to speak low. My neat little house. 
 My brother knocked softly. Thomas considers himself a 
 learned man. The melancholy cavaliers. *He reached the 
 gate all alone. "We two are all alone. That wicked little 
 monkey ! She has a sweetly pretty bonnet. Such a darling 
 child. 
 
 The diminutive power of the adjective often qualifies the noun 
 with which that adjective agrees. 
 
LESSON LVI. 
 PRONOUNS (PERSONAL). 
 
 Eii, de mim, a mini, mim, me. 
 N6s, de nos, a nos, nos. 
 Tu, de ti, a ti, ti. 
 Vos, de vos, a vos, vos. 
 fille, delle, a elle, elle.* 
 Ella, della, a e"lla, ella. 
 filles, delles, a elles, elles (m.). 
 Ellas, dellas, a ellas, ellas (f.). 
 
 I, of me, to me, me, me. 
 We, of us, to us, us. 
 Thou, of thee, to thee, thee. 
 You, of you, to you, you. 
 He, of him, to him, him. 
 She, of her, to her, her. 
 They, of them, to them, them. 
 They, of them, to them, them. 
 
 fille e generoso. Nos s6mos ventur6sos. filles estao occu- 
 pados. Nao sou surdo. Dous delles. Tu abandonas os 
 amfgos. Eu o chaTno. Eu amo. Ullle esta prompto. fille 
 (a com elles. filles fallam de mim. Eu niinca fallo delles. 
 lle e mais mogo que eu. Eu o amo. Amo-o conio m^u 
 proprio irmao. N6s os mod^rnos. Jfille e mais rico que 
 elles. assumpto em que V. S. me tern fallado. Entre 
 elle e mim. K6s o chamamos. Julias amam. fille Ihes 
 disse. A mim. Delle. L^mbro-me della. Eu por mim. 
 JS r o meio delles. 
 
 I have a knife. / have no husband. Thou hast a fork. 
 He has no shoes. We have good wine. He is deaf. She 
 is blind. We are lazy. Thou lovest the friends. / love 
 him. He loves her. She is my sister's friend. The women 
 are beautiful, and they are sisters. He has spoken to me. 
 We love him. He is in the midst of them. My mother 
 who sent me with them. She is richer than he. They (f.) 
 love their father.* With me. With thee. They (m.) are 
 ready. Of her. Without me. Without him. She loves us. 
 We love her. She is good. 
 
 * 0, a, os, as, are often used for the accusative of the third personal 
 pronouns. "Eu o chamo," I call him; "Nao a vejo," I do not see 
 her, etc. 
 
( 57 ) 
 
 LESSOR LVII. 
 PRONOUNS (CONJUNCTIVE). 
 
 Me, te, se, the. 
 
 Nos, vos, Ihes. 
 
 Me, te ; o,* a,* lo*, la.* 
 
 Nos, vos, os,* as,* los,* las.* 
 
 Comigo, comtigo, comsigo. 
 
 To me, to thee, to him, her, if. 
 To us, to you, to them. 
 Me, thee ; him, her, it. 
 Us, you, them. 
 With me, thee, etc. 
 
 lima penna. Nao Ike dfgo. Faca-?we o favor. V. 
 S. p6de fazer-we um grande servi9o. Ffco-ZAe miiito obri- 
 gado. Agradeo-Z7ie infinitame'nte. Sinto d&i-lhe tanto inc6m- 
 modo. o que Ike p6sso diz6r. EU o supp6nho. Nao o 
 cr&o. Eu o que"ro. Elle d&i-we um Hvro. Elle falla c&ntra 
 mim. Elle d&n-nos diias patacas. Ella d&u.-lhes muito di- 
 nheiro. Comndsco. Lev^i o cao ao rlo, e lancei-o na agua. 
 Montei a 4gua, e levei-a ao rio. Diga-me. Dlga-Z/ie. Diga- 
 Ihes. Quero \Q-lo Nao p6sso v&-la. Faja-we um par de 
 b6tas. 
 
 Ifc seems to me. I give you these books. Do him the 
 favour. Give me the new pens. / am much obliged to you. 
 I thank them. It is what / can tell you. She gave me two 
 beautiful books. Tell them that the money is good. / wish 
 to see her. I cannot see them. Make me a pair of shoes. 
 / do not believe him. He gave me a dog, and 7 threw it 
 into the river. Give him a book. You can do him a great 
 favour. . She gave him a pen. Tell him that I cannot give 
 him the horse. He gave them a pair of boots. Tliey speak 
 against me. I am sorry to give them so much trouble. 
 
 * Used after infinitives t as " Nao p<5sso 
 
( 58 ) 
 
 LESSON LVIII. 
 PRONOUNS (MIXED CONJUNCTIVE),* p. 260. 
 
 M'o, m'a. 
 M'os, m'as. 
 T'o, t'a, t'os, t'as. 
 Lh'o, Ih'a, Ih'os, Ih'as. 
 
 It or him to me, it or her to me. 
 Them to me. 
 
 Him, her, it, or them to thee. 
 Him, her, it, or them to you. 
 
 Dai-m'o. Eu comprei-o para d&r-lh'o. O livro 6 novo, eu 
 Ih'o darei. A penna e" b6a, elle m'a dara. Elles Ih'a levaram. 
 Fa^a-ra'os largas. De-m'as. Disse-m'o ce"rta pess6a. Deixe- 
 m'o ver. Is ao Ih'o direi. Assim m'o disseram. Nao Ih'o diga. 
 Perdoa-ra'o, se o fiz. Diziz-lh'o o sen espelho. Perguntai- 
 m'o a mim. Nao Ih'o p6sso dizer. Eu Ih'o darei. Muito 
 Ih'o agrade0. Deixe-m'o alguns dias. Eu Ih'o tenho dito. 
 'Ffyz-rn'os ver. Quando m'os poderd dar 1 Eu Ih'os mandarei. 
 De-me licen^a de Ih'os provar. Eu Ih'o affiance. Pois dir- 
 ro-?o-hei eu. 
 
 Give it me. Give it him. Give it them. I bought it to 
 give it to them. These pens are good ; give me them. The 
 mare is beautiful, and I gave her to him. The letter is beau- 
 tiful ; let me see it. Is the book good ? I will give it you. 
 Give me leave to show them to him. I shall pay it you. I 
 will give it you for less. The rings are pretty ; I will show 
 them to thee. I thank you much for it (m.)- When shall 
 you be able to show them tome? I assure you of it. I shall 
 tell it you. He gave it me. The house is new ; I will give 
 it to you. The horse is gentle ; will you give it to her ? Give 
 him leave to try them for me. 
 
 * These pronouns are compounds of the dative of the person with the 
 accusative of the thing. M'o stands for me o, it to me, the accusative of 
 course agreeing with the noun to which it refers. 
 
( 59 ) 
 
 LESSON LIX. 
 
 PRONOUNS (POSSESSIVE), p. 261. 
 
 Meu minha ; meus, minhas. 
 Teu, tua ; teus, tuas. 
 Seu, sua ; seus, siias. 
 Nosso, nossa ; nossos, nossas. 
 Vosso, v6ssa ; v6ssos, vossas. 
 
 My, mine. 
 
 Thy, thine. 
 
 His, her, its, their, your.* 
 
 Our, ours. 
 
 Your, yours. 
 
 Meu pae, miriha mae e m/inhas irmas estao no campo. 
 Seu filho e" sabio. Seu irmao 6" mo90. t sen jardlm e" 
 mai6r que o meu. Vosso amigo e o meu. Este chape^i 6 
 men. Com os seus parentes. C6mo esta minha irma ? Os 
 nfissos amigos nos abandonam. Sua Magestade. No seu 
 leito. seu primeiro impulse, tlma das suas maos. Urn 
 meu patricio.J Dous amigos seus. No meio dos seus con- 
 cidadaos. A energia da sua alma. Meus amfgos. Lon- 
 dres tern suets bellezas. Os seus mais pequenos movimentos. 
 Van-Dyck f6i o seu melh6r discipulo. 
 
 My mother and my brothers are in the garden. His son 
 is young. Your house is larger than mine. He is my friend. 
 He is one of my friends. One of your countrymen. In the 
 midst of his friends. The image of my mother. He was 
 the victim of the ideas of his time, as so many are of those 
 of ours. With his hand between hers. Two volumes of 
 this our journal. One of my legs. My aunts. With all 
 my heart. Three friends of his. This house is mine. 
 His garden is large. In other countries, especially in 
 ours. 
 
 * When speaking to any one in the third person, seu stands for 
 your, e.g., "G6sto do seu estylo," I like your style. When speaking 
 to a person of an other person, use d'ette, " Gdsto do estylo d'elle," I 
 like his style. 
 
 t The article is prefixed to the possessive when emphasis is required. 
 
 One of my countrymen. 
 
( 60 ) 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 PRONOUNS (DEMONSTRATIVE), p. 261. 
 
 fiste, e*sta ; este?, e*stas ; isto.* 
 fisse, essa ; esses, e"ssas ; o,t a, 
 
 os, as ; isso.* 
 Aquelle, aquella ; aquelles, 
 
 aquellas ; aquillo. 
 Est'outro, ess'outro, aquell'- 
 
 outro. 
 
 This ; these ; this.* 
 
 That ; those ; that ; t that.* 
 
 That; those; that. 
 This other ; that other. 
 
 fiste tapete. Aquella arvore fistes livros. Aquelles 
 h6mens. JiJssa casa. losses rios. ste quadro 6 lindo. 
 Isto * 6" p&ra mim. tfstas b6tas sao de Paulo, j&ste 4 o 
 seculo das revolugoes. Aquellas mulh^res nao sao tao boas 
 coino estes h6mens. $ste h6mem e o author deste livro. 
 Sou desta opiniao. Ndda disto* 6 assim. Um dia destes. 
 C6mo e isto* possivel? Nao g6sto disto. Naquelle logar. 
 No aspecto daquellas lindas paizdgens. Por este vil prego. 
 Nesta capital. Neste momento. Isto* nao 4 provavel. 
 fissas representagoes. sta esp^cie cruelissima. Custa-me 
 a crer aquillo que vi. 
 
 TJiis house. That tree. These houses. Those trees. 
 This book is beautiful. Of this house. Of those books. 
 In these representations. TJiose books are John's. This is 
 for him. In these rivers. This is not possible. The leaves 
 of those beautiful trees. These (f.) are not good. He is of 
 that opinion. Of these two men. In this case. This other 
 one has a disagreeable voice. Those cavaliers. In that. Of 
 this. The ground is that of a Roman town. The voice is 
 that of a man. One of these days. Those sheets are damp. 
 The door of this house. 
 
 * Isto and isso, this and that, are used without nouns, like ceci and 
 cela in French. 
 
 t In contrasted allusion : ' ' O ar da cid^de 6 ma'u ; o do campo, 
 bom," The air of the town is bad ; that of the country, good. 
 
( 61 ) 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 PRONOUNS (RELATIVE), p. 262. 
 
 qual,* os quaes ; a qual, as 
 
 quaes. 
 Cujo, ciija ; cujos, cujas ; de 
 
 quern. 
 
 Quern ; o que. 
 Que,t a quern. 
 Aquelle que, aquella que ; o 
 
 que. 
 
 Who, wliich. 
 Whose. 
 
 Who, he, who, whoever ; what 
 Who, which, that, whom. 
 He who, she who ; that which, 
 what. 
 
 Encontre'i um h6mem, o qudl me reconheceu. novo 
 re!6gio que elle tern. passaro que canta. A mulher que 
 eu estimo. h6mem de cujo cavallo Ihe fallei. Deus, cujas 
 6bras admiramos. Camoes, cujo me'rito conhecemos. tlma 
 fi6r, cujo cheiro e" agradavel. Quern mais tern, mais deseja. 
 lima cousa de que elle nao e capaz. As circumstancias 
 em que, etc. S6mos quern somos. Os que sao sabios sao 
 f elizes. Esta V. S. ce"rto do que dfz 1 A penna com que eii 
 escrevo. Os que pensam. negocio de que trato. Isto e 
 tiido o que elle me disse. 
 
 He saw a man in the house, who said, etc. The situation 
 in which. To know what was the substance of the petitions. 
 In every place in which. Lorenzo was he who knew him. 
 Very different from what it at present appears. One of 
 those men in whose hands. If I judge by what I see. He 
 who is religious knows, etc. Whoever has most, wants most. 
 This sea whose waves, etc. I am sure of what I say. The 
 pencil with which I write is yours. He that has most, wants 
 most. The man that is in the garden is my friend. The 
 house in which he lives. 
 
 * Qudl preceded by the article corresponds to the Latin qui, not quis 
 or qualis. It is like the old English " the which," or the French " le 
 quel," and reproduces the idea of the object already designated. 
 
 t Que is equal to who, which, that, and whom, and is indeclinable. 
 
( 62 ) 
 
 LESSON LXII. 
 PRONOUNS (INTERROGATIVE), p. 263. 
 
 Qual * destes ? 
 Que h6mem e este ? 
 Que tropas sao essas ? 
 Quern e ? que 1 
 De quern ?\ 
 Chijo? / 
 A quem ? 
 
 Which of these ? 
 What man is this ? 
 What troops are those ? 
 Who is it? What? 
 
 Whose ? 
 
 To whom ? Whom ? 
 
 Quern 6 ? Quern estd ahf ? Qudl de sens irinaos ? Que 
 livros tern o rapaz ? Qw^ delles 1 dudes sao as suas razoes ? 
 Qwem. est& a p6rta ? Qwem serao os paes destes menlnos ? 
 De quern e este quadro ? Ellas sao diias irmas : a g-wewi d4 
 V. S. a pref erencia ? Qwe k, isso ? Q^g horas sao ? Qwera 
 sao elles? Que vergonha! Qudl dos d6us? Que Ihe 
 pare'ce disto ? Quern t'o disse ? (2^ novidades ? Qz^e boas 
 novas ha ? que 6 a virtude ? Qwera sabe se e'ssas sao ver- 
 dadeiras? Que idade tern seu tio? Qudl 4 o meu livro? 
 Nenhiim destes. Em torn de quern quer sr obedecido. 
 Quern foram os primeiros ? 
 
 Which of your sisters ? What is that ? TF/ja books have 
 the girls ? TF7?a^ woman is that ? TTAo* a pity ! Whose 
 hat is this ? FTia^ age is your son ? Which of them ? TFfto 
 z's in the garden ? They are brothers ; which do you prefer ? 
 TFAa* ship is that ? To wfawn ^ Who knows ? F7^a^ news 
 to-day? What o'clock is it? Whose pen is this? What 
 are your reasons? What is truth? What horse is this? 
 Who art thou ? TFAo is the master of the house ? Which 
 of these monuments? What are the requisites of a good 
 soldier ? Who were the second boys ? 
 
 * Qudl, interrogative, corresponds nearly to the Latin qualis. 
 
( 63 ) 
 
 LESSON LXIII. 
 PRONOUNS (REFLECTIVE AND INTENSITIVE). 
 
 Eu mfamo, elle mfcmo. 
 Ella mesma. 
 filles mesmos. 
 Ellas mfomas. 
 Me, te, se. 
 De si mfomo. 
 Contentdr-nos, em si. 
 A, para, de, por si. 
 
 Falla-se de pdz j por si s6. 
 
 I myself, he himself, etc. 
 
 She herself. 
 
 They themselves (m.). 
 
 They themselves (f.). 
 
 Myself, thyseZ/, hims^/. 
 
 Of one's seZ/. 
 
 To content ourselves; in 
 
 To, for, of, by one's self; or 
 
 himself. 
 They speak of peace ; alone. 
 
 Eu mesmo o ffz. A mim mesmo. Lembro-we disso no 
 mesmo dia. Qudl 6 o homem que niinca se engana ? fille 
 fez-se soldddo. Faz-se tarde. Limito-wze 4 questao. Desejo- 
 we no campo. V6u-wie para cdsa. A falsidade 4 odi6sa em 
 si mesma. Isto por si mesmo esta claro. Lan^ou longe de 
 si a arma fatal Ellas mesmas m'o disseram. Aqui mesmo. 
 Como se chama isto? Elle nao esta em si. Chama-se milho. 
 Falla-se, conversa-se, e o tempo se passa. Fdzem mal a si os 
 que abusam da saude. Nao se sdbe. A mim mesmo come^a 
 a turvar-se-me a cabega. 
 
 I do not remember this. In itself. Alone. He limits 
 himself to the fact. Whose origin is unknown. I saved her, 
 and he saved himself. He became a sailor. They are of 
 importance to me. Nothing subsists by itself save God. I 
 myself was present. I am going home. Vice is odious in 
 itself. The women themselves went away. Henry killed 
 himself. He said to himself. He threw far from him the 
 gold. That wine is called "bual." I forgot to write the 
 letter. They themselves said it to him. He did it himself. 
 I limit myself to this question. To content themselves. 
 
( 64 ) 
 LESSON LXIV. 
 
 PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS WITH 
 INDICATIVES, p. 260. 
 
 Deixam-vos a honra. 
 Dar-rae-has prazer. 
 A mim me daras, etc. 
 
 Deus apraz-se da humildade. 
 Assim o prometteram. 
 EU v6-lo digo. 
 Adoram-wo,* na, nos, nets. 
 
 They leave you the honour. 
 Thou wilt give me pleasure. 
 To me myself thou wilt give, 
 
 etc. 
 
 God delights in humility. 
 So they promised it. 
 I tell you it. 
 They adore him, her, them. 
 
 Gabas-me o bom genio. Affigurava-se-me 
 que ella estava junto de mim. Dep6is ergueu-se, e assentdu- 
 se-lhe ao lado. Elle obrigou-o a toinar algiima refei9ao. 
 Elles mataram-m Calei-we. Deu-wie uma das siias maos, 
 levei-a a boca, e beijei-a. sta palavra senti-a soar, apal 
 pAva-a, via-a escripta, affigurava-se-??ie convertida em effeito. 
 Arripiaram-se-??ie os cabellos. Aqui me matarani um filho. 
 Encaminhei-we para a p6rta. Repito-^e que nao me importa. 
 Elle assentou-se-me ao lado. Elles mataram-7ia. 
 
 7 went to led, but could not sleep. I told him all. It 
 remains for us to know. Without his knowing it. His 
 hands, above all, incommoded him. He gave me one of his 
 hands ; I pressed it between mine, raised it to my mouth, 
 and kissed it. A dagger glittered in my hand. My pulse 
 beat with, feverish force. I told him I was ready. Let 
 them leave us the honour. Eame has exalted him. They 
 love him. They honour her. These men leave him the 
 glory. They killed my daughter here. The heathen adore 
 her. The old man seated himself at my side. 
 
 * The "n " is for the sake of sound, instead of adoram-o. 
 
LESSOR LXV. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS WITH INFINITIVES, p. 260. 
 
 Quero perdoar-Z/ie. 
 
 Que perigos se me podem offe- 
 
 recer ? 
 
 Pois mais vos quero dizer. 
 Vim de casa p^ra te ver. 
 Quiz v-lo,* vQ-la, ve-los, \e-las. 
 
 I wish to pardon him. 
 
 What dangers can present 
 
 themselves to me 1 
 Then more I wish to tell you. 
 I came from home to see thee. 
 I wished to see him, her, them. 
 
 Kaleb sahio da cidade, fingindo abandond-?a f de todo. 
 velho veio acompanha-lo. bom do monge correu a abraga- 
 lo. Custou-we a conheceWAe as feigoes. Ve-Zo-heis ja. 
 Pensa-?o e faze-fo sao c6usas bem differentes. Nao queria 
 demorar-me alii mais. Custava-we a cre-Zo. aspecto far- 
 vos-ha crer. Engandr-vos-heis. Ve-?a-heis. sol comegava 
 a tingir-me a cama de t6das as cores das vidragas de uma frusta 
 que me ficava fronteira. Cort4r-ZAe-hemos lima talhdda. 
 Disse-me que seu senhor precisava fallar-ie. Ouvi, sem 
 irritar-me. 
 
 After giving him. He resolved to asTc her in marriage. 
 We are going to help you to raise it. No one dared to con- 
 tradict me, I wish to spare you some trouble. I began to 
 observe myself ,$ and to study myself, in order to know my- 
 self. They come to consult him. I cannot hear you. He 
 offered to give him the horse. The good priest ran to tell 
 him. He desires to see them. I came from Lisbon to see 
 you. He told me that the Duke wished to speak to me. I 
 can hardly believe him. After pardoning him. To say it 
 and to do it are not the same thing. I wish to see you at 
 home. 
 
 * V$-lo is contracted for ver o or ver lo. 
 t Often divided " abandonoZ-a " instead of 
 Rendered by "me." 
 
( 66 ) 
 LESSON LXYI. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS WITH IMPERATIVES, p. 260. 
 
 Deus vos prospe"re ! 
 O'ra nSo * me importune. 
 Fiqa-me este favor. 
 De-wie lima rosa. 
 
 Nao Ihe diga isso. 
 
 May God prosper you ! 
 Now, do not teaze me. 
 Do me this favour. 
 Give me a rose. 
 Bring us some. 
 Don't tell him that. 
 
 Abra5a-?ne, falla-rae de meu pae. Traga-rae. De-me de que 
 beber. Nao se m6va d'ahi. Traga-rcos azeite. Traga-wo-Zas. 
 Fac.a-77ie o banho mais quente. Ya-me buscar lima carruagem. 
 Diga-lhe que me traga os sapatos. Senhor, salve-7zos. S6gue- 
 me. Expllca-7ws 4ssa parabola. Levantae-ros. Paga-7?ze o 
 que me de" ves. Tira-fe d'ahi. Dae-me esse Hvro. V6ste-me. 
 Traga-7ne as meias. Deixa-o entrar. Assente-se ao p^ do 
 liime. M6stre-me o melh6r que tive"r. Ac6ide-nos cedo. 
 Diga-lhes que me tragam o meu bahii. T?fya.-me o obs^quio 
 de dizer. 
 
 Give him a tulip. Don't leave me. Don't tell me that. 
 Speak to me of my friend. Bring me a glass of water. Tell 
 him to bring me my coat. Follow me. Pay me the money. 
 Do me this kindness. Bring us some wine. Embrace him. 
 Give him some drink. Don't move from this house. Ex- 
 plain to me this history. Give him these new books. Let 
 them come in. Sit down here. Show him the best cloth you 
 have. Do us the favour to show it to him. Do not strike 
 them. Tell him to bring rae the new boots. Do me the 
 favour to tell him the way. 
 
 * In negative sentences the pronoun precedes. 
 
( 67 ) 
 
 LESSON LXVII. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS WITH GERUNDS. 
 
 Promettendo-we niio cair. 
 Em vos vendo. 
 Estou-me aprest^ndo. 
 Queim&ndcT-me * o cerebro. 
 Pedlndo-nos o n6sso v6to. 
 Tendo-os ouvido. 
 
 Promising me not to fall. 
 In seeing you. 
 I am getting ready. 
 Burning my brain. 
 Asking our vote. 
 Having heard them. 
 
 Elle fazendo-os cair em lima cilada, os destro$6u. Obri- 
 gando-os a entregar Toledo. P6ndo-^e a mao no hombro. 
 Chegando-se ao pe" do leito. Voltando-se para mim. Parece- 
 me que o estou vendo. Comparando-me a outrem. Faltando- 
 Ihe as for9as, retirou-se p^ra a siia ciddde. Comparando-a^. 
 Elevando-o acfma das mivens. s^rvo langando-se-Z/ie aos 
 PC'S. Tendo-os deixado, retir6u-se elle. Chamando-os. Asse- 
 gur&ndo-lhe que achara. Deixando-o cheio. Ofiferecendo-se- 
 Ihe a vista. P6ndo-?zos de joelhos diante d'^lla. Pendu- 
 rando-o. 
 
 Listening to him. Placing my hand on his shoulder. 
 Asking me that. Promising me not to go. In hearing you. 
 /am dressing myself. Asking him for his vote. Having 
 seen them. His strength failing, he went home. The man 
 falling at my feet. Falling on my knees before him. Hang- 
 ing them. Cutting my hand. Raising him above other men. 
 Making me fall. Obliging them to retire. Placing his hand 
 on my head. Leaving them. Having left me. Placing his 
 foot on the ground. Comparing the one with the other. 
 Seeing him. 
 
 * This form is often equal to a possessive pronoun. 
 
LESSON LXVIIL 
 PRONOUNS (DEMONSTRATIVE RELATIVE). 
 
 Por o serem. 
 
 Sem o * serem. 
 
 As casas contrastavao com 
 
 que 
 As mais bellas sao as que 
 
 Sem a ouvlr. 
 
 E realmente o nao e. 
 
 On account of their being so. 
 
 Without their being so. 
 
 The houses contrasted with 
 
 those which 
 The handsomest are those 
 
 which 
 
 Without hearing it. 
 And really it is not so. 
 
 Os^heios e*ram os da persuasao, nao os da f 6ra. fissas sao 
 as minhas razoes, boas oil mas, digo-os como as sinto. 
 niimero d'aquelles 6 miii pequeno, o d'6stes infinlto. Quando 
 a n6ssa razao discorda da dos 6utros, etc. Os males da 
 primeira vida sao nada comparados com os da segiinda. Ha 
 verdades que a n6s o nao par^cem. A esperanja terr^stre ^ 
 frdgil, como o* sao todas as cousas da terra. Que hymnos 
 p6dem entrar em parall^lo com os que David cantava ? A 
 situagao nao ^ a da diivida. tlma so ambi9ao, a de agradar 
 aDeus. 
 
 This condition is worse than that of excited passions. Its 
 sphere is inferior to that of truth. Some books, as those of 
 the Egyptians, etc. The handsomest flowers are those which 
 perish soonest. The number of servants exceeds that of the 
 masters. I know the end of the story without hearing it. 
 It is necessary to be just, and in order to be so, it is indis- 
 pensable, etc. Political questions are those which, etc. I 
 say them as I feel them. The more I am contented with my 
 heart, the less I am with my pen. The situation is not one 
 of difficulty. My opinion is not that of the Court. 
 
 * Like the French "sans Tetre." 
 
( 69 ) 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 PRONOUNS (CONJUNCTIVE AND PERSONAL, REFLECTIVE 
 FOR POSSESSIVE). 
 
 Abaixar-ZAe a soberba. 
 Va a cdsa d'Slle*^ 
 Fica-we o pe mdis d vontdde. 
 Arranhou-we a orelha. 
 D6e-?ne a garganta. 
 Em Ihe morrendo o pae. 
 
 To lower his pride. 
 
 Go to his house. 
 
 My foot is easier. 
 
 You have scratched my ear. 
 
 My throat is sore. 
 
 As soon as his father is dead. 
 
 Arripiaram-se-rae os cabellos. Custou-rae a conhecer-?/^ 
 as feigoes. Figou-?7ie bem estampado na mem6ria. Notei que 
 os be"steiros me vigiavam os passos. Ergui o punhal, e cravei- 
 Ih'o duas v^zes no peito. su6r corria-me da Mnte. Elle 
 devfa seguir os passos do h6mem, vigid-lo, escutar-/7ie as 
 palavras, e estudar-?^e o men6r ge*sto. Os cabellos crigdram- 
 se-lhe de horr6r. Yiam-se-Z^e na t^sta rrigas, que, etc. Elle 
 Ihe f alia ao ouvido. Qu6r que Ihe leve a sua mala ? Tenha 
 a bonddde de m'os manddr a casa. Elle tocou-ZAe na mao. 
 
 These sounds, instead of causing me pleasure, made my 
 hair stand erect. A smile played on Ms lips. To lower his 
 pride. My head aches. To diminish their importance. 
 My head begins to turn. He seated himself at my side. It 
 puzzled me to recognise his features. He touched their eyes. 
 To remedy an evil, one must know its causes. He took the 
 ring from his * own hand, and put it on his * (another's). 
 He put around his neck a collar of gold. I closed his eyes. 
 Will you cut my hair 1 The scene remained impressed on 
 my memory. She touched my hand. 
 
 * It is important to note the difference between " sfia cdsa " and 
 "cdsa d'ellc." See p. 59, note. 
 
( 70 ) 
 LESSON LXX. 
 
 SER TO BE, ALWAYS (INDICATIVE), p. 269. 
 
 Sou, es, e ; somos, sois, sio. 
 Era, e"ras, e"ra; eramos, e"reis, 
 
 e"ram. 
 Fui, foste, foi; fomos, fostes, 
 
 foram. 
 Fora, foras, fora; foramos, 
 
 foreis, f6ram. 
 Serei, as, a ; emos, eis, d,o. 
 
 Am, art, is ; are, are, are. 
 Was, wast, was ; were, etc. 
 
 Was, wast, was ; were, etc. 
 Had been, hadst been, had been. 
 I shall be, etc. 
 
 Sou surdo. Sou m6nge. J2s inglez. Eu sou Jose*. $ 
 tempo de dizer-lhe adeus. um fdcto. fi ce"rto que . . . 
 lima historia. Isto e impossivel. $ bem triste. Que 
 feliz que SOIL I Nao e tarde. Os dias sdo ciirtos. fira o 
 f rio excessive. $ este o camlnho ? fi o mdis curto camlnho. 
 iZlle era medico. J&lle e dos nossos. Isto e naturdL Que 
 horas sao ? verddde. Sou apaixonado delles. Sou eu 
 em pessoa. Sou um delles. Um s6 serd bastante. Eu 
 serei pintor. N6s seremos sapatelros. C6mo foi isso? 
 i um grande general. irmao d'elle e soldado. 
 
 I am an Englishman. She is French. He is blind and 
 deaf. It is improbable. The evenings are long. This 
 needle is too large. The flowers are beautiful It is I 
 myself. It is nothing. This pen is bad. The bed is good. 
 These chairs are very beautiful. It is more than probable. 
 It is ten o'clock. What is the price? Is he a German? 
 It was night. John and Henry were the sons of Charles. 
 It is late. It is time to go. It is possible. I am fond of 
 it. John will be a soldier. Is it all the same ? Hannibal 
 was a very great general. 
 
 * " Ser " expresses attributes or permanent qualities. " S6u doente " 
 is " I am always ill, an invalid ;" but "Estdu doente " means "I am 
 at present unwell." 
 
( 71 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXI. 
 SEE TO BE (SUBJUNCTIVE), p. 270. 
 
 Que eu seja, as, a; a"mos, aes, 
 
 am. 
 
 Se eu f6sse, es, e; gmos, eis, em. 
 
 That I be, or may be, etc., 
 
 etc. 
 
 If I were, or might be. 
 
 Se eu for, es, for; mos, des, em. i If I be, were. 
 Fora, as, a; ainos, eis, am. Would be; were, had been. 
 
 Se eu for, etc. If I should be, or were. 
 
 Seria, as, a; amos, eis, am. I should be. 
 
 E possivel que assim seja ? A fim de que eu seja rico. 
 Se isso fosse commigo. E precise que ella seja prudente. Era 
 precise que fdsse mais mode'sta. Se a manteiga fdr boa, 
 traga quatro arrdteis. Importa que os trabalhos sejam aca- 
 bados. E possivel que nao seja f eliz. Se fdr da siia vontade. 
 Sentiria que fdssem recusadas. Era possivel que fossemos 
 diligntes. Que as b6tas sejam de bom cabedal. E neces- 
 sario que Y. S. seja apresentado. A discussao entre n6s fdra 
 impossivel. Se eu fdra em seu logar. Sentiria que V. S. 
 fdsse cansado. Importa que a 6bra seja compl^ta. Fdsse o 
 
 It is impossible it can be so. That I may be wise. It is 
 necessary that he should be good. You must be diligent. 
 Discussion would be improbable. If I were prudent. I am 
 sorry that the story is so short. He will be our friend. If 
 he were a rich merchant. It was necessary he should be 
 more diligent. I am sorry they are refused. Let the gloves 
 be good. If the cheese is good, buy it. It is not possible 
 for you to be quiet. You must be presented to the king. In 
 order that he may be happy. Let the shoes be of the best 
 leather. If I were in his place. 
 
( 72 ) 
 
 LESSOR LXXH. 
 SER TO BE (INFINITIVE, IMPERATIVE, PARTICIPLES). 
 
 Ser ; ser eu, seres tu.* 
 
 Ser elle, ser ella. 
 
 Sermos nos, serdes vos, serein 
 
 elles. 
 
 Sendo, sido ; em ser. 
 Se tu, seja elle ; sej&mos nos, 
 
 sede vos, sejam elles. 
 
 To be ; my being, thy being. 
 His being, her being, its being. 
 Our being, your being, their 
 
 being. 
 
 Being, been; in bein. 
 Be thou, let him be, let us be. 
 
 Ser feio. Nao ser bonfto. que tern de ser nao se p6de 
 evitar. Tenho de ser julgado. Para sermos julgados. Eu 
 estive sendo o guarda. Pois bem, seja assim. seres tu 
 form6sa. As feias, nem por o serem. resultddo foi o 
 serem exterminados. Os sentimentos nao podiam deixar de 
 Ihe serem presentes a memoria. Que nao seja tao comprido. 
 A ser assim. /Ser-lhe-hei reconhecido. Sejdmos virtu6sos, e 
 seremos f ellzes. Sendo tao tarde. Em ser mais usddo. Em 
 ser o amigo d'elle. Para sermos amigos. Que Ihe pare"ce se 
 foramos dar um passeio. Sendo assim. 
 
 Not to be brave. What has to be done, must not be 
 neglected. The man must be judged. In being punished. 
 Whatever it might be. Let us be good, and we shall be 
 happy. The youth being better taught, will be more com- 
 petent. In order to their being friends. To be old. In 
 being more useful. The result was our being almost exter- 
 minated. Far from being. In spite of my stature being 
 rather diminutive. It was no great merit my being good. 
 In spite of my being a child. If it is so. This being so. 
 Our being English. Being early. Very good, let it be so. 
 
 * A. peculiarity in Portuguese is the possession of a personal or 
 declined infinitive, equal to the English participle with a possessive 
 pronoun. 
 
( 73 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXIII. 
 S^R TO BE (COMPOUND TENSES). 
 
 EU tenho sido, tu tens , elle 
 
 tern . 
 
 Eu tinha sido, tu tinhas , elle 
 
 tinha . 
 Eu hei de ser, tu has de ser, 
 
 dlle ha de ser. 
 
 I have been, thou hast , he 
 
 has . 
 I had been, thou hadst , he 
 
 had . 
 I shall be, thou shalt , he 
 
 shall. 
 
 Tenho sido mui infeliz. Tu has de ser minha esp6sa. 
 Elles terdo sido mais f6rtes. Terias sido sua vfctima. Eu 
 nao tinha sido o prime'iro. Eu nao teria sido commerciante. 
 future ha de ser crente. Aquillo niinca h4 de ser. Teve 
 grande felicidade em nao ser descobe'rto. Se assim tiver de 
 ser. Se tiveres saudddes de mim. /Ser-me-hia impossivel. 
 Nao t6r sido vencido. Osca fic6u sendo o centro da ref6rma 
 intellectual. N'unia v41ha estrebaria que tinha sido habitada 
 por uma vaca. rapaz teria sido o amigo d'elle. 
 
 He will he my husband. The boy has been very unhappy. 
 That will never be. He was fortunate in not being punished. 
 If such taJce place. He had a house which had been in- 
 habited by robbers. It will be impossible for him. If I 
 had been a Frenchman, I should have paid the money. If I 
 had been blind, I should have been very unhappy. He would 
 not have been a soldier, if he had been the heir. The sun, 
 being the centre of the system, etc. She has been very un- 
 happy in not being rewarded. It would have been impossible 
 for me to pay the money. He would have been the victim of 
 the robber. 
 
LESSON LXXIV. 
 
 ESTAR * TO BE, AT PRESENT (INDICATIVE). 
 
 Estou, as, a ; amos, aes, am. 
 
 Estava, avas, ava ; avamos, 
 aveis, dvao. 
 
 Estive, iveste, eve ; ivemos, 
 ivestes, iveram. 
 
 Estiv6ra, iveras, ivra ; fra- 
 mes, ivereis, iveram. 
 
 Estarei, as, a ; emos, eis, So. 
 
 Am, art, is ; are. 
 Was, wast, was ; were. 
 
 Was, wast, was ; were. 
 Had been, hadst been, etc. 
 I shall be, thou, etc. 
 
 Estou doente. Estou contentissimo. Como estdV. SJ A 
 p6rta estd ab^rta, tempo estd bom. Estdu cansado. 
 Estd dormindo. A agua estd quente. JEstdva viiivo. 
 almo90 estd prompto. Todos estdo em casa, Onde estd o 
 livro 1 Aqui estd a carta. Estdo ricos. As toalhas estdo 
 na gaveta. Nisso estdva toda a duvida. Oh! que dura 
 que estd! Mfnha irma estd em AUemanha. Estdmos no 
 inve"rno. A sala estdva cheia. Estd o s61 no zenith. O 
 Senhor B. estd em casa? Eu nunca estive em Inglate"rra. 
 Estdu de saiide. Estarei aqul dentro d'um mez. 
 
 I am old. She is at table. He is not ill. The door is 
 not open. The water is cold. Where is the letter ? The 
 book is in the drawer here. I am pleased with him. They 
 -were rich. Dinner is on the table. Here is the boy. They 
 are afflicted. All the ladies are in the hall. My brother is 
 in England. I was there last month. She is much better. 
 He is so-so. I am angry. The weather is showery. He is 
 delighted. My friend is in France. I was at my brother's. 
 He is ill. We are in a very difficult case. He will be here 
 within a week. 
 
 * Estdr refers to accidents, or temporary states, qualities, positions, 
 circumstances. Hence "Estdu cansddo," but "Sou Inglez." 
 
( 75 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXV. 
 ESTAR TO BE (SUBJUNCTIVE). 
 
 Esteja, as, a ; a"mos, aes, am. 
 Se estivesse, see, se ; sgmos, 
 
 seis, sem 
 
 Se estiver, es, er ; mos, des, em. 
 Se estivera, as, a ; a"mos, eis, am. 
 Estaria,* as, a ; a"mos, eis, am. 
 
 That I be, may be. 
 If I should be, were. 
 
 If I (shall) be. 
 
 If I were, had been. 
 
 I should be. 
 
 Nada tenho que nao esteja as 6rdens de V. S. Miiito 
 me ale"gro que esteja a seu gosto. Espe"ro que esteja bem 
 disposto. Esteja quie"to. Nao sabla que elle estivesse 
 doente. Se o coronel estivesse aquf, etc. Se estivermos 
 longe. Esteja a sua vontade. Se estivera no seu logar. 
 Hoje nao havera estrella, por p6uco importante que seja, 
 que nao esteja comprehendfda em algiima das constella- 
 9oes. Faa c6mo se estivesse em sua casa. Esteja o jantdr 
 prdmpto as seis horas. Se estiveres pelo que digo, estd 
 justo. Elle faria isso, se estivesse^ etc. Estava* eu bem 
 servido 1 
 
 If lie were in my place, he would not pay the money. 
 If my friend had been here, I should have been quite 
 happy. Be quiet. Let dinner be ready at five o'clock. I 
 did not consent that he should be here. If he were here, 
 he would sing. I should le content if I could see my 
 brother. He has nothing which is not at your service. If 
 I were in your place, I should not go to Lisbon. Let the 
 horse be ready at four o'clock. If he agrees to what I say, 
 the thing is settled. He would do this if he were at home. 
 Be quiet, if you can. 
 
 * The imperfect is often used for the future conditional, i.e., was 
 for would be, e.g., " D.esejdva mtiito ve-lo," instead of "Desejan'a;" 
 like the French " Si failais," or the English " If I went, I should 
 get wet." 
 
( 76 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXYI. 
 
 ESTAR TO BE (INFINITIVE, IMPERATIVE, AND 
 PARTICIPLES). 
 
 Estar ; estar en, estares tn.* 
 Estar elle, estar ella. 
 Estarmos n6s, estardes v6s, 
 
 estarem elles. 
 
 Estando, estado, tenho estado. 
 Esta tu, estae v6s. 
 
 To be ; my being, thy being. 
 
 His being, her being. 
 
 Our being, your being, their 
 
 being. 
 
 Being, been, having been. 
 Be, be you. 
 
 estdres padre, a mim m'o de"ves. Estdr para morre'r. 
 Nao p6dem os h6mens estdr al^gres sem contender? O 
 estdrem elles aqul nao me imp6rta. Deixe estdr. Esteja 
 a siia vontade. Apesar de estdr sentado ao sen lado. Em 
 um h6mem estdndo contente, tiido vae bem. Ha Y. S. de 
 estdr em casa ? Para estdrmos satisfeitos falta pouco. Estdr 
 eu aqui nao vos incommode. Estde ce"rtos do que vos dfgo. 
 desejo de estdr na siia companhla. Ella tern estddo a 
 chorar. Estdndo 611a melh6r, tiido se faz. Estdrem elles 
 tristes, a si o d^vem. 
 
 My being sure of his aid. In order that we may be 
 satisfied Their being warm does not depend on me. To 
 be about to fall. In spite of being satisfied. Without 
 being clear. Their being unhappy is owing to their lazi- 
 ness. For our being happy, little is needed. Your being 
 a soldier you owe to him. Can the boy not be quiet 1 ? 
 Let it be. The desire of being with me. The sky begins 
 to be clear. My being here is not agreeable. In spite of 
 being in my house. Their being unwell is not my fault. 
 In order to our being certain. 
 
 * This declined or personal infinitive is peculiar to the Portuguese 
 language. It is often used, as in Greek and German, with the article 
 prefixed. It seems best rendered by the present participle, and a 
 possessive pronoun. 
 
( -77 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXVII. 
 ESTAE TO BE (COMPOUND TENSES). 
 
 Tenho estddo, tens , tern . 
 Tinha estddo, tinhas , tinha . 
 
 Hei de estar, has de , ha 
 
 de . 
 Terei estado, teras , terd . 
 
 Teria estddo, etc., etc. 
 Se eu tiv^r estddo. 
 Se eu tive"sse estddo. 
 
 I have been, thou hast , he 
 
 has . 
 I had been, thou hadst , he 
 
 had . 
 I shall be, thou shalt , he 
 
 shall. 
 I shall have been, thou shalt , 
 
 he shall (or will) . 
 I should have been. 
 If I had been. 
 If I should have been. 
 
 Tenlio estddo miiito doente. Eu tinha estddo em cdsa. Eu 
 teria estddo em casa, com aviso teu. Hei de flritfr milit&l 
 amanha. Terei estddo Id. Elle hd de estdr bo"m. Elle nao 
 s6ube que eu tinha estddo Id. Ter estddo. Se eu tivesse Id 
 estddo, ndda aconteceria. Quando eu tinha estddo d mesa, 
 etc. Depois de ter estddo tao ale"gre ! Se eu tiver estddo Id, 
 niinca mdis o chegue a v^r. Nao 6 o ciico que estou ouvindo 1 
 Terd estddo no templo. Ellas teem estddo no escript6rio. 
 Depois de elles terem estddo tao tristes. Hd de estdr em 
 cdsa antes de elles chegdrem. 
 
 He has been very ill. We have been quite well. Having 
 been in bed. They had been in the street. He will be a 
 sailor next week. If he had been on horseback, he would 
 have gone quickly. If I had been rich. If the weather had 
 been bad, I should have staid at home. If the lady had been 
 well, she would have gone to the country. To have been 
 at home. He has been. We have been here. I should have 
 been in church. He has been well. After having been very 
 ill. We had been there. The men had been with you. To 
 have been at home. 
 
( 78 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXVIII. 
 TER TO HAVE (INDICATIVE). 
 
 Tenho, tens, t&n ; temos, ten- 
 
 des, teem * or tern. 
 Tinha, tinhas, tinha ; tinhamos, 
 
 tinheis, tinhao. 
 Tive, tiveste, teve ; tivemos, 
 
 tive"stes, tiverao. 
 Tive'ra, as, a ; amos, eis, So. 
 Terei, as, a ; emos, eis, ao. 
 
 Have, hast, has ; have. 
 Had, hadst, had ; had. 
 Had, hadst, had ; had. 
 
 Had had. 
 Shall have. 
 
 Tenho uvas. Ella tern i igos. Elle tern laranjas. Temos 
 vfnho. Tendes cerejas. Elles teem n6zes. Nao tenho meias. 
 Nao tenho chape"u. Nao temos sapatos. Ellas nao tern 
 rendas. Eu tinha lima f61ha de pap^l. fille tinha nm 
 chap^u de palha. Tern ella lima faca? Tern vinho ? + 
 Temos n6s pennas 1 Tinha elle urn prato ? filles nao tin 
 ham luvas. Nao tenho eu um cao? Nao teremos nos 
 chiivas ? Que idade tern V. S. ? Tenho vinte annos. Nao 
 tive tempo para ir. Tenho esperan^as de ser o primeiro. 
 Ja o tenho. Nao teria eu a desgraa 1 
 
 We have a fine morning. We have time enough. Have 
 you change ? Everything has an air of life. I shall have 
 the honour. What disease have you 1 ? Shall we have 
 time 1 We had no winter this year. We shall have rain. 
 I have a great weakness. I had a sore throat. He had had 
 a headache. Has he? TFVZZ you have the goodness? I 
 should have much pleasure. We shall not Tzcwe a fine day. 
 I shall be very angry. Would you Tzaz/'e the goodness to ? 
 How old are you ? I aw thirty. I had not time. They 
 have a sheet of paper. 
 
 * It is better to use t$em or <m than tern for the plural. 
 
 t "Have you wine?" the third person singular being often em- 
 ployed without V. M. or V. S. The Portuguese speak to each other 
 generally in the third person, as if "Has he wine?" and yet, strange 
 to say, when they represent a dialogue in a novel, they do not give it 
 in the language as spoken, but transform all the third person singular 
 into the second person plural, v6s! 
 
( 79 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXIX. 
 TER TO HAVE (SUBJUNCTIVE). 
 
 Que eu tenha, as, a ; amos,des, 
 
 am. 
 Que eu tivesse, esses, esse ; 
 
 essemos, esseis, ssem. 
 Se eu tiver, eres, er ; ermos, 
 
 erdes, erem. 
 Se eu tivesse, etc., etc. 
 Teria, as, a ; Sines, eis, am. 
 
 That I may have, thou, etc. 
 
 That I might have ; if I had ; * 
 
 etc., etc., etc. 
 If I (shall) have, etc. 
 
 If I (should) have ; if I had. 
 I should have, etc. 
 
 Que eu tenha cha. Que elle tenha nata. Que terihdmos 
 queijo. Tenha a bondade de dar-me um bocadinho. Que eu 
 tivesse mostarda. Se eu tivesse cinco patacas. Keceio que 
 terihdmos um verao quente. .A fim que elle tenha bons 
 exemplos. Nao creio que elle tenha f6me. Quero que meu 
 filho tenha a melhor instrucfao. Qu^ndo eu tiver sede. 
 Yirei amanha, se tiver t^mpo. Sentiria que os meus amigos 
 tivessem frio. Temo que elle nao tenha dinheiro. Ainda 
 que nao tivessemos os livros, etc. Qualque"r fortuna que eu 
 tivesse, etc. 
 
 That we may have coffee. That they may have good wine. 
 Have the goodness to show him the book. If I had money. 
 If your brother had five pounds. I fear we may have bad 
 news. We do not believe that they are hungry. In order 
 that he may have new books. When I am hungry, I shall 
 have bread. If I have time, I shall have that pleasure. They 
 fear they may not have money. I should be sorry if the poor 
 boys were hungry. Whatever fortune we might have. I fear 
 I shall not have ten dollars. I shall write to-day, if I have 
 time. He wishes his son to have the best masters. 
 
 * If I had, where future (i.e., if I should have), is " Se eu tiv&se; " 
 where past (i.e., if I had had), " Se eu tivtra." 
 
( 80 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXX: 
 TER TO HAVE (INFINITIVE, IMPERATIVE, 
 
 PARTICIPLES, ETC.). 
 
 Ter ; ter eu, teres tu. 
 
 Ter elle, ter ella. 
 
 Termos nos, terdes v6s, terem 
 
 elles. 
 
 Tendo, tido, tendo tido. 
 Tdm tu, tende vos. 
 
 To have ; my having, thy hav- 
 
 His having, her having. 
 
 Our having, your having, their 
 
 having. 
 
 Having, had, having had. 
 Have thou ; have ye. 
 
 Te"nho receio de ter necessidade de seu auxilio. Ter algiim 
 medo. Ter f6me. Ter sede. Nao ha de que t&r medo. E 
 melh6r ter muito que pouco. Par^ce-me te-lo alcangado. 
 terem elles concebido esse proj^cto. Nao tenha siisto. Este 
 rio tern tres 16guas de Urgo. Tenhdmos paciencia. Tenha 
 por certo o que Ihe digo. Onde vae ter 4sta estrada 1 Sem 
 termos um monumento. Depois de ter acabado. Tendo de 
 mencionar os Franc^zes. Os que casam com mulh^res 
 maidres no ser, no saber e no ter, estao em grandissimo perigo. 
 
 We begin to have some hope. To be hungry and thirsty. 
 It is better to have hope than fear. My having conceived 
 this scheme was lucky. "Without our having money. The 
 man begins to be hungry. After my having the horse in the 
 stable. This road leads to the palace. There is nothing to 
 be afraid of in the garden. Don't be afraid. His having 
 patience is important. The boy begins to be thirsty. This 
 house is fifty feet high. In spite of their containing the 
 money. Your having finished this monument is a proof of 
 your talent. That I may have a new book. 
 
81 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXXI. 
 TEE TO HAVE (COMPOUND TENSES). 
 
 Eu tenho tido, tu tens tido, 
 
 elle tern tido, etc. 
 Eu tinha tido, tu tinhas tido, 
 
 etc. 
 Eu hei de ter, tu has de ter, 
 
 elle ha de ter. 
 
 Eu terei tido, tu terds tido, etc. 
 Que eu tenha tido, etc. 
 
 I have had, thou hast had, he 
 
 has had, etc. 
 I had had, thou hadst had, etc. 
 
 I must (or shall) have, thou 
 
 shalt have, he shall have. 
 I shall have had, thou shalt 
 That I had had, etc. 
 
 Tenho tido febre. Tu tens tido sede. Eu tinha tido 
 laranjas. Hei de ter vinho. Tu terds tido um chape* u de 
 palha. Nao temos tido sapatos. Hei de ter o gosto de o ver 
 amanha. Hei de ter a satisfacao. JElle est& todo mi, e hd 
 de ter muito frio. Hei de ter noticias de meu pae. Nao 
 terei a ousadia. . . Hd de ter tiido as 8 horas. Hei de ter 
 f6me. Tern tido mMo. Esta rua vai ter a pra^a. Comedo 
 a ter vontdde de comer. Se eu tiver tido dinheiro. Tenho 
 tido muito dinheiro. rapaz hd de ter lima fortuna im- 
 inensa. Elles teem tido a mole"stia. Terei tido o gosto de 
 ver o rei. 
 
 I have had money. He has had hope. We had had good 
 friends. The boy must be thirsty. I shall be cold. I shall 
 have had the satisfaction. Having had the pleasure. If I 
 had had a sword. Having had fever. They had had news 
 of my brothers. He has had the boldness to We shall 
 have the satisfaction of The children must be hungry. 
 This street leads to the cathedral. We begin to be hungry. 
 You shall have the boots at four o'clock. We shall have hope. 
 Having had. They have had the pleasure of seeing the 
 queen. He must have news of his brother. They had had 
 plenty of money. 
 
( 82 ^ 
 LESSON LXXXII. 
 
 HAVER* TO HAVE, THERE TO BE, MUST. 
 
 Hei, has, ha; havemos,t haveis, 
 
 hao. 
 Havia,I havias, havia, havia- 
 
 mos, havieis, havlam. 
 Houve, houveste, houve ; hou- 
 
 vemos, houvestes, houv6ram. 
 Haverei, as, a; emos, eis, So. 
 
 Have, hast, has; have. 
 Had, hadst, had; had. 
 Had, hadst, had; had. 
 Shall have. 
 
 Ha gente c[ue Ha dous annos. Hei de confessar. Tu 
 has de ir. lle ha de t6r miiito frfo. Que ha de ser de 
 mim? Nao ha c6usa mais provavel. Havia miiita gente. 
 Ha miiito ouro no Brazil. Nao ha pennas. Ha outras 
 linguas. Houve vinte m6rtos. Havia lima mulh^r. Ha 
 orvalho. Ha de fazer-se. Que se ha de fazer? Quantas 
 leguas ha d'aquf a Camacha ? Ha lima le"gua e m^ia. Nao 
 ha mais d'uma milha. Mostrar-lhes-Aeraos. Ha de ser um 
 pouco tdrde. Hav&rd miiitos ins^ctos este anno. Nao ha 
 perlgo. Espe'ro que haverd miiita fnicta. 
 
 There are men that never pay. Five years ago I was in 
 this house. Ton must confess that you have done wrong. 
 I have to read. We shall be very cold. What will become 
 of us ? There is nothing more certain. TJiere were many 
 people in the fields. How many leagues is it to Lisbon ? 
 Is there danger on the road ? It is not more than a league. 
 Tltere will be much fruit this year. We shall show (to) 
 them the road to Lumiar. I hope there will be many peaches. 
 There was a long interval of profound silence. There was a 
 feast. It is ten years since I had that horse. Are there 
 many soldiers ? 
 
 * Havgr is principal and auxiliary ; but is now less used than t$r. 
 Its chief use as an auxiliary is to form the compound tenses of verbs 
 expressing future actions or states, as " Hti de escrever ;" also used by 
 itself, " Se houvdr tempo." Impersonally, its use is very general ; Ha, 
 "there is," with both singular and plural nouns, e.g., " Hd vinho," 
 and " Hd muitas pessoas." 
 
 1* Or hemos. 
 
 J Hia or ia in compounds: " Ser-me-a'a," but better " Ser-me-hia." 
 
( 83 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXXIII. 
 HAV^R TO HAVE (SUBJUNCTIVE). 
 
 Que eu haja, hajas, haja, ha- 
 
 jamos, hajais, hajam. 
 Que eu houve"sse, houv6*sses, 
 
 houvesse ; houve"ssemos, hou- 
 
 vesseis, houve"ssem. 
 Se eu houver, houveres, hou- 
 
 ve*r ; houve"rmos, houve"rdes, 
 
 houverem. 
 Se eu houvesse, etc. 
 Haveria, as, a ; amos, eis, am. 
 
 That I may have ; that there 
 
 be. 
 That I might be; that there 
 
 were. 
 
 If I have ; if there were or le. 
 
 If I had ; should have. 
 I should have. 
 
 TSnho medo que hdja grande poeira. necessario que 
 .hdja pre"mios para que hdja soldados. Hajdmo-nos por 
 6utra maneira. Nao 6 para admirar que eu nao hdja che- 
 gddo a tempo ? Pode ser que hdja. Hdja saude ! Se eu 
 h&uver de ir. Se houveres de ver. Quires que tenhdmos 
 saude. Se houvesse de escutar, elle saberla. Se elle hou- 
 ver de pagar. Ainda que isso me houvesse de custar a vlda. 
 Se houvesse occasiao, eu Ihe escreveria. Se houver occasiao, 
 eu Ihe escreverei. L6go que hdja occasiao, escreva-me. 
 Temos medo que hdja urn temporal. Se elle houver de sair 
 e"sta n6ite. 
 
 I fear there may be a shower. It is necessary to have 
 rewards that we may have good scholars It may be there 
 are. See if there is beer. If they would listen, they would 
 know. Good-bye. As soon as there is an opportunity, 
 write me a long letter. If there be (or is) an opportunity, 
 I will send you the money. We must manage another way. 
 If he has to pay the money. Even though this battle should 
 cost me my life. If these boys do anything of the kind, 
 they must suffer punishment. If a chance should occur, I 
 should of course write. If you have to go, you must go at 
 once. 
 
LESSON LXXXIV. 
 
 HAVER TO HAVE (INFINITIVE, IMPERATIVE, 
 PARTICIPLES). 
 
 Haver ; haver eu ; haveres tu. ! To have ; my having, thy hav- 
 ing. 
 
 Haver elle, haver ella. 
 Havermos n6s, haverdes v6s, 
 
 haverem elles. 
 Havendo, havido. 
 Ha, havei. 
 Haver, ter havido. 
 
 His having, her having. 
 
 Our having, your having, their 
 
 having. 
 Having, had. 
 Have, have ye. 
 To have, to have had. 
 
 Para haver de fallar. Haver mister. Haver eu dito 
 isso, nao me pe"sa. Haver elle ido nao pode ter causado isso. 
 P&ra haver de s6r t6u amigo, e" precise saber isso. 
 havermos feito isso nao imp6rta. Havei compaixao de 
 mim. Estao havendo miiitas chuvas. Elle sabe como se 
 ha de haver. Ha de haver mister dinheiro. Nos haveremos 
 mister de dinheiro. Nao p6de haver taL Haver pao im- 
 p6rta-nos. Eu hei de haver dinheiro de fulano. Ha-de se 
 fazer o que elle quizer. Haver por bem. Para haver de 
 ouvir. Haver por maL Havendo * chuva, nao YOU. 
 
 My having done that does not affect me. In order to buy. 
 He knows how to behave himself. In order to speak. To 
 have good wine is important for us. His having said that 
 does not grieve him. I am to receive twenty dollars from 
 Mr. Stuart. A good deal of rain is falling. The Queen 
 has thought fit. He is determined to taTce it amiss. The 
 troops have need of money. To have said so much to the 
 poor boy was very bad. The tailor has to get fifty dollars. 
 His having spoken was unfortunate. Your having money 
 gives me pleasure. 
 
 * Havendo has a future meaning, e.g., " havendo mdo tSmpo, " means, 
 "there being bad weather," that is, " i/ there is bad weather." 
 
( 85 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXXV. 
 HAVER TO HAVE (COMPOUND TENSES). 
 
 Tenho havido,* tens , tern . 
 
 Tinha , tinhas , tinha . 
 Hei de haver, has de haver, 
 
 etc. 
 Terei havido,* teras , tera , 
 
 etc. 
 
 Teria havido, terias , etc. 
 Que eu * tenha havido. 
 Se eu tiv^r havido. 
 Se eu tive"sse havido. 
 
 I have had, thou hadst had, 
 
 etc. 
 
 I had had, thou, etc. 
 I shall have ; it will be. 
 
 I shall have had. 
 
 I should have had. 
 That I may have had. 
 If I have had. 
 If I had had. 
 
 Tern havido miiitos naufragios. Tinha havido grande 
 se"cca. Tinhamos havido e'stas noticias. Nao ha de haver 
 nada. Hei de haver livros de fulano. Nao sei se terd 
 havido miiita ne"ve fete anno ; Erros, Aave-los-haf nste 
 volume, mas nao os conhego. Erros, Aave-los-hia t men6res, 
 se os h6mens aprend^ssem. Tendo havido miiita se"cca por 
 falta de chuva. Se tivessem havido fl6res, teria havido 
 fructos. Nao s^i se terd havido muito vinho este S,nno. 
 Sabe, se terd de haver f e"sta ? C^a have-la-ha t b6a. Pennas 
 have-las-ha f n^sta gaveta, mas nao as vejo. 
 
 There have been many fires in Constantinople. I know 
 not if there has been much disease amongst the vines this 
 year. Errors there must be in the life of every man, but he 
 must reform. If there had been a good education, we should 
 have had good results. There having been no ra^n, the 
 ground was perfectly dry. There would be less crime if 
 there were less ignorance. My brother had had this news 
 before the newspapers came. There had been showers all 
 day. There have been many shipwrecks this year. If there 
 had been industry, there would have been money. 
 
 * Not much used in first person. 
 
 t Though these forms are of frequent occurrence, the best writers 
 write thus : HavSl-os-ha, havel-os-hia. 
 
( 86 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXXYL 
 
 I. CONJUGATION.-VERBS IN AE (INDICATIVE). 
 i TO LOVE. 
 
 I love, thou lovest, loves ; love. 
 
 I loved, or was loving. 
 I loved, or did love. 
 I had loved, etc., etc. 
 I shall love. 
 
 Amo, amais, amd; amaTnos, 
 
 amdis, amam. 
 Amava,* amdvas, amdva ; amd- 
 
 vamos, amdveis, amdvam. 
 Amei,t amdste, amou; amd- 
 
 mos, amdstes, amdram. 
 Amdra ; amdras, amdra, amdr- 
 
 amos, amdreis, amdram. 
 Amarei, amards, amard, amar- 
 
 emos, amareis, ainarao. 
 
 Amamos. Jogas. Mdndam. Lavdvas. Gastdvam. Con- 
 tei. Amdste. Fallou. Dedararei. Abrayard. Comprd- 
 ram. Voltei. Pagarei. Louvariamos. FiqUei (from 
 ficdr). Ensinarei. Gritdvam. Level. Governas. Elevei. 
 Reguldu. Professdra. ToquH. Ensinftu. Dan$dvamos. 
 Limpo os quadros. Solicitdmos um emprego. Atei o ani- 
 mal Despejdu o c6po. Achdmos o h6mem. Selldstes o 
 cavallo. Eu estuddva a ligao. Fechdu as jan^llas. 0>ue- 
 brdra a p6rta. Encontrei um amigo. Ella nomedu o mata- 
 dor do rei. Nao levantards falso testemiinho. 
 
 I play. Thou commandest. He washes. I was not wash- 
 ing. The governor spoke. I remained at home. I was 
 declaring. I shall teach. They will buy a horse. They 
 had returned. I should declare. I solicited an office. The 
 boy was cleaning the pictures. The girls broke the windows. 
 We met two friends. We bought two gold rings. He tied 
 the norse. I was preparing. I danced at the ball. The 
 murderer will break the door. Thou shalt love thy neigh- 
 bour. They played. My brother bought a fine horse. The 
 port-captain visited the frigate. 
 
 * Amava, indicates a continued past action during a time. 
 t Am$i shows an instantaneous action at a time. 
 
LESSON LXXXVII. 
 
 VERBS IN AR (SUBJUNCTIVE, INFINITIVE, IMPERATIVE, 
 AND PARTICIPLES). 
 
 Que u &me, ames, ame ; ame- 
 
 mos, ameis, &inem. 
 Que eu amdsse, amdsses, am- 
 
 asse ; amassemos, amdsseis, 
 
 amdssem. 
 Se eu amar, amares, amdr ; am- 
 
 armos, amardes, amarem. 
 Eu amar, tu amares, elle amdr, 
 
 nos amarmos, v6s amardes, 
 
 elles amarem. 
 Ama, amai. 
 Amando, amddo. 
 Tendo amddo. 
 Arndr, ter amado. 
 
 That I may love, etc. 
 That I might love, etc. 
 
 If I love, etc. 
 
 My loving, thy loving, his lov- 
 ing, our loving, your loving, 
 their loving. 
 
 Love, love ye. 
 
 Loving, loved. 
 
 Having loved. 
 
 To love, to have loved. 
 
 Que elle grite para eu parar. Quando eu chamdr. Miiito 
 folgp que me trdte com liberdade. Diga-lhe que entre. Passe 
 muito bem. Entremos n^sta loja. Nao chores, meu filho. 
 Que nao se engdne. A menos que eu amdsse este h6mem. 
 Ficdr-\}\Q-hei muito obrigado. Continuemos n6sso passeio. 
 Mandou que se comefdsse o ataque. Se tu olrdres bem. Nao 
 fdlle nisso. Amei os parentes. Agua quente para lavdrmos 
 a boca. Manddi-o chamdr para me tomdr medida. P6de 
 tomd-l&. amdr eu a poesia. Amdndo-me. Tel-o amddo. 
 
 They call him to stop. When we call always come. I am 
 very glad that you treat me with sincerity. Tell them to 
 come in. . He takes whatever pleases him. Let them go into 
 this church. When he weeps comfort him. Don't cry, my 
 children. Our loving history is praiseworthy. Some work 
 to gain a living. Water to wash my hands. He hoped to 
 find them at home. Lest I should call the old man. Find- 
 ing the men working. To take my measure. He ordered 
 them not to work. Loving him. Take this glass of wine. 
 
( 88 ) 
 LESSON LXXXVIII. 
 
 VERBS IN AR (COMPOUND ACTIVE TENSES). 
 
 (or) tenho amado. 
 Havia (or) tinha amado. 
 Hduve (or) twe amado. 
 Haverei (or) tergi amddo. 
 Haveria (or) terfa amado. 
 Hdja (or) ttinha amado. 
 JHouv&se (or) tiv&se amado. 
 
 I have loved. 
 
 I had loved. 
 
 I had loved. 
 
 I shall have loved. 
 
 I should have loved. 
 
 That I have loved. 
 
 That I had loved. 
 
 Ainda que hei visitddo miiitas vezes a sua qufnta, niinca o 
 encontrei. Haviamos encontrddo um amfgo. Quando tinlia 
 nomeddo o h6mem, todos se espantaram. Oxala que eu 
 tivesse comefddo mais cedo. Se tivesse contddo com a satis- 
 fa^ao de ter V. S. a jantar, terla mandddo faz6r macarrao. 
 Terei reparddo e"sta desgrdfa em ties ou quatro dias. Elles 
 terdo rasgddo a carta, antes de chegar a policia. No caso que 
 V. S. tenha conservddo essa cangao, r6go-lhe que m'a empreste. 
 Duvido que o rei tenha chegddo. Depois de haver chamddo 
 o rapaz deu-lhe um recado. 
 
 He has visited my quinta to-day. I had met my sister. 
 When he had repaired t the loss. They had torn the letters. 
 The traitor would have declared all. In case you have not 
 torn the letters, I beg you will show them to me. We should 
 have given him the book. Would that I had finished the 
 work ! If I had calculated on the pleasure of having you to 
 breakfast, I should have had something good. They would 
 have travelled all night, if necessary. He doubts the queen's 
 having arrived. After having spoken. He will have torn the 
 book before the police-officer arrives. 
 
 * See note, page 82. t Translate by present subjunctive. 
 
( 89 ) 
 
 LESSON LXXXIX. 
 
 VERBS IN AR (PASSIVE, PROGRESSIVE, AND FUTURE 
 FORMS). . 
 
 Estou am&ndo, estou a amdr. 
 
 Estava amende, estava a amar. 
 
 Estou encantado. 
 
 Fiquei admirado. 
 
 S6u, fra, tdriho sido amddo. 
 
 Ainda que eu fosse amado. 
 
 I am loving. 
 
 I was loving. 
 
 I am enchanted. 
 
 I was astonished. 
 
 I am, was, have been loved 
 
 Though I were loved. 
 
 Sempre estd cantdndo. rlo estd gelddo. Elle estd 
 zombdndo. A p6rta estd fechdda. Ainda que eu seja amddo. 
 Toda a cidade estd illumindda. verde agraddr-me-hia 
 mdis. Um p6bre h6mem tinha sido accusddo d'esse crime. 
 Ellas fdram acomparihddas por J6rge. $ estimddo de to- 
 dos. A pe"rna estd quebrdda. Ella e amdda de seu pae. 
 Antes que tudo esteja arranjddo. Estdu enganddo. Can- 
 s^i-me de viajdr. Canso-me de ensindr. Estdva admirddo 
 da sua simplicidade. Fiquei encantado de siias maneiras. 
 
 I am calling. He is finishing. The boys are, singing. 
 The queen is accompanied by the Duke. The Thames is 
 frozen. I am astonished. Though he was admonished. He 
 has been deceived. All the houses will be illuminated. The 
 governor is esteemed by all good] men. The boy is beloved 
 by his father. Black would please me more. The horse's 
 leg was broken. You were joking. Henry was tired of 
 speaking. Your friend was astonished when he entered the 
 house. All the houses were brilliantly illuminated. He is 
 tired of teaching. 
 
( 90 ) 
 LESSON XC. 
 
 VERBS IN AR (REFLECTIVES AND RECIPROCALS). 
 
 Acho-m.e; t6rna~Be. 
 Aproveitdr-me de 
 Aquentando-me ao s6L 
 P6sso engandr-me. 
 Eu me tenho lisongeddo. 
 filles se amam uns aos outros. 
 
 I find myself; it grows. 
 To avail myself of. 
 Warming myself in the sun. 
 I may be mistaken. 
 I have flattered myself. 
 They love one another. 
 
 Eu me lisongeio. fille aproxima-se a n6s. Joao retirdu-se. 
 Elle se Iduva a si mesmo. fille atisenta-se da minha casa. 
 Levdnto-me sempre as seis h6ras. Se nao me levdnto 16go, 
 t6rno a adonnecer. Muito me alegro. E miiita amabilidade 
 ter-se lembrddo de n6s. Pe^o-lhe que se assente. Nao posso 
 demordr-me. Comegava a impacientdr-me. Elle se Umbra. 
 Sao horas de levantdr-me. Assente-se aqui. Terei o gosto de 
 aproveitdr-me de su amavel convite. Levantdr-se cedo 4 a 
 mais saudavel cousa. Elle apearse do cavdllo. Avisei-o para 
 que s<( caldsse. 
 
 We may be mistaken. Henry retires. Warming himself. 
 I find myself quite well. I do not remember this. They 
 absent themselves from my house. We flatter ourselves. 
 The girls drew near to (de) us. We get up at seven o'clock. 
 The boy praised himself. If I do not flatter myself. We 
 cannot stay. It is time for us to get up. He will have the 
 pleasure of availing himself of your offer. The soldiers 
 alighted from their horses. They have flattered themselves. 
 I remember it well. Do you remember her ? Sit here. 
 
( 91 ) 
 
 LESSON XCI. 
 
 VERBS IN AR (ACTIVES AND NEUTERS, REFLECTIVES IN 
 PORTUGUESE AS PASSIVES IN ENGLISH). 
 
 Eoses are found. 
 
 It will be continued. 
 
 Less to be feared. 
 
 "We must part. 
 
 This is not to be wondered at. 
 
 You ought to be ashamed. 
 
 This is called 
 
 Continudr-se-ha. 
 
 Menos de receidr. 
 
 E mister separdr-nos. 
 
 Isto nao e de admirdr. 
 
 V. M. devia envergonhdr-se. 
 
 isto chdma-se 
 
 E se achard. Gastou-se t6da a vela. senh6r engdna-se. 
 Admira-me isto. Duvida-se muito d^sta noticia. mel- 
 Ii6r inglez fdlla-se em Londres. tempo serena. Abaixdu- 
 se a p6nte levadfca. que se da aos mendigos. sta dis- 
 tincsao funda-se na auctoridade de Cicero. Confirma-se a 
 noticia. sol se mfistra. Acdbdr-se-ha o culto divlno, e 
 pregdr-se-Jido heresias. Tem-se derrotddo os inimigos. Nao 
 sei se me atreva a perguntar-lhe. Como se chdma isto] 
 CJidma-se. . . . Contmudr-se-ftd amanha. Este cavallo 6 
 menos de receidr. 
 
 Gold is found in Brazil. This history will be continued. 
 These men ought to be ashamed. The best Portuguese is 
 spoken in Coimbra. They will be found. This news was 
 confirmed. The first is modified by the second. The moon 
 appears. This distinction is founded on truth. The thieves 
 have been put to flight. What do you call this in Portu- 
 guese ? The sun will show himself. The glorious traditions 
 of the nation were sought out. The boys ought to be ashamed. 
 Less to be praised. Roses are found in these mountains. 
 
( 92 ) 
 LESSON XCII. 
 
 VERBS IN AK (iMPERSONALS).* 
 
 Fdlla-ae. 
 
 Troveja, ntva, gda. 
 , r&ta. 
 todavia. 
 o valor. 
 
 It is said, they say, people 
 
 say. 
 
 It thunders, snows, freezes. 
 It is related, it remains. 
 Be it observed, however. 
 They praise his courage. 
 
 Hontem a n6ite geldva. Comegava a trovejdr t qundo me 
 deitel A que'm estd cansado, a ca~ma pare'ce b6a. Nao im- 
 porta. Bdsta. f6go apdga-se. $ao nevou durante a tua 
 ausencia ! Nao trovejard. Desagrdda-me. Alegra-mQ isto. 
 Bastard que me lembre o seu nome. Estd ameagando chiiva. 
 J^-me precise. Mesta-me contar. Relampeja. Estd trove- 
 jdndo. A admirafao come56u a torndr-se mais moderada. 
 J6ven torndu a caldr-se. Ao chegdrmos ao fim de n6ssa 
 viagem. Melh6r 6 nao falldrmos mais n^ste assumpto. 
 C6nta-se que o r^i, etc. 
 
 They say that it thunders. It was beginning to snow 
 when I went to bed. It is thundering. When one is tired t 
 a chair is agreeable. This will be enough. It was raining 
 all night. I must. On their arriving at the end of their 
 voyage. The heat began to grow more moderate. The old 
 man again became silent. It is better for us not to say more. 
 It is said that the Duke, etc. I was glad of it. It lightens 
 and thunders. I was displeased. They praise her beauty. 
 It is said there will be war. It did not snow. The girl 
 was again silent. 
 * Impersonal verbs are far more used in Portuguese than in English. 
 
( 93 ) 
 LESSON XCIII. 
 
 VERBS IN AR (IDIOMATIC FORMS). 
 
 Estdva a chamar. 
 Acdbo de tomar. 
 Estdndo escrevSndo isto. 
 fdnho que estudar. 
 E de desejar. 
 Acabdda a cea. 
 
 I was calling. 
 
 taken. 
 While writing this. 
 I have to study. 
 It is to be wished. 
 Supper being ended. 
 
 Esquecidos de todos os riscos, ido navegdndo. tempo 
 vde aclardndo. fe precise separdr-nos. peixe acdba de 
 chegdr. Estdu a estudar. Nada Urn que receiar disso. 
 Acdba-se-me a paciencia. Nao presta pdra nada. Acdbo de 
 chegdr de Lisb&a. Tirdda a causa, ce*ssa o effeito. Estdndo 
 disputdndo sobre a m6rte. Eu o vejo dan$dr. Acdbo de 
 jantdr. Estou a trabalhar. fille vde procurar a. V. S. 
 Teriho de me embarcar. Teriho muito que esperar. Vejo um 
 h6mem cortdndo panno. Acabddo de publicar-se. Acabddas 
 as disposigoes necessarias, etc. 
 
 We have just taken tea. Forgetful of his friends, he went 
 travelling. I have to finish my letter. It is to be hoped 
 that the wound will be nothing. I saw him leaping. The 
 mail has just arrived. This fish is good /or nothing. The 
 Duke has just dined. The colonel is at dinner. The man is 
 joking. He is going to call on you to-morrow. I see a boy 
 studying his lesson. We have to go on board. Just published. 
 The work being finished. Dinner done. I must rest. The 
 time having arrived. Forgetting every danger, she went 
 through the battlefield. 
 
LESSON XCIV. 
 
 IL CONJUGATION. VERBS IN ER (INDICATIVE). 
 TEMEK TO FEAR. 
 
 Temo, temes, teme; tememos, 
 temeis, temem. 
 
 Temia, temias, temia; teml- 
 amos, temieis, temiam. 
 
 Temi, temeste, temeu ; teme- 
 mos, temestes, temeram. 
 
 Temera, temeras, temera, teme- 
 ramos, temereis, temeram. 
 
 Temerei, temeras, temera, teme- 
 remos, temereis, temerao. 
 
 Fear, fearest, fears ; fear. 
 Feared, or was fearing. 
 Feared, or did fear. 
 Had feared. 
 Shall fear. 
 
 Aprendo. Bebes. Corrdmpe. Devemos. Estend&is. Fdzem. 
 Descrevia. Padeciamos. Escondi. Aborreceu. Procederam. 
 Vencera. Remover ei. Prometterd. Receberiamos. Come- 
 riam. Vend! lla vendeu. fille regerd. Prendi. Ellas 
 conhecem. Meu irmao morreu. Bebemos a sua saiide. Ellas 
 comeram miiito pao. Elle combateu pela liberdade.^ Tenho 
 lido miiitos llvros. ^Isto ndsce da siia negligencia. Elle rom- 
 perd a negociafao. fille interrompeu n6ssa conversa^ao. Elle 
 encheu o espa^o. jardineiro escolhe os melh6res. Isso 
 nao depende de mim. 
 
 I shall eat nothing. I was fearing. They were drinking. 
 Thou hadst feared. I shall learn. I might extend. We 
 might receive. He eats and drinks. They drank much old 
 wine. He will interrupt our conversation. The king will 
 conquer. He suffers. The boy hides the money. I shall 
 not describe the town. The house fills the space. He mil 
 die of hunger. The gardener's daughter mil cull the flowers. 
 The general has conquered the difficulties. The peasants 
 fought for the cause of freedom. My sister died yesterday. 
 They interrupted us. 
 
( 95 ) 
 LESSON XCV. 
 
 VERBS IN ER (SUBJUNCTIVE, INFINITIVE, AND 
 
 IMPERATIVE). 
 
 Que t6ma, temas, tema; te- 
 
 mamos, temdis, temam. 
 Que temesse, temesses, te- 
 
 messe ; temessemos, temes- 
 
 seis, temdssem. 
 Se (qu&ndo) eu temer, temeres, 
 
 terrier ; temermos, temerdes, 
 
 temerem. 
 
 Eu temer, tu temeres. 
 Teme, temSi. 
 Temendo, temido. 
 Tendo temido. 
 Temer, ter temido. 
 
 That I may fear, etc. 
 
 That I might, could, would, 
 should fear. 
 
 If (when) I fear, etc.' 
 
 My fearing, thy fearing, etc. 
 
 Fear, fear ye. 
 
 Fearing, feared. 
 
 Having feared. 
 
 To fear, to have feared. 
 
 Que eu beba. Que elle dva. Que n6s escrevessemos. 
 Se eu esguecer. Se n6s temermos. PaTa saber. Tremendo. 
 Comido. Hei de vender. Se quizer chegar. Vendo as 
 lagrimas. monge comegou a flescer a escada. Nao ha 
 tempo a perder. Prohibem-]hQ o beber vinho. la a con- 
 descender com o seu r6go. Urn homem tremer / Chegou 
 ,ntes &'anoitecer. Fendendo as 6ndas. Yae-se fazendo 
 tarde. Ou90 bater. Se nao adormecer 16go, lerei. A dgua 
 esta fervendo. T6me o c6po, e de-me de beber. Permitta- 
 me que Ihe offerega lima chavana de chd. 
 
 I must read, lie must drink. She must eat. After 
 my death. That I may drink. If you wish to eat. He 
 began to drink wine. I must comply with his request. 
 When you know our way. Fearing the consequences. He 
 will not light the candles. I hear a knock. Allow me to 
 offer you a glass of wine. If he wishes to sell the horse. 
 It is groining late, and I have three letters to write. Is not 
 the water boiling? That I might not lose time. If he 
 fears. If they fear. If I should forget. I must sell that 
 horse. A soldier to tremble / 
 
( 96 ) 
 LESSOR XCVL 
 
 VERBS IN ER (COMPOUND ACTIVE TENSES). 
 
 Hei or tenho temido. 
 Ha via or tinha temido. 
 Houve * or tive * temido. 
 Haverei or terei temido. 
 Haveria or teria temida 
 Haja or tenha temido. 
 Houvesse or tivesse temido. 
 
 I have feared. 
 
 I had feared. 
 
 I had feared. 
 
 I shall have feared. 
 
 I should have feared. 
 
 That I have feared. 
 
 That, or if, I had feared. 
 
 Tenho recelido nniitas cartas. comme'rcio tern soffrido. 
 Temos lido. A lingua Franceza tern obtido lima universali- 
 dade, que a vae convertendo, por assim dizer, em lingua 
 geral. Terei comido. Teras bebido. Sem diivida terdo 
 comido bastante. Se tivesse escondido. Tinha anoitecido. 
 Disse ter respondido. Tendo morrido seu pae na gu^rra. 
 Tenho comido muito, mdis do que devia. Declare haver 
 recebido. Logo que V. S. o tiver lido. Meu irmao tern 
 recebido miiitas cartas. fille decldra haver recelido dez 
 mil reis. 
 
 I have eaten enough. I may have appeared careless. 
 The incidents which had occurred. If they had learned 
 to calculate the consequences. My brother had received 
 two letters. The health of the soldiers has suffered. They 
 have read my papers. The English language has obtained 
 a certain universality in America. The man has eaten more 
 than he ought. I declare I have received it. If I had 
 feared. If he had prohibited. I should have forgotten. He 
 has offered. That orator has obtained a certain popularity. 
 His brother having died in battle. 
 
 * Seldom used. 
 
( 97 ) 
 
 LESSON XCVII. 
 
 VERBS IN ER (PROGRESSIVE, PASSIVE, AND FUTURE 
 FORMS). 
 
 Est6u temendo, estou a temer. 
 Estava temendo, estdva a temer. 
 Est6u vencido. 
 Ainda que eu fosse vencido. 
 Havemos de nos diyertir. 
 Escrever-lhe-hei; hia. 
 
 I am fearing. 
 
 I was fearing. 
 
 I am conquered. 
 
 Though I were conquered. 
 
 We shall enjoy ourselves. 
 
 I shall write to him; should. 
 
 Elle foi absolvido da accusa9ao. " Dever-se-ha abrir as 
 janellas. Proceder-se-ha assim. Tinhamos sido mal rece- 
 bzdos por seu pae. Te-lo-haV. S. aprendido. Estdva elle 
 convencido disso? Em. fim anoitecera. Vdmos a descer. 
 Sem dizer palavra, desceu. V. S. me fez descer. Depots de 
 fallecer o rei. ^mirado de Badaj6z havia sido submettido. 
 Nao seriamos vencidos em generosidade. Escrever-lhe-hei 
 qudrta-f^ira, se nao pud^r ir v^-lo na segiinda. Nao hei de 
 soffrer tal. Que qu^r comer ? fllle estdva bebendo. Depois 
 de eu morrer. 
 
 I shall write to them. I am writing. He is drinking. 
 They are learning. He is conquered. Without fearing the 
 consequences. After having written the letter. What do 
 you wish to drink ? After his death. I was convinced of 
 the truth. The enemy was conquered. I shall not suffer 
 this. After the death of the Emperor. I was badly received. 
 After her death. I shall write to his brother. He will write 
 to you on Wednesday, if he cannot call on Tuesday. The 
 Queen of Spain was badly received at the theatre. The 
 Emperor of Russia was not convinced of this. 
 
( 98 ) 
 LESSON XCVIII. 
 
 VERBS IN ER (REFLECTIVES* AND RECIPROCALS). 
 
 esque'ce-se de siias promes- 
 
 sas. 
 
 h6mem prudente nao pro- 
 
 mette 
 
 Atrevo-me a pedir. 
 Logo ella se arrependeu. 
 
 esgue'ceram-se de Ulysses. 
 
 He forgets his promises. 
 
 The prudent man does not pro- 
 mise if 
 I venture to ask. 
 She repented instantly. 
 They have forgotten Ulysses. 
 
 fille esconde-se justfca. Abstenho-me de beber vinho. 
 fille se intromette nos meus neg6cios. M&i tio mette-se a 
 fallar em politica. Vendo-se perseguido de pe"rto, cessou de 
 defender-se. V6u-me metier na cUma. Nao me esquecerei. 
 Aborrece-me isso. Este h6mem esqueceu-se de canta>. Nao 
 se esque$a de vir 16go que tiv^r jantado. fi necessario arre- 
 pender-se dos peccados. Amda te atreves a replicar-me ? 
 historiador ve-se miiitas vezes perple"xo. Para se valer do 
 frio. Os Sainoiedas estendem-se pela Siberia. Atrevi-me na 
 siia bondide. 
 
 The king never ventured to open the door. Seeing himself 
 obliged to keep a flock. I have forgotten your name. Have 
 you forgotten me 1 He has forgotten me. In order to obtain 
 rewards, they have recourse to (valerse) flattery and fraud. 
 They were obliged to surre?ider. Law is not required to 
 repress luxury. Its defenders had to retire to the castle. 
 Not being able to maintain himself. In February the city 
 had surrendered. Do not forget to pay the money as soon 
 as you have dined. The boy hid himself in the stable. I 
 venture to ask a favour. I repent of my sin. 
 
 * A reflective in Portuguese is often simple in English, 
 
( 99 ) 
 
 * 
 
 LESSON XCIX. 
 
 VERBS IN ER (ACTIVE AND REFLECTIVE IN PORTUGUESE = 
 
 PASSIVES IN ENGLISH). 
 
 trlgo vSnde-se a 
 Estende-se sta significance 
 Nao se viam senao poucos mas- 
 
 tros. 
 
 To see justice done. 
 Her voice trembling. 
 
 Tremendo-iTig a v6z. 
 
 Wheat is sold at 
 
 This meaning is extended to 
 
 A few masts only were seen. 
 
 A melh6r bectfda que se pode fornecer a urn do^nte e* dgua 
 piira. museu se ha de estender. Viam-se as ilhas levan- 
 tar seus cumes. Onde se ve o tiimulo. Desejo ver fazer 
 justi^a neste neg6cio. Para se corihecer a causa provavel. 
 Os vapores se estendiam. A cidade 6 c^lebre por siias feiras, 
 que sefdzein s6bre a ne"ve. Vendem-se em Moscow casas de 
 Madeira, que se armam e desarmam segiindo se qu&r. Aqui 
 se cdlhe excellente vinho. AH se faz um grande comme'rcio 
 de c6bre. amor s6 4 mais para se temer do. . . . 
 
 Sugar is sold at sixpence a pound. Is wine sold here ? 
 Russia extends to Germany. A few men only are seen. The 
 house is seen amongst the woods. He wishes to see justice 
 done to these poor sailors. Very good books are sold here. 
 The house was reduced to ashes in less than three hours. 
 The fair is held in the forest. A great trade in iron was 
 carried on in this district. The best wine that can be fur- 
 nished is Bual. The mountains were seen afar off. I must 
 see justice done to that poor negro. His hand trembling. 
 
Parece; succeMe. 
 
 Ch6ve. 
 
 Sabe-se. 
 
 Vale. 
 
 Faz vento; faz relampagos. 
 
 Escurecer-se. 
 
 LESSON C. 
 
 VERBS IN ER (IMPERSONAL). 
 
 It seems; it happens. 
 
 It rains. 
 
 It is known. 
 
 It is worth. 
 
 It is windy; it lightens. 
 
 To grow dark. 
 
 Ensma"ndo, se aprende. Nao Ihe succedeo c6mo esperdva. 
 Quern nao apparece esque"ce. Ao amanhecer. Faz-se tarde. 
 H6je choverd. Chdve. Diz-se. Estd-mQ bem. Parece ser 
 verdade o que elle diz. Que Ihe parece ? Nao vale a pena. 
 Nao se sdbe quando jantara. Chove miiito. Faz trovoes. 
 Faz urn calor terriveL Quando se fax de vela? Antes 
 ftamanhecer. Parecfa-nos ver a ilha, mas era ne"voa. O ar 
 estava tao escuro que parecia noite. Par4ce-me bem 
 escrever esta carta. Nem sempre succede segiindo os n6ssos 
 
 At daybreak the Russian troops appeared near the church. 
 I must go home, for it is late. It is said that Admiral 
 Napier has attacked Cronstadt. It is not Unown when the 
 French frigate will arrive. I cannot leave the house ; the 
 lieat is so terrible. What is most becoming in a parent is 
 to be just and kind. It is proper to rouse the attention of 
 these men. What do you think ? If it is windy, shall I 
 go 1 ? It seems to be true what she says. In teaching one 
 learns. It is not worth while to go, for it mil rain. It is 
 well known that the man will not pay the money. 
 
LESSON CI. 
 
 VERBS IN ER (IDIOMATIC FORMS). 
 
 Tive que escrevfo. 
 Tornou a Ur a carta. 
 Sem que eu o percebfase. 
 Serd mister que me fag a, etc. 
 Elle estd pdra morrer. 
 
 I had to write. 
 He read the letter again. 
 Without my perceiving it. 
 You must make me, etc. 
 He is about to die. 
 
 T6rne a escrevSr a carta. Estou morrendo de se"de. De- 
 me de beb&r. A senh6ra tornou a dizer-lhe. Sentiu miiita 
 alegria ao ve-lo entrar na sala. barulho que da a conhecer. 
 Sem que n6s o percebessemos. Em chovendo* E possivel 
 que t6rne a ver-te ? Assim torndsse eu a ver Ulysses ! Vie*- 
 ram lamber-lhe os p^s. Nao podendo soffrer em silencio. 
 Dizem que o Senhor N. deve fazer f o primeiro pap61. Antes 
 de morrer, Aff6nso declar6u, etc. Fallecido o cdnde. Em 
 n6sso entender. M^u parecer 6 que Sem que o cavalh&ro o 
 tivesse percebido. 
 
 He has to write to England by the Brazil steamer of the 
 8th inst. He read the book again, but he is not yet con- 
 vinced of the truth. She left the room without my perceiv- 
 ing it. The old general is about to die. As soon as the king 
 was dead the Duke left Lisbon. The poor traveller was 
 dying of thirst. My opinion is, that we ought to go home 
 by the first steamer. They say that Mario is to perform 
 the principal part. Before dying, the prisoner declared his 
 innocence. If it rains. You must write that letter again. 
 I rejoiced to see her enter the house. The thief came in 
 without your seeing him. 
 
 * Translate "if it rains." See p. 132. 
 t FazSr paptt, play a part. 
 
f .-. H - ( 102 ) 
 
 LESSON CII. 
 
 III. CONJUGATION. VEEBS IN IB. 
 PUNIR, TO PUNISH. 
 
 Piino, punes, piine ; punimos, 
 
 punis, punem. 
 Punia, punias, punfa ; puni- 
 
 ainos, punieis, puniam. 
 Puni, punfste, poniu ; punimos, 
 
 punistes, puniram. 
 Punira, puniras, -a ; Smos, -eis, 
 
 -ao. 
 Punirei, -as, -d ; -emos, -eis, -ao. 
 
 Punish, punishest, punishes. 
 Punished, or was punishing. 
 Punished, or did punish. 
 Had punished. 
 Shall punish. 
 
 Tradtizo. Applaudimos. Abriria, Abria. Admittiam. 
 Admittiram. Applaudiramos. Applaudiremos. Admitte 
 isso. Eu o introduzi. fille pede vinho. Conde residiu 
 sempre em Portugal A enfermidade que conduziu Afionso 
 4 sepultiira. Pedi-lhe a siia protec9ao. Abriu passo pelo 
 miiro. Kaymiindo decaiu da grd^a do rei. A m6rte des- 
 truiu as esperanfas que Henrique concebera de obter o domi- 
 nio de Toledo. official seguiu o seu conductor. Como 
 jd advertimos. Frigiu ^lla o peixe ? CumprirSi com o pro- 
 mettido. 
 
 He repeated some words in a low voice. He called for 
 beer. The king resided for some time in Windsor. He 
 destroyed all the fortifications. The child followed the guide. 
 She has not fried the fish. The impartial public applauded. 
 I prefer coffee. I have lost* my book. The Turkish 
 Government asks for the evacuation of the provinces. An 
 earthquake has destroyed the town. He translated Her- 
 culano's History of Portugal into English. He will not 
 fulfil his promise, I am sure. He/eW into disgrace. He/eZZ 
 from the Queen's favour. I do not admit that. 
 
 * As if " I lost." 
 i 
 
( 103 ) 
 
 LESSON CIII. 
 
 VERBS IN IR (SUBJUNCTIVE, IMPERATIVE, AND 
 INFINITIVE). 
 
 Puna, punas, puna; pun&mos, 
 
 punais, punam. 
 Punisse, punisses ; punisse ; 
 
 punissemos, punisseis, pu- 
 
 nissem. 
 Se punir, punires, punir ; pu- 
 
 nfrmos, punirdes, punirem. 
 Punirla, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -ia"o. 
 
 Piine, puni. 
 Punfndo, punido. 
 Punir, ter punido. 
 
 That . . . may punish. 
 That . . . might punish. 
 
 If ... punish. 
 Should punish. 
 
 Punish (thou), punish (ye). 
 
 Punishing, punished. 
 
 To punish, to have punished. 
 
 V. Ex a me diz que stiba. Advirta* disso sen irmao. 
 Tradtiza* isto em ing!6z. Que destrudmos a 6bra. Que 
 traduzissemos. Suba V. M. Permitta-mQ que me retire. 
 Vamos dormir a Santarem. Condtiza estes senh6res para 
 a sala gr^nde. Ao ouvir um tal discurso. P^ra me con- 
 duzir a ciddde. Fazendo prome'ssas que dependem do tempo 
 p&ra se cumprirem. Os soldados chamam o p6bre pat^ta 
 pdra se divertirem com a siia tolice. Nao p6de competir com 
 elle. Henrique foi persegui-lo no seu leito de m6rte. Se 
 punirmos ^stes ladroes. 
 
 Translate that letter into French. Allow me to finish the 
 boot. On hearing these words, he fell to the ground. I 
 cannot compete with him. The monk went to warn him. 
 In order to conduct him to the palace. I shall go and fulfil 
 my duty. Eeduce everything to figures. Allow me to go 
 home now. He called the boy to him, to amuse himself 
 with his folly. On hearing the voice of my father, I left 
 the room. Fulfil your duty. Show the Count into the 
 drawing-room. That I may translate the king's letter into 
 German. Punish the boy. 
 
 * The subjunctive is (politely) used for the imperative. 
 
( 104 ) 
 
 LESSON CIV. 
 VERBS IN IR (COMPOUND TENSES ACTIVE). 
 
 Hei ou tenho punido. | I have punished. 
 
 Havia, h6uve ; tinha, tive pu- j I had punished. 
 
 nido. 
 
 Haver<&, or fa/ ter&, or fa I shall or should have pun- 
 
 punido. 
 Haja, tenha punido. 
 Houvesse, tive"sse punido. 
 Quaudo houver, tive"r punido. 
 
 ished. 
 That I have punished. 
 That I had punished. 
 When I have punished. 
 
 Tenho dormido. Elle tinha apparecido. Elle tinha im- 
 primido a siia 6bra. Nao tinham elles comido a fruta? 
 Nao ha traduzido a fabula *{ Eu tnho ouvido dizr. Em 
 breve teremos conduido a Jornada. Tenho ouvido tiido. O 
 criado que se havia decidido a seguir seu amo, etc. Havendo 
 at4 ahi seguido. Assim tern resolvido o cons^lho. Gonver- 
 tida a gue"rra civil em guerra estrangeira. Que elles tiv^ssem 
 sacvdido o p6. Y6u perder quanto tinha adguirido. Tal 
 pregad6r niinca eu o tinha ouvido. Elle tern s&roido miiito a 
 meu contento. 
 
 He had slept. They had slept in an humble inn. The 
 man had suddenly appeared. The sovereigns being converted 
 into silver. Has he eaten all the strawberries ? Had your 
 friend printed his book before, etc. When I have translated 
 that speech into Portuguese, etc. France has not competed 
 with England. They have not persecuted the men. When 
 the soldiers destroy the bridge. They had opened the win- 
 dows. He had not fulfilled his promise. Did you hear that' 
 the French had taken the Malakoff ? 
 
( 105 ) 
 
 LESSON CV. 
 VERBS IN IR (PROGRESSIVE, PASSIVE, AND FUTURE). 
 
 Est6u punindo, a punir. 
 Estava punindo, a punir. 
 Estou caido. 
 Estou resolvido. 
 Ser eu punldo. 
 Ao abrir da porta. 
 
 I am punishing. 
 
 I was punishing. 
 
 I have fallen. 
 
 I am resolved. 
 
 My being punished. 
 
 At the opening of the door. 
 
 For silas ciilpas nao serein punidas. fille tfnha sfdo 
 despedido. ^Tu teras sfdo vestido. A empreza teria sfdo 
 differida. fllle 4 applaudido de toda a gente. Nao se>ndo 
 intewompido o s6m. Estava vestido de piirpura. fille vai 
 saindo bem do neg6cio. Sendo muito instruido. Se 4stas 
 cousas nao f6rem reprimidas. A casa 6 bem corihecida de 
 t6dos. Nao os condemnem, sem srem ouvidos. Nao quero 
 que sej'a p&rseguido. A cdsa teria sido demolida. A lei 
 esta abolida. Nao o ha de punir ? Elle os ha de reduzir. 
 Estdu resolvido a falldr. 
 
 He has fallen into my net. Their not being punished 
 for their faults was owing to their being powerful. The 
 king was clothed in purple. The lad, being well instructed, 
 has translated the book accurately. Has the law been 
 abolished? This castle was built in the reign of George 
 III. I shall not have to punish him. The old castle has 
 been demolished. The rebellion was suppressed. He was 
 punishing the boy. Our being persecuted was the result 
 of the king's command. He was punished without being 
 heard. Repeated times. We wish to start. 
 
( 106 ) 
 
 LESSON CVL 
 VERBS IN IR (REFLECTIVES AND RECIPROCALS). 
 
 V6u despedir-me de V. S. 
 Unem-se os labios da ferida. 
 Rindo-se; sorrindo-se. 
 Outras terras se sumiram. 
 Sinto-me indisposto. 
 Fingir-se ce"go. 
 
 I must take my leave of you. 
 The lips of the wound unite. 
 Laughing ; smiling. 
 Other lands disappeared. 
 I feel unwell. 
 To feign himself blind. 
 
 O cavalheiro dirigiu-se para o logdr. Nao se feriram 
 elles ? museu se lia de abrir a ^quinze de margo. Lhe 
 respondeu o soldado rindo-se. az&ugue tine-se com o 
 6uro. Sorria-se na te>ra a Primavera. Queira servir-se dfsto. 
 Vde-se pondo o s61. F6i-se como um passarinho. Fugiu- 
 me da vista. Os Lapoes se servem da ^nj^a' naa siias viagens, 
 e se cobrem com siia p^lle. C6mo se dvstinguiram os Persas ? 
 Deixa-w?e ao menos despedir de Eucharis. Vae divertir-se. 
 Eu me inctimbo desse neg6cio. Elle escapou-se da vista de 
 eeu pae. 
 
 He went out smiling. The soul is about to say farewell. 
 Six pieces of artillery followed. I must take my leave of 
 you. The lady feels herself unwell. The soldier feigned 
 himself deaf. The child, laughing, went out. The moon 
 is setting. The man fled from my sight. The Indians use 
 rice. The Caffres cover themselves with the skins of lions. 
 He will take charge of these affairs. He amuses * himself 
 in deceiving me. I take my leave. My brother feels un- 
 well. He feigns himself lame. I am going to take leave of 
 my friends. The boy feigned himself blind. 
 
 * Divertir. 
 
( 107 ) 
 
 LESSON CVII. 
 
 VERBS IN IR (ACTIVE AND REFLECTIVE ; PASSIVES AND 
 NEUTERS IN ENGLISH). 
 
 A Irlanda divide-se em 
 
 Nutre-se a alma. 
 
 Rindo-se; de se abrir. 
 
 A que horas pdrte o vapor ? 
 
 Styue-se que 
 
 Sentiu-se um grande ruido. 
 
 Ireland is divided into 
 The soul is nourished. 
 Laughing ; of being opened. 
 When does the steamer start ? 
 It follows that 
 A great noise was heard. 
 
 " Calmar" 6nde se concluiu o celebre tratado. Divlr 
 dem-se as opinioes. Ouviam-se os passarinhos chilrando. 
 Porque se prefere 6sta estrdda d 6utra ? Pdrte-se o cora9ao. 
 Vde-se concluindo. Zunem-lhe os ouyidos. Em appare- 
 cendo o s61, as estrellas s6mem~se. Sentiu-se um grande 
 trem6r. Partiam-se em varias opinioes. Estes navios 
 pdrtem tao arrebatddamente. Sentiu-se grande abalo no 
 navio. Nao me sinto com for^as para Isso. Queira ser- 
 vir-se disto. Divide-se a casa em quartos. rne'stre despe- 
 diu-se. A que hftras pdrte o duque ? 
 
 England is divided into forty counties. At what o'clock 
 does the steamer leave the port ? It follows that you must 
 go immediately. The poor child is drawing near its end. 
 Why is this house preferred to the other ? Opinions were 
 divided. A great motion was felt. Pray, help yourself. 
 The work is divided. The necessity of roads being opened. 
 The city is divided into seven quarters or districts. The 
 King of Portugal took his leave at four o'clock. She is not 
 strong enough for this. The patient is dying. I do not feel 
 equal to this. The garden is divided into three parts. 
 
( 108 ) 
 
 LESSON CVIIL 
 VERBS IN IR (IMPERSONAL). 
 
 Cde neVe ; chdve pe"dra. 
 Caiu-lhe a espada da m 
 Cumpre-nos narrar. 
 Cumprindo-BQ com os preceitos 
 da lei. 
 
 It snows ; it hails. 
 His sword fell from his hand. 
 It is our duty to narrate. 
 Fulfilling the requirements of 
 the law. 
 
 tomar lima resoluQao. Cde miiita pe"dra. Esta- 
 caindo ne>e? Cdem grandes fr6cos. H6je cumpre osten- 
 tarmos. Cde-me a penna da mao. ceu ge"a, ne"va, abraza, 
 e chdve. Ha cousas que nos nao cumpre saber. Cumpre 
 ter os meios. Caiu lima grande pancada d'agua. Est^ 
 caindo p^dra. Caiu bastante neve. Caiu geada. Cdem 
 algiimas gotas d'agua. Cumpre escrever aqu^lla carta antes 
 de sair o vapor. Z)6e-me o h6mbro miiito. Estd caindo 
 muita neve. Caiu h6ntem miiita pe"dra. Cumpre-mQ dizer- 
 Ihe com franqueza. 
 
 It was snowing all night. I cannot go, as it rains and 
 hails. It is my duty to tell you. My left hand pains me. 
 It will snow to-morrow. It is pouring. It is our duty to 
 go, if it does not snoio. It is hailing. It will snow to- 
 morrow on the hills, but we shall have fine weather in town. 
 Fulfilling the commandments of my superior officer, it is my 
 duty to inform you. Tears fell from her eyes in showers. I 
 am bound to write that letter. I have a sore throat. You 
 must take a resolution. Much snow is falling. 
 
( 109 ) 
 
 LESSON CIX. 
 VERBS IN IR (IDIOMATIC FORMS). 
 
 Tenho de partir. 
 
 Acdbo de ouvir. 
 
 Se estdva prdmpto para partir. 
 
 Ouviu lima v6z chamar. 
 
 Nao podem deixdr de sentir. 
 
 Estdva pdra pedir. 
 
 I have to go. 
 
 1 have just heard. 
 
 If he was ready to start. 
 
 He heard a voice call. 
 
 They cannot help feeling. 
 
 He was about to ask. 
 
 Se bem tenho entendfdo o que acdbo de ouvir. Eis-nos 
 partidos. Vae-se partir. V. S. nao esta em estado de 
 repetir a siia ligao. Pe^r-lhe-hei lima fatia, se me faz 
 fav6r. Santarem nao tard6u a cair-lhe nas maos. P6sso 
 servir-te de alguma hortali9a ? De que que*r que o sirva ? 
 Ir diminuindo. p6bre h6mem esta a concluir. A prima- 
 v^ra esta rindo nos jardins. Dividir doze por trs. Estdmos 
 pdra partir. Acdbo de partir. Eaz inao tempo para se sair. 
 cair * da f olha. Nao p6sso deixar de sentir. rapaz nao 
 esta prdmpto para partir. 
 
 I am ready to start. I have to go to England by the 
 steamer. The boy has just heard that his father is dead. 
 I cannot help asking you. We are off. "We have to go to 
 Lisbon by the Galgo. They had to repeat all the lesson. 
 The town was not long in falling into the hands of the 
 French. May I offer you some beef ? The poor invalid is 
 dying. I have just heard that the steamer goes about four 
 o'clock. I cannot help falling. What shall I offer them 1 
 He was about to ask for water. We have just heard of the 
 victory. He cannot help speaking. 
 
 * The Portuguese often use the infinitive instead of a noun. 
 
( no ) 
 
 LESSON CX. 
 POK TO PUT (AND ITS COMPOUNDS). 
 
 Ponho, poes, poe ; pomos, pon- 
 
 des, p6em. 
 
 Piinha, as, a ; iimos, Sis, am. 
 Puz, e"ste, 6z ; emos, estes, eram. 
 Puzra, ras, era ; eramos, er- 
 
 eis, eram. 
 Pordi, as, a ; emos, eis, ao. 
 
 I put, thou puttest, lie puts, 
 
 etc. 
 
 I put, or was putting, etc. 
 I put, or did put, etc. 
 I had put, etc. 
 
 I shall put, etc. 
 
 Pttohamos. Puzeramos. Porei. Pomos. O h6mem 
 poe, e Dens dispoe. A galliuha poe 6vos. Eu ptinha o pe" 
 no estribo. Elle poz a mao na t^sta. Eu puz a espdda a 
 cinta. Elles puzeram os vestldos. Eu puzera toda a dili- 
 ge^ncia. Porei fim a obra. Pord o h6mem na riia. Com- 
 pomos Hvros. Ella compoe a casa. padre compord as 
 dissansoes. Compoz-se com a siia s6rte. Este Hvro compoe- 
 se de tres partes. general dispoe as pe^as em bateria. 
 Supponho que nao. Eu o suppdriho. lle pdz-8Q em pe*. 
 impdz lima condi^ao. 
 
 He put his hands on the boy's head. They imposed 
 severe terms. She put a sealed letter into my hand. Where 
 have you put my hat ? I shall put the books on the table. 
 The year is composed of days. In you he places all his con- 
 fidence. She will put some coal on the fire. He has not 
 put the bridle on the mare. I shall dispose of my house. 
 We suppose not, They will put the papers into my hands. 
 He disposed of his goods. He put it here. They laid down 
 their arms. The rebels deposed the king. The gardener 
 transplanted the trees. He will suppose. I composed a 
 book. 
 
( 111 ) 
 
 LESSON CXI. 
 FOR TO PUT (SUBJUNCTIVE). 
 
 Que eii ponha, as, a ; mos, 
 
 aes, am. 
 Que eu puzesse, es, e ; ess&nos, 
 
 Sis, em. 
 Se eu puzer, es, er ; mos, des, 
 
 em. 
 Se eu puzera, as, a; a"mos, eis, 
 
 am. 
 Poria, ias, ia, iamos, ieis, iam. 
 
 That I may put, etc. 
 That I might put, etc. 
 If I put, etc. 
 If I had put, etc. 
 I should put, etc. 
 
 Se puzfr miiito carvao, ha de apagar 6 f6go. Diga-lhe 
 que pdnha o Hvro na mesa. Se puzermos o navio em perlgo. 
 Se o general puzesse os soldados a fe"rros. Mand6u aos 
 officiaes que repuzessem o dinheiro de cjtda um nos sus 
 sdccos. Ponha a roupa a enxugar. Ponhdmos a pan^lla ao 
 lume. Se expuzermos 4stas diividas. Se eu puzesse o h6mem 
 na riia. Se elle se puzer a cavallo. Se as menf nas se puzerem 
 a chorar. Se os astros se puzessem. Se em duas h6ras me 
 puzesse em Lisb6a. Se V. M. puzer tanto tempo em fazer 
 isto. Elle nao o comporia. 
 
 If the boy puts too much water. Tell him to put the 
 wine on the table. I told him to put out the dog. Let us 
 suppose it so. If the sun sets at seven o'clock. Tell him to 
 mount his horse. I know not to what to attribute it. If 
 the captain puts the ship in danger. If he can be in 
 Funchal in three hours. Tell the maid to lay the cloth. 
 Tell him to put the hammock on the ground. Let us put 
 the pan on the fire. Put the shirts to dry. If she should 
 put on mourning. Lay the cloth at six o'clock. The hen 
 would lay eggs. He would impose terms. 
 
LESSON CXII. 
 
 FOR TO PUT (IMPERATIVE, INFINITIVE, AND 
 PARTICIPLES). 
 
 For, ter posto. 
 
 For en, p6res tu, por elle. 
 
 Pormos nos, pordes vos, porem 
 
 Slles. 
 
 PSe, ponde. 
 Pondo, posto. 
 
 To put, to have put. 
 
 My putting, thy putting, his 
 
 putting. 
 Our putting, your putting, their 
 
 putting. 
 
 Put (thou), put (ye). 
 Putting, put. 
 
 Por o h6mem por governador. Ter pdsto o navio em 
 perigo. Poe de parte a vaidade. Sem eu por o vestldo. 
 Porem-se os astros. pormos t6da a diligencia nem sempre 
 da bons successes. Depois de elle ter pdsto a mesa. Posto 
 o medo. tlma c6usa supposta. Para o Bfspo impor as 
 maos. Impondo tribiito. Sem ellas terem disposto da sua 
 fazenda. Dispondo os pain^is na sala. Sem eu dispor e*stas 
 arvores. Depois do capitao ter tiido dispdsto para a empreza. 
 Sem compdrmos as dispiitas. Marquez 4ra tddo compdsto 
 de bondade. 
 
 Having placed the lad as inspector. Lay aside the book. 
 Without his putting off his coat. Our composing books will 
 not pay the labour. After the king's imposing tribute. 
 Without my disposing of my house. After your settling 
 your disputes. He is reconciled with the doctor. After 
 his having placed the pictures in the gallery. Without 
 her having composed a poem. My having laid the cloth 
 gave mm pleasure. After our having transplanted these 
 bushes. Without putting his life in peril. 
 
( 113 ) 
 LESSON CXIII. 
 
 FOR COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Hei on tenho posto. 
 Havia, tinha posto. 
 Haverei, haveria, terei, teria, 
 
 pdsto. 
 
 Haja, tSnha posto. 
 Houvesse, tive"sse posto. 
 Quando houve"f, tiver posto. 
 Ter posto, haver de por. 
 
 I have put, etc. 
 
 I had put, etc. 
 
 I shall, or should have put. 
 
 That I may have put. 
 That I might have put. 
 When I have put. 
 To have put ; to have to put. 
 
 Eu tenho posto o chape'u na cabega. Hei de por o homem 
 f6ra. Temos posto a casa em perigo. Ellas hdo de pdr-se a 
 cavallo. Que eu tenha posto o piano em execugao. Se elle 
 tivesse pdsto o criado na riia. Se ^lles tivessem pdsto os p^s 
 ao camlnho. Se as aves tivessem posto os 6vos no nlnho. 
 Quando eu tiver posto a mesa. Ter pdsto todo a cuidado. 
 Estd pdsto a trabalhar. Tendo compdsto um livro. Estdr 
 compdsto com lle. Tinha compdsto o semblante. Eu teria 
 dispdsto as estatuas na galeria. Se elle tivesse dispdsto do 
 dinheiro. 
 
 He has put the hat on his head. I shall put the boy out 
 of the house. They have placed the kingdom in danger. I 
 have arranged the pictures in the hall. When the birds 
 have laid their eggs. The servant had laid the cloth. I 
 shall have composed some verses. These young ladies have 
 mounted their horses. When he has put the plan in execu- 
 tion. Having composed a good book. If I had put my hat 
 on the table. I shall have to compose verses. I should have 
 prepared all for the enterprise. He had put every confidence 
 in his friend. If he Jiad put on the boots. 
 
LESSON CXIY. 
 IRREGULAR VERBS IN AE, p. 275. 
 
 Buscar, busque ; tocar, toquei. 
 Folgfdr, folgue j entre</o>, en- 
 
 tregue. 
 Arrancdr, buscar, atacar, edi- 
 
 ficar, embarcar, ficar, peccar, 
 
 replicar, suffocar, tocar. 
 Alugar, carregar, cegar, casti- 
 
 gar, chegar, empregdr, etc. 
 
 Car changes c into qu before e. 
 Gar takes u after g before e. 
 
 Pull up, fetch, attack, build, 
 embark, stay, sin, reply, 
 suffocate, touch. 
 
 Hire, charge, blind, chastise, 
 reach, employ, etc. 
 
 Ataquei o inimigo de flanco. Busque o chapeu. Dfga- 
 Ihe que arrdnque as arvores. Edifiquemos lima p6nte aqui 
 Embarquei-mz no neg6cio sem reflectir. Pequei miiitas 
 vezes. N5o replique ! Suffoquei-Q nos meus brakes. T6que 
 a campainha. Kao qluguei a casa. Carreguei os batalhoes 
 inimigos. Que elles encrdvem a artilheria. Castiguemos 
 Isses rapdzes. CJiegue-se ao p6 do liime. Empreguei todo o 
 tempo no estudo. Estraguemos todas ^stas mas he"rvas. 
 Miiito folguei de a ver. Ldrgue isso. Pdgue o dinheiro. 
 Jd paguei. Pegue na pa. Pe^ we n'isso. 
 
 the bell. Don't stay in the house. Let go the 
 bridle. I rang the bell three times. Do not touch me. 
 Fetch the hammock-men. Tell him to stay in the garden. 
 Don't reply. Spike the guns. Let us load the car. Let 
 the man build the bridge. Do not tear your new dress. I 
 spoiled that boy. My duty requires me to confiscate the 
 lace. I approached the fire. I suffocated the lion in my 
 arms. Take the reins, and sfay here. I embarked in a ship 
 of war. I did not load the gun. Let us pay the money. 
 I reached the chamber, attacked the thief, and chastised him 
 severely. Tear the paper, and pwf out the light. 
 
LSESON CXY. 
 
 BAR TO GIVE.* 
 
 "Ddu, -ds, -d, -a"mos, -des, -ao. 
 Dava, -as, -a, -amos, -eis, -am. 
 D^i, -este, -e*u, -e"mos, -estes, 
 
 -eram. 
 
 Dem, -as, -a, -amos, -eis, -am. 
 Darei, etc. Daria, etc. 
 D$, -es, -e", -mos, -eis, -m. 
 Desse, dosses, etc. 
 Se der, etc. 
 Da, dae. 
 Dar, ter ddo, d^ndo, dado. 
 
 I give, thou givest, he gives. 
 I was giving, etc. 
 I gave, or did give. 
 
 I had given, etc. 
 I shall give. Should give. 
 I may give. 
 I might give. 
 If I give. 
 
 Give (thou), give (ye). 
 To give, to have given, giving, 
 given. 
 
 Ddmos. Deste. Deu. Demos. Ddva. Darei. Daria. 
 Tinha dado. Se en der. Se eu desse. Dera. Ter dddo. 
 Se tive"sse dddo. D6u-lhe os parabens. Eu nao dou tanto. 
 Dou-Ihe a minha palavra. Ella me ddva pequ^na soldada. 
 Ainda nao deu lima h6ra. As vinhas nao d&ram este nno. 
 Elle nao me deu notlcias. Ja deram olto h6ras. Dd 
 Iicen9a que . De-me 6sse chapdu. Dae pao ao senh6r. 
 Preciso que me de as siias chaves. ZMr-me-hia miiito 
 praz^r o conversarmos. ZMr-lhe-hel em troca este re!6gio. 
 Quanto me dd p^lo meu 1 
 
 He gives. We give. Thou givest. I gave. We were 
 giving. I had given. I shall give. He might give. I shall 
 not -give a dollar. The man gave good wages. It has not 
 yet struck two. Pears have not yielded well this year. 
 Give me leave to . Give wine to the men. I shall give 
 you a book in exchange. It has already struck. I can give 
 it you for two dollars. You must give them to be mended. 
 You must give him your papers. They gave me good news. 
 It would give me much pleasure to meet. If I give. I 
 shall not give so much. Give it me. 
 
 * Only the most important parts of the irregular verbs are given. 
 They should be carefully committed to memory. 
 
LESSON CXVI. 
 DAR TO GIVE (IDIOMATIC FORMS).* 
 
 To appoint a meeting. 
 
 Ddr (Ha e bora 
 
 Ddr licao ; dar c6staa. 
 
 DSu-ine a entender. 
 Ddr comsigo no chao. 
 No qual me da conta de. 
 
 Ddr-se por culpado. 
 
 To say a lesson; to turn the 
 back. 
 
 He gave me to understand. 
 
 To fall to tbe ground. 
 
 In which you give me an ac- 
 count of. 
 
 To admit bis guilt. 
 
 Ddr o sim. Deu fogo. fille deu a vfda por seu ami'go. 
 Dd licenca, Ddndo ouvfdos. Nao deram quartel. Ella 
 da lima olhada. Nao poder ddr um passo. Mais vale urn 
 " t6ma Ja " que ddis " te darei." De aonde der. A riia vae 
 ddr 4 praga. Dados as maos. relogio dd b6ras. Ouve-o 
 ddr boras 1 Afnda nao : de-\he c6rda. Quando dd a v^la 1 
 Ddr de esp6ras. Ddr em bebado. O navio dd n'um banco. 
 O barco nao dd pelo leme. Don por concluido este negocio. 
 Ddr as maos. Nao se me dd nada. Ddr-se-li& caso ? Dd- 
 se como c^rto. Dou-ine bem neste clima. Demos que assim 
 seja. 
 
 To shake bands. I gave him credit. Tbe king gives 
 audience. He gave me bis hand. They gave him some- 
 thing to drink. I put an end to the affair. They gave 
 thanks. The soldiers turned their backs. Minos gave 
 laws. Shall I say my lesson? They gave no quarter. 
 He bore witness. He gave a glance. He could not walk 
 a step. He gave me to understand that. They gave 
 proofs of . To give and take. Whatever may happen. 
 To knock the head against the wall. Give him my regards. 
 He could not advance a step. Having shaken hands. 
 
 * These are but a few specimens. Consult Constancy's Dictionary, 
 Dar." 
 
LESSON CXVII. 
 IEREGULAE VERBS IN EK, p. 277. 
 
 Ger changes g into,/ in the first pers. sing. pres. ind. and subj. 
 
 Cer changes c into p. 
 
 Oer changes o into 6, when followed by o or a. 
 
 Perddr, changes d into c, in first pers. sing. pres. ind. and subj. 
 
 Jaz$r, makes jazo. 
 
 Abr&njo t6do o genero humlno. Doo-me de um pe*. 
 Pancadas que doam. Um eleit6r p6de dizer " eu elejo." 
 Nunca jdzo na cama depois das 6 h6ras. M6o o milho todos 
 os dias. Moam a canna de assucar la em cima. Certifico- 
 Ibe que perco n'isso. Nao perca tempo. Nao percdmos 
 minca de vista e"sta lei. Que eu nao perca e"sta occasiao. 
 Rdnjo os denies com frio. Rdnja o cao, nao me imp6rta. 
 Tdnjo a trombeta. Tanjdmos os instrumentos. Nunca 
 torfo o rosto ao inimigo. Tor$dmos as r^deas aos cavallos. 
 Perca os seus bdns. 
 
 I elect my governors. I lie in bed eight hours every night. 
 I lose time in hearing this story. That the boy may not 
 lose this opportunity. I play the usual instruments. Let 
 him not twist my meaning. Tell him not to lose time. My 
 hand pains me. Let him grind the wheat every morning. 
 Let us not lose the advantage. I gnash my teeth with fever. 
 Let the door creak on its hinges. As soon as the church 
 bell rings I shall go home. The Queen may say " I reign" 
 Tell the girl not to twist the strings of the harp. Tell him 
 to elect the most faithful deputy. Let us lie in peace till the 
 enemy disappears. Let him not lose the dollar. 
 
LESSON CXVIIL 
 CABR TO BE CONTAINED, FIT, SUIT, BE EQUAL TO, 
 
 BE THE DUTY OF, HAPPEN. 
 
 Caibo, cdbes, cabe ; cabemos, 
 
 cabeis, cabem. 
 Cabia, -as, -ia; -iainos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Cou&e, -este, -be; -emos, -estes, 
 
 -erao. 
 Coubera, -as, -a, etc. Caberei, 
 
 -as, -a. 
 Caiba, etc. Caberia, etc. Cou- 
 
 besse. 
 
 I fit, suit, etc. 
 
 I fitted, was fitting. 
 
 I fitted, did fit. 
 
 Had fitted, will fit. 
 
 May, should, might suit 
 
 O vinho no cdbe na garrafa. A gente cdbe na casa. 
 cdbe n'um h6mem de bem o mentlr. Este officio nao me 
 cdbe. Nao me cdbe aconselhar os mais v^lhos. Isto me 
 coube por s<Srte. Isso s6 cdbe ao sdbio. Nao cdbe na minha 
 penna escrever o que vos couber na boca. Creio que nem 
 no miindo todo poderiam caber os livros. Devemos obstar 
 quanto em n6s couber. Couberdo as auctoridades na casa 
 da camara. Coubera trigo nos saccos. Caberido ambos os 
 batalhoes no mesmo quartel ? C6ube-m& atalhar o maL 
 Seria b6m, se coubesse. 
 
 The wine was not contained in the bottle. Many persons 
 met in the college. It fell to my lot to be first. It does 
 not become a man of honour. So many people cannot be 
 contained in this room. This office does not suit him. The 
 pupils assembled in the school The sacks contained barley. 
 If the people cannot be contained in the cathedral, they 
 must stay outside. I inherited a house (lit. a house fell to 
 me in heirship). The greater part fell to me. He stands 
 well with the minister. If it suits. The theatre will not 
 Itold the people. It does not become me. The house will 
 not accommodate the family. 
 
( 119 ) 
 
 LESSON CXIX. 
 
 CRER TO BELIEVE. 
 
 Creio, crs, ere* ; -emos, -edes, 
 
 -em. 
 Cria, -ias, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Cri, create, cru ; cremos, cres- 
 
 tes, crerain. 
 Cr^ra, -as, -a, etc. Crerei, -ds, 
 
 -a. 
 Cr&a, -as, -a, etc. Creria, -as, 
 
 etc. Cresse, etc. 
 
 Believe, believest, believes. 
 Believed, was believing. 
 Believed, did believe. 
 Had believed, shall believe. 
 May, should, might believe. 
 
 Creio que sim. Creio que nao. u o creio. u S& que 
 cres. Creio bem. Nao o creio. Custa-me a cre-lo. Quern 
 o creria? Creio que nos podemos levantar. Os Judeus 
 nem criam em Chrlsto nem a Christo. Creio que ^ esta a 
 causa. Crer em s6nhos. Ninguem o crfa. Eu o creio. 
 Para que creiam. Crede no Evang^lho. C6mo me crereis. 
 Se tu creres, veras a g!6ria. Nao o crestes. P6dem cre-lo a 
 V. S. Crer em Christo 6 crer nelle ; crer a Christo <$ cre-lo 
 a elle. Creu Abrahao a Deus. u cri } por isso fallei. 
 Elles creram na Escriptura. 
 
 I believe. He believes. I believe so. I don't believe it. 
 I can't believe it. Who would believe that man ? I believe 
 in the Supreme. In order that you may believe. He had 
 not believed. He believed and spoke. To make themselves 
 believed. He does not believe me. I do not believe him. 
 Believing him. Having believed. If I should believe. That 
 ye may believe. Many believed in his name. That many 
 may believe. If thou believest, thou shalt see heaven. If he 
 believes. I cannot believe what he says. Some believe too 
 much, others too little. Believe me, it is not so. 
 
( 120 ) 
 
 LESSON CXX. 
 
 DIZER TO SAY, TELL, AND COMPOUNDS. 
 
 Digo, dizes, diz ; dizmos, 
 
 diseis, -em. 
 Dizia, -ias, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Disse, disse'ste, disse ; -4mos, 
 
 -e"stes, erain. 
 Dissera, -as, -a. Dirdi, -as, -a, 
 
 etc. 
 Diga, etc. Diria, etc. Dis- 
 
 Dize, ei ; se disse"r ; dizndo, 
 dito. 
 
 I say, sayest, says. 
 
 Said, was saying. 
 
 Said, did say. 
 
 Had said. Shall say. 
 
 May, should, might say. 
 
 Say ; if I say ; saying, said. 
 
 Digo que sim. Digo que nao. A lei diz. Nao digo 
 menos d'isso. Diz-se. Nao sei o que dizes. Diziam isto 
 os Judeus. Os h6mens Ihe disseram. Disse-]he Martha. 
 Dissemos. Elle diria. P6de crer o que eu Ihe digo. Dis- 
 seram-m'o. Todos o dizem. Quern Ih'o disse. Os gustos 
 condiziam com a pessoa. Nao 6 necessario dize-\o ag6ra. 
 Ninguem diga. Tornou pois elle a dizer-lhes. Nao Ihe 
 diga isso. Eu Ihe direi. Diga-lhe que entre. Z)ir-lhe-hei. 
 Qu^r dizer. Que querem dizer estas palavras? Miiito ha 
 que dizer. Para melhor dizer. 
 
 I say so. I don't say so. It is said. Everybody says so. 
 What do you say ? Did he tell it you ? I heard say. Who 
 told you ? What did he say to you ? I don't know what he 
 says. The women told him. Let no one say. Did you 
 say that? No, I did not say it. To tell you the truth. 
 Tell me frankly. I have just told you. This said, he went 
 out. If he says. Let no one say. If they say. Tell them 
 to come in. I must tell you a story. If I might tell the 
 truth. That is to say. I don't understand what you say. 
 I shall say. If I should say. He began saying. 
 
( 121 ) 
 LESSON CXXI. 
 
 FAZER DO, MAKE. 
 
 Fago, fazes, faz ; fazemos, -eis, 
 
 -em. 
 
 Fazia, -ias, -fa ; faziamos, -eis, 
 
 -am. 
 Fiz, fizeste, fz ; fizemos, -6s- 
 
 tes, -eram. 
 Fizera, -as, -a. FarM, -ds, -d, 
 
 etc. 
 Faga, -as, -a. Faria, 
 
 etc. 
 Se fizer, fazendo, feito. 
 
 I make ; makest, make. 
 Made, was making. 
 Made, did make. 
 Had made, shall make. 
 May, should, might make. 
 If I make, making, made. 
 
 Nao fdco nada. Fd$o esm61as. Nao fd$o caso disso. 
 fille fdz gue'rra. Isso nao me fdz nada. lle fazia a 
 barba. Elle fez a cama. Fizera um livro. Se elle fzer 
 diividas. Joao fdz-SQ v^lho.^ Fdz liia, vento, calor, frio. 
 mendfgo se fdz siirdo. Eu fazia-o por brincadeira. 
 que est4 feito estd feito. Fd$a-me ^ste fav6r. pre90 
 fdz-mQ medo. Fdr-me-lda, o favor. Que faremos ? Faria 
 melh6r se. Nao fdpa tdl. T6rna a fazer s61. Fdz poeira. 
 Desejo que/apa a siia fortuna. Fd$a-\he os meus compri- 
 mentos. ^a-lo-hei c6m prazer. Nao p6sso fazer isto. Teria 
 feito isto. 
 
 He gives alms. We think nothing of that. They make 
 war. He sJiaves. She will make the bed. Louisa grows 
 old. John grows proud. Do me the favour to give me. 
 Who plays the part of Cato ? The moon shines. I did it 
 for fun. They would do better, if . He will do it with 
 pleasure. The horse frightens me. Do nothing of the kind. 
 They had a good voyage. Your friend wrote a book. It is 
 cold here. He does nothing. This story does not concern 
 me. Let him do so. The beggar feigns himself blind. 
 Doing, done. 
 
( 122 ) 
 
 LESSOX CXXII. 
 LER TO READ. 
 
 L&o, -les, -le ; l&nos, ledes, 
 
 leem. 
 
 Lia, -ias, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, -fam. 
 Li, ISste, lu ; lemos, ISstes, 
 
 leram. 
 
 Lera, -as, -a, Leri, -as, -a, etc. 
 Leia, etc. Leria, etc. Lesse. 
 Le, lede. Se eu leT. Se elles 
 
 ]ssem. 
 Lendo, lido. 
 
 Read, readest, reads. 
 
 Read, or was reading. 
 Read, or did read. 
 
 Had read. Shall read. 
 May, should, might read. 
 May ; if I read ; if they should 
 
 read. 
 Reading, read. 
 
 Leio philosophfa. Leriamos. Se eu ler. Se elles lessem. 
 Como les tul Lemos. Leu o cartel? V. S. nao le bem. 
 A passagem que lia ^ra 4sta. Le ^sse Hvro. Nao sei ler. 
 Tomando o Hvro, leu. Illle tomou as cartas, e leu-as. Os 
 prophetas que cada sabbado se leem. Lerds as palavras 
 d^sta lei. Ler com s^ria attengao. Entendes o que estas 
 Undo ? Entenda o que U. Elles leram no livro da lei, e 
 o povo entendia quando se estava Undo. Leia devagar. 
 Sei ler, escrever e contar. Depois de a ler. u vos con- 
 juro que ledes e"sta carta. 
 
 I read the classics. He reads philosophy. They are 
 reading Byron. I was listening when he was reading. 
 I read the book yesterday. He has read it frequently. 
 The papers are read every day. When you have done 
 reading. Having read the letter. He received the letters 
 and read them. What is he reading? I advise you to 
 read. The king ordered him to read the proclamation. 
 Head this beautiful letter. He must read slowly. If he 
 reads well Heading the letter. After reading it. These 
 memoirs will be read and appreciated. 
 
( 123 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXIIL 
 PODER TO BE ABLE, p. 278. 
 
 Posso, p6des, pode ; pode~mos, 
 
 podeis, p6dem. 
 Podia, -fas, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Pdde, pudeste, p6de ; pudemos, 
 
 pudestes, -e"rao. 
 Pudera, -eras, -era, etc. Pode- 
 
 rei, -eras, -erd, etc. 
 Possa. Poderia. Pude*sse. 
 Se puder. 
 Pode'ndo, podido. 
 
 Can, canst, can. 
 Could, eouldst, could. 
 Could, eouldst, could. 
 Had been able, shall be able. 
 
 May, could, might be able. 
 
 If I can. 
 
 Being able, been able. 
 
 Nao posso soffrer isto. Nao posso creT. Nao posso mais. 
 O pouco que p6sso. Nao Ihe posso dizer. Ag6ra nao posso. 
 Pode s^r. Nao p6de s^r. fille nao p6de sair do quarto. Se 
 tu quires, bem me podes limpar. Podeis vos beber o calix 1 
 Como se pode isto fazer ? Ja nao podia ver. Nao se p6de. 
 Pode ser que parta amanha. Nao poderia nega-lo, ainda 
 quando quizesse. Ainda que tenhamos podido ve-los. Eu 
 nao o pude cham&r. Nao poderds ver. Quero panno que se 
 possa lavar. mais depre"ssa que puder. Sinto miiito nao 
 poder. Podera ! 
 
 He cannot believe. We cannot suffer this noise. All I 
 can. I can't at present. It can't be. Can you eat fish? 
 The thief could not deny it. The old man could not see. 
 He will not be able to write. I am sorry I can't. It can't 
 be done. Can you let me see those letters ? Can you give 
 us supper here ? May I ask you if . My brother cannot 
 leave his room. The lady could not hear. I shall be able 
 to take it. If I could not. If I were able. Being able. 
 Can one pass this way? That cannot be the case. The 
 thief could not deny the accusation. 
 
( 124 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXIV. 
 QUERER * TO WANT, WISH, p. 277. 
 
 Que*ro, quires, quer ; queremos, 
 
 quereis, querem. 
 Queria, -las, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Quiz, quizestes, quiz ; -emos, 
 
 -estes, -eram. 
 Quizera, -as, -a. Querer6i, -as, 
 
 -a. 
 Queira, quereria, quizesse. 
 
 Se quizer, querendo, querido.* 
 
 Want, wantest, wants. 
 Was wanting. 
 Wanted, did want 
 Had wanted, shall want 
 
 May want, should want, might 
 
 want. 
 If I want, wanting, wanted. 
 
 Quero um cavallo. Quero-me fr deitar. fille quer fallar 
 a V. S. due-las jiistas 1 Quero-as bem justas. Quer fazer- 
 me um favdr? Nao quer sentar-se? Quer-me escovar a 
 casdca 1 Que pap^l qi&r V. S. 1 Quizera uns sapatos. Mur- 
 miirem quanto quizerem. Quizera ter um exemplar de 
 Camoes. Seja conio quizer. Quizera que Y. M. me trocasse 
 os 6culos. Quanto quer por elle ? Queria comprar panno. 
 Querej'ia antes que fosse vrde. Dar-lhe-h^i 6utro, se quizer. 
 P6de vir quando quizer. Se e"llas quizerem vir comn6sco. 
 Como quizer. 
 
 I want a glass. He wants to go to bed. The boy at the 
 door wishes to speak to you. Will you do me a service? 
 Do you wish me to bring the horse ? What book do you 
 want ? I should like to have a cup of tea. How much do 
 you want for the book ? As you please. I will give you 
 this, if you like. I should prefer it green. If the boys wish 
 to go to Lisbon. He will not stay. Do you want beer ? I 
 should like to go, if you would take me. I should like you 
 to bring my books. He prefers the blue cloth. They may 
 come when they like. 
 
 * " Querer " sometimes means M to love," and so " querido " signifies 
 " dear " or " beloved." 
 
( 125 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXV. 
 EEQUEREE TO REQUIRE, DEMAND, PETITION. 
 
 Requeiro, requires, reque*r ; 
 
 -emos, -eis, -em. 
 Bequeria, -las, -ia; -famos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Requeri, -este, -u; -e~mos, -e"s- 
 
 tes, -e~ram. 
 Requer<h'a, -as, -a. Reque- 
 
 rerei. 
 Requeira, -as, -a. Requereria, 
 
 etc. 
 
 Require, requirest, requires. 
 Required, was requiring. 
 Required, did require. 
 Had required, shall require. 
 May, should, might require. 
 
 Requeiro o meu dir&to. Nao requeiro o pagamento. O 
 h6rnem requer de seu amigo rim fav6r. ista doenga requer 
 grande cuidddo. sta empr^sa requer miiita prudencia. Eu 
 requer ergi a vfda do h6mem da mao do ho" mem. Tiido o que 
 se furtasse, de mim o requererias. Requererei as v6ssas 
 primicias. iis-ahi se requer de n6s o seu s&ngue. Quern 
 requerSu e"stas cdusas de v6ssas maos ? Nao requer a lei para 
 me"stres de esc61a h6mens de engenho superior. Segiindo 
 requerem as circumstancias, Os advogddos requerem em 
 favor dos clientes. 
 
 I demand justice. He does not require payment to-day. 
 The boy accuses the men of theft. These diseases require 
 great care and attention. Who has required this money? 
 To demand tribute. Looking for materials. Such an under- 
 taking would require the greatest skill As the necessity of 
 the case may require. If I demand the money. Exacted 
 by superior authority. Demanding from the magistrate what 
 is due to him. She demanded from the king what was due 
 to her. This undertaking demands great perseverance. I 
 demand payment immediately. 
 
( 126 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXVI. 
 SABER TO KNOW. 
 
 Sei, sabes, sdbe ; sab&mos, sa- 
 
 be"is, sabem. 
 Sabia, -las, -ia; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iiim. 
 Soube, -este, -e ; -emos, -estes, 
 
 -eram. 
 Soubera, -as, -a. SabeTei, -as, 
 
 -a. 
 SaiUa, etc. Saberia, etc. Sou- 
 
 besse, etc. 
 Se souber. Sab^ndo. Sabido. 
 
 Know, knowest, knows. 
 
 Knew, knewest. 
 
 Knew, did know. 
 
 Had known, shall know. 
 
 May, should, might know. 
 
 If I know; knowing, known. 
 
 Nao set quasi nada. Sei ler. Sei fazr vestfdos. Ja se 
 sdbe. Com o tempo tiido se sdbe. Sale montar a cavallo 1 
 Nao sei. Sabe que h6ras sao ? Sdbe Deus. Elle sdube-o. 
 P6de-se saber ? Elle beni sdbe o que faz. Nao sdbe o seu 
 pap^l. Kao que eu sdiba. lle nao sabza d'onde Ihe vi^ra. 
 Dizemos o que sabemos. Nao ha ninguem que o nao sdiba. 
 Para sabermos o tempo. Vou tocar para saber. Para que 
 sdiba. Para que soubesses que. Se'm eu o saber. Sem elles 
 o saberem. Se ^u souber de ce*rto. Se o pai de familia 
 
 I know it. I don't know. -I know nothing new. I 
 nothing of this. Not that I know of. I don't know the 
 truth. He can swim. Can he ride 1 Can you speak Eng- 
 lish 7 I did not know that she was ill. It is not known. 
 Do you know where Mr. S. lives? Do you Tcnow what 
 o'clock it is ? We knew. I shall ring to know if breakfast 
 is ready. Without his knowing it. He says what he knows. 
 If he knew it exactly. He does not know what you mean. 
 Without our knowing it. If Henry had known. Every one 
 "knows. Not knowing the law. Let it be known. I should 
 have told you, if I had known. 
 
( 127 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXVII. 
 
 TKAZER TO BRING, BEAR, FETCH. 
 
 Bring, bringest, brings. 
 Was bringing. 
 Brought, did bring. 
 Had brought, shall bring. 
 
 Tra*go, trdzes, traz ; trazemos. 
 
 trazeis, trdzem. 
 Trazia, -ias, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -am. 
 Tr6uxe, -este, -e ; -emos, -estes, 
 
 -e"ram. 
 Trouxera, -as, -a. Trarei, -as, 
 
 -a", etc. 
 Traga, -as, -a. Traria, -as, -a, 
 
 etc. 
 Se trouxer, traz6ndo, trazido. 
 
 May bring, should bring, might 
 
 bring. 
 If I bring ; bringing ; brought. 
 
 Trdgo isto na mem6ria. Fa^a-a c6mo ag6ra se trdzem. 
 Que accusacao trazeis ? Trdz fazendas prohibidas 1 Trd- 
 ga-me. Este v^nto trdz chuva. Trouxeram os ramos. 
 Trazei tima pouca d'agua. aut6r trouxe muitos examples. 
 Henrique trazia sua descendencia dos Godos. Imp6rta que 
 eu as trdga. F6i elle e trouxe-o. Vendo o cestinho, man- 
 d6u lima das criadas trazer-lh-o. Tragdmos a Area. Qu&n- 
 do os tiv^r trazido dois dias. Trdga-nolo. Trouxe tiido? 
 Trazendo no bico um ramo. T?\ze-m'o p^ra comer. Trazei- 
 me ca vosso irmao. 
 
 He bears that in mind. Make my trousers as they are 
 now worn. The man was carrying contraband goods. That 
 wind will bring rain. The orator brought forward examples. 
 He brought them to Adam. Bring me hot water. Bring 
 us some wine. He went and brought them. If I do not 
 bring him, I will pay you fifty dollars. He will not bring 
 an accusation. Has he brought the wine 1 I ordered him 
 to bring the basket. He must bring the books. Let us 
 fetch the water. Bring it to me to drink. Bearing laurel. 
 Tell him to bring the horse. 
 
( 128 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXVIII. 
 
 VALER TO BE WORTH, AVAIL, HELP. 
 
 Valho, vales, vale ; valemos, 
 
 -eis, -em. 
 Valia, -las, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Vali, -este, -eu ; -emos, -estes, 
 
 -eram. 
 ValSra, -as, -a. Valerei, -as, 
 
 -a, etc. 
 Valha, -as. Valeria. Valesse, 
 
 etc. 
 Se valer, valendo, valida 
 
 Am worth, art , is , are * , 
 
 etc. 
 Was , wast , was . 
 
 "Was , wast , was . 
 Had been. Shall be. 
 
 May be . Should be . 
 
 Might be . 
 If I be . Being . Been . 
 
 saber nao vale na praca. Vdle mais. Valia o vinho 
 miiito. Nao vdlem cem prazeres um dos seus desgostos. A 
 terra vdle 400 slclos de prata. Pelo prego que ella vdle. 
 VdUia-me Deus ! Kao vdle a p&na. Elles se valido dos 
 meios. Tanto vales quanto has. Valer-se do frio. Deve- 
 mos valer aos desgra9ados. Valeu-me neste aperto. Se o 
 negocio valia a pena. Valei-me aos desmaios. Mais vdleis 
 v6s que miiitos passaros. A minha penna nao vdle nada. 
 Valer-se de t6dos os meios. Vdle mais um passaro na mao 
 do que dois voando. 
 
 Wit won't sell in the streets. Wine is valuable now. 
 What is that bit of land worth ? Better late than never. 
 Wine is worth a great deal now. It is not worth while to 
 go to bed. These excuses are ivorth nothing. It is really 
 good for nothing. I avail myself of my friend. It would 
 be worth a large sum of money. The house was worth 
 more than the garden. Blankets to protect us from cold. 
 These peaches are valueless. It will be valuable. I avail 
 myself of all the means. It is better. If the profit fe 
 worth the labour. That old house is not worth a sovereign. 
 
( 129 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXIX. 
 
 
 VER TO SEE. 
 
 
 Vejo, ves, ve ; vemos, vedes, 
 veem. 
 
 See, seest, sees. 
 
 
 Via, vias, via ; viamos, vieis, 
 viam. 
 
 Was seeing. 
 
 
 Vi, viste, viu ; vimos, vistes, 
 viram. 
 
 Saw, etc. 
 
 
 Vira, -as, -a, etc. Verei, -as, 
 -a, etc. 
 V6ja, -as, -a, etc. Veria, -as, 
 -a, etc. Visse, etc. 
 Se vir ; vendo, visto. Ve, vede. 
 
 Had seen. Shall see. 
 
 May see. Should see. 
 see. 
 If I see ; seeing, seen. 
 
 Might 
 
 See. 
 
 Vejo h6mens. Tu o viste. Eu o vi. Elles viram as 
 6bras. Nunca vi. Pelo que vejo. Como ve agora? Nao 
 ha que^m o veja. Sem ver ningu&n. Vi lima luz. Ja se 
 ve. Tu creste porque me viste. L6go que eu tiv^r visto. 
 Vamos vendo. Viu-se niinca cousa similhante? Vejdmos. 
 Creio que foi ver a irma. Visto* a escassez de cereaes. 
 6lla ha de estimar miiito vS-lo. A meu ver. P6de ver-se 
 h6je o museu 1 Desejo v-\os antes de partir. Veja se esta 
 em casa. Se eu o tiv^sse visto. Tenho-o visto passeiar. Ter 
 
 gosto de ver. Vae ver mundo. 
 
 I see the houses. He sees me. In order to see the city. 
 
 1 have not seen the city. So far as I see, he is honest. 
 How did you see ? Without my seeing it. Without their 
 seeing me. As soon as I have seen him, I shall go home. 
 They saw him writing. They went to see the world. I 
 shall see him. We must see them before we leave. Look 
 at my hand. If I see him not, I shall not go. I saw the 
 queen. Can the church be seen to-day] Go and see. I 
 believe the Countess has gone to see her son. I shall see 
 them to-morrow. To have seen. Seeing. 
 
 * " Visto" in the sense of "seeing" or "in consequence of." 
 
 I 
 
( 130 ) 
 LESSON CXXX. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS IN IR. 
 
 1. Gir changes g intoj in the first pers. sing. pres. ind.; fugir, 
 fujo. 
 
 2. Guir drops the w, as distinguir, distingo. 
 
 3. E\n the penultimate often becomes i; sentir, sinto. 
 4. Dormir makes d&rmoj pedir, pego; ouvir, 6u<;o; medir, 
 
 Distingo facilmente a difference Consigo o mu intento. 
 Persigo o inimfgo. Nao prosigo o argumento. Eu o sigo. 
 Siga-me. Dirijo a educagao d'este menfno. Exijo paga- 
 mento t6das as semanas. Fujo da tenta^ao. Sinto imiito. 
 Assinto as condigSes. Con&into em fazer o que me propoe. 
 Dissinto da opiniao da maioria. Presinto os perigos. Nao 
 confiro o titulo. Desfiro a espada. Nao firo ninguem. 
 Sempre preflro o cafe. Refiro este phenomeno d mgsma 
 causa. Transfiro a leitiira p^ra amanha. rei que eu 
 sirvo. 
 
 I do not distinguish colours. Dress me, if you please. I 
 follow them easily. I attain (conseguir) the same result. 
 I follmo (perseguir) the chase. I prosecute the enterprise. I 
 do not assent to the terms. I consent with reluctance. I 
 dissent from the opinions of the chamber. I foresee violent 
 revolutions. I confer the bishopric on his son. I unfurl 
 the sails. I strike him on the head. I prefer tea to coffee. 
 I refer this effect to its true cause. I postpone (transferir) 
 the meeting till Monday. The queen whom I serve is 
 Victoria. I warn the boys of the danger. I turn this water 
 into steam. I divert the youth from his studies. He says 
 that I pervert the sense. I do not subvert anything. 
 
( 131 ) 
 LESSON CXXXI. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS IN IB. 
 
 Those having u before b, d, g, I, m, p, s, in the infinitive, change 
 u into o in the second and third pers. sing, and in the third 
 plur. pres. ind.; also in the second pers. sing, of imper.: as 
 acudir, answer, kelp; bulir, move; cuspir, spit; consumir, con- 
 sume; construir, build; destruir, destroy; engullr, swallow; 
 fugir, flee; sacudir, shake; snmir, lose ; tossir, cough; subir, 
 mount, rise. 
 
 O navio acode ao le*me. Ac6des a Joao. Os cavallos 
 acodem a espora. Acode tu com a resp6sta. vnto bole 
 nos arvoredos. Nao buldmos n'fsso. As folhas bdlem com-o 
 vento. A capa c6spe a chiiva. O h6mem c6spe muito. As 
 niivens cospem raios. Uns cons6mem as n6ites em estiidos. 
 O f6go consume a llnha. imperad6r construe palacios e 
 temples. "tTma 6nda engfile a nau. !^stes p6bres engolem 
 tddas as affrdntas. F6ge o tempo. Tu foges a Hz. pe 
 me foge. ilia f6ge de mim. Os cavallos fogem. As tem- 
 pestades sacftdem as grandes drvores. 
 
 The horse answers the spur. Thou helpest Antonio. 
 Answer the bell quickly. The breeze shakes the leaves. 
 Tell him not to move in that affair. The cloud gives forth 
 rain. The philosopher consumes his nights in labour. The 
 fire consumes all things. The engineer constructs new for- 
 tresses. The spendthrift consumes (engulir) all his capital. 
 He flees from the field of battle. They flee from dangers. 
 Time flies rapidly. He shakes the branches of the tree. 
 The horses shake off the riders. The moon sets. The soldier 
 mounts the ladder. The sailors mount the mast. An idea 
 comes into (subir) my mind. 
 
( 132 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXXII. 
 
 CONDUZtR CONDUCT, CONDUCE INDUZlR, ETC. 
 
 Conduce, conduces!, conduces. 
 
 Condiizo, conduzes, condiiz ; 
 
 conduzimos, conduzis, con- 
 
 diizem. 
 Conduzia, -ias, -ia; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Conduzf,-iste,-io; -imos, -istes, 
 
 -iram. 
 Conduzira, -iras, -ira, etc. Con- 
 
 duzirgi, -as, -a, etc. 
 
 Conduced, was conducing. 
 
 Conduced, did conduce. 
 
 Had conduced. Shall conduce. 
 
 O piloto conduz o^ navlo ao porto. A die"ta condiiz muito 
 para a boa saiide. Elle me induzio a deixar a casa. A Africa 
 produz elephantes. A f6me reduzio os cercados a se darem 
 ao ininilgo. Elle induzira o rapaz em erro. Segredos per- 
 p^tuos induzem suspeita. Se 411e introduzir 4sta m6da. A 
 v^lhice nos reduz a meninos. Traduzido. Um traidor guia 
 pdz-uos um atalho para conduzir-nos a sitio 6nde estava o 
 inimigo emboscado. Esta reduzido a mendicidade. A 
 mol^stia ameaja reduzir-vos a mis^ria. 
 
 I shall lead the ship into port. Repose conduces to re- 
 covery. The boy induced his friend to steal. The island 
 produces rich fruits. I shall translate this work into Portu- 
 guese. His singular conduct excited the suspicion of his 
 friends. The man will be reduced to misery in his old age. 
 A terrible earthquake had reduced the castle to ruins. The 
 volume is translated. The guide led the soldiers into an 
 ambuscade. Hunger will make, the enemy surrender. The 
 Countess should introduce the fashion. Old age reduced him 
 to childhood. Reduced to obedience. 
 
( 133 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXXIII. 
 IR TO GO, p. 281. 
 
 V6u, vaes, vae ; vamos, ides, 
 
 vS,o. 
 
 la, las, ia ; iamos, ieis, iam. 
 Fui, foste, f6i; fomos, fostes, 
 
 f6ram. 
 
 Fora, -as, -a ; irei, iras, ira", etc. 
 Vd, -as, -a. Iria, -as, -a. Fosse. 
 Se for, indo, ido. 
 Vde. Ide. 
 
 Go, goest, goes ; go. 
 
 Was going. 
 Went ; did go. 
 
 Had gone ; shall go. 
 
 May go ; should go ; might go. 
 
 If I go, going, gone. 
 
 Go (a.). Go (pi.). 
 
 Eu vdu senh6r. Para 6nde vdes? V6u pesd-Ia. Ton 
 mostrar-lhe. lle vde ao campo. Ella vde para casa. Vd- 
 mos para nossa casa. Vdmos a cdsa de Dus. Vd ver quern 
 6. Jase/^elle? Vdmos. Elle ia adiante delles. Mo 
 iremos pelos campos. Vde com elles. Vd-se. Ao tempo 
 que ellas iam. Vde-te. Vd-se emb6ra. Vd. Quires ir 
 com 6ste h6mem? Irei. rel vos nao hd de deixar ir. 
 N6s havemos de ir. Se vie'res commigo, irei. Ide, dae as 
 n6vas a rneus irmaos pztra que vdo a Galile'a. E foi com elle 
 Simeao. A6nde fdstes ? Nao vds la. 
 
 I am going. Go and see who it is. Go and open the 
 door. When are you going ? I have to go. They will not 
 go. 'The fire does not burn well. They went home. Go 
 away. I shall go to-morrow. They are going to build a 
 bridge. Will you go? I will go. He is going to the 
 theatre. He must go. Where does the steamer go ? Do 
 not go so fast. We went immediately. Let us go down 
 directly. Shall we go before dinner? They would go, if 
 they could. They have gone. It is time to go to bed. I 
 am going to show you my watch. He ordered him to go. 
 The governor will let you go. Let us go and bathe in the 
 
( 134 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXXIV. 
 PEDiR TO ASK (A FAVOUR). 
 
 Peco, pe*des, pe"de ; pedfmos, 
 
 pedfs, pedem. 
 Pedia, -fas, -ia; iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Pedi, -iste, -io; -Imos, -istes, 
 
 -iraiiL 
 Pedira, -as, -a. Pedirei, -as, 
 
 -d, etc. 
 
 Peca. Pediria. Pedfsse. 
 Se pedir ; pedindo ; pedldo. 
 
 Ask, askest, asks. 
 Asked ; was asking. 
 Asked ; did ask. 
 Had asked ; shall ask. 
 
 May, should, might, ask. 
 If I ask ; asking ; asked. 
 
 Pef0-lhe que se assente. Pefo perdao. Pef0-lhe por 
 fav6r. Pepo-lhe que dem6re algiins dias. Pepo-lhe mil 
 perdoes. !Este neg6cio pede pnidencia. Pedimos o que se 
 nos deve. Pedi, e dar-se-vos-ha. Todo o que pede, recebe. 
 Se seu filho Ihe pedir pao. Elle Ihe prometeu que Ihe 
 daria tudo o que Ihe pedisse. Kao sabeis o que pedis. Pepo-a 
 com fe". At6 ag6ra nao pedistes nada. Pedio-m& o des- 
 culpisse pela siia condiicta. Nao hd mais que pedir. 
 pae dari bens aos que Ih'os pedirem. Pedindo-lhe alguma 
 cousa. 
 
 I beg you will not stay. He begs pardon. He asks him 
 for what is due. This business demands caution. If the 
 girl asks him for a book, he will give it her. He promises 
 that he will give all she asks. Peter will ask them for it. 
 He does not know what he asks. There is nothing more to 
 be desired. Ask it of the king, and he will give it to you. 
 He asks a favour of us now. He said, I beg pardon. Will 
 you ask him for it ? He gives to those that will ask. Ask- 
 ing. Having asked. If I should ask. They may beg 
 pardon. He will not ask. 
 
( 135 ) 
 LESSON CXXXV. 
 
 EIK TO LAUGH. 
 
 Rio, ris, ri ; rimos, rides, riem. 
 Ria, -as, -a ; -iamos, -ieis, -iam. 
 Ri, riste,riu; -imos, -istes, -iram. 
 Rira, -as, -a. Riri, -as, -a. 
 Ria. Riria. Risse. 
 Se rir, rindo, rido. 
 
 Laugh, laughest, laughs. 
 Laughed, was laughing. 
 Laughed, did laugh. 
 Had laughed. Shall laugh. 
 May laugh; should; might. 
 If I laugh; laughing; laughed. 
 
 se p6de rir da vinganca. Joao afog6u-se de rir. 
 Rimos ate" alta n6ite. Como os padres de S. R6que hao de 
 rir-se ! A clara noite se Ihe ri. Dem6crito de tudo rfa. 
 Se elle rir. Elles rirdo. Por que se riu elle? que 
 tendo ouvido Sara, se poz a rir. Eu nao me ri. Porque, te 
 riste tu? Abrahao riu-se. V6s vos rireis. A primav^ra 
 esta rindo nos jardins. As r6sas se v6m rindo delici6sas. 
 Ha tempo de chorar e tempo de rir. Ou se^ag^ste^ ou se 
 ria, nao achara descanQO. Uma v6z que bradava 
 
 He laughs continually. Laughing and talking. How he 
 will laugh at the story ! If he laughs to-day, he will cry to- 
 morrow. The flowers were smiling in the gardens. Two 
 years ago, I should have laughed with the rest. Why do 
 you laugh so immoderately ? The little boy, smiling, said to 
 his mother, "I cannot help laughing." When I heard that, 
 I began to laugh. Your old friend laughs at everything. 
 If I had seen him, I should not have laughed. We were 
 laughing when he came in. I shall laugh at you. I do not 
 laugh. They were smiling. 
 
( 136 ) 
 
 LESSON CXXXVL 
 SAHlR OR SAlR TO GO OUT, BE LIKE. 
 
 Saio, saes, sae ; saimos, sais, . Go out, goest out, goes out 
 saem. 
 
 Saia, -ias, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Sai, -iste, -iu ; -imos, -istes, 
 
 -iram. 
 
 Saira. Sairei. 
 Saia. Sairia. Saisse. 
 Se sair. Saindo. Saido. 
 
 "Was going out. 
 Went out, did go out. 
 
 Had gone out. Shall go out. 
 May. Should . Might. 
 
 May 
 Ifl-. 
 
 Going . Gone. 
 
 Sdio da esc61a. Miiitas vezes o vf sair. Sde a sdu pae. 
 Os signaes que no ce"o sdem. Saia o s61 sobre a te"rra. Nao 
 saireis das portas. Ao sair do s61. Lazaro sde para f6ra. 
 Acaba de sair. Sde da area. Saiu pois Noe". Sairam 
 todos os animaes. JEu sairei com meu pde. Saidmos f6ra 
 ao c&mpo. L6go que o rapaz se f6i, saiu David do logar 
 onde estdva. Sairam da barca. Elle ordenou que todos 
 saissem. Dize-lhe que deixe sair os filhos. Depois disto 
 sairemos. Ao sair. Elle saiu, e f 6i a urn logar dese*rto. 
 
 He comes out of school at four. They go out every day. 
 At the rising of the moon. Come forth. Mr. S. has just 
 gone out. Then John went out. He will go out with his 
 father. The queen ordered all to go out. We shall not go 
 out. Both having gone out. He is like his mother. As 
 soon as he had gone out from the presence of the king. 
 Without their leaving the house. As soon as the young 
 man had left the presence of the emperor. My friend having 
 gone out, I must stay in the house. As soon as the boy had 
 gone, I went out of the room. 
 
( 137 ) 
 
 Sirvo, serves, serve ; servimos, 
 
 servis, s^rvem. 
 Servia, -ias, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, 
 
 iam. 
 Servi, -iste, -iu ; -imos, -istes, 
 
 -irao. 
 
 Servira, -as, -a ; servirei, -as, -a. 
 Sirva ; serviria ; servisse. 
 
 LESSON CXXXYII. 
 SERViR TO SERVE. 
 
 Serve, servest, serves. 
 Was serving. 
 Served, did serve. 
 
 Se servir ; servindo, servido. 
 Serve. Servi. 
 
 Had served ; shall serve. 
 May serve ; should serve ; might 
 
 serve. 
 
 If I serve ; serving, served. 
 Go (s.). Go (pi.). 
 
 Deus de quern s6u, e a qum sirvo. D^us a quern tu 
 Jac6b serwu se"te annos. Eu sirvo a lei. Se alguem 
 me serve, siga-me. O mais velho servird ao mais m69o. 
 Os servos o serviram. Sirva-se de min sm cerem6nia. 
 Que"r que Ihe sirva um pouco ? De que serve isso ? Desejo 
 servir os meus amigos. Elle serviu na gu^rra. Sei servir a 
 mesa. Atrevo-me a pedir a. Y. S. que se sirva conceder- 
 me um momento. Poderei servir de secretario. "dTma mesa 
 bem servida. Espera que o Sr. E. se servird perdoar-lhe 
 e"sta importuniddde. 
 
 The king whom I serve. Henry served four years in the 
 army. If any one will serve me, let him follow me. Thou 
 knowest how I served thee. I am very glad to have an 
 opportunity of serving you. I hope that you may serve me 
 well. The lad can wait at table. I shall serve as guide. 
 I hope you will deign to grant me five minutes' audience. 
 I have served him four years. The table of your friend is 
 well served. Make use of me when you please. If he 
 serves. Your brother is serving in the Crimea. I am 
 always happy to serve my friends. 
 
( 138 ) 
 LESSON CXXXVIII. 
 
 SUBlR TO GO UP, RAISE, MOUNT. 
 
 Siibo, s6bes, sobe ; subimos, 
 
 subis, s6bem. 
 Subia, -las, -ia; -famos, -ieis, 
 
 -iam. 
 Subi, -iste, -iu ; -imos, -Istes, 
 
 -iram. 
 Subira, -as, -a. Subir^i, -as, 
 
 -a, etc. 
 Suba, -as, -a, etc. Subirfa, etc. 
 
 Subisse, etc. 
 
 Se subir, subindo, subido. 
 Sobe. Subi. I Go (s.). Go (pL). 
 
 Go up ; goest up, goes up. 
 
 Was going up. 
 
 Went up ; did go up. 
 
 Had gone up. Shall go up. 
 
 May. Should. Might. 
 
 If I . Going . Gone . 
 
 Subia-lhe a cor 4 face. A lua sobe, e o sol de*sce. 
 vinho sobe & cabega. Subia, o fiimo. Subindo pelo Tejo 
 acima. Nao subiu ao piilpito. J6rge Quarto subiu ao 
 throno em 1820. Subiu a um m6nte. marlnheiro subiu 
 ao topo do mastro. Qu^r subir a esta arvore ? globo 
 subiu ao ar. Subiu-lhe ao corafao o desejo de reinar. Subir ei 
 ao c^o. Subiste ao alto, tlma f^ra que s6be ao abysmo. 
 Os anjos subindo e descendo. Guardae-vos de subir ao m6nte. 
 Subirei. N ao suba todo o p6vo. Se disse"rem : " Subi para 
 ca," subdmos. 
 
 I go up the ladder. They go up the steps. He was 
 mounting the hill. The colour mounts into my face. The 
 sun was rising. That brandy gets into my head. The 
 smoke will ascend. Going up the river. The preacher had 
 not mounted the pulpit. The Emperor Alexander II. came 
 to the throne this year. I shall climb the tree. Corn rises 
 in price every day. The wine does not amount to more 
 than a dollar a bottle. The king raised the general to the 
 highest dignities. The soldier will mount the walL For- 
 tune raises some and lowers others. An idea arose in my 
 mind. He rises daily in public esteem. 
 
( 139 ) 
 LESSON CXXXIX. 
 
 VIR TO COME. 
 
 Vnho, ve"ns, vrn ; vimos, vin- 
 
 des, vem. 
 
 Vinha, -as, -a ; -amos, -eis, -ara. 
 Vina, viste, viu ; viemos, 
 
 viestes, viSram. 
 Vie'ra, -as, -a ; virdi, -as, -a, 
 
 etc. 
 Venha, -as, -a ; viria ; vie"sse, 
 
 etc. 
 
 Se vier ; vindo ; vindo. 
 Vem. Vinde. 
 
 Come, comest, comes. 
 
 Was coming. 
 Came ; did come. 
 
 Had come ; shall come. 
 
 May come ; should come ; might 
 
 come. 
 
 If I come ; coming ; come. 
 Come (s.). Come (pL). 
 
 Veriho da igreja. ce"rto que vem. Vem bem a tempo. 
 D'6nde vem V. S. ? vento vein deste lado. Nos vimos 
 canyados. V6s vindes. J\ilgo que vird. Dfzem que vSio. 
 Elle disse que viria. Na semana que vem. Venha ca. Nao 
 duvido que venha. Temo que nao venha. G6sto que viesse. 
 Em vindo a primave'ra. Temo que nao viesse. Vem a saber- 
 se. Eu s6ube que elle viera. Duvidei se elle viria. Quando 
 vier o inve"rno. Vindo a n6ite. Duvido se tera vindo. 
 L6go que vier. Se alguem vier, diga-lhe. N6s a veremos, 
 se lle vier. Vieram todos. 
 
 He comes from town. It is not certain that he comes. 
 The man came in time. The rain comes from the south. 
 I think she mil come. They came to words. They say 
 the Duke came yesterday. They said that they would come. 
 I don't doubt his coming. I fear the post will not come in 
 time. Tell him to come. They would like him to come. 
 He will come to-morrow. Next month. They came yester- 
 day. Will you come with me? I came by the steamer. 
 When they come, I will pay them. Letters came \)j the 
 steamer. I shall see them if they come in time. 
 
LESSON CXL. 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLES.* 
 
 Nao podendo viveT. 
 Emtdndo expressoes baixas. 
 A sua cabea naddndo em san- 
 
 gue. 
 
 As ov&has andam saltdndo. 
 Tratando-me pe"lo m&u nome. 
 Promette'ndo-lhQS ricas offertas. 
 
 Not being able to live. 
 Avoiding low expressions. 
 His head swimming in blood. 
 
 The sheep went leaping. 
 Addressing me by name. 
 Promising them rich gifts. 
 
 Escrevendo a algiim amigo. CommunicdndoJh'os. _ Os 
 ze"phiros respirdndo brandamente. As mulh^res estao sem- 
 pre ou fidndo, ou fazendo debiixos para as bordadiiras, ou 
 dobrdndo ricas sedas. Cupido, batendo as azas, andava 
 vodndo 4 r6da da mae. Encontrdndo-os nas margens do 
 Douro. Aff6nso, sabendo da vlnda de Iiisuf march6u a en- 
 contra-lo. As vantagens que obteria invadindo aqu^lla 
 provincia. Pedindo perdao ao c^o. Tomdndo a mao. Fic6u 
 immdvel ollidndo para o anciao. Levdndo a taja. 
 
 Regulating the administration and distributing justice. 
 Carrying the terror of its arms. Leaving this province sub- 
 dued. Saying these words. Doing this. Following the 
 windings of the stream. Making due allowance for, etc. 
 Raising the glass to the lips. The porter went running to 
 the cell. Finding him assassinated. He passed hours and 
 hours praying. In writing this book. Gaining time. Hin- 
 dering him from returning (subj.). Hearing this name. 
 Entering the house. Opening the door. The man, knowing 
 the arrival of the steamer. 
 
 * Undergo no inflection. 
 
LESSON CXLI. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLES.* 
 
 amddo Telemaco. 
 A embarcaao j& concluida. 
 Antes de subjugddos. 
 Depois de submettida a cidade. 
 A victoria obtida pelo ri. 
 
 Vencido, pediu e obteve a paz. 
 
 My beloved Telemacus. 
 
 The vessel already finished. 
 
 Before being subdued. 
 
 After the city's submission.^ 
 
 The victory obtained by the 
 king. 
 
 Conquered, he asked and ob- 
 tained peace. 
 
 A b6ca meia ab'erta, eomo que querla acabar a palavra 
 comecdda. tlma flha cercdda de mar. Tendo elle assi'm 
 fdllddo. "dma guerra felizmente termindda. L6pes se viu 
 constrangido a ir buscar um asylo. Cartas assignddas pelo 
 imperador. exercito capitaneddo por Pellissier. 111690 
 Scipiao, chamddo dep6is o Africano. Os Beberes, antes de 
 subjugddos pelos Arabes, seguiam diversas religioes. Or- 
 donho, carregddo de desp6jos, voltou a Leao. Os filhos 
 do rei fallecido. Um acontecimento inesperddo. Tochas 
 accesas. 
 
 Sebastopol surrounded by the sea. My dear friends. In 
 spite - of being well garrisoned. The hill known by the 
 name of " Mamelon Vert." The fleets laden with the spoils 
 of the world. Awake, with my eyes open, I saw Lopes 
 blood-stained. Actuated by opposite feelings. Before the 
 suppression of the monastery. With his mouth half opened, 
 he stood before the king. The conqueror, laden with spoils, 
 returned to Lisbon. Conquered, he evacuated the town. 
 The oration being concluded. He read the proclamation 
 signed by the emperor. 
 
 * When used actively as part of a compound tense, they undergo no 
 inflection. (See p. 143.) Used passively, or after the verb " to be," or 
 as adjectives, they agree in gender and number with the noun to which 
 they refer. 
 
 t Observe this singular idiom. 
 
LESSON CXLII. 
 
 FORM LIKE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Chegddo o tmpo. 
 Oonsultddos os capitSes. 
 Tornados as redeas. 
 Passddos tres nnos. 
 Faltdndo-lhe as forgas. 
 JAtas estas cousas. 
 
 The time being come. 
 The captains being asked. 
 The reins being taken. 
 Three years afterwards. 
 His strength failing. 
 These things 6ein^ sawfc 
 
 Conduida esta expedi9ao. Sabida e"sta resp6sta. 
 lima parte da guarnigao, e eaptiva 6utra, a fortaleza foi 
 reduzida a nm montao de ruinas. Obtidas n6vas vanta- 
 gens, voltou a C6rdova. Acdbddas as pr6vas piiblicas, etc. 
 Acdbdda a cafdda, voltaram ambos. Pacificddo e ordenddo 
 tiido, preparou-se para a gu^rra. Passddos qudtro dnnos, 
 lle volt6u 4 Hespanha. Feita esta ora$ao mental, o bom do 
 chancellor apag6u as diias t6chas. Tomdda a resolugao de 
 que fallei. Passddos alguns dfas. Rasgddos os vestfdos. 
 Tomdda a fortaleza. 
 
 Toledo being taken, all the chief towns fell into the 
 hands of the Saracens. Having taken the reins of govern- 
 ment. This ansicer being known, the town surrendered. 
 Some months having passed. The revolution ended, society 
 breathes again. That done, I shall return. Wliich being 
 heard, Joseph wept. Dinner ordered one day. At last, 
 after four days, we left Semis. His clothes being torn in 
 the battle, he fled naked from the field. New victories 
 being gained, he mounted the throne. The war 
 finislied, the army came home. 
 
( H3 ) 
 LESSON CXLIIL 
 
 PARTICIPLES USED ACTIVELY. 
 
 Acreditddo* agradecido. 
 Canpddo, confiddo. 
 Homem cangddo. 
 Cansadas escadas. 
 Esquecido, experimentddo. 
 Divertido, suffocado. 
 Felto isto, acabada a c6ia.t 
 
 Having believed, thanked. 
 Having tired, trusted. 
 A man who tires is tired. 
 Fatiguing staircases. 
 Forgetful, experienced. 
 Amusing, suffocating. 
 Having done this, supper ended. 
 
 Animo agradeczdo. Palavras agradecidas. H6mem atre- 
 vido no mar. soldado arriscddo. Um h6mem calddo. 
 As cancddas escadas. Elle, conhecido da sua ciilpa. H6mem 
 comiderddo no que faz. Muito forte e determinddo a soffrer. 
 Um ge"nio dissimulddo. s^u amigo 6 h6mem bem enten- 
 dido. As fingidas gentes. Elles ^ram lidos e versados nas 
 Escriptiiras. Um animo ousddo. E t6do parecido com s^u 
 pae. E presumido da siia sciencia. A idade vae-me faz^ndo 
 esquecido. Durante h6ras esqueddas. 
 
 A grateful soul. A soldier daring in battle. The man 
 that tires. The sailor rushing into danger. The fatiguing 
 march. They, aware of their faults. This is a man who 
 considers things. Determined to die, he left the house. A 
 spirit prone to deceive. He has a daring mind. She is like 
 her mother. An amusing piece. These suffocating nights 
 of summer. The word of an experienced man. A well-read 
 man. The new comedy is very amusing. Tried fidelity. 
 Words thanking. He was a silent man, but a daring soldier. 
 She is very like her father. 
 
 * Many of these adjectives are used both actively and passively, 
 e.g., " Homem canqddo" might mean a tired man or a tiresome man, 
 but in this sense seldom used. 
 
 t " Having done this " is often rendered passively, as if " This 
 being done." 
 
( 144 ) 
 LESSOX CXLIV. 
 
 PARTICIPLES USED PASSIVELY. 
 
 Urn homera ferido. 
 
 Uma mulher/erlda. 
 
 Homens feridos, mulhe'res feri- 
 
 das. 
 Os soldados, que tnho aqui 
 
 feridos.* 
 
 Os soldados que te"nho ferido* 
 Acreditddo, agradecido. 
 Canpddo, confiddo. 
 
 A wounded man. 
 
 A wounded woman. 
 
 Wounded men, wounded wo- 
 men. 
 
 The wounded soldiers I have 
 here. 
 
 The soldiers I have wounded. 
 
 Being believed, thanked. 
 
 Being tired, bold. 
 
 Logar povoddo. Campos semeddos. beneffcio agra- 
 decido. tlma empresa arriscdda. tlma n6ite caldda. Re- 
 cebi lima resp6sta determindda. l!Tma m6rte dissimuldda. 
 ti"ma 6bra bem entendida. Lagrimas fingidas. T^ma es- 
 posa rica e bem parecida. territ6rio cercddo pelo oceano. 
 A por9io Tiabitdda pelos Ce"lticos. As forfas capitawddas 
 por Scipiao, chamddo depois o Africano. Deixando subfu- 
 gdda 6sta provincia. A adiantdda conqufsta. Urn illimitddo 
 poder. resultddo d'fsto. Os proscrvptos. S6 os eruditos 
 sabiam. 
 
 Populous places. Kindnesses appreciated. A bold un- 
 dertaking. A silent wood. He sent me a decisive reply. 
 A feigned illness. A building well planned. Situated on 
 the verge of Europe and defended by the Pyrenees. Beasts 
 accustomed to carnage. The facts contained in this letter. 
 He returned, accompanied by a friend, a person already 
 known to the reader. The rector half asleep. The inhabi- 
 tants tired of suffering. A battle gained. Persons reputed 
 happy. The emperor has unlimited power. Be kind 
 enough to send a definite answer. 
 
 * The great difference is produced by feridoe agreeing with iddados. 
 The Portuguese does not follow the French syntax in such forms as " La 
 lettre que j'ai e"crite." 
 
( 145 ) 
 LESSON CXLV. 
 
 PARTICIPLES WITH T&R E HAV&R. 
 
 Tnhp ouvido fallar de 
 Depois de o te"rmos comprddo. 
 T6nho escripto lima carta. 
 Os soldados que tenho ferido.* 
 Tern caido muita chuva. 
 Tern havido muitos naufragios. 
 
 I have heard speak of 
 
 After our having bought it. 
 
 I have written a letter. 
 
 The soldiers I have wounded. 
 
 Much rain has fallen. 
 
 There have been many wrecks. 
 
 Tenho acdbddo a Ii9ao. lla havia acdhddo a tar^fa. 
 Dep6is de haver dado varias instrucgoes. Elle tinha estu- 
 dddo na siia infancia. Tendo completes cem annos. Os 
 Romanes tinhao sujeitddo tudo. Scipiao se gabdva de nao 
 t^r deixddo um s6 Carthaginez na Hespanha. Elle tem-se 
 envolvido naqu^lle neg6cio. Os dois tinham obedecldo. 
 Elle havia-se assentddo n'uma grande p^dra. Elle tinha 
 adquirido a experiencia. que tinha visto e ouvido tinha- 
 Ihe ensinddo a moderar os seus desejos. Tenho-lhe escripto 
 miiitas cartas. 
 
 He has finished the lesson. The boy has completed his 
 task. After having studied the Latin language. I had 
 written four letters. What they had seen and heard had 
 taught them to moderate their desires. They have not 
 acquired fame. The youth had subdued his will to reason. 
 He had involved himself in difficulties. To have given many 
 years to business. He has not left a single enemy. The 
 general had not acquired experience. The troops had not 
 obeyed. The boy had studied geography for years. I have 
 written three letters in Portuguese. 
 
 * The participle in a relative clause does not agree with the noun 
 to which it relates, unless it actually qualifies that noun. The Por- 
 tuguese differs from the French rule as to the past participle. (See p. 
 147.) 
 
 K 
 
( 146 ) 
 LESSON CXLVI. 
 
 PARTICIPLES WITH Sf!R, EST^R, E FIClR.* 
 
 Sou amado, amdda. 
 Soinos amados, amddas. 
 Estou ferido, ferida. 
 Esta~mos feridos, feridas. 
 Fico-lhe miiito obrigddo, a. 
 Fic^mos-lhe agradecidos, as. 
 
 I am loved. 
 We are loved 
 I am wounded. 
 We are wounded. 
 I am much obliged. 
 We are much obliged. 
 
 Sou avisddo. Sou avisdda. Est6u convencida. Ssras 
 chamddo. Serlam chamddos. lle teria sido chamddo. 
 Era, emfim, chegddo o tempo. As accusagoes sao exagerddas. 
 A lingua Latina ra ensindda por bons metres. A Penin- 
 sula estive'ra dividida em diias grandes provincias. Elles 
 eram considerddos como auxilidres. Estd indigndda. Estou 
 convidddo. Estou constipddo. Ficou miiito sentido com as 
 n6vas. Os montanhezes resistiram, mas o resultddo foi o 
 serem exterminddos. Ella ficava convencida. Eu estava 
 junto com elle. A lingua Portugueza 6 derivdda da Latina, 
 
 They are informed. The soldier is wounded. I was 
 called. The men were called. The women were called. 
 She had been called. The time was come. The Portuguese 
 language was taught in England. England had been divided. 
 Occupations in which I am involved. The business is con- 
 cluded. Hugo was killed in battle. His scruples had been 
 completely removed. His last words were uttered in a firm 
 tone. The sad distinction of being feared and hated. Being 
 asked by the king. I was convinced. He was considered as 
 a friend. I was invited. 
 
 * After these verbs, and all passive forms, the participle agrees as an 
 adjective with the subject of the verb. But the participle, when 
 auxiliary, is not inflected, e.g., "^llla tern sido amdda." 
 
LESSON CXLVII. 
 
 IRREGULAR PARTICIPLES USED ACTIVELY. 
 
 Tenho escripto lima carta. 
 (Tenho lima carta escripta.) 
 filles teem gdstado dinhelro. 
 Tenho pdgo o trabalho. 
 Havia ganhddo experiencia. 
 Tenho ab&rto as cartas. 
 Tenho as cartas ab&rtas. 
 
 I have written a letter. 
 (I have a letter written.} 
 They have spent money. 
 I have paid the work. 
 He had gained experience. 
 I have opened the letters. 
 I have the letters open. 
 
 Depois de ter entregue a fortaleza. Os deputados que 
 tinhao eleito. Tendo escripto miiitos livros. Tendo-se 
 entregue com ferv6r ao estiido. Simao nao tinha ganhddo 
 miiito no commercio que fazla. Entregue a severidade da 
 siia justiga. A peste tern mdrto miiita gente. ifella tinha 
 coberto a mesa com panno. meu amfgo tinha descrvpto a 
 viagem. Elle tern desfeito as pazes. portador tinha 
 entregue a carta. filles tinham envdlto as maos no p^nno. 
 Tenho gastddo miiito cabedal. Tdndo aceito ^ste officio. 
 
 He has written two letters. I have paid the shoemaker. 
 After having given up the fortress, he was put to death. 
 The yellow fever has destroyed many people at Rio. The 
 governor had expended the capital and interest. The poor 
 old man had not gained much in the trade to India. The 
 taking of Sebastopol has opened the eyes of the Emperor. I 
 have a letter written, but not sealed. Your friend has de- 
 scribed the voyage. After having gained a large fortune 
 in India, he returned to England. He had spent immense 
 sums. The cholera destroyed many thousands in Madeira 
 in 1856. 
 
( 148 ) 
 LESSON CXLVIII. 
 
 IRREGULARS IN AR. 
 
 C^uando a cdrta foi entregue. 
 Animo, coracao, piilso quieto. 
 O doente esta salvo. 
 Um rio sScco. tf ma pessoa se- 
 
 gura. 
 S6Uo de lingua. Sujeito a li. 
 
 When the letter was delivered. 
 Quiet mind, heart, pulse. 
 The patient is safe (saved). 
 A dry river. A safe person. 
 
 Loose- tongued. Subject to law. 
 
 Oracao, 6bra de Deus mui aceita. Cora^oes bem affedos. 
 $ma dignidade annexa a siia familia. tlma alma captiva. 
 Luz dispersa. Estou entregue da carta. Olhos enxutos. 
 Saiu por uma p6rta escusa. Um mandado expresso. Fdrto 
 de corner. Um h6meni fdrto de honras. Terras ignotas. 
 Hypocrisia sempre infesta a virtude. mar inquieto. Elle 
 6 isento de ir A gue'rra. Pastos juntos deste rio. Um espfrito 
 inquieto. j^gua limpa. Verdades manifestos. Morto de 
 medo. tlma c6r mixta.* tlma planta murcha. Designios 
 occultos. As dividas pdgas. 
 
 An accepted gifi A bishop expelled from his see. That 
 land is exempt. A dry purse is empty. In an unused room. 
 An unknown person. A climate hurtful to the health. By 
 express words. Exempt from his jurisdiction. The garden 
 joined to our house. Pure wheat. Dead with fatigue. 
 Mixed colours. These faded flowers. Hidden thoughts. 
 Troops paid. A loose life. Suspected of murder. The 
 wandering pilgrim. The poor man safe. I went out by a 
 forgotten door. An unquiet mind. Almsgiving is a work 
 acceptable to God. A few pages annexed to the book. 
 
 * Meesta. 
 
LESSON CXLIX. 
 
 IRREGULARS IN ER. 
 
 A bsolved of crimes. 
 Absolute dominion. 
 Corrupted, corrupt. 
 Involved ; involved, mixed. 
 Incurred ; subject to. 
 Well or ill thought of. 
 
 Absolto, absolvido de crimes. 
 Dominio absolute. 
 Corrompido, corrupto. 
 Jfnvolvido, envdlto. 
 Incorrido, incurso. 
 Bern ou mal qufoto. 
 
 Evora f6i feita capital da Lusitania. lle devfa se"r 06- 
 solto. Em absoluta desdrdem. Miii attento criado. H6mem 
 convicto de calumnia. mundo esta corrupto. Arvore 
 defendida. Armas defezas. Elle tern escolhido um logar. 
 Envolvido naquella accusa9ao. Hist6rias envoltas em fabulas. 
 Envdlto em tr^vas. Os artfgos contidos nas f61has. Um 
 serniao extenso. Tenho incorrido em ciilpa. Incurso na pena. 
 Tern morrido muita gente de f 6me. tlma planta m6rta. Um 
 h6mem perverso. tlma gente pervertida. Est6u preso n^sta 
 cama. H6mens resolutos. 
 
 Absolved of sin. Absolute lord. Very obedient servant. 
 He was convicted of theft. The minister is corrupt. The 
 forbidden garden. They have chosen a house. A serpent 
 involved in nets. He has incurred punishment. Many 
 people have died of fever. Dead water. He has killed the 
 enemy. A depraved man. An abandoned population. A 
 sheep caught by the wolf. A man resolute in business. 
 Suspended in the air. Her loose hair. A , soul absorbed in 
 sorrow. They had defensive arms. He was made chief of 
 the robbers. A pool of stagnant water. 
 
Aberto. 
 
 Extinguido, extincto. 
 Incluido, induso. 
 Dirtgido, dirJcto. 
 Resolvido resoluto. 
 
 ( 150 ) 
 LESSON CL. 
 
 IRREGULARS IN IR. 
 Open. 
 
 Extinguished, extinct. 
 Included, inclosed. 
 Directed, direct. 
 Resolved, resolute. 
 
 O ar aberto. Gue*rra dberta. Ferldas abertas. Estou 
 abstrdcto. Ide"as dbstrdctas. Estou afflicto. corpo coberto 
 de pennas. Nofoes confusas. Um estylo diffuse. Um 
 exe'rcito diffuse. l^ma contradicgao directa. Em casas 
 distinctas. Uma v6z distincta. Diz C^sar que a Gallia ^ 
 dividida em tr^s partes. tlma igreja erecta aqui. tlma 
 fonte exhdtista de agua. Nunca extincto sera seu n6me. 
 Chamma extinguida. Incluido no niimero. Uma carta 
 inclusa em 6utra, Elle tlnha aberto a p6rta. feta vai in- 
 dusa na siia. 
 
 The open sea. Open ears. He is absent in mind. They 
 are afflicted. The sky covered with clouds. A diffuse dis- 
 course. Ideas distinct. A body exhausted of blood. I have 
 interrupted the relations. Our relations are interrupted. 
 He has oppressed me with calumnies. He was oppressed 
 with grief. He is much afflicted. They have confused 
 notions of the subject. That orator has a very distinct voice. 
 He was included in the number of the victims. Several 
 churches were erected here last year, Ireland is divided into 
 four provinces. 
 
LESSON CLI. 
 
 PERSONAL INFINITIVE. 
 
 Deixe-os divertir. 
 
 Para se preservdrem. 
 
 filles, depois de terem assolado. 
 
 No cdso de voltdrmos. 
 
 Antes de $u sair da prisao. 
 
 Para sabermos quern era. 
 
 Let them amuse themselves. 
 In order to preserve themselves. 
 They, after having destroyed. 
 In case of our returning. 
 Before my going out of. 
 In order that we may know who. 
 
 N6s s6 o conhecmos para chordrmos a sua falta, e muitos 
 desejavam ser sepultados juntainente com elle. Sem irmos 
 buscar 6utra cousa. Todas as nymphas em silencio se in- 
 clinavam a prestar ouvidos a Tele"maco, e faziam lima 
 esp^cie de meio circulo para melh6r o escutdrem, e para 
 melh6r o verem. Depois de termos admirado este especta- 
 culo. A vingansa Iev6u-os a buscdrem a alliana dos 
 Christaos. Os Mosarabes esqueciam a siia lingua para 
 s6 falldrem o arabe. Para os alumnos adquirirem um co- 
 nhecim^nto. 
 
 Vanities which are far from having the value which is 
 attributed to them. Hence arises the necessity of our 
 describing. Toledo on the approach of the enemy opened 
 its gates. The inhabitants lost all hope of their being 
 able to resist. On the approach of the Saracens. It was 
 the residence of the sultans before their talcing Constanti- 
 nople. The Saxons forced the Britons to retire. A few 
 hours before my going out of prison. He obliged them to 
 work gratuitously. After paying the bill, we set out. In 
 case of her returning. 
 
( 152 ) 
 LESSON CLIL 
 
 PECULIARITIES OF INFINITIVE. 
 
 Muito valorise pdra temr a 
 
 morte. 
 
 Bdsta um so vicio p&ra 
 N&o tnto pdra temdr. 
 A pdnto de passdr por. 
 sSrdes invejddos. 
 rne^rno que dizSr que. 
 
 Too brave to fear death. 
 
 One vice is enough to 
 Not so much to be feared. 
 So much so as to be taken for. 
 Your being envied. 
 The same as to say that. 
 
 Muito pio pdra encontrdr a m6rte com horror. Bdsta 
 um s6 vicio pdra fazer iniiteis muitas virtiides. A m6rte 
 nao e" tanto pdra temer como os prazeres. Depende uni- 
 camente da v6ssa vontade o serdes invejados em vez de 
 invej6sos. Assds poder6so pdra produzir. Creador, 
 ao formd-lo . Qualquer nao preclsa senao de se recolher 
 em si mesmo pdra se convened de, etc. Um me"ro ou- 
 vir-dizer. A verdade 6 perigosa de dizer-se e desagra- 
 ddvel de ouvir-se. pensamento 6 mui limitado^ra os 
 comprehender. 
 
 Words are too weak to tell my woe. It is too deep for 
 you to find. This expedient is powerful enough to produce 
 the best results. To conquer such an enemy the militia 
 is sufficient. He was on the point of losing his sight. It 
 is enough to enable us to make. Death is not so much to 
 be feared as dishonour. His being envied was the cause of 
 his death. The old general was too brave to fear death. 
 The steam was not sufficient to work the ship. One leak is 
 enough to sink the steamer. The language is easy enough 
 to be learned by the studious. 
 
( 153 ) 
 LESSON CLIII. 
 
 PECULIARITIES OF INFINITIVE. 
 
 Pass&i boras a chamdr. 
 Umfalldr de ventriloquo. 
 Bile ria a bom rir. 
 Dar de corner. 
 Acho que ceiisurdr. 
 Bastihite pdra saber que, etc. 
 
 I passed hours in calling. 
 A speech of the ventriloquist. 
 He laughed with all his might. 
 To give something to eat. 
 I find something to blame. 
 Enough to know that, etc. 
 
 Diias (Tessas horas passei-as a chamdr * ao Senhor que . 
 Estava all urn rapaz a chordr. E pdra louvdr a Deus ! 
 Estava a chov&r. Esta um ca!6r de matdr. Os ba^nhos sao 
 mui pequSnos pdra se poder nadar. Nao 6 seu filho que 
 vejo ale"m a jogar? Comega por perder o seu dinheiro. L4 
 estA a siia filha a ouvir um aventureiro. Ou90 later. P^tra 
 viver socegddo. No men entend^r. Era pdra ver e^te ajun- 
 tamento de rapazes ! A agua estd a ferver ? A saber isso. 
 A ser assim. Anda a mdis anddr. Ao mSu iidr. At^ nao 
 poder mdis. 
 
 It is a heat enough to Ml you. He began by eating 
 oranges. In order to live quietly, we must go to the country. 
 In my opinion the weather is too hot for walking. It was 
 a sight to see such a gathering of troops. The poor girl stood 
 weeping in the street. The old soldier laughed with all his 
 might. I see a boy playing in the garden. It is not in my 
 power. Is the water boiling 9 He spent four hours calling 
 on God. I hear some one knocking at the window. He 
 rode at full speed. There is an old sailor begging in the 
 lane. The room is too small for dancing in. 
 
 * Or " clauiar." 
 
LESSON CLIV. 
 
 PARA WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 Para viveT socegddo. 
 Quartos para alugar. 
 Juizo bastante para saber. 
 Para Ihe dizer a verddde. 
 (,)avallos para vender. 
 Era para ver 1 
 
 In order to live retired. 
 
 Rooms to let. 
 
 Sense enough to know. 
 
 To tell you the truth. 
 
 Horses for sale. 
 
 It was a sight to see ! 
 
 Estmos n6s aqui para beber on pdra comer ? Para, la 
 irmos e*ra miste'r passarmos por Dijon. Pdra prevenir a 
 indigestao. lle acha dinheiro pdra jogdr. Basta um s6 
 vicio pdra fazfr iniiteis miiitas virtiides. Ficaremos pdra 
 ver a danga ? Quer ficar pdra jantdr commigo ? Vou contar 
 pdra ver se esta todo. V ... aliiga livros pdra ler ? Vou 
 tocar pdra saber. Os abysmos abriam-se pdra as receberem. 
 Elle nos da azas pdra vodrmos. Os auxflios necessarios pdra 
 um Inglez poder escrever em Franc^z. JElle grlta pdra eu 
 pardr. Pdra eu ir. 
 
 In order to be seen. He has less reason to murmur. To 
 offend no one. Is it not astonishing ? That we may go 
 safely, it is necessary to start soon. It were much to be 
 desired that . How much will it cost me to go by the 
 steamer? A single instance will serve to show. I shall stay 
 to see the siege. The boat was ready to receive them. The 
 articles needed for a Dutchman to write Greek. Will you 
 remain to dinner with us 1 He gave us legs to walk. We 
 were about to sail. I have horses to sell. She has rooms 
 to let. 
 
LESSON CLV. 
 
 FOR WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 For ser bom. 
 
 For Ihe nao ttr sido possivel. 
 Esta por pagdr. 
 Qudrtos por mobildr. 
 Quanto se paga por franquear ] 
 Sentenciado a morte por ha- 
 vfa 
 
 On account of its being good. 
 As it was out of his power. 
 It remains to be paid. 
 Unfurnished rooms. 
 How much is paid /or, etc. 
 Sentenced to death for hav- 
 ing 
 
 Vimos um rapaz com a razao totalmente perturbada por 
 haver bebido em demasia. Nao tard6u miiito em ser casti- 
 gddo por se haver esque'cfdo tanto do que devia a seus pdes. 
 Esta por escrever. Tudo isto por nao ter reflectido nas 
 consequencias. Don grafas aos deuses por m'o haverem 
 dado. Elles saiam goz6sos por terem sfdo * achddos dignos 
 de soffr^r. Por ser Francez. Elle gasta o tempo por nao 
 saber c6mo o occupar melh6r. Por Ihe nao ser tao facil. 
 Por assim dizer. A gente ficou encantada por elle haver 
 chegado. 
 
 On account of its being old. Punished for having de- 
 serted the army. He was blamed for having forgotten the 
 letter. From its being more difficult for me. So to say. 
 The work remained unfinished. In consequence of having 
 left the army without leave. Because of his being bad. 
 This little account is unpaid. How much must I pay for 
 sending a letter to Setiibal ? He has unfurnished rooms in 
 his house. On account of being a Spaniard. He wastes his 
 money from not knowing how to spend it. It remains to be 
 written. From his having been much occupied. 
 
 * See note, p. 146. 
 
( 156 ) 
 
 LESSON CLYI. 
 
 VERBS IN THE NEGATIVE FORM.* 
 
 Ndo faltarM. 
 Ndo ha diivida. 
 Ndo me t6que. 
 Nfinca ouvi dizer. 
 Eu ndo disse ndda. 
 Ndo diga nem palavra. 
 
 I will not fail. 
 There is no doubt. 
 Do not touch me. 
 I never heard it. 
 I said nothing. 
 Say not a word. 
 
 Ndo quero. Ndo e verdade. Ndo posso beber mais. 
 Ndo se m6va d'ahi. A senh6ra ndo m'o disse. Ndo o 
 crUo. fille ndo me disse nada. Ndo Ihes direi. Ndo fdqa 
 bulha. Ndo o entendo. Ndo sei nada d'fsso. Ndo que 
 eu sdiba. Ndo os corihfyo. V. ndo aprSnde ndda. fille 
 ndo pronuncia bem. Se V. tern tengao de me dar algiimas 
 cartas, te"nha a bonddde de as ndo fechdr. Ndo importa. 
 Ndo gosto d'isto. Ndo fdlle n'isso. Ndo ha pao. Ndo 
 cdme nada. Ndo me Umbro bem d'fsso. Ndo se esque$a. 
 Eu ndo optnso. Parece-me que ndo. 
 
 This knife does not cut well. This dollar is not good I 
 have no change. Don't lose time. I c&nnot stay. There 
 is no water. I do not know them. He does not know me. 
 I suppose not. I think not. I do not believe it. It cannot 
 be true. That cannot be. There is nothing more probable. 
 I canwo write more. I am not surprised. There is no 
 news. I cannot stay. I do not complain. Do you want 
 nothing more? I never let the rooms for less than two 
 guineas a week. The monk said nothing. The man said 
 nothing. Have the kindness not to give it to him. 
 
 * Observe : 1. That the negative almost always begins the sen- 
 tence. 2. That in compound negatives (nao-nada) " nao " precedes and 
 " ndda " follows the verb. 3. That a negative makes the pronoun (in 
 the accusative) precede the verb. 
 
LESSON CLVII. 
 
 VERBS IN THE INTERROGATIVE.* 
 
 Que destja V. S. ? 
 
 Ja acabdu ? 
 
 V. S. entendtu-o ? 
 
 Que Ihe partfce ? 
 
 Ja se foi o se" u me"stre ? 
 
 fille cte-lh'o ? 
 
 What do you wish for ? 
 
 ou 
 
 Did you understand him ? 
 What do you ftw& ? 
 Is your master gone ? 
 Did he feH it you ? 
 
 Quein e que duvida ? que se Aa de fazer ? Com quern 
 fdtta V. SJ /S^e falldr Francez? Que Ihe fdlta? Que 
 bulha se fdz all? P6^e-se-lhe perguntar? Ja almopou? 
 Gdsta do molho ? Qwer um osso 1 Jantou bem ? Qual e a 
 sua ligao ? Quer vir commigo ? jEJs^( canfado ? 7^ calor ? 
 6uve-o dar h6ras ? Jdnta-se a b6rdo do paquete ? Em que 
 rua e? Quanto devo pagar por isto? Entende-me bem? 
 Quer tr a bondade de Ihe fallar ? Quanto temos andddo ? 
 Estao feitas as camas? Quanto se deve? T6ma cha, ou 
 cafe? 
 
 Is it cold ? What o'clock is it ? How much do you ask 
 a week ? Where does Mr. Jones live ? Who knocks at the 
 door? Will you spea& with me? Are the boys gone? 
 Have you cfo'wec? ? Do you ta&e beer or wine ? What time 
 do we dine to-day ? Have you ham ? /S%aW we have fish ? 
 Wi7/ you have soup ? Z)o you drink wine ? Caw I offer you 
 some chicken ? Have you dewed well ? Do you fo'&e beef ? 
 Can you sj?ea& Portuguese ? Do you understand her ? 
 you beer ? Are the beds made ? Which is my book ? 
 you have cheese ? 
 
 * There is no peculiar form in Portuguese, as in English. "Jd 
 acabdu " means " Have you done ? " or " You have done," according to 
 the tone and manner of the speaker. 
 
( 158 ) 
 
 LESSOR CLYIII. 
 
 VERBS IN THE NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE. 
 
 V. S. ndo o disse ? 
 Por que ndo responde ? 
 V. S. ndo me entende ? 
 Ndo falla Francez ? 
 Nao charmarSi eu ? 
 EscreVe-lhe V. S., ndo e assim?* 
 
 Did you not say it ? 
 
 Why do you not reply ? 
 
 Do you not understand me ? 
 
 Zton'tf you speak French ? 
 
 Shall I not calif 
 
 You write to him, don't you ? 
 
 Ndo ha ninguem que pense em dar lima n6va edi^ao? 
 Ndo receias que Mentdr peleje por teres vlndo a cdga ? Os 
 seus amfgos ndo o t6em abandonddo ? Ndo quer assentdr- 
 se 1 Ndo teriam sido bons soldados *? V ... ndo o entende ? 
 Ainda ndo acabdu? V. M. ndo o entende? Ndo o co- 
 w7iec<2 ? Os Senh6res ndo quer em cear ? Por que ndo fdi V. 
 M. ? Por que Tzao esperdu pela resposta ? Por que me ndo 
 trduxe o cavallo ? -ZVoo seria melh6r que. . . . Ndo 6uve o 
 que estou dizendo 1 Ndo Ihe hei de dar o dinheiro ? 
 ww o rel ? 
 
 Why c?o you not go ? Witt you not dine with me 1 Do 
 you w0 speaA: Spanish 1 Does he wotf understand Portuguese ? 
 Z>o you not wish to have breakfast ? Z)/c? rco the soldiers 
 abandon him ? jBas the pupil not yet finished the lesson ? 
 7s wo one at home to-day ? TT^7Z not the gentlemen swp here 
 to-night? Do you not fear? Why do you wo/ s^>ea& Eng- 
 lish with these gentlemen ? Have you TW? breakfasted yet ? 
 Do you wo understand me? /SftaZZ I rco ca?Z the boy? 
 Have not his friends understood him ? TForcY you sit down ? 
 I not pay the money ? /S/iaZZ I wo/ ^o to Paris ? 
 
 * Used liked the French " n'est-ce pas ? " or the German " nicht 
 wahr ? " 
 
( 159 ) 
 LESSON CLIX. 
 
 VERBS IN THE AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Abra a porta. 
 Fdlle sempre Portuguz. 
 Veja qu&ntas horas sao. 
 Nao vd tao depressa. 
 Ndo diga n6m palavra. 
 Nao me fdlte. 
 
 Open the door. 
 
 Always speak Portuguese. 
 
 See what o'clock it is. 
 
 Don't go so fast. 
 
 Say not a word. 
 
 Do not disappoint me. 
 
 Nao me toque. Leia de vagar. Venha d'aquf a p6uco. 
 Vd tocar guitarra. Nao terika receio. Mesjponda-mG. Nao 
 fd$a bulha. Nao se aqufya. Diga-me de que gosta. Ndo 
 me de m4is do que metade d'isso. Trdga outra colh^r. Nao 
 o pdupe. F"a-me buscar um. Leve ^sta carta ao correio. 
 Nao perca tempo. Fd$a f av6r de me mostrar. Nao fdlte a 
 sua palavra. Nao apdgue a luz. S6pre o lume. Espere um 
 pouco. Nao tenha siisto. Nao digdes a pessoa alguma o que 
 vfstes. Nao sejas ligeiro. Nao te associes com quern nao 
 conh^ces. 
 
 Be kind enough to tell me. Ask if Mr. J. is better. 
 Don't go so slowly. Bring hot plates. Go and get me some 
 fresh pears. Don't make so much noise in the kitchen. 
 Deliver this letter as soon as possible. Do not lose time. 
 Do me the favour to lend me a penknife. See what o'clock 
 it is, if you please. Go and fetch my gloves. Bring lights 
 and more wood. Let me know to-morrow. Put the saddle 
 farther back. Tell him that I am ill. Tell the servant not 
 to come. Take the horse to the stable. Don't let him drink. 
 Don't lose a moment. Don't speak to him. Do not stay. 
 
( 160 ) 
 LESSON CLX. 
 
 SUBORDINATION OF TENSES PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Creio que ha um so Deus. 
 Conhfyo quanto de" vo. 
 CrSio que a chamou Deus. 
 Creio que ficarei com ste. 
 Estou certo que nao tardara, 
 Que quer que Ihe offere^a 1 
 
 I believe there is one God, 
 I know how much I owe. 
 I believe that God called her. 
 I think I shall take this. 
 I am certain he will not stay. 
 What shall I offer you ? 
 
 Sao J6gos que peMem um exercicio continue. Farece-me 
 que estas condicoes sao moderadas. Creio que a cama e b6a. 
 Faz amanha um anno que nao te vejo, que nao ougo a tua 
 voz. Espero que ouvira. Rogo a V. S. que me faga saber. 
 Nao sei que diga. 6uves o que te dlgo ? Bern ve que nao 
 falta nada. Nao se sdbe quando saira. V. S. sdbe que o 
 niogo esta em casa. jRoao-lhe queira dar-me. Ore que v 
 tudo, e nada conhece. Elle sdbe que sou lima boa fr^gueza. 
 Digo que elle faz bem. Digo que elle tern f ^ito bem. Teriho 
 dito que Deus 6 justo. 
 
 The general opinion is that they were Italians. You 
 know where I live. I think we shall have rain. I say that 
 he was doing well. I say that he will do well. I say that 
 he would have done well. He says I play. I hope there 
 will be much fruit. I know well how much I owe you. I 
 said that God is just. I shall say that he is innocent I 
 was saying that my son is unwell. They say that John has 
 arrived. I know that he is coming. Dost thou believe 
 Divine justice sleeps ? The wicked man lies when he says 
 that he hopes. 
 
LESSON CLXI. 
 
 IMPERFECT* AND ITS SUBORDINATES. 
 
 Dizfa eu que elle e bom. 
 Estimdva que viesses. 
 Nao sabla que horas eram. 
 
 Estimdva que V. S. tivesse 
 
 vindo. 
 Ella julgdva que elle tfnha 
 
 partido. 
 
 I was saying he is good. 
 
 I was glad you came. 
 
 I did not know what o'clock 
 
 it was. 
 I was glad you had come. 
 
 She thought he had gone. 
 
 Tocdva admiravelmente quando tlnha doze annos. Em 
 quanto Mentor fazia este disciirso, tomamos n6s a ilha. 
 Dormia eu tao bem quando V. M. me acord6u. Eu nao 
 me persuadia que as cousas safssem tao mal. Era neces- 
 sario que eu pagdsse. Sdbia Narbal que Baleazar nao 
 morrera afogddo. Tudo dizia que ahi havia o espirito de 
 um godo. Jiilia cuiddva que eu nao queria voltar. Melh6r 
 Ihe estdva* se se calasse. Se o neg6cio valia a pena. 
 N'uma regata de vap6res o n6sso b^rco nao ganhdva* de 
 ce"rto o pr^mio. 
 
 I was saying that your brother is lazy. I was sorry 
 you came. He did not know that I was sleeping. I icas 
 aware that he had gone. The figure was more slight than 
 powerful. His fine mouth gave him great animation: his 
 delicate hands had an air of distinction. The gestures 
 of the priest had a theatrical exaggeration. Expecting 
 a bow, but if he expected, he deceived himself. I did not 
 know that your brother had been ill. While I ivas speak- 
 ing, the machine exploded. It was necessary that he 
 should speak. 
 
 * Is often used for future conditional. 
 
( 162 ) 
 LESSON CLXII. 
 
 PRETERITE AND SUBORDINATES. 
 Disse eu que o mSu amigo esta I said my friend is here. 
 
 I was glad you came. 
 
 I was writing when he went. 
 
 I told him to go. 
 
 The king awoke. 
 
 I asked him to pay me. 
 
 Estimei que viesses. 
 
 Eu escrevia quando elle partiu. 
 
 Eu dfese-lhe que fosse. 
 
 O monarcha acorddu. 
 
 Pedl que me pagasse. 
 
 Disseram-me que havia d6is caminhos. Bern conheceu 
 a Deusa que este era Telemaco. Fingiram os poe"tas que os 
 gigantes tfnham feito guerra, etc. Perguntei-]he em que con- 
 sistia a auctoridade de rei. Disse-m& que elle vie"sse. Pedi 
 que me deixassem estdr s6. Os past6res quizeram que me 
 cobrisse com a pelle. Perguntdram qudl e mais glori6so ? 
 Aconselhou-lhe que fosse por te"rra. Prov6u-se que ella 
 fora quem envenenara e afogara o rei. Perceberam os 
 guardas que 411a soffria. la chamar soccdrro, quando me 
 deteve lima reflexao. 
 
 I told him not to go. I asked him to come. The pea- 
 sant said there were two roads. The soldier knew perfectly 
 well that it was his superior officer. The pilgrims have 
 feigned that the East is full of riches. I advised him to 
 go to Lisbon by the Galgo. They asked which was the 
 best road to Batalha. The shepherds wished me to re- 
 main in the country. I told them to go to their own 
 houses. I begged the soldiers to let me go. I was glad 
 when my brother came. I said that my friend would go 
 by the steamer. 
 
( 163 ) 
 LESSON CLXIII. 
 
 PLUPERFECT* AND SUBORDINATES. 
 
 governad6r formdra o de- 
 
 o. 
 
 Praticou qu&nto dissdra. 
 
 Quizera que fize*sse &ste fav6r. 
 
 Estimdra muito saber. 
 
 Eu o amdra, se e~lle fosse digno. 
 
 Se o caminho f6ra bom. 
 
 The governor had formed the 
 
 plan. 
 He practised what he had 
 
 said. 
 
 I could wish you to do me . 
 I should be glad to know. 
 I had loved, had he been 
 
 worthy. 
 Had the road been good. 
 
 Eu te amdra, se tu me corresponderas. Queixando-se 
 que a rainha tomdra tal auctoridade. Elle viu urn fidalgo 
 que nao apparecera durante a acfao, e pergunt6u-lhe 6nde 
 estiv&ra em qu&nto se combat&ra. Estimdra que estive"sses 
 com saiide. Eu quizera ir, se tiv^sse logdr. Prouvera a 
 Deus que me visse livre d'ella. Eu o premidra, se elle o 
 merecesse. rei desejdra ir a caca, se nao fora a chiiva. 
 rapaz quizera pagar, se tivesse dinheiro. 
 
 I should be glad to know that it is so. I could wish that 
 you would do me this favour. I should feel much pleasure 
 if you were well. I had loved him, had he been worthy of 
 love. ' This would be good, could it be realised. If he had 
 been good, he would not have done evil. If the road were 
 good, I should take a walk. If he had known it, he would 
 have done nothing. He said to one who had offended him. 
 He said that he had completed his twenty years. As soon as 
 he had finished the work. 
 
 * Also used as a form of conditional, as is sometimes the case in 
 English : " Had I known " for " If I had known ; " "Had the doctor 
 come sooner, my brother had not died," for "If the doctor had come 
 sooner, my brother would not have died." 
 
( 164 ) 
 
 LESSON CLXIY. 
 
 FUTURE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Farfo o que V. S. deseja. 
 
 Que sera de mim se elle partfr ? 
 
 Estimarei que 
 
 EstimarSi se tive"res vindo. 
 
 No fim se verd quern perde. 
 
 I will do what you ask. 
 What will become of me if he 
 
 goes? 
 
 I shall be glad if you come. 
 I shall be glad when you have 
 
 come. 
 In the end, it will be seen who 
 
 loses. 
 
 Irei p&ra 6nde me mandarem. Amanha irei a casa de Y. 
 S., se fize"r bom tempo. Se tu obrares bem, serds premiado. 
 Se o fizerem, provardo o meu resentimento. Perderei o 
 friicto da minha viagem, se nao chegar a tempo. T6do o 
 fav6r que Ihe fize"r o receberei c6mo feito a mim mesmo. V. 
 S. perdoard. Creio que serd o desejo de V. S. Estimard 
 miiito que seu tio venha pelo vapor. Nao ir&i amanha. 
 Pagarei o dinheiro ^sta tdrde. Perderei o jogo. Pei-derd o 
 cao na riia. Nao irei a casa de V. E. e*sta tarde. 
 
 He will do what they ask. What will become of the poor 
 boy if his father goes to the Crimea ? I shall go wherever 
 my general orders me. You will see to-morrow who is right. 
 If you study well, you will gain the prize. I shall lose the 
 steamer if I do not reach Lisbon in time. I shall start for 
 London when you like. I shall be glad if you go with me 
 to my quinta. He will go to Camacha if it does not rain. 
 I shall pay the men to-morrow. I shall not go to Batalha 
 till next month. They mil go. If it is a fine day I shall 
 visit the gardens. You will see the museum next week. 
 
( 165 ) 
 
 LESSON CLXV. 
 FUTURE (COMPOUND). 
 
 Hei de stir. 
 
 fille hd de tir. 
 
 Nos havdmos de amdr. 
 
 Paffdr-lhQ-he'i. 
 
 Achdr-me-ha em casa. 
 
 I have to be, or shall be. 
 He must have, or shall have. 
 We have to love, or must love. 
 I shall pay him. 
 You will find me at home. 
 I shall tell him. 
 
 Demordr-me-hei aqui alguns mezes. Hei de ter f6me. 
 A6nde havemos de pardr? Di-lo-hemos* amanha cedo. 
 .Zfa-lo-hei.t ^ar-me-h^i. f Como os padres hdo de rir-se 
 a e"sta hdra ! Dar-lh'o-hemos, se o pagar. Hei de ficdr 
 com o panno. C6mo Mi de provdr no men livro. Vermos 
 a6nde tiido isto hd de ir pardr. " que hei de fazer ? " 
 exclam6u o monge. Hd de se dar urna grS,nde batalha. 
 Ella hd de estdr anciosa de o ver. P^ra que hei de 
 mentir ? $ excellente mae : Deus hd de Ih'o pagdr. En- 
 gana-se ; hd de vel-o. Hei de dar-lhe urn a noticia para a con- 
 solar. 
 
 I will follow thee everywhere. I must taste this new dish. 
 I shall tell him when he comes. If you call at my quinta 
 (villa) at four o'clock, you will find me at home. I shall 
 stay at this village for some weeks. I shall pay him the 
 money when he has finished the work. Where have we to 
 pass the night ? We shall see where all this is to end ? I 
 must buy this cloth. There will be a great battle. We 
 shall stay there a few weeks. She must be hungry. I shall 
 do it with much pleasure. 
 
 * Contracted for diz$r. t For/as^r. 
 
( 166 ) 
 LESSON CLXVL 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT.* 
 
 Tenho amado. 
 Tenho tido. 
 fille tern est&do. 
 Temos comido. 
 filles tern cumprido. 
 Ellas tern ido. 
 
 I have loved. 
 I have had. 
 He has been. 
 We have eaten. 
 They have finished. 
 They have gone. 
 
 A rapida narracao que temos feito, basta para se conhecer 
 que, etc. Tem-se feito muita biilha. Gragas a Deus, tenho 
 tido amigos. Nas visitas que tenho feito a div^rsas esc61as, 
 tenho tido occasiao de apreciar o merecimento dos profes- 
 sores, etc. Tenho itisto com verdadeira satisfa9ao que, etc. 
 Pelos servos que tern prestddo a Portugal. Tenho dtto 
 que Deus 6 justa Digo que elle tern feito bem. Tu tens 
 tido. Estd havido por h6mem de probidide. h6mem 
 tern comido. Temos cumprido com a nossa palavra. 
 
 I have been. He has had. They have loved. We have 
 seen. Tell him he has done well. I have seen with great 
 pleasure. The rapid voyage we have made, etc. He has 
 had many very good friends. He is considered a man of 
 great talent. He has not kept his word. They have said 
 that God is just That poor boy has been the sport of bad 
 fortune. There has been much noise. I have been loved. 
 I have seen the Queen several times. Have you been often 
 in France ? I have had occasion. Have you dined ? 
 
 * In most cases the Portuguese use the preterite instead of the com- 
 pound of the present : " Eu vi," not " T$nho vfe/o." 
 
( 167 ) 
 LESSON CLXVII. 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT AND PRETERITE. 
 
 Elles haviam aceitddo o jiigo. They had accepted the yoke. 
 
 En nao tinha amddo. I had not loved. 
 
 filles haviam confessddo. They had confessed. 
 
 Nao tinha sido possiveL | It had not been possible. 
 
 Apenas tinha saido. i Hardly had he gone out. 
 
 O h6mem que se tinha rido de. The man who had laughed at. 
 
 Raymun do tinha vindo a Hespanha tempos antes. O Cid 
 que os Arabes tinham tomddo por capitao. Elles tinham- 
 me ensinddo a escrevSr. Tinha deixddo o meu cavallo ao 
 pagem. Julgui que o tinha perdido. Tinham-me dito que e\ 
 Havia muita gente que tinha chegddo primeiro do que n6s. 
 Elle nao tinha ganhddo * miiito no comm^rcio que fazia, mas 
 tinha adquirido a experiencia. que tinha visto e ouvido 
 tinha-lhe ensinddo a moderar os s^us desejos. Machado tinha 
 tencionado escrev^r em latim. llas haviam sido olvidadas. 
 
 Centuries before, the greatest philosophers had confessed 
 their ignorance. Hardly had she gone out when the house 
 fell The man who had laughed at the justice of the king. 
 The man whom he had taken for his friend. What I had 
 seen and heard was enough. They had been severely punished. 
 That old man had taught the boy to write. He had con- 
 fessed the crime. Hardly had the steamer left the port when 
 the man-of-war entered. The merchant had accepted the 
 offer. If our friend had left his horse. 
 
 * " Simao de Ndntua," Part II., page 3. 
 
( 168 ) 
 LESSON CLXVIIL 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. 
 
 Dize-lhe que Sntre. 
 Pe"90-lhe que se assfate. 
 E preciso que me vd. 
 Rec&o que tenhdmos. 
 
 Tell him to come in. 
 Pray be seated. 
 I must go. 
 I fear we shall have. 
 
 Diga-me o que Ihe devo. ] Tell me what I owe you. 
 
 Estimo que ttnha vlndo. ' I am glad you have come. 
 
 De 1 licenca que veja. Peco-lhe que demore algiins dfas. 
 L6go que receba aviso, pagar-lh'a-hei de contado, se o senhor 
 quizer. Quelra Deus que seja restituido a s6us paes. Per- 
 mitta-mQ que Ihe mostre 4sta caixinha. G6sto que nao seja 
 cozlda demais. Que quer V. S. que Ihe sirva ? Receio que 
 a c6r nao seja fixa. P6de s^r que Mja alguma pancada 
 d'agua. Tenho m&lo que hdja gr^nde poeira. Fd$a como 
 eu. f ogo nao tarda que se accenda. Duvido que eu possa 
 fazer. Duvido que venha. Temo que nao venha. Ainda 
 que venha nao nos vera. 
 
 I am glad that you enjoy good health. I wish he may 
 come. I am very glad you are well. There is no man so 
 perfect that has not his failings. I do not doubt but he 
 will do it. I doubt his doing it. I will not go thither 
 before he comes. Pray be seated. In case they should not 
 be up so early. Tell him to bring me the shoes. Whatever 
 may be their traditions. Who am I, to go to Pharaoh? 
 Tell him to pay the money. Perhaps he may go. Go home. 
 Do as I do. I fear we shall have war in 1860. Allow me 
 to show you that picture. 
 
( 169 ) 
 LESSON CLXIX. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT. 
 
 Pediu-me o desculpdsse. 
 Como se dependfcse de, etc. 
 Procure! que fdsse recebido. 
 Ninguern, que eu soubesse, 
 
 tinha. 
 
 Sem que elle me sentisse. 
 OxaM que eu houvesse sido ! 
 
 He apologised to me. 
 
 As if depended on. 
 
 I aimed at his being received. 
 
 No one I knew had. 
 
 Without his knowing me. 
 that I had been ! 
 
 Mandou que se comepdsse o ataque. Nao pude alcanar 
 quern fdsse aquelle. Recei6so de que a siia vinda augmentdsse 
 as perturba9oes, elle tent6u de impedl-la. Nomeando uni 
 cabe^a * a que tMos obedecessem, e que tivesse bastante energia 
 para Ihes dar a paz. OxalA que eu houvesse sido estudioso. 
 Receiando que torndsse a si, e a obrigdsse a matdr-se com elle. 
 Havia-lhe Baleazar recommendado que se elle visse occasiao 
 opportiina para que torndsse, Ihe manddsse um ann^l de 6uro 
 que Ihe servirla de aviso, do qual entendesse que era tempo 
 de voltar. 
 
 He waited till the priest ordered him to speak. Hinder- 
 ing him from killing her. As if the notion of a Supreme 
 Bei&g depended on a sound. If it were essential to our 
 nature. Without a roof to shelter them. Even if it were so. 
 If we were perfect, we should be saints. If he heard you. 
 Did he ask you not to say ? It was not necessary for you 
 to tell. If for a moment I could suppose him capable of 
 meanness. The General ordered the troops to begin the 
 battle. He was afraid his speaking might hinder the nego- 
 tiations. 
 
 * Cabtya and Guia are masculine when meaning chief guide, as 
 "Ocabfya de famflia." 
 
( 170 ) 
 
 LESSON CLXX. 
 
 FUTURE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Diria, se pode"ra. 
 
 Sentiria se fossem. 
 
 Seria se fosse. 
 
 Era melh6r se . 
 
 Trinta annos serlam a idade. 
 
 Sefdsse menos devoto, diria. 
 
 I would say, if I could. 
 I should be sorry if they were. 
 It would be if it were. 
 It would be better if . 
 Thirty might be the age. 
 If he were less devout, I should 
 say. 
 
 A carta de V. S. me consolaria, se eu estivera em estado 
 de receber consolaao. Temiam que as p6rtas estivessem 
 f echadas. Nao poderia e*lla nega-lo, ainda quando quizesse. 
 Promettlra-lhes ^lla que s6 esposaria outro quando posesse 
 termo a um v6u que estava tecendo. Eu me contaria por 
 mui feliz se podesse acompanhar-te. Ealsdrio seria eu, se 
 negasse a verdade. Eu a amaria, se ^lla me amasse. Sen- 
 tiria se fossem recusados. Se elles vidssem implorar piedade, 
 negar-lh'a-^io tu 1 6ra melh6r se elle pagdsse. 
 
 I knew they would employ force if I resisted. I should be 
 inconsolable if anything happened to him. It would be 
 less severe if I were supported with greater fortitude. If 
 he were less obstinate, I should say . I should be sorry if 
 you were to leave the house. He would be very happy if 
 he could go to India. Your kindness would comfort me if 
 I could receive comfort. I should be glad if you could call 
 to-morrow. They would not refuse if you would ask im- 
 mediately. I should consider myself very happy if I had 
 health and a moderate income. 
 
 * The imperfect indicative is often used for the future conditional. 
 See page 161. 
 
( 171 ) 
 LESSON CLXXI. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE. 
 
 Se o fizer, pagar-lhe-hei. 
 
 Se nao adormecfa, lerei. 
 
 Se nao puder ir so, ajudd,e-o. 
 
 Perderei se nao chegdr a tempo. 
 
 Eu farM quslnto pude'r. 
 P&ra qudndo voltdrmos. 
 
 If he does it, I shall pay him. 
 If I don't sleep, I shall read. 
 If he can't go alone, help him. 
 I shall lose if I don't arrive in 
 
 time. 
 
 I'll do what I can. 
 By the time we return. 
 
 Se V. S. saw*, dfga ao rapaz. Se o tomdr ao meX dar- 
 In'o-hei por menos. Quando tiver sede o que hei de beber ? 
 Se examindrmos urn mappa do norte da Italia, acharemos 
 lima ramificagao dos Alpes, etc. Se me constipdr. Se all 
 Ihe puder prestar algiim servigo, fa-lo-hei com prazer. 
 Fare'mos como pudermos. Se ^sta Ihe nao bastdr, tenho 
 ainda mais ao seu dispor. Se o tmpo correr bem, hav^mos 
 de ter bastante friicta. Earei o que me pedes, se puder. 
 que Y. quizer. Em quanto o mundo durdr. Se ofizer, 
 agradecer-lhe-h^i. 
 
 I shall do all I can to help you. He will sail at noon 
 if the wind is favourable. If we always go at this rate, 
 we 1 shall soon arrive. Certainly, if I return by Calais. If 
 you wish it, I will accompany you thither. If you take 
 it by the month, I will give it you for less. You may come 
 when you please. If we give credit to what he says. 
 "When you least think so, you will find, etc. While I 
 breathe, I exist only for thee. If I do not see you again. 
 If we limit ourselves to the state. If the lady catches 
 cold. 
 
( 172 ) 
 LESSON CLXXII. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 fille se teria casado. 
 fille Ih'a houvfra dado. 
 
 Se estive'sse dado. 
 Ella teria morrido se . 
 Se eu tivesse tido. 
 Se eu tivfr tido. 
 
 He would have married. 
 
 He would have given her to 
 
 him. 
 
 If it had been given. 
 She would have died if . 
 If I had had. 
 If I shall have had. 
 
 Eu te teria obsequiddo, se tu me tivesses olsequiddo 
 ^rimliro. Eu o teria avisddo, se elle m'o tivesse pedido. 
 Elle teria praticddo algiim acto de extrema violencia, se 
 Mogueis nao houvera tomddo a defsa do accusado. Teria 
 tido miiito gosto em faze-lo. Se a mfnha palavra estivesse 
 ddda, nao a quebrara eu. A estatiira seria desempenada, 
 se o trabalho a nao tivesse curvddo um p6uco. Eu 
 teria dlmo$ddo na siia qulnta, por^m o tempo nao me 
 permittiu. Se elle tiver tido. Oxala que tivesse tido 
 tempo. 
 
 He would have married her if she had been younger. 
 If I had eaten the fruit, I should have been ilL I should 
 have advised him, if he had asked me. If it had not 
 rained, I should have gone to the country. If they had 
 paid the money, the slave would have been set at liberty. 
 He would have had a fine figure if work had not bent his 
 back. I wish I had had more time. She would have gone 
 to France if she had had money. If his word had been 
 given, he would not have broken it. I should have had much 
 pleasure in dining with you. 
 
( 173 ) 
 LESSON CLXXIII. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER CERTAIN WORDS.* 
 
 Tr$mo que o amor se apdgue. 
 Nao que'ro que ella core. 
 Tenho medo que elle conheca. 
 Qualque'r que seja. 
 Nao soffro que inddguem. 
 Talvz que seja assim. 
 
 I tremble lest love should cease. 
 
 I won't have her blush. 
 
 I fear his knowing. 
 
 Whatever may be. 
 
 1 do not allow them to inquire. 
 
 Perhaps this may be so. 
 
 Nao quero que sejas victima da tiia delicadeza. Nao 
 quero que o padre espere por minha ciilpa. Qualquer que 
 seja o sentido em que se escreva. natural que chegue. 
 Receio que do cora$ao venha a sua m6rte. Sfnto que talvez 
 estas sejam as ultimas h6ras de felicidade. Roguemos a 
 Deus que auxilfe o p6bre homem. Se V. S. sabe a quern 
 falla, aconselho-o a que nao continue. Pode ser que elle 
 vdnha. P6de acontecer que nos alcdnce. Prohibo-lhe que se 
 vermelha. Nao teme que se dbra o chao e o sepulte ? 
 
 I fear that your sword is shorter than your tongue. I 
 dread her Jcnoiving that I love her so much. I do not wish 
 you to be the victim of your devotion. I do not want you 
 to wait on my account. Let us entreat the king to pardon 
 the poor soldier. It is natural that he should weep. I 
 advise you not to go on. Do you not fear that the ground 
 may open? He may come. Perhaps these are the last. 
 Do you not fear that the earth will open ? I feel that these 
 are, perhaps, the last days of joy. 
 
 * Chiefly verbs of emotion, sentiment, hope, fear, asking, forbidding, 
 doubt ; contingent words, as possivel, qualqutr, naturdl, tdlvez, pode 
 8$r, bdsta. 
 
LESSON CLXXIV. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER CONJUNCTION OR RELATIVE. 
 
 Quero que V. M./apa isto. 
 Quern quizer, dirija-se. 
 S6 conhe^o um que p6ssa. 
 Nao ha quern fdpa bem. 
 Nao sao cousas que se digam. 
 Diga-lhe que me trdga. 
 
 I want you to do it. 
 Whoever wishes, may apply. 
 I only know one who can. 
 There is none that doeth good. 
 These are not things to be said. 
 Tell him to bring me. 
 
 So conhe0 tun camfnho que nos possa conduzir a g!6ria. 
 Quer que eu o sirva de legumes ? Fazem mal a si os que 
 abtisam da saiide. Nao tenho nada que nao es^'a as 6rdens 
 de Y. S. Nao 6 um diccionario 6bra que do primeiro jacto 
 p6ssa sair perfeita. Nao ha quern ent$nda, nao ha quern 
 busque a Deus. Nao ha ninguem que nao o sdiba. Nao 
 conhefo ninguem que me proteja e ajude a estabeleger-me. 
 Eis-aqui o que me convinha bem ! Nao devemos excluir id6a 
 alguma que tenda a elucidar a questao. 
 
 He only knows one road that can lead him to Paris. I 
 know no one who can protect me. There is no one that does 
 not know the poet. He who abuses his health injures him- 
 self. A picture is not a work which can be perfect all at 
 once. They want him to do it. Whoever wishes to take 
 this house, may apply to J. C., No. 2 King Street. There 
 is no one that seeks after God. There is nothing done that 
 is not discovered. God grant that you do not repent of it. 
 These are not things to be said before everybody. 
 
( 175 ) 
 LESSON CLXXV. 
 
 IMPERATIVE, AND SUBJUNCTIVE FOR IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Mdnde que elle va. 
 Olha como e formoso ! 
 Soce'gue ! Retire-^ ! 
 Nao se esqufya. 
 Nao acredtte. 
 T6me sentido. 
 
 Order him to go. 
 See how beautiful it is ! 
 Be easy ! Retire ! 
 Do not forget. 
 Don't believe it 
 Take care. 
 
 Sdbe que s6 seras grande em quanto soube'res ser re- 
 portado. Diga-lhQ que me trdga os meus sapatos. Nao 
 se assuste. Seja f6rte, anime-se ! Nao se fdlle mais n'isso. 
 T6rne a reflectir : vd de vagdr. Veja se me ajiida. Pdnha- 
 me o que quize"r. Metire-se, quando nao sera preso. Lem- 
 bre-SQ de su pae; veja o desgosto de siia mae. Olhe 
 para a sua consciencia, e Mete em quanto tiver f6r9as. Ou$a 
 a v6z do c6u. Seja superior a desgrd^a. Nao espere ndda 
 d'elles. flncha o c6po e rf^Ye vinho a Joao. Pe$a licenga a 
 siia mae. 
 
 Go immediately from my presence. Take care ; the river 
 is very deep. Be my friend, and I shall always protect 
 you. Do not disturb the few days I have left. Fill the 
 glass and pour water into the basin. Do not speak any 
 more on that point. See how absent he is ! Do not make 
 me weep. Tell me your name. Tell the boy to clean the 
 stable. Be superior to despair. Fill that bottle with 
 old wine. Don't forget to pay the bill. See how handsome 
 she is. 
 
( 176 ) 
 LESSON CLXXVI. 
 
 ENGLISH INDICATIVE = PORTUGUESE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Alegro-me que Y. S. esteja bom. 
 Espere que elle vgnha. 
 Espe"re que nao seja nada. 
 Temo que nao esttja assds 
 
 cozida. 
 
 No caso que sfya enganado. 
 Ate que Ihe pdguem. 
 
 I am glad you are well. 
 Stay till he comes. 
 I hope it will be nothing. 
 I fear it is not done enough. 
 
 In case you are deceived. 
 Till they pay him. 
 
 Precise d'tima casa que seja grande e bella. Prociire-me 
 um criado que seja diligente. Elle se ale"gra de que ella 
 nao se tenha perdido. Acabemos antes que venha algue"m. 
 Pe90-lhe que venha mais cedo. Nao qu^r sair ate que Ihe 
 pdguem. Temo que nao estejdmos de v61ta ^sta noite. For 
 mais que fd$a nao p6de destrulr tudo. E possivel que o 
 justo ptigue pelo peccad6r ? Temo que os 6vos nao estejam 
 assas cozidos. Espero que elle me pdgue. Precise d'um 
 cavallo que seja manso. 
 
 I am sorry you are not well. Stay till your brother comes. 
 The doctor hopes it will be nothing. He is afraid the beef 
 is not done enough. In case he is deceived. Get me a 
 pupil that is attentive to his studies. Let us finish before 
 the teacher comes. He begs me to come sooner. He fears 
 he will not return to town to-night. It is possible the 
 innocent may pay for the guilty. The Count wants a palace 
 that is large and well situated. I will not leave the house 
 till I am paid. I am waiting till the people come. I am 
 glad you are well. 
 
( 177 ) 
 
 LESSON CLXXVII. 
 
 ENGLISH INFINITIVE = PORTUGUESE SUBJUNCTIVE* 
 
 Diga-lhe que stiba. 
 N&O Ihe diga que venka* 
 Desejo que elle vdnha. 
 Pe^o-lhe que me dispense. 
 R6go a V. S. que o nao fdfa. 
 Nao sou tao tolo que o acredite. 
 
 Tell him to come up. 
 Don't tell him to come. 
 I wish you to come. 
 I beg you to excuse me. 
 I beg you not to do it. 
 I am not so foolish as to believe 
 it. 
 
 Pe"co a V. ... que o fdca. Diga-lhe que nao tdrde. 
 Dize-lhe que venha amanha. Permitta-me V. S. que c& Ihe 
 diga. Estd ce"rto de que os Ien96es estejam bem seccos. 
 Estimo que esteja a seu g6sta Pe"go-lhe que nao nos fd$a 
 esperar. T6me sentfdo nao se queime. T6me euidado nao 
 me corte. Eu desafio a algu^m que me tire o meu. D4 
 Iicen9a que os prove. Permitta-me que Ihe mfistre este livro. 
 Que quereis que el-rei fd$a ? Permitta-me que eu dbra a 
 jane"lla. P6go-lhe me fd$a a barba. Nao tenho expressoes 
 com que descreva. 
 
 I beg you not to make me wait. Do you wish me to do 
 it 1 Tell him to come to-morrow. He begs me not to do it 1 
 I beg you will come. Allow me to show you this watch. I 
 beg you not to keep us waiting. Pray, try them. If he does 
 not understand what I am, it is not worth while to tell him. 
 I have not words to tell the force, etc. I beg you to tell 
 him. I am sorry it is not to your taste. I wish you to 
 shave me now. Give me leave to try these cherries. Take 
 care not to cut my face. 
 
 * To one familiar with classical or foreign languages, this principle 
 presents no difficulties ; but the merely English scholar must carefully 
 study examples of the rule, that in the subordinate clause of a sen- 
 tence the infinitive in English is generally represented by the subjunc- 
 tive in Portuguese. 
 
( 178 ) 
 LESSON CLXXVIII. 
 
 ENGLISH INFINITIVE = PORTUGUESE SUBJUNCTIVE* 
 
 fiu. disse-lhe que fdsse.-\- 
 Pedi-lhe que nao fdsse la. 
 Pediu-lhe que Ihe dJsse. 
 Quize*ra que me trocdsse. 
 Ella Ihe obtestou quize'sse ter 
 
 d'ella compaix&o. 
 Pedindo a DSus salvdsse a 
 
 alma. 
 
 I told him to go. 
 
 I begged 
 He asked 
 
 ed him not to go there. 
 
 him to give. 
 I should like to change. 
 She implored him to have pity. 
 
 Praying God to save the souL 
 
 Dava motfvo a que todos falldssem mal d'elle. Disse*ram- 
 Ihe que nao tivesse rec&o. Kecommendei-lhe que nao 
 tarddsse. Impedl-lhe que fossem. Mandei-lhe que fdsse 
 para casa. Pedlu a siia mulh^r que Ihe desse um c6po d'agua. 
 Rogaram-lhe que o nao faesse. Kecommendou ao criado que 
 o acorddsse as seis h6ras. Ordenou-lhe que saisse. Dlsse 
 ao comprador que viesse ver a qulnta. Orden6u que pedissem 
 o que quizessem. Pedindo -Ihe que procurdsse o Hvro. 
 Quize"ra que os dedaes tivessem um estqjo. 
 
 He requested them to bring him two new books. He 
 made every one speak ill of him. He told me not to be 
 afraid. I exhorted him to behave well. The boy prevented 
 me from going. She ordered him to bring the wine. The 
 king ordered him to make restitution. I begged them not 
 to go there. The general had prohibited the soldiers from 
 playing. I recommended him to hide himself. Minos 
 wished his sons to succeed him in the kingdom. Tell him 
 to bring my hat. 
 
 * Many words take the infinitive, as impedir, prohibit. 
 + When the whole transaction is past ; but when he has not gone, 
 vd, instead. 
 
( 179 ) 
 
 LESSON CLXXIX. 
 
 ENGLISH PARTICIPLE = PORTUGUESE INFINITIVE OR 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 fiu o vi passedr. 
 
 Vejo um homem a cortdr lenha. 
 
 Em logar de* dizfo. 
 
 Em comer* e leMr. 
 
 Util p&ra* escrevdr. 
 
 Sem que 
 
 I saw him walking. 
 
 I see a man cutting wood. 
 
 In place of saying. 
 
 In eating and drinking. 
 
 Useful for writing. 
 
 Without any one speaking. 
 
 Pe'rdem-se muitas c6usas por falta de perguntdr. Estou 
 canado de ler. Nao p6sso fallar sem rir. Sem que nin- 
 guem o suspeitdsse. Sem que 611es o percebessem. Depois 
 de tomdr Sevilha. Nao cont^nte com se fazer temido. De- 
 pois de fazer isto. Antes de expirdr. Terei o gosto de o 
 torndr a ver. Depois de ter estddo tao al^gre. Nao os con- 
 demnem sem serem ouvidos. Em vez de se mstruir, estd 
 jogdndo. Abstenho-me de leber vlnho. Calais, notdvel por 
 ser a passagem mais curta. L6nge de ser. 
 
 Happiness consists in never "being ill. I saw a man writ- 
 ing a letter. In place of speaking, he writes. He spent the 
 night in playing and singing. He went away without any 
 one's' telling him. After taking Toledo, he marched against 
 Madrid. Instead of studying his lesson, he went to the ball. 
 After having been remarkable for being the most splendid 
 theatre in Europe. Without losing time. She accused 
 Marbal of having been an accomplice. Having money is a 
 crime in Tyre, and having virtue is a greater. 
 
 * Notice that prepositions govern the infinitive, not the present 
 participle. 
 
( 180 ) 
 
 LESSON CLXXX. 
 
 ENGLISH PAST AND COMPOUND PERFECT = PORTUGUESE 
 SIMPLE PERFECT. 
 
 Cort6ii-me. 
 
 Ja almocdu ? 
 
 A senhora cham6u-me 1 
 
 V... 
 
 Seu irmao morrSu. 
 Ja v$io o sapateiro ? 
 
 You have cut me. 
 Have you breakfasted ? 
 Did you call me, ma'am ? 
 When did you come ? 
 His brother is dead. 
 Has the shoemaker come ? 
 
 Ja veio por e*sta estrada ? seu amigo alnda nao entrau. 
 Almocei mui bem. Ja chegou o correio ? A senhora man- 
 dou-iRQ dizer que vie"sse. tempo que fugiu nao volta. 
 morto, cujo pulso cessou de bater. Deus mostrou a Fara6 
 o que hade fazer. J&acabdu? Aondeficou hontem? J4 
 lebes vinho ? Mudou o tempo. Ja se /^'. Creio que foi 
 v^r a irma. Como passdu V. S. a n6ite ? lla ainda nao 
 dan$6u. A na9ao desappareceu da face da te"rra. seu 
 amigo ainda nao entrou. Nasceu em Munich no dia 2 de 
 Outubro. 
 
 He has fulfilled all his duties. The boy has cut me. 
 Have you dined ? When dz'd your brother return from Lis- 
 bon ? Has my father returned ? The poor wounded soldier, 
 whose pulse has ceased to beat Time past never returns. 
 The boy has drunk wine. Your nephew has sworn my 
 death. The steamer has arrived. They are out. Has your 
 master arrived? What has passed does not return. His 
 friend has not returned. Have you taken tea? I believe 
 my uncle has gone to Campanario. The king has sent me 
 a beautiful ring. The allies have taken the south of Sebas- 
 topol. 
 
LESSON CLXXXI. 
 
 ENGLISH PRESENT = PORTUGUESE FUTURE, AND VICE-VERSA, 
 
 Ld o espero. 
 
 Saiu, mas 16go v6lta. 
 
 Se eufdr algiim dia a Roma. 
 
 Quando vidr, diga-lhe. 
 
 Se me nao ddr mais, etc. 
 
 Nao dcho* 
 
 I shall wait for you there. 
 He's out, but will return soon. 
 If I go some day to Rome. 
 When he comes, tell him. 
 If you do not give me more. 
 I cannot find. 
 
 Hav&nos de ca tornar quando elle representdr. Eu Ih'o 
 trarei a primeira vez que ca vier. Se podermos ser uteis, 
 ficamos as 6rdens de Y. M. Tira a vida a d6is filhos meus, 
 se eu o nao trouxer 6utra vez. Levem-me de 61hos tapados 
 a6nde quizerem. Nao dcho * as toalhas. Vim para ver se 
 dcho a chave. Filippe esta vfvo e sao, e volta qualqu^r dla. 
 Esta gente nao descdn$a em quanto nao subverter tiido. 
 Liicte em quanto tiver f Srfas. Em qu^nto respirdr nao ex- 
 isto senao para ti. Se nao torndr a ver-te, este ann^l 4 p^-ra 
 te lembrares de mim. 
 
 He will be back immediately. The messenger will soon 
 return. I shall wait for the boy there. My master will 
 soon return. Know that they will not rest till they humble 
 us all. If I return some day to Paris, I shall see the 
 Emperor. If the man does not give me more, I will not sell 
 him the horse. When Mario sings, I shall go again. The 
 first time I come, I shall bring my guitar. I cannot find * 
 the plate. He has come to see if he can find the keys. 
 That boy will never rest till he has ruined his health. While 
 I breathe, I shall never love another. 
 
 * The Portuguese present indicative is often equal to a present 
 potential : " n2,o dcho," I cannot find. 
 
( 182 ) 
 
 LESSON CLXXXII. 
 
 ENGLISH PRESENT PARTICIPLE = PORTUGUESE RELATIVE AND 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 A voz de qu$m cldma. 
 
 Vendo um menino chordndo. 
 
 Acudir a quSm chdma. 
 
 No anno que vem. 
 
 Coino o pulso de um que tre'me. 
 
 Tanta gente que ahi 
 
 The voice of one crying. 
 
 Seeing a child crying.* 
 
 To answer one calling. 
 
 In the coming year. 
 
 Like the pulse of one trembling. 
 
 Such a number coming here ! 
 
 Ouvia lima v6z que The dizia. Eis lima v6z dos ceos, que 
 dizia. De repente acordou-me do lethargo lima v6z que 
 braddu: "Foi aqui" Ella acalenta os menlnos que choram. 
 A eloquencia ^ o talento que domina pela palavra as vontades 
 dos 6utros. Para o anno que vem estarei em Roma. Oujo 
 algu^m que pede soccorro. flu vi lima crianga que chordva 
 pela mae. Meu pae ouviu ladroes que forfdvam a p6rta. 
 Via-se de t^rra lima mao que agitdva um lengo branco. 
 Ouvimos os passaros que docemente cantdvam no jardlm. 
 
 We saw a hand waving a white handkerchief. I heard 
 the voice of a young child crying. I think I shall spend a 
 few days next month at St. Anna. It was the voice of one 
 crying in the wilderness. I shall be in London the greater 
 part of next year. I hear the cries of some one asking 
 assistance. We hear the lions roaring in the forests. I 
 have not time to answer every one calling on me. As I lay 
 awake in my bed last night, I heard some thieves forcing 
 the window of my room. I saw a poor child crying for its 
 lost mother. Did you see the crowd of people coming here ? 
 I dread the coming winter. 
 
 * Sometimes the participle is used. 
 
( 183 ) 
 
 LESSOR CLXXXIII. 
 
 PORTUGUESE REFLECTIVE = ENGLISH PASSIVES AND NEUTERS. 
 
 senhor engdna-se. 
 Canfirma-se a noticia. 
 Divide-se a casa em qudrtos. 
 
 filles se tdrnam religiosos. 
 Usam-se estas palavras. 
 Phen6menos que se t$m obser- 
 vddo. 
 
 You are mistaken. 
 
 The news is confirmed. 
 
 The house is divided into 
 rooms. 
 
 They become religious. 
 
 The words are used. 
 
 Phenomena which have been ob- 
 served. 
 
 Aquelles dois se despediram um do 6utro. Isto chdma-se 
 trigo. Sentiu-se um grande ruido. Diz-se. P6de ver-se 
 hoje o museu ? Vd-se embora ! De*ve indagdr-se o estado 
 das estradas. T6das as noticias que se puderem colligir. As 
 medidas de que se faz uso n'este districto. Para que este 
 servi90 se pdssa faz^r. K imita9ao do que se practica nos 
 paizes mais cultos. N'6sta llha s6mente se fabrica 16ua de 
 barro. No dia 10 do corrnte se perderam d6is navios 
 merca"ntes. A verddde 6 perig6sa de dizer-se, e desagraddvel 
 de ouvir-se. 
 
 These expressions are not used. You are mistaken, ma'am. 
 The intelligence is not confirmed. The kingdom is divided 
 into six provinces. The conversation became general. This 
 is called barley. It is said that the king is dead. Can the 
 church be seen to-day? Yesterday, ten ships of war were 
 lost. It is dangerous to speak truth ; disagreeable to hear it. 
 The dear friends said good-bye. This town is called rather 
 handsome. In the dreadful storm of 26th October 1859, 
 the Royal Charter and many other ships were lost. 
 
( 184 ) 
 LESSON CLXXXIV. 
 
 ENGLISH INDICATIVE = PORTUGUESE INFINITIVE. 
 
 Sinto nao podfr. 
 Espero vS-lo. 
 Va v$r quern e. 
 Sinto deixd-lo. 
 Espero torndr a ve-lo. 
 Lisonjeio-me de meredr. 
 
 I am sorry that I can not. 
 
 I hope I shall see you. 
 
 Go and see who it is. 
 
 I regret I must go. 
 
 I hope I shall see you again. 
 
 I natter myself I shall merit. 
 
 Estao no quarto as n6ssas malas 1 Sim, senhores, la as 
 mandei por. Espero ve-lo em bre" ve restabelecido. Va abrir 
 a p6rta. Temia nao ter o gosto de ve'r a V. S. Que*r o 
 senhor ficdr para jantar commigo ? Sinto muito nao poder 
 aproveitdr-me mais tempo da siia companhia. Pretende nao 
 ter sido enganado. Dizem ser no senhorio de lima^Deusa 
 tao cru^l, que nao consente que ningue"m ahi ap6rte. Sen- 
 tindo muito nao ter podido ir a casa do senhor. Sinto causdr- 
 Ihe ^sta privagao. Estimo muito ser o 6rgao dos sentimentos 
 da Academia. 
 
 I thank you sincerely for your attention. I am sorry that 
 I am obliged to tell you. I hope / shall see you again to- 
 morrow. Go and see who is at the door. Go and open the 
 front gate. I am sorry / cannot avail myself of your polite 
 invitation. I regret / was not able to go to your house 
 yesterday. I am glad that I am the organ of the opinion of 
 the Camara. I hope that I shall find my brother in perfect 
 health. It seems to me that the time has arrived. I am 
 sorry / must leave the society of my friends. He pretends 
 he has not been cheated. He is sorry to cause the gentleman 
 all this trouble. 
 
( 185 ) 
 
 LESSON CLXXXV. 
 
 ENGLISH INFINITIVE PASSIVE = PORTUGUESE INFINITIVE 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Ellase faz amdr. 
 E de desejdr. 
 Deixou-se apanhdr. 
 O mesmo se pode dizer de. 
 C6mo era de esperdr. 
 u as mandarei concertdr. 
 
 She makes herself beloved. 
 It is to be hoped for. 
 He let himself be caught. 
 The same may be said of. 
 As was to be expected. 
 I'll get them mended. 
 
 V. S. nunca se deixa ver. Estas pennas nao pre'stam 
 para nada ; mande-as apardr. Nao si se o m^smo se poderi 
 dizer da s\ia intelligencia. Quiz^ra mandar concertdr limas 
 r^ndas, e faze-las dep6is lavdr. E precise da-lo a compdr. 
 AH estao os marmores de Pdros, que os c6ndes d'Arund^l 
 fiz^ram transportdr da Gre"cia. De maneira que p6de dividir- 
 se em tres partes. A rainha Christina fez assassindr Monal- 
 d^schi. Fazem-me doer. Fazia-se temer dos Mouros. $ de 
 crer que elle nao f6sse alheio. Isso nao d6ve admirdr. 
 
 He makes himself feared. I'll send them to be mended. 
 It cannot be denied. Truth is sometimes dangerous to tell, 
 and disagreeable to hear. This cannot be translated into 
 Latin. It is to be hoped that the Russians will evacuate the 
 north fort. The poor horse allowed himself to be caught. 
 I think the same may be said of many men. As was to be 
 expected, the first man was shot. He will send the boots to 
 be mended. Mrs. R. never allows herself to be seen. Send 
 these pens to be mended. So that the whole kingdom can 
 be divided into four parts. He was incapable of deceiving, 
 or allowing himself to be deceived. 
 
( 186 ) 
 LESSON CLXXXVI. 
 
 AM GOING TO = V6U, EST6U PiRA . 
 
 V6u despedir-me de V. S. 
 
 Estdupdra ir a sua casa. 
 
 la a dizer. 
 
 Vdo plantar. 
 
 Estou a pdnto de me ir emb6ra. 
 
 leit^r we v$ndo. 
 
 I am going to take leave. 
 I am going to your house. 
 I was going to say. 
 They are going to plant. 
 I am about to go away. 
 The reader is witnessing. 
 
 Voitrlhe mandar um bocado de gallinha. V6u deitar liito. 
 Tol6sa estdva a pdnto de render-se quando o diique appa- 
 receu a soccorre-la. Vdu tocar para sabr se o almoo est 
 prompto. Vde V. S. ver as luminarias ? Estou para con- 
 clulr um neg6cio mui import&nte. amor frate"rno estivera 
 a pdnto de dar a victoria a commiserafao. la para retirar- 
 me, quando o monge me disse. N'^ssa occasiao estdva elle 
 a partir para S. Claudio. Eu estdu a dizer c&usas que, 
 etc. Estou para salr. rapazinho estd pdra morrer. Vdu 
 tomar um banho. 
 
 They are going into mourning. She was going to call for 
 help. I am going to take leave of you, as the steamer starts 
 to-day at four o'clock. I shall ring to know if dinner is 
 ready. I was going to say that I could not pay the money, 
 when he offered me his purse. I am going to plant sugar- 
 canes in these fields. I am going to send you a slice of this 
 cold beef. The fort was on the point of surrendering, when 
 the Count appeared with a thousand men. The ship was 
 about to sail for Teneriffe. I leg to say, in reply to your 
 letter of 21st ult. I shall put on my boots. 
 
( 187 ) 
 LESSON CLXXXV1I. 
 
 AM TO, HAVE TO = Dl:VO, TflNHO, QUE (OR) DE. 
 
 Devo j an tar com elle. 
 Tdmos de partir amanliS. 
 V. S. devia jantar. 
 u devia ter jantado. 
 Tern muito que fazer. 
 Tdnho que ir-me. 
 
 I am to dine with him. 
 We are to leave to-morrow. 
 You were to dine. 
 I was to have dined. 
 He Ms much to do. 
 I have to go. 
 
 devemos acompanha-los. e"mir regu!6u os tributes 
 que os vencidos deviam pagar. Com o pretexto de ter de 
 occupar-se de graves neg6cios. casarnento devia ser no 
 comedo do inve"rno. Pequna cidade, 6nde devia estdr a 6 
 de jiinho, dla de feira. Tenho que pedir-lhe um favor. 
 Teriho miiito que fazer. ]hle tern cartas que escrev^r. Tenho 
 que ir a muitas partes. Tenho h6ra dada para tratar de 
 neg6cios. Nada tern que receidr d'isso. Teve de ceder aos 
 desejos dos ambiciosos. Elles guidram me pra o aposento, 
 6nde devia passar a n6ite. 
 
 He is to dine with the Duke of Pahnella to-morrow. I 
 must set out on Thursday for Paris. You were to breakfast 
 with me ; why did you not come ? I was to have dined * 
 with the Count on Wednesday, but I was too ill to go. I 
 have to ask a special favour. He has really a great deal to 
 do. I have two words to say to you. The general settled 
 the tributes which the conquered tribes were to pay. I have 
 an appointment. Under the pretext of having to occupy him- 
 self in matters of importance. The funeral was to take place 
 at three o'clock. 
 
 * This, though common, is not correct English. Such phrases aa 
 "I was to have gone," " I intended to have stayed," should be " I was 
 to go," "I intended to stay." 
 
( 188 ) 
 LESSON CLXXXVIII. 
 
 IDIOMATIC FORMS WITH " EST6U." 
 
 Estdu a estudar. 
 Estd a chov^r. 
 Estdu a partir. 
 Estdu estudando. 
 Estd acabando-se. 
 Estdu a ser julgado. 
 
 I am studying. 
 
 It is raining. 
 
 I am about to start. 
 
 I am studying. 
 
 He is dying. 
 
 I am to be judged. 
 
 Eu estdva a escrevSr qundo elle partfu. Estou a traba- 
 Ihar. Estdu a sudr em bica. Estdu a partir para Portugal 
 Estd jantdndo. Elle estd a estudar Direito em Coimbra, 
 Eu * a dizer-lhe isto, e o h6mem a dormir ! Eu estdva a rir, 
 elle a chordr. Eu estive a dizer mlssa, e elles a ouvi-la. 
 Meu irmao estdva a deserihdr, e minha irma a tocdr, quando 
 pegou o fogo em casa. Elle estdva Undo quando eu o encon- 
 trei. Senhor P. estd a morrer e o fllho a brincdr. Estdu 
 aguarddndo o que elle respondera. 
 
 She was reading when he entered the room. He is study- 
 ing medicine in the University of Edinburgh. My friend is 
 about to start for Lisbon in the Galgo. I was running for 
 the doctor when I met my father. The poor old monk was 
 dying. Why am I talking to you about things superior to 
 your understanding ? Your brother was playing the machete 
 when the house fell It is raining in the mountains, though 
 the sun is shining in town. Your uncle is working in the 
 palace of the Count. I was teaching the boys when the 
 earthquake took place. I am perspiring very much. 
 
 * An elliptical phrase. 
 
( 189 ) 
 LESSON CLXXXIX. 
 
 IR WITH PRESENT PARTICIPLE.* 
 
 chegdndo o inverno. 
 O tempo vdi limpdndo. 
 Vdi-se fazdndo velho. 
 Vdi perdendo a belleza. 
 Vdi-se concluindo. 
 Em* amarihecendo* 
 
 Winter is coming. 
 
 It dears up. 
 
 He is growing old. 
 
 She is losing her beauty. 
 
 He is dying. 
 
 When day dawns. 
 
 Vdi-se approximdndo a vindima. Vdi-se> fazendo tarde. 
 As niivens vao-se separdndo. tempo vdi estando mais 
 ameno. Dur6u a guerra d6z annos, e ao passo que ia durdndo 
 e crescendo a gue"rra, se ia juntamente com os annos 
 diminuindo a causa d'ella. C6mo visse que se vinha che- 
 gdndo o dia da sua m6rte. Mentor ia seguindo a Tele"maco. 
 r^'-se chegdndo a colheita. Vdi perdendo o medo. Eu os 
 leio, mas vdu sempre dizendo que nao. doente vde-se con- 
 cluindo. Isto vde sendo dla. Deve ser um prazer r^gio ir 
 Undo aquella delici6sa satyra. 
 
 Winter is drawing near. In order to be able to live. 
 That sad emigration is depopulating this beautiful island. 
 Returning to what I was saying to you. The leaves of the 
 trees are falling. The months are rolling on. The sick 
 man is hastening to his end. The soldiers were following 
 the enemy. Winter is coming, and the days will soon be 
 short. The rain has ceased, and the weather is clearing up. 
 When day dawns, I shall set off for Lisbon. The weather 
 is becoming milder, and the fields are getting clothed with 
 verdure. That young lady is losing her beauty. The har- 
 vest is approaching rapidly. 
 
 * The participle with " em " prefixed is equal to & future indicative. 
 
( 190 ) 
 LESSON CXC. 
 
 CAN = P(5SSO, SET ; COULD = PODIA, PODERf A, SdUBE. 
 
 P6de faze-lo, se g6sta. 
 Se V. M. puder vir. 
 Sei ler e escrever. 
 D'onde se podia ver. 
 Perguntar se sabia ler. 
 Como se nao pudessem haver 
 bom ens. 
 
 He can do it, if he likes. 
 If you can come. 
 I can read and write. 
 Whence could be seen. 
 To ask if he could read. 
 As if there could not be men. 
 
 Diga-me em que Ihe posso servir. V. S. pode fazer-me 
 urn grande sen^o. Kemediar-nos-hemos como pudermos. 
 Pode ver-se h6je o museu? Nao posso ficar. a melh6r 
 c&usa que pode fazer. Pode-me mandar isto ? Que posso 
 offerecer a V. S. ? V. S. poderia fazer-me um favor. Tere- 
 mos peixe? Nao pude achar. Todos os sitios d'6nde se 
 podia ver o desembarque do che"fe. fille soube reprimir os 
 abuses. Poderia alguem espera-lo ? Nao posso mais. Nao 
 o posso softer. Evito-o quanto posso. mais depr^ssa que 
 puder. 
 
 Can you send it for me to the Torrinha road ? If I can 
 render" you any service, I will do it with pleasure. He 
 could not be a minute without his friend. The best advice 
 that can be given. He found him the most patient listener 
 that garrulity could demand. Do you know what can be 
 done ? He said that you alone could give exact intelligence. 
 He could see and hear all perfectly. You can go home, if 
 you like. I can not remain to-night. I began to ask if he 
 could read. Could any hope to see the boy again ? I avoid 
 the youth as much as I can. As fast as you can. You can 
 do me a favour. 
 
( 191 ) 
 LESSON CXCI. 
 
 CAN HAVE, COULD HAVE = ?6DE T^R, PODERIA 
 
 fille nao p6de tSrffato isto. 
 
 E impossivel que elle tenha 
 
 obrado assim. 
 Nao p6de sgr que elle. Unha 
 
 mdrto o homem. 
 Eu poderia tir acabddo a 6bra. 
 fille nao tinha podido descobrir. 
 
 He can not have done it. 
 He can not have done so. 
 
 He can not have killed the man. 
 
 I could have finished the work. 
 He could not have found out. 
 
 fille poderia ter seguido o officio de seu pae. Verdades que 
 a sua razao nao Uriha podido descobrir. lle poderia ter 
 gdrihddo na especula^ao, se pensasse melh6r. Eu poderia ter 
 feito fsto, se tiv^sse tido tempo bastante. secretario poderia 
 ter escripto este officio, se quize'sse trabalhdr mdis. Os 
 hdmens poderiam ter sido^ mdis felizes, se de ha mais tempo 
 se tivessem conhecido. ifelle inflamm6u-se a p6nto que pode- 
 ria ter jeito asneira. Senhor F. tinha podido fazer isto, 
 se Ih'o pedissem. Elle apresentdu mais dinh&ro do que 
 tinha podido ganhar. 
 
 They heard truths which the most cultivated reason could 
 not have discovered. They can not have finished that im- 
 mense work in three months. You might have built that 
 house' in a year. He could have done the work very easily 
 in three weeks, if they had allowed him. The book is better 
 printed than I could have supposed. The secretary could 
 have finished all these letters, if he had not gone to the ball. 
 It is quite impossible that he can hav^cted. so. The officer 
 might have gained a hundred dollars, if he had been attentive. 
 I could have saved the boy, if I had had a rope. 
 
( 192 ) 
 LESSON CXCII. 
 
 MAY, MIGHT = P6SSO, PODERlA, 
 
 Posso pedir-lhe lima graca ? 
 
 Pdsso enganar-me. 
 
 Qualquer or quemquer que 
 
 *#a. 
 Muitos podertam ser felizes, 
 
 se . 
 Uma questao qne poderia ser 
 
 curiosa. 
 Seja feita a vontade de Deus ! 
 
 May I ask a favour of you ? 
 I may be mistaken. 
 Whoever he may be. 
 
 Many mt<//i be happy, if . 
 
 A question which might 
 
 curious. 
 May God's will be done ! 
 
 Isto p6de ser. Quando o rapaz vi4r, poderd V. M. ir. 
 Elles poderdo magodr-se. Seja o que elle quiz^r, eu estimo 
 siia probidade. Pode ser assim. Pode acontecer. Qual- 
 que"r p6de fazer o que nao for contrdrio as leis. Ndo nos e 
 licito violar a lei. Ser-me-hd permittido ofierecer-lhe. Pode 
 ser que elle venha. Oxala que seja fellz ! Oxala que v6lte 
 cedo. P6de-se retirar. Creio que nos podemos levantar. 
 Eu podia fazer isso se quizesse. Eu tinha podido faze-lo, 
 mas, etc. Elle poderia ir, se quizesse. Ser-lhe-Aia Hcito ir, 
 se podesse. 
 
 He may do what he pleases. May I be allowed to send 
 you a wing 1 May be she will come to-morrow. May he 
 soon revisit his native land ! Such a thing may happen. 
 You may go, as you have finished the work. These may do 
 what is not contrary to law. You may come as soon as you 
 please. You may be sure that you will find me at home. 
 The boy might do it, if he liked. The child might read, if 
 he would. He might go to Demerara, if he could get money 
 to pay his passage. He might write the letter, if he pleased. 
 He might sing, if he would. 
 
( 193 ) 
 LESSON CXCIII. 
 
 SHALL,* SHOULD.* 
 
 Terfo a honra ? 
 
 Qu4r que elle venha ? 
 
 Sertii affogddo. 
 
 Irto, se tive"sse cavallo. 
 
 Deve obedecer. 
 
 Se elle fiaJsse isso. 
 
 Shall I have the honour ? 
 
 Will he come ? s/iaW he come ? 
 
 I sftaZZ be drowned. 
 
 I should go, if I had a horse. 
 
 He should obey. 
 
 If he should do that. 
 
 Nao ire* a Lisb6a amanha. A menina diz que nao quer ir, 
 mas hd de ir. Nao, nao hd de fazer tal. Dir-lhe-hei o que 
 penso ? Se V. S. nao quer ir, irei s6. /re* por elle ? Eu 
 voltarei se puder. JFicarei, se me for llcito. Do que Ihe ^ei 
 c?e eu offerecer 1 Quer que eu o sirva de legumes ? Dfga-me 
 que edificios havemos de ver. Se elle vi^sse, comeria com- 
 n6sco. Se eu tive"sse cavallo, iria. Se tiv^sse noticias 
 d'elles, dar-lh'as-Aia. Se chovesse, V. S. nao devia ir. Se 
 eu tive"sse pod^r, as c6usas haviam de ir d'outro modo. 
 
 If he should do that, I would punish him. I shall not 
 go to Camacha on Monday. /Shall I help you to a little 
 roast-beef ? How much should I give him per day ? I shall 
 want you to-morrow at six o'clock. Shall you have time to 
 come with me ? Shall we go on Monday 1 I should like to 
 have a catalogue. I shall be much obliged to you. I should 
 like a glass of beer. Shall I light the fire 1 We shall not 
 be ready in time. It shall be done. If we were perfect, we 
 should be saints. Shall I have the honour of calling on you 
 to-morrow 1 If I had a good pony, I should go. He shall 
 have it next week. 
 
 * Implied in the form of the Portuguese verb, e.y. , I shall go, irei ; 
 / should go, iria. 
 
 N 
 
( 194 ) 
 LESSON CXCIV. 
 
 WILL, WOULD QU^RO, V6U, QUIZ. 
 
 Quer V. S. faze-lo, ou nao ? 
 Nao, eu nao que"ro. 
 P0tt-lhe mostrdr os quartos. 
 Nao o quiz fazer. 
 Isto 6 o que eu faria. 
 Se ella fro pedisse, dar-lh'o- 
 hfat 
 
 Witt you do it or not ? 
 
 No, I will not 
 
 I mil show you the rooms. 
 
 He would not do it. 
 
 This is what I'd do. 
 
 If she asked, would you give it ? 
 
 Quer almo9ar eomn6sco ? Quer cha ? Elle nao quer tra- 
 balhar. Terta de pedlr-lhe uma c6usa. Quer fazer-me um 
 obse'quio ? V6u ver. Creio que V. S. gostard d'este. Elle 
 hd de cd estdr quarta-feira. Fd-lo-hei com gosto. J^aree por 
 V. S. o que nao faria por ninguem. Espero que nao seja 
 ndda. Nao hd de dizer que nao. Quer tomar um c6po de 
 n6ve ? Quer Y. S. que eu v hoje ? Choverd, mas nao A< 
 c?e trovejdr. N6s nao Ihe pagaremos. Segiindo se guer. 
 Deixe-me passdr, eu hei de ir. Eu quero que V. M. 
 isto. 
 
 Will you go or not 1 I rc7Z tell him to come. Let me 
 pass. I will see my child. The man says he will send the 
 money to-morrow. He was very lazy, and would not write 
 the letter. The doctor says it will be nothing. I'll go and 
 see who is at the door. What would you have us do ? If I 
 were in your place, this is what I would do. Would you go, 
 if he invited you 1 In the evening, he would relate to us 
 his numerous adventures. Sometimes he would go at ten 
 o'clock. No, I will not. At night the old man would read 
 to us. I told him all, yet he would not believe me. 
 
( 195 ) 
 LESSON CXCV. 
 
 WILL HAVE, WOULD HAVE TEREI, TERfA, QUERfDO. 
 
 Teria escripto. 
 
 Iria,* teria ido. 
 
 EU qufro que elle obedea. 
 
 fille teria querldo casar-se. 
 
 N&o ganhaVa.f 
 
 Eu nao quize'ra que V. S. escre- 
 
 He would have written. 
 I would have gone. 
 I will have him obey. 
 He would have married. 
 I would not have gained. 
 I would not have you write. 
 
 Eu teria jantddo com V. S., porem a chiiva nao me 
 deixou. Peliisio, d'onde havia fazer-se o nosso embarque, 
 se Ses6stris nao acabara. Se tive"sse pedido D. Beatrlz a 
 v6sso pae, ^lle Ih'a houvera dddo por mulh^r. Ella teria 
 morrido, se nao f6sse, etc. N'lima regata de vap6res o n6sso 
 barco nao ganhdva t de ce"rto o pr^mio. Bern desejdva t eu 
 ser o portad6r, mas neg6cios dom^sticos me embara$am. Se 
 nao estiv^sse impedldo por doena, iria pessoalm^nte a casa 
 de Y. S. A nao ser Y. S., estdva perdido. 
 
 I would have paid him with pleasure, but he would not 
 take the money. Be that as it may. I will have my child 
 obey me. He would have liked to marry, but unfortunately 
 he had not the means. I would not have you write to him 
 any more, for he will not reply. Without doubt he would 
 have died, if it had not been for the kindness of the old 
 vicar. But for you, he would have been entirely ruined. I 
 should have liked to accompany you to Madeira, but press- 
 ing business prevents me. I should have dined with the 
 Duke, but the storm hindered me. 
 
 * " Iria" would go, is often used for " teria ido," would have gone. 
 t The imperfect is often used in this sense. 
 
( 196 ) 
 
 LESSON CXCYI. 
 "WILL" OR "SHALL" IN THE SENSE OF "MUST" OR 
 
 Se o fize"r, pagdr-lhe-hSi. 
 QuantolheMcfedar? 
 vinho hd de sfo barato este 
 
 que hei de corner ? 
 
 Que caminho hei de tomdr ? 
 
 Dar-lhe-he'i diias patacas. 
 
 If he does it, I must pay him. 
 What shall I have to give you ? 
 Wine will be cheap this year. 
 
 What shall I eat ? 
 What road must I take ? 
 ril give you two dollars. 
 
 Nao se sabe em que se hd de passar o tmpo. Se all Ihe 
 puder prestar algum servigo, fd-lo-hei com prazer. Qu^ndo 
 tiv^r sede, o que hei de beber ? Estimd-lo-hei muito, ficdr- 
 Ihe-hei agradecldo. jSr-me-hd Hcito perguntar-lhe ? Apedr- 
 nos-hemos aquil Sim, Senhdres, hao de ter bons quartos 
 e boas camas. V. S. hd de achdr os pregos mui razoareis. 
 Hd de almo$dr comn6sco. Que Ihe hei de dizer da gente ? 
 Para que lid de matar-se 1 A colheita hd de ser b6a. Os 
 vinhos hao de ser muito bons ste 4nno. A6nde havemos 
 de pardr para janUr ? 
 
 If he finishes the printing in three weeks, I shall pay 
 him more. How much shall I have to give the man ? Milk 
 will be much cheaper next year. What will the man drink ? 
 Which of these two roads shall I take ? I shall do it with 
 much pleasure. May I be permitted to inquire if you have 
 had good news from the Duke 1 You will find the prices at 
 the hotels very reasonable, but the rooms are not clean. 
 Where shall we stop to breakfast? When I am hungry, 
 what am I to eat? My friend, you will breakfast with me 
 this morning. I will give you ten dollars, nothing more. 
 
( 197 ) 
 LESSON CXCVII. 
 
 I HAVE JUST ACUBO* DE. 
 
 Acabdva de vir, quando. 
 Acdbo de o fazer. 
 Chego agfira mesmo. 
 Acabddo de publicar-se. 
 Acabdvam de concluir. 
 Acabdva V. S. de sair. 
 
 He had just come, when. 
 I have just done it. 
 I am just arrived. 
 Just published. 
 They had just finished. 
 You were just gone out. 
 
 Acdbo de tomdr lima chfcara de cafe*. T6rne a vir coser, 
 quando acabar * de brincar. Acabam de entrar. Nao fdqo 
 mdis que chegdr da Crimea. Os Musulmanos acabdvam de 
 conquistdr aquella parte da Africa. novo emir acabdu de 
 avassalldr o re"sto da Peninsula. Que h6ras sao ? Acdbam 
 de dar nove. Os Judeus acabdvam de receber a lei. 
 peixe acdba de chegdr. Este catdlogo acdba de ser publicado 
 hoje mesmo. Acabdvamos de comprar a casa quando Ihe 
 peg6u o f 6go. Acabdndo de dizer isto. 
 
 The mail has just arrived. I have just told you. Just 
 published, a History of Portugal, by A. Herculano. They 
 had just finished a beautiful drawing of the fortress, when 
 a shot was fired. I am sorry I cannot dine with you, as I 
 have just finished lunch. In reply to your kind letter, just 
 received. The books, to which I refer, have just been pub- 
 lished by Silva. The allies have just succeeded in forcing 
 the Russians to evacuate part of Sebastopol. We had just 
 bought the house, when it took fire. The lady had just 
 gone out when I called. Having just said these words, he 
 expired. 
 
 * This idiom literally means, "I finish of doing ; " and resembles the 
 French, " Je viens de faire." 
 
( 198 ) 
 LESSON CXCVHL 
 
 OUGHT D&VO, DEVfA. 
 
 Dtvo fazer o meu thema. 
 fille dtve estdr aqui 
 O vSrde d&e ir-lhe bem. 
 N&o dfoo duvidclr. 
 que devfa dizer. 
 
 I ought to do my theme. 
 He ought to be here. 
 Green ought to suit you well. 
 I ought not to doubt. 
 What I ought to say. 
 
 Devemos trabalhar e nao brincar. V. M. deve pensar 
 Antes de fallar. Aquelle que nao quer trabalhar nao deve 
 comer. Nao se deve deixar para amanha aquillo que se 
 p6de fazer h6je. A que h6ras deverei estar prompto ? Eu 
 nao duvido, nem devo duvidar. Na gu^rra o rei deve ser o 
 defens6r dos p6vos. E certo que se fosse verdadeiro, devia 
 ser adoptado. nome do Sr. F. deve ser nos tao caro, c6mo 
 se fdsse o de um compatri6ta n6sso. fiste catalogo que deve 
 considerar-se como um supplemento. 
 
 These boys ought to work, and not to play. Every one 
 ought to think before speaking. He who will not work, 
 ought not to eat. This book ought to be considered as an 
 answer. If my plan is good, it ought to be adopted. The 
 interests of these children ought not to be sacrificed. Such 
 people ought not to be admitted into good society. He 
 neither doubts, nor ought to doubt. At what hour ought 
 the boat to be ready? The king ought always to be the 
 defender of his country. That ought never to be left for 
 to-morrow, which can be done to-day. You ought to go to 
 Madeira in time. 
 
( 199 ) 
 LESSON CXCIX. 
 
 MUST DVO, SR PRECISO, MISTER, ETC. 
 
 D$w comer. 
 
 E prectso que elle sgja doudo. 
 
 E mister separar-nos. 
 
 Preciso levantar-me. 
 Preciso que me faa, etc. 
 
 I must eat. 
 
 He must be mad. 
 
 We must part. 
 
 I must rise. 
 
 You must make me, etc. 
 
 Ag6ra deve tomar uma chicara de cafe". Predso lavar as 
 maos. Preciso ir-me emb6ra. fi preciso irmos vestldas em 
 c6rpo. Devo tomdr a direita ou d esquerda? Devo fazer 
 aqulllo? Ca^arei as b6tas, porque deve faz^r lama. Ser& 
 mister que me faa 6utro par. Serd preciso que eu l^ve a 
 comida dmanha 1 Elles devem t^r vlndo nmi m6gos para a 
 Inglat^rra. Devemos morrer todos. E mister que leve este 
 rol. Preciso que isso ese/a prompto para qulnta-felra. A 
 que h6ras deverei estar prompto 1 Deve ser urn prazer r^gio. 
 
 I must write. You must cut my hair. They must learn. 
 He must have been a handsome man. If you do not wish 
 to lose the friendship of your uncle, you ought to act other- 
 wise. He must be a fool, when he acts in that manner. 
 We must part, for the steamer goes in an hour. You must 
 make me a pair of stout boots. Now, you must take a glass 
 of wine and water. I must wash my hands. We must go 
 in full dress. Must I take the right hand or the left ? At 
 this price they must be very good. What must be given to 
 the coachman ? 
 
( 200 ) 
 LESSON CC. 
 
 THERE IS, HERE IS HA, TEM, EIS-AQUl 
 
 Ha um homem. 
 Havia um soldado. 
 Nao ha perigo. 
 Nao tern pressa. 
 Ha seis mezes que estou aqni. 
 qum o veja. 
 
 There is a man. 
 
 There was a soldier. 
 
 There is no danger. 
 
 There is no hurry. 
 
 I have been here six months. 
 
 You are quite a stranger. 
 
 Ha d6is annos que o nao vejo. Tres dias ha que eu a vi. 
 Ha miiito tempo que nao tnho o g&sto de v6r a V. S. Ha 
 alguma c6usa de novo ? Nao ha t^mpo a perder. Ha cartas 
 para mim? Devo ter lima c4rta no escanfnho. Eis-aqui 
 Ifndos aventaes de seda. Aqul os tern lindlsstmos. Eis-aqui 
 o que eu aborre^o. Ha alguma esperan9a? Eis-ms aqui. 
 Nada ha tao perigoso como a ma companbia. Eis-aqui um 
 amigo meu. Ha b6mens. Que tempo ha que V. S. esta no 
 Funchal 1 Ha um mez que elle esta doente. 
 
 There will always be poor in the world. If there should 
 be any one . If there were but two horses. How long 
 have you been in Oporto ? There is nothing so injurious to 
 the invalid as excitement. She has been very ill for two 
 months. Cronstadt is one of the strongest fortresses that 
 exist. There is no hurry. I shall send it to-morrow. Here 
 are some very fine books for sale. Is there anything new in 
 the paper to-day? Are there any letters for my father? I 
 have been five years in the island. 
 
( 201 ) 
 
 LESSON CGI. 
 
 ADVERBS OF PLACE. 
 
 6nde ? por onde ? aonde ? para 
 
 6nde ? embora ? 
 Aqui, ahf, d'ahi, all, por aquf. 
 
 Alem, cd, Id, acold, acima. 
 
 Cerca, dentro, f6ra, diUnte, 
 atras. 
 
 Where ] which way ? whither 
 
 Here, there, thence, yonder, 
 this way. 
 
 Beyond, here, there, over there, 
 up. 
 
 Round, within, out, before, be- 
 hind. 
 
 (hide 6* a casa de ? V6nha cd. Va-se embora. Eu 
 aqui est6u bem. Venha por aqui. V&por ahi. Passe por 
 all. Venha d'aqui a pouco. Vamos a p4 ate" Id. Por onde 
 vamos 1 Eis-a<2w lima linda vista. Ha clnco annos para 
 cd. Mo se mova d'ahi. Fique ahi. Voltemos pdra trdz. 
 Adnde vae o rapaz? Uaqui a alguns dlas. T6rne atrdz. 
 D'aqui pdra ali. Aqui dentro. D'aqui por didnte. Dentro 
 em tr^s dias. Tern saido f6ra. Tenho gente de fora. 
 Janta fora. Mandar algugm adidnte. De hoje em didnte. 
 Deixar alguem atrdz. Alem d'isso. 
 
 Where is the church? Let us go on horseback. Here 
 is a beautiful watch. Where is your master ? Stay here. 
 He goes out. My friend lives there. Which way did he 
 go ? From hence forward. He has company. My friend 
 is dining out. Besides this. The church is far from this. 
 Near land. It is near mid-day. The gentleman is not 
 within. Nearly five years ago. I shall return within three 
 weeks. My master dines out to-day, not far from this. 
 Let us go up. He went down. After that, he went away. 
 
( 202 ) 
 
 LESSON CCIL 
 
 ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 
 Qudndo, algumas vezes, desde. 
 Sempre, cedo, tarde, p&ra sem- 
 
 Nunca, ta"ntas vezes, muitas 
 vezes, rdras vezes, outra vez. 
 
 Ag6ra, &ntes, depois, entao. 
 
 Hoje, hontem, hdntem pela 
 manhci. 
 
 When, sometimes, since. 
 Always, soon, late, for ever. 
 
 Never, so often, often, seldom, 
 
 again. 
 
 Now, before, after, then. 
 To-day, yesterday, yesterday 
 
 morning. 
 
 Qudndo vde o vapor 1 Apenas tinha saido, qudndo a casa 
 cafa. Hoje em dia. De qudndo em qudndo. Desde entao. 
 Devernos sempre fazer o n6sso dever. Muito cedo. Amar 
 para sempre. Ouvi-o dizer outfora. Eu Antes quererla n6zes. 
 Vde-se fazendo tdrde. Mdis do que nunca. Agora quer 
 uma c6usa, agora qu^r outra. Antes morrer que ser traidor. 
 Voltei tres mezes depois. Hontem foi dia santo em t6do o 
 logar. Levante-se jd. jd tempo. Jd vou. Jd se foi o 
 seu me'stre ? Estive Id hontem p^la manha. Logo vou. 
 Logo que receberdes 4sta vlnde ver-me. 
 
 When does he return 1 He had hardly gone, when he fell. 
 I see him from time to time. Till now. He will rather die 
 than work. He is sometimes in town in the morning. 
 Always get up early. Since then I have seldom seen him 
 here. I shall write to you to-day or to-morrow. It is grow- 
 ing late ; I must go home. He will give it you now. Yes- 
 terday was the first day of the month. He prefers fish. It 
 is time to write that letter. I am coming directly. As soon 
 as he died. Formerly so full of life. 
 
( 203 ) 
 LESSON CCIII. 
 
 ADVERBS OF QUANTITY AND NUMBER. 
 
 Tao quao ; lima vez, (Mas vezes. 
 Miii, mais, menos, tilnto quanto. 
 
 Assas, apenas, tanto qu&nto 
 demasiado, em quanto. 
 
 Quasi, de nenhum modo, s6. 
 
 Cerca, as vezes, as mais das 
 vezes. 
 
 So as ; once, twice. 
 
 Much, more, less, as much as. 
 
 Enough, hardly, so much as, 
 too much, while. 
 
 Almost, not at all, only. 
 
 About, at times, most fre- 
 quently. 
 
 Nao va tdo depre"ssa. Tao alto e too branco. Tanto 
 melh6r. Tdnto pei6r. Tanto por tdnto. Se elle fosse tdo 
 prudente quao atrevido. Eiz isso tres vezes. Nem mais nem 
 menos. Qu^r comer mdis ? Sao quasi de"z h6ras. Qudnto 
 16 va pela passdgem 1 Mui agradavel. Pouco mdis on menos. 
 Nao se acha menos. Adiantar-se-ha gudnto poder. Qudnto 
 em mim f6r. Def^ndo-o qudnto p6sso. Em quanto a este 
 homem. castigo par^ce-nos demasiddo sevdro. Em qudnto 
 durar o miindb. Ha qudsi um mez. De mdis a mdis. Em 
 qudnto ao mdis. Comprido de mdis. 
 
 He goes too fast. This man is so tall. If you come 
 with us, so much the better. If she were as good as she is 
 beautiful. He is sixty years, neither more nor less. I 
 found myself minus. How much did you pay for this book ? 
 He will write as much as he can. As to this country, I 
 think it beautiful. While the world lasts, there will be 
 good and bad men. I shall help you as far as in me lies. 
 It is nearly a year. I have not even a dollar. It is almost 
 four o'clock. His conduct is not at all agreeable. So much 
 the worse. The cholera raged, so that it threatened to 
 destroy all. 
 
( 204 ) 
 LESSON CCIV. 
 
 ADVERBS OF MANNER AND QUALITY. 
 
 Sim, ce"rtamente, na verdacle, 
 N&o, ainda nSo, nada, nada 
 
 menoa. 
 
 Assfm, por acdso, assim mesmo. 
 C6mo, bem, mal, melh6r, peior. 
 Talvez, p6de sr, porventiira. 
 Devagar, depre"ssa. 
 
 Yes, certainly, indeed. 
 
 No, not yet, nothing, nothing 
 
 So, by chance, just so. 
 How, well, ill, better, worse. 
 Perhaps, may be, perchance. 
 Slowly, fast. 
 
 Creio que sim. Dlgo que ndo. Fagamos assim. lle 
 ndo me disse ndda. Ndo o crelo. Ainda ndo acab6u? 
 Como diz V. S.? Ndo 16 bem. V. S. ndo &nda nada. 
 Como se chama isto ? ]Elle falla devagdr. Talvez ndo seja 
 necessario. Mtiito bem, estarel pr&mpto. Estimo mtiito que 
 assim acontecsse. Como assim ? Assim seja. Como que"r 
 que sejal Morrer como miliUr. Ferido c6mo estdva, 
 f allou. 6ra bem. Bern pduco. Muito bem f eito. De mal 
 para peior. Mal disposto. Ndo ha nada melh6r. Cdda 
 vez melhor. Esta peior. Nao p6de ser. Yamos devagdr. 
 
 I say so. I believe not. Let him do so. I cannot go 
 yet. The boy does not write well. Perhaps he will return 
 to-morrow. So be it ; I am quite ready. He wishes to die 
 as a soldier. Ill as he was, he wrote a long letter. There 
 is nothing better than pure water. Let us go back quickly. 
 He grows better and better. Whatever be the case, I must 
 go to Lisbon. The work is very well done. I am glad that 
 he is so well. Go quicTdy. I have not seen it yet. Let him 
 do so. The work is very well done. The poor are behaving 
 worse and worse. Charles does not speak well in public. 
 
( 205 ) 
 LESSON CCV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES USED FOR ADVERBS. 
 
 Sinto infiriito. 
 
 Rdro pr^gava. 
 
 Disse ella bdixo. 
 
 Doce tanges, doce cantas. 
 
 Falla cldro e distincto. 
 Fallava rijo. 
 
 I regret very much. 
 He rarely preached. 
 She said in a low voice. 
 Sweetly thou playest, sweetly 
 
 singest. 
 
 He speaks clearly and distinctly. 
 He was speaking aloud. 
 
 Desprezando ingrdta e descuiddda os mfmos com que foi 
 tratada. Queira V. S. aceitar benigno a expressao de meu 
 sincere Iouv6r. tlma tal sociedade 4 a sentin^lla que vigia 
 cautettsa em torno, eiz Tenho a h6nra de dizer-lhe que me 
 aproveitarei gostdso dos sus offerecimentos. Sentlndo in- 
 finito a dor que tao justamente afflige a V. S. Minha mulh^r 
 se reconh^ce agradecida. F61go infinite de ter uma occasiao 
 de ser util a V. S. Ellas viviam seguras e quietas. Sentiu 
 infimto a m6rte do seu amigo. Elle falla bdixo. 
 
 "Will you kindly accept this trifle ? I rejoice extremely to 
 have it in my power to be of use to you. I shall avail my- 
 self with pleasure of your kindness. He watches carefully 
 around. The monk rarely preaches. I grieve very much. 
 Despising ungratefully the offers I made. I feel very much 
 the grief which, etc. He spoke very slowly. I rejoice much 
 to hear of your good fortune. He lives quietly and securely 
 in a cottage. Will you kindly excuse the trouble I give 
 you 1 I shall avail myself gratefully of your kindness. 
 
( 206 ) 
 LESSON CCVL 
 
 PHRASEOLOGY OF ADVERBS. 
 
 Cd e 1, por 6ra. 
 Para cd e pslra Id, sobretiido. 
 Jd la, jd ag6ra, jd entao. 
 Jd ha dias, jd jd ; jim, jim. 
 
 Aquf dentro, at6 aqui, ate ahi. 
 Ainda nao, algum tanto. 
 
 Hither and thither, at present 
 Up and down, above all. 
 Done with, now, even then. 
 Some days ago, quickly ; yes, 
 
 yes. 
 
 Within, to this, to that time. 
 Not yet, rather. 
 
 De ha cinco annos pdra cd. Desde entdo para cd sempre 
 cri que, etc. A hisixSria dos tempos que jd Id vao. Estas 
 b6tas sao grandes de mdis. As s61as nao sao bastdnte fortes. 
 D'aqui a tres mezes. Isso jd Id vai. Ld se foi tiido. Jd 
 Id vai o tempo. Jd me lembro. Isso hontem seria bom, jd 
 agora 6 superfluo. Nbjdjd! Aqui jaz. D'aqui a algiins 
 dlas. D'ali a dois dias. Ao longe pelos compos. D'ahi a 
 POILCO parecea-me ouvfr a v6z. Jd ch6ra, jd se ri, jd se 
 enf ur^ce. Alc&ntara, onde jd entdo havia uma p6nte, pduco 
 mdis on menos como a de hoje. 
 
 Go very quickly. Some days hence. Now I remember. 
 The higher you go, the colder it gets. This dress is rather 
 short Three months hence I shall go to England. He 
 promotes directly or indirectly the instruction of the people. 
 Morally and socially speaking. Some days ago, I was walk- 
 ing in the Praa. Yesterday food would have been welcome ; 
 to-day it is useless. Even then there was a bridge and a 
 small house. I cannot go at present. This paper is too 
 large. The soles of my boots are not strong enough. They 
 will go to England within three months. The history of 
 days gone by. 
 
( 207 ) 
 LESSON CCVIL 
 
 ADVERBIAL PHRASES. 
 
 ApSnas, mal, t&nto que. 
 Assim que elle sepultou seu pae. 
 
 Yeiu ver-me assim que chegou. 
 Em chegfoido i p6rta. 
 
 Hardly, scarcely, as soon as. 
 As soon as he had buried his 
 
 father. 
 He came to see me as soon as 
 
 he arrived. 
 As soon as I had arrived at the 
 
 door. 
 
 fille correu a mim ap&nas me avist6u. Ella apenas o vfra 
 desapparecer no arco, safra detraz do reposteiro. Apenas 
 descavalg6u, deu varias 6rdens. JElle foi roubado pelos 
 Berberescos, qu^ndo apenas contava cinco annos. "M^u 
 criado" gritou Brltes apenas me viu. Apenas cheg6u a 
 Tunis, foi elle comprado por 6rdem do bei. Mai se p6dem 
 ler sem horror. besteiro apenas entr6u encaminhou-se 
 para uma chamin^. Os recursos do pastor apenas chegavam 
 para sustentar as cri^ngas. 
 
 As soon as he had dined, he went out. They could hardly 
 stand. They hesitated, as soon as they saw me. Hardly 
 had the horse come, when he was bought. No sooner had 
 they left the regiment, than they became the victims of the 
 guerillas. The soldier no sooner entered the room, than he 
 took a seat near the fire. If I do not get up as soon as I 
 awake, I fall asleep again. He had hardly entered the 
 house, when the assassin stabbed him. No sooner had the 
 ship struck, than all order was at an end. He lost his sight 
 when he was hardly six years old. He paid the money as 
 soon as he came. 
 
( 208 ) 
 LESSON CCYIIL 
 
 SENAO, ETC. 
 
 Senao,* menos, so, nao mais do 
 
 que. 
 
 Ninguem sendo meu pae. 
 Mais nada senao 
 Tiido, mSnos lima affronta. 
 Nao tenho senao 
 Nao tern mais do que dizer. 
 Nao ha form6sa sem sendo. 
 
 But, less, only, only. 
 
 No one but my father. 
 Nothing more, except 
 All but an affront. 
 I have nothing but 
 You have only to say. 
 No beauty without a but. 
 
 Eu esque'cer-me-hia de tiido menos de um am6r piiro e 
 ardente. Nao se esta senao ao pe* do hime. Elle nao tern 
 outra ciilpa sendo a de ter obedecido a lei do prophe"ta. 
 Ninguem nos ve sendo Deus. Nao tenho sendo papel 
 ordinario. Tiido 6 merecedor de respeito, menos o infeliz 
 que vos falla. Nao ach^i sendo homens. Nao esp4ro sendo 
 pelas suas 6rdens. Nao 90 6utra c6usa sendo tosslr. Nao 
 ^ sendo um aguaceiro. Nao faz sendo conversar. Nao 
 qu^ro escrever sendo um bilhete. Nao entrei sendo para 
 saber como estava Y. S. 
 
 It is nothing but water. I only eat twice a day. A 
 miserable system is that of those who admit no other light 
 than that of reason. We have here but five loaves. It is 
 nothing but an invention. This excellent man had nothing 
 but a limited income. The letter contained nothing but the 
 usual words. During the whole three days. I did nothing 
 but write to Laura. He leaves nothing but ruins. He 
 knows no mother but me. He has nothing but an old coat. 
 They have only a very small salary. He had no fault but 
 laziness. 
 
 * "Se nao" means if not; as "lilies mdstram se nao mutua ami- 
 zacle, ao mnos mtituo respeito." 
 
( 209 ) 
 LESSON CCIX 
 
 THAT DE QUE.* 
 
 Sem se lembrarem de que.ir 
 fiste sera o signal de que, etc. 
 Nao sou digno de que entres 
 
 na, etc. 
 
 Nao ha de que.$ 
 Pea que Ihe d6-em de * beber. 
 
 Without remembering that. 
 This shall be the sign that. 
 I am not worthy that you, etc. 
 
 That is nothing. 
 
 Call for something * to drink. 
 
 Com a differenca de que o periodo conta-se por annos. 
 Kecordei-me de que ja nem pae nem irma tinha. Elle dava 
 visiveis signaes de que o seu cora9ao nao estava sereno. 
 Avisa-lo-hei de que deve comparecer. Queixavam-se os 
 p6vos de que o abbade mandava, etc. Vasco tremia de que 
 o segredo fatal Ihe escapasse. Todos se queixavam de que 
 os tempos nao e"ram pr6speros. Esta ce"rto de que os len^oes 
 estejam bem seccos ? Sem se lembrarem de que o me'dico 
 disse hontem 4 tarde. Sinto muito queixar-me de que o 
 secretario escreveu. Estou perfeitamente segiiro de que 
 estou dizendo a verdade. 
 
 He remembered that he had invited the General and two 
 friends to dinner. I am not certain that the sheets are dry. 
 He will convince himself that his faith is weak. Without 
 my remembering that the man had gone. This shall be the 
 sign that I send thee. If I remember what the old man told 
 us. Impressed with the conviction that associations are 
 a powerful element, etc. I am convinced that your creditor 
 will not pay the fifty pounds. Be sure that the bed is well- 
 aired. I remembered that he had lost his brother at Cawn- 
 pore. 
 
 * De, etc. De que often means " something," as " De-me de que 
 beb6r," " Give me something to drink." 
 
 t Que is pronounced qu& when it finishes a sentence, as in " Nao ha 
 de qu$; " otherwise it is pronounced que (e mute), as in "Ndo sou digno 
 de que &ntres na" etc. 
 
 I Equal to " Pray don't mention it," or "It's not worth mentioning." 
 
 O 
 
( 210 ) 
 LESSON OCX. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS OF EXISTENCE AND STATE. 
 
 Em. 
 
 Sobre, sob, entre. 
 Ante, apos, contra. 
 Com, sSm. 
 Dentro de. 
 
 In, on, at, into. 
 
 Upon, under, between, an, at. 
 
 Before, after, against. 
 
 With, without. 
 
 Within. 
 
 No inve*rno. Em casa. Em gue*rra. Em me*thodo bre"ve. 
 Em consciencia. Em p6nto. Em L&ndres. Esta em si. 
 Fic6u em te"rra. Estfve em Africa. Vai em biisca d'elle. 
 Em puni^ao dos seus peccados. De um em 6utro. Em 
 acabando, irei. Nos nossos tempos. De nia em riia. Esta 
 sobre a mesa. Sdbre longa consideragao. T6ma sdbre si a 
 culpa. Sob a figiira de Mentor. Sob seu ampdro. fintre 
 umas arvores. ntre n6s fique o segredo. Le a carta para 
 si. Fa-lo-hei com prazer. Sem ceremdnia. Com tantas 
 attengoes. Ante os 61hos. 
 
 At all times. In Paris. In England. From door to door. 
 Straws formed into a flower. In three days. It is in the 
 drawer. In proof of his friendship. Above our strength. 
 The Queen reigns over the people. The war in Asia. He 
 went from one to the other. The book is on the table. Hav- 
 ing dined, I shall go out. Your friend is not himself. He 
 will do it with much pleasure. He will pay in advance. The 
 man voted against me. Without saying a word. Without 
 delay. Without reason. He dines at the inn. He is at 
 home. Amongst friends. I shall be there within an hour. 
 
( 211 ) 
 LESSON CCXI. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS OF ACTION. 
 
 De ; dsde ; por. 
 
 For. 
 
 A ; ate" ; para. 
 
 At esse p6nto. 
 
 PaTa com. 
 
 Of, from, by, than ; since ; by. 
 Through, by means of. 
 To, at ; till ; for ; towards. 
 So far, to this point. 
 Towards. 
 
 Pe^o-lhe por fav6r. P&las siias 6rdens. Da minha parte. 
 Se eu vie"r por Coimbra. Vein de Er&nc,a. Da choup&na 
 ao palacio. Em menos de tres annos. Em vasos de metal. 
 Cheio d'agua. p6bre do h6mem. P6rtas de 6uro. E de 
 Lisboa. Edigao para uso do Colle'gio. Elle saiu de casa. 
 Desde entao. Desde as tres h6ras ate as qudtro. De dia. 
 Capdz de ensindr. Vivr de p^ixe. Saltar de alegria. 
 Diante de mim. De madrugada. Elle se aparta do seu 
 dever. Do Funchal a Machico ha tr^s l^guas. A julzo do 
 cirurgiao. Irei a Londres. 
 
 A marble statue.* A writing-master. I learned it ly 
 heart. One by one. From Madrid to Lisbon. Till that 
 moment. He must go to Santarem. From man to man. 
 The thief of a boy ! I shall return through Germany in 
 less than four months. Your friend is from Spain. At 
 three o'clock. He is of a good family. A windmill. They 
 live on fish. In the opinion of the lawyer. From Eunchal 
 to the Mount. He will go to Braganza. I must do my 
 duty towards my pupils. Since then I have not seen him. 
 The poor woman ! 
 
 * Such forms are translated as if " statue of marble." 
 
( 212 ) 
 
 LESSON CCXII. 
 
 USES OF "PARA." 
 
 Vae para Franca. 
 O amor para com o fillio. 
 Trabalho para ganhar. 
 Para o dia seguinte. 
 Esta para partir. 
 Miiito bom pdra urn princi- 
 piante. 
 
 He is going to France. 
 
 Love for the son. 
 
 I work to gain. 
 
 For the following day. 
 
 He is about to start 
 
 Very good for a beginner. 
 
 You pdra Lisb6a. Vae para casa d'ella. Esta pdra 
 chover. Que"ro os sapatos pdra hoje. Habilidade pdra as 
 letras. Pdra dentro do mar. Uma viagem pdra as Indias. 
 pdra confirmacao d'esta verdade. Tenho h6ra dada pdra 
 tratar de neg6cios. Deus sabe pdra que. Pdra a 6utra 
 T^Z. Von tocar pdra saber. Agua quente pdra lavarmos 
 as maos. Para cima. Elle nao presta pdra nada. Pdra 
 que V. S. o saiba. De mim pdra mim. Ha oito pdra n6ve 
 annos. 6lhe pdra mim. Pdra a outra parte. Vestidos 
 pdra os hospedes. 
 
 This house is for the Countess. This pencil is for draw- 
 ing. He is strong enough to walk. He is not the man for 
 that. A house for the poor. John works for the public 
 good. On the other side. Towards the end of the month. 
 Much advanced for his age. "We are just going to start. 
 He is gone upstairs. They have gone down. Towards the 
 south. For the future. A child of eight to ten years. 
 Four or five leagues of. A remedy for all diseases. He 
 went off to France. This book is for a beginner. 
 
( 213 ) 
 LESSON CCXIII. 
 
 USES OF "FOR."* 
 
 Os males causados por Joao. 
 For toda a Asia ; por porta. 
 
 Por anno, mez, semana, dia. 
 Por dez annos ; por culpado. 
 Feito por f6ra, por vergonha. 
 A obra esta por fazer. 
 
 The evils caused by John. 
 Throughout Asia ; through the 
 
 gate. 
 
 Per annum, month, week, day. 
 For tea years ; as guilty. 
 Done by force, out of shame. 
 The work is not done. 
 
 Por ag6ra. Ir por vfoho. Palavra por palavra. Trocar 
 vfnho por azeite. Por d6uto que seja. Por mim, ficarei 
 aqui Por todo o reino. Y. S. nao o tera por m4nos de de"z 
 patdcas. Eu passarei por Portugal. A razao de vfote por 
 cento. Deixaram-n'o^ormorto. Eu tenho-o pormeu amfgo. 
 Por mar e por terra. Vae j?^o medico. Por exemplo. Por 
 inveja. Por toda a vida. Reputado por sabio. ^ n&te 
 irei por siia casa. P&jo-lhe pela n^ssa amizdde. Um vale 
 por miiitos. Eu intercedi por Scipiao. A obra fic6u por 
 acabar. Pelas duas h6ras da tarde. 
 
 For the space of a year. For money. For a hundred 
 and -sixty dollars a year. By the force of friendship. By 
 this letter. We must go for water. He exchanges wine for 
 bread. As for me, I shall go. I'll not give the book for 
 less than five dollars. He pays at the rate of ten per cent. 
 He returns to Germany by France. I shall call on you about 
 four this afternoon. We must send for the doctor. How- 
 ever rich he may be. Done by John, Fifty pounds per 
 annum. For many ages. For two pounds. Out of spite. 
 He translates verbally. The robbers left him for dead. 
 
 * " P6r" is a verb ; "por," a preposition. 
 
( 214 ) 
 LESSON CCXIV. 
 
 PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES WITH "DE." 
 
 Antes,* dilute,* dentro, detrdz. 
 Debdixo, em cima (a cima), 
 
 diem, atrdz. 
 Defronte, dcerca, a r6da, em 
 
 r6da. 
 Depdis, ao redor, em torno, ao 
 
 longo, abaixo. 
 
 Before, before, within, after. 
 Under, upon, beyond, behind, 
 
 Facing, about, round, around. 
 
 After, round, in turn, along, 
 below. 
 
 Antes do seu nascimento. Antes de qufnta feira. Didnte 
 de mim. Didnte do Rei. Dentro do seu palacio. Dentro 
 do meu coragao. Dentro do anno. Dentro da cidade. De- 
 trdz da p6rta. Detrdz do palacio. Alem d'isso. Leia didnte 
 de mim. Debdixo da mesa. Depdis de ceia. Depois de 
 tantas prome'ssas. Depdis de Cicero. Depois d'amanha. 
 Depdis de jantar. Fora da casa. Estar defronte de outro. 
 Na roda do anno. Fora da graga. Fora de perigo. Fora 
 de tempo. Acerca do miiro. Acerca d'Sste neg6cio. Perto 
 do rio. Perto de tres h6ras. 
 
 Before the creation. Before the house. He stood "before 
 the fire. After the flood. Behind me. Within the house. 
 Out of the kingdom. Out of town. Out of doors. Beyond 
 measure. Behind the house. Under the chair. After 
 dinner. After so much work. Near the house. Facing 
 the church. He went round the house. Along the sea-coast. 
 Oyer his head. Upon the table. .From ojf the chair. He 
 sat below them. He is out of danger. I told him about this. 
 Near ten o'clock. Beside me. From beyond the river. Be- 
 yond sea. Under the show of friendship. Before breakfast. 
 
 * "Antes" is before as to time; "diante " is before as to place or 
 person. 
 
 ^ 
 
( 215 ) 
 
 LESSON CCXV. 
 
 PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES WITH "A.' 
 
 Junto, junto a. 
 
 Pegado, na casa pegdda. 
 
 Qu^nto. 
 
 Ate. 
 
 Conforme, segiindo. 
 
 Tocante. 
 
 Close, near. 
 
 Near, next door. 
 
 As to. 
 
 Till. 
 
 According to, suitable. 
 
 Touching, regarding. 
 
 A mfnha casa esta junta a siia. Junta a cidade. Pe- 
 gddo as cousas do mundo. Pegddo aos jardins de Ce"sar. 
 Quanta a disputa. Triste ate a m6rte. Isso agrada ate 
 aos brutos. Ingrato ate ao pae. Desde as dez h6ras ate as 
 onze. Ate aos 61hos. Ate a primeira. Julg6u conforms as 
 leis. Viver conforme aos dictates da razao. Nada s^i 
 tocdnte ao assiimpto. Segundo S. Jer6nymo. Na casa 
 pegdda a minha. Junto as margens do mar. Esta Hsta 
 SQT& junta aos estatiitos. Qudnto a esse p6nto. Conforme 
 a Hsta do governad6r. 
 
 the month of June. As to this subject. According 
 to your orders. According to the promise he made. He 
 knows absolutely nothing in relation to the subject in ques- 
 tion. The governor's palace is near the fortress of St. George. 
 The prince was ungrateful, even to his father. As to the 
 dispute, I think I shall leave it in the hands of the governor. 
 I shall stay at home till four o'clock. His quinta (villa) 
 is very near the sea-shore. I know nothing relative to the 
 subject of which you speak. We ought to act according 
 to the dictates of reason. You must judge according to the 
 laws. 
 
( 216 ) 
 LESSON CCXVL 
 
 PREPOSITION WITHOUT " A " OR " DE." 
 
 A, ate. 
 
 Com, conforme, contra. 
 Dura"nte, de, desde. 
 fintre, em, segiindo, salvo. 
 
 Para, por, perante, sob. 
 Sobre, de traz, s6m, tocante. 
 
 At, till. 
 
 With, according to, against. 
 
 During, of, since. 
 
 Between, in, according to, ex- 
 
 cept. 
 
 For, by, before, under. 
 Upon, behind, without, about. 
 
 Vou a Londres. Kao chegarei a tempo. Nao sei montar 
 a cavdllo. D'aqul a tres dias. A seu g6sto. Ao principio. 
 fille foi a casa. Cara a cara. Ate Roma. Ate as orelhas. 
 Com a ajiida cT um amigo. Com cortezia. Com armas pro- 
 hibidas. Conforme o meu parecer. Conforme o seu mereci- 
 mSnto. Fallou contra mim. Contra a siia yontade. Du- 
 rdnte o inve'rno. Yem de Lisboa. fille foi a p^ dtede o 
 Funchal ate Camacho. Desde o primeiro ate o ultimo. 
 Conforme este piano. Desde o bergo. Sem dinheiro. Para 
 mim. Em Paris, fintre n6s. Perdnte o juiz. 
 
 I shall return to Spain. The house is on the right hand. 
 He goes on foot. They travel by night. He lives in Lon- 
 don. He speaks with elegance. According to their prin- 
 ciples. The day after. According to his custom. I saw 
 him face to face. Dinner is already on the table. During 
 fourteen years. To the east and to the north. Except 
 Arragon and Navarre. Under the feet. According to this 
 plan. According to the indications. From that period. 
 From the beginning to the end. He is at his ease. He 
 lives in the English fashion. A man between twenty and 
 thirty years of age. 
 
( 217 ) 
 LESSON CCXVII. 
 
 PREPOSITIONAL IDIOMS. 
 
 Em Ihe morrendo o pae. 
 Nao podemos ir de botas. 
 Sem Irmos vestidas em corpo/ 
 Precfsa tomd-lo em jejtim. 
 Sem apparato nem ostentaQao. 
 Ptllo que me toca. 
 
 As soon as his father is dead. 
 We can't go in boots. 
 Without going in full dress. 
 It must be taken fasting. 
 Without form or show. 
 As far as I am concerned. 
 
 Precfsa ir de sapatos. Em n6ssa procura. Um doutor 
 em leis. Tomar de renda. For maos violentas em Joao. 
 Bosquejar ao lapis. Yende a peso. Pagavel d vista. Gente 
 havida por incapaz de enganar. A sessenta dias vista. A 
 minha espe"ra. filles g6stam de ordr em pe nas Synag6gas. 
 Ao alcdnce de toda a gente. Nao ha obra, por grande que 
 se'ja, que se nao p6ssa encurtar. Servir de segiindo pae. Em 
 eu tendo b6a cama. Sem mostrdr vaiddde nem sob^rba. 
 Caindo em t^rra. Em acaba"ndo, irei. Os h6mens feitos d 
 imdgem de Deus. Jantdr na riia. 
 
 He comes to (em) his assistance. Blindfold. Waiting for 
 us. Above the level of the sea. By good fortune. From 
 sea to sea. You must take that medicine fasting. Your 
 brother is a doctor of laws. They laid violent hands on the 
 treasures in the palace. You cannot go to court in boots. 
 In search of you. To dine in the open air. I gave him a 
 bill at sixty days' sight. This book is published at a price 
 within reach of everybody. The General ordered the troops 
 to march at night. He leaps for joy. I am dying of hunger. 
 He is low-legged. As soon as I have done, he may go. 
 
 * Literally, "in .body." 
 
( 218 ) 
 LESSON CCXVIII. 
 
 PHRASEOLOGY PREPOSITIONS AND NOUNS. 
 
 A pre"ssa, a rios, aos centos. 
 A logares, a condi9ao de que. 
 jL pena de, aos montoes, a 
 
 pdrte, a proposito. 
 Ao presente, a tempo, a miudo, 
 
 ao menos. 
 As ave"ssas, a final, a b6rdo, 
 
 a espera. 
 
 Fast, in streams, in hundreds. 
 In places, on condition that. 
 On pain of, in heaps, aside, by 
 
 the by (apropos). 
 At present, in time, often, at 
 
 least. 
 Upside-down, finally, on board, 
 
 in wait, or waiting. 
 
 A fdlta de chiivas. Morto d Idnea. fiste rfo em logares 
 tern dez brfigas de fundo. Elle desc6bre ao longe dois h6mens. 
 DeVo tomar d direita ou d esquerda ? Ffca-me o pe mais d 
 vontdde. Yamos a pe. Yae d roda do mundo. Ao proprio. 
 rei estava n'esse tempo n a flor da idade. Com muito 
 praz^r. A primeira vista. A tdda a pressa. Ao principio. 
 Ao romper do dfa. Rio dbdixo. A proposito do que V. S. 
 diz. Nao obstdnte isto, dmbos eram, etc. Eu estou na 
 cama, mas o v^lho estd de cama. Est^mos d espera. Escre" ve 
 a proposito. Fora de proposito. 
 
 Round his heart. Little by little he lost all his money. 
 Down the river. Apropos of what he was saying. They 
 arrived in time. They all spoke at once. They went on 
 foot. This river, in places, is very deep. The man is in the 
 prime of life. The boat went down the river. Notwithstand- 
 ing this, both were in bed. The men were in hundreds. He 
 came on purpose. The fields suffer for want of rain. The 
 ship has gone round the world. At first sight he fled. At 
 break of day the ship went down the river. 
 
( 219 ) 
 LESSON CCXIX. 
 
 PHRASEOLOGY PREPOSITIONS, ADJECTIVES, AND NOUNS. 
 
 De proposito, improvise, de 
 
 qiuindo em quando. 
 De salto, vagar, c6r, 
 
 caminho. 
 Em 6rdem, fim, cima, 
 
 casa. 
 De todo, sem falta, em pe. 
 
 On purpose, suddenly, from 
 
 time to time. 
 By starts, slowly, by heart, on 
 
 the way. 
 In order, in short, above, at 
 
 home. 
 Quite, without fail, on foot, or 
 
 standing. 
 
 Vestido de marinheiro. De piira humanidade me soc- 
 correu. De tres em tres dias. Em cima de n6s. As vagas 
 accumulavam-se em surras. Por baixo de capa. Em fim 
 611a Ihe diz. Em quanto imp6rta isso 1 Anda de ga!6pe. 
 Estd em pe\ Sobre tiido. Antes de tiido. Em des6rdem. 
 Em po^oes. Em rebanhos. Na idade de pouco mais de 
 vinte annos. frdsco virado de b6ca para baixo. Em 
 primeiro logdr. Elle estd em casa. Sem termo. Sem 
 limites. Em lima palavra. De mdu grddo. Nao podemos 
 ir de kotos nem as senhoras de chapeu. Passe mtiito bem. 
 
 He was dressed as a soldier. From six to eight years. 
 It is 'raining above the sea. I see the waves in mountains. 
 Go slowly. Send the books to me, without fail, to-morrow. 
 I am in doubt. He is not at home. I stand sentinel. It 
 lies at the bottom. He was in danger of being drowned. 
 The poor fellow is beside himself. What news? I shall 
 see him on the way. Go in peace. I am in earnest. I 
 know him by sight. He knows me by name. With haste. 
 In place of that word. He went to the ball in boots. 
 They were dressed as sailors. The child went on all fours. 
 
( 220 ) 
 LESSON CCXX. 
 
 PHRASEOLOGY PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, AND NOUNS. 
 
 Para cfma,~baixo, diante, 
 
 -tras. 
 Para entao, para outra vez. 
 
 Above, below, before, behind. 
 By then, next time. 
 
 Piira casa, fora, dentro. Home, out, in. 
 
 Por ventura, costume, cima. By chance, custom, above. 
 
 Por medo, amor, favor, For fear lest, love, by favour, 
 isso. therefore. 
 
 Von pdra cima. Varnos pdra bdixo. Y4 mais para 
 didnte. Mais pdra trdz / Esta para safr. Sem tomar por 
 isso o titulo. Hvro esta Id em cima. Muito perto. Hon- 
 tem de tarde. Hontem pela manha. Depois d'amanha. 
 Antes de h6ntem. Ha muito tempo. Por metades. So por 
 este meio. Amanha pela manha. Mais adidnte. Antes 
 mais que menos. Pdra entao jd tereuios acabado a 6bra. 
 Os cabellos atados por de trdz. Por e"ssa razao. Vamos 
 pdra cdsa. Anda pdra didnte. Tenho-o por ignordnte. 
 Nao o tenho por ddido. Passe por Id. So por so. 
 
 I am going upstairs. They are going down. He is out. 
 They will go out. I went yesterday morning. He will 
 return to-morrow morning. I consider them mad. Go more 
 that way. Farther back. I must go home. At last he 
 went in. The man is very near. For fear. I believe them 
 mad. He considers me ignorant. For the same reason. 
 For -want of space. On account of indisposition. The boy 
 is upstairs. Go on. Above the water. By chance he fell 
 into the water. Let us go upstairs to the library. They 
 consider him rather foolish. 
 
( 221 ) 
 
 LESSON CCXXI 
 
 PHRASEOLOGY CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Assim assim, assim seja, como. 
 Ainda quando, ainda agora, 
 
 de modo que. 
 Nao so, mas tambem. 
 Nao s6, mas ate ; nao senao. 
 Com tanto que. 
 A saber isso ; a ser assim. 
 
 So so ; so be it ; as. 
 
 Even when, but just now, so 
 
 that. 
 
 Not only, but also. 
 Not only, but even ; only. 
 So that, provided. 
 If I had known it ; that being so. 
 
 Assim na paz como na gu&ra. Assim elle queira. Com- 
 tdnto que. Em quanta ao que. Porem com tiido isso. Pelo 
 contrdrio. Como quer que. Tdnto mdis. A nao ser isso, 
 teria sido seu amigo. Ainda agfira chegou. lle residiu 
 qudsi sempre em Portugal Fabulas recebidas nao so pelos 
 chronfstas, mas ate pelos historiadores. Entao, mtiito embora. 
 Assim cdmo tambem declarava. Assim se resolveu. El mais 
 duvidoso ainda. Cabellos espssos, posto que ja grisalhos. 
 Escrevia como fallava. Assim como appareceu. Assim como 
 assim, estou decidido a casdr. 
 
 So that he was seldom able to work. It is lut twelve 
 o'clock. Why so ? They are not so. His leg is but so so. 
 But for him, I should have lost my life. But yet, Madam. 
 He will find but very few. But even kings must die. May 
 he do so to me, and more also. A courtier and a patron 
 too. If, however, you cannot go. This is still more doubt- 
 ful. Not only praised by the people, but even honoured by 
 the king. On the contrary, I shall remain at home. As 
 he also promised. I should not go, knowing this. The 
 man wrote as he spoke. Even wlien I went away, he was 
 not satisfied. 
 
( 222 ) 
 LESSON CCXXII. 
 
 NOUNS REQUIRING "DE" OR "A." 
 
 Meio, favor, honra, gosto, pra- 
 
 zer, bondade, idea, caso. 
 Espeninca, necessiddde, defen- 
 
 sao. 
 Consequencia, resoluao, cer- 
 
 teza. 
 Resistencia, avere&o, obedien- 
 
 cia. 
 
 Means, favour, honour, plea- 
 sure, goodness, idea, case. 
 Hope, need, defence. 
 
 Consequence, resolution, cer- 
 tainty. 
 
 Resistance, aversion, obed- 
 ience. 
 
 No meio de lima existencia de continuous combates. O 
 pensamento de fugfr. No cdso de nao poder dar, etc. As 
 esperdncas de obter. A idea de fi car senhor. A necessiddde de 
 confiar a defensao da patria a este prlncipe. Em consequencia 
 d'isto. Tenha a bonddde de ver. Ella tomou a resolucdo de 
 divorci4r-se. Com o intento de acommetter Aff6nso VI. 
 Accessao ao throno. A siia volta a Aragao. Em relacdo ao 
 conde. Cara a cara. Amdr a patria. Com relacdo d 
 situagao. Tern medo d agua ? tfma 16nga resistencia d f or- 
 tiina e d actividade do rei. 
 
 I have the honour to be. Have the goodness to pass me 
 the water. I am glad to have an opportunity of being useful 
 to you. The fear of being taken. The pleasure of seeing 
 you. It is time to go there. Without loss of time. He 
 had means of escaping. The result of this enterprise. The 
 news of the invasion. A method of doing. On account of 
 illness. Adherence to the principles of justice. In relation 
 to that question. A constant inclination to moderate prin- 
 ciples. Homage to the See of Rome. A lesson to the people. 
 The only remedy for the evil. 
 
 * The preposition which a word takes after it is called its complement. 
 Many of the complements in Portuguese follow the English idiom. 
 
( 223 ) 
 LESSON CCXXIII. 
 
 NOUNS REQUIRING "POR" OR "PARA." 
 
 Bsapego. Prayers, disinterestedness. 
 
 Enthusiasm, indiifere^a. Enthusiasm, indifference. 
 
 Predilecgclo, classificaao. Predilection, classification. 
 
 Propensao, motivos, instru- Propensity, motives, instru- 
 
 mento. ment. 
 
 Lealdade, habilidade, caridade. Loyalty, ability, charity. 
 
 Coadjuvaao, passeio, liber- Assistance, walk, liberty. 
 
 dade. 
 
 Amor p3lo fllho. Preces por chiiva. l^ma predileccdo 
 por n6ssa patria. Classificasao dos habitantes por s&xos, 
 idades e profissoes. Enthusiasmo pela miisica. Am&r pelos 
 h6mens. Indiffer^nga por tiido. Desapego p$lo mundo. 
 Correio para Inglate"rra por navios e pelos paquetes. O 
 camiriho pdra lr d cidade. A propensao pdra a ociosidade. 
 amor pelo o filho. Lealddde pdra com s^us prlncipes. O 
 linico meio pdra os destruir. Liberddde pdra todos. 
 progrdmma pdra a exposi9ao. A siia coadjuvaqao pdra este 
 obj^cto. 
 
 There are reasons for believing. Walks for foot-passengers. 
 Better instruments for this. Full liberty for all those who, 
 etc. An ample theatre for ambition. Various precautions 
 for the defence. An excellent remedy for toothache. An 
 advantage for a son. Grounds for hoping. Balm for your 
 wounds. A reason for supposing me dead. Emigration to 
 Demerara. Prayers for rain. He has a predilection for 
 port-wine. The classification of the boys by ages. Enthu- 
 siasm for the drama. A subscription for the poor sailors. 
 The way to Camacha. Love of men. 
 
( 224 ) 
 LESSON CCXXIV. 
 
 NOUNS REQUIRING " EM," " NTRE." 
 
 Desordem, prazer, influencia. 
 Entrada, promoao, confianca. 
 
 Perigo, mudanca, ciilpa. 
 Desintelligencia, differena,dis- 
 
 Allian9a, vontdde, emulafao. 
 
 Disorder, pleasure, influence. 
 
 Entrance, promotion, confi- 
 dence. 
 
 Danger, change, fault. 
 
 Misunderstanding, difference, 
 distinction. 
 
 Alliance, will, emulation. 
 
 A influencia no animo do rei. tlma des6rdem no estado. 
 A entrada no poder do conde Derby. Elle foi moderado 
 em e"pochas em que houve perigo em o ser. A pi-omo$ao 
 em h6nras e em lucres. A siia confidn$a em Deus. Uma 
 mud^nga na constitui9ao. Como se tivdsse culpa em exe- 
 cutdr as 6rdens do rei. Um tratado entre os reis. A paz 
 entre os dois inimigos. As negociagoes entre os gabinetes 
 de L6ndres e Paris, tlma allianca entre os estados. Um 
 combate entre a guarda e os paisanos. A liita entre a 
 humanidade e a justia. 
 
 The influence of this belief on the mind of the queen. 
 There is danger in being a minister of state. His promotion 
 in honour was very rapid. A change in the government of 
 Spain. The communication between Lisbon and Santarem. 
 The peace between the two nations was broken. Harmony 
 between these two souls. The space between the armies. 
 Connivance between the thieves and the officers. A struggle 
 between the king and the parliament. A bad feeling between 
 the sisters. A treaty between the kings. 
 
( 225 ) 
 LESSON CCXXV. 
 
 NOUNS REQUIRING (1) "COM," (2) " CONTRA* 
 
 (1) Pacto, reconciliagao, inti- 
 midade. 
 
 Alli&na, contdcto, harmonia. 
 Combate, guerra. 
 
 (2) Conspira^ao, susp&ta. 
 Tentativa, violdncia, barreira. 
 Qudixa, reacgao, abrigo. 
 
 Compact, reconciliation, inti- 
 macy. 
 
 Alliance, contact, harmony. 
 Combat, war. 
 Conspiracy, suspicion. 
 Attempt, violence, barrier. 
 Complaint, reaction, shelter 
 
 resentimento centra o marido. tfma empreza contra os 
 rebe'ldes. Lhe ficou dentro da alma o espfnho da ma vontdde 
 contra o seu success6r. "Cma conspiraqdo contra o imperador. 
 Suspeitas odi6sas cdntra a siia victima. Um abrigo contra 
 os reveres da fortiina. paeto do principe com o conde. 
 Pela sua allidn$a com os christaos. De accordo com elle. 
 tlma lucta com o rei. Desejo ter corihecimento com elle. 
 Guerras com os inimfgos do rei. S. Petersbiirgo estara em 
 contdcto com o Mar-Negro. As opinioes dos seus amigos 
 estdvain ftaccordo com as siias. 
 
 The reconciliation with the emperor. An alliance with 
 the Romans. His intimacy with my brother. In immediate 
 contact with the king. The complaints against him. They 
 had committed violence against the people. They raised 
 barriers against the torrent. The reaction of the Visigoths 
 against the Arabs. A good shelter against the reverses of 
 fortune. In harmony with the ideas. From the conversation 
 of the king with the pilgrim. In that terrible combat with 
 the Russians. This little house is a shelter against the 
 reverses of fortune. I must raise a barrier against the inva- 
 sion of the enemy. 
 
 p 
 
( 226 ) 
 
 LESSON 
 
 NOUNS REQUIRING 
 Discussao, reflexoes, proposta. 
 Correspondencia, juizo, obser- 
 
 Influencia, estiidos, supremacia. 
 Ac^ao, conqufsta, p6nte, vigi- 
 
 Itincia. 
 Tratado, artigo, emprestador. 
 
 noticia. 
 
 CCXXYI. 
 "SOBRE" (ON, OVER). 
 
 Discussion, reflections, propo- 
 sal. 
 
 Correspondence, judgment, ob- 
 servation. 
 
 Influence, studies, supremacy. 
 
 Action, conquest, bridge, vigi- 
 lance. 
 
 Treaty, article, lender, news. 
 
 Na discussdo sobre o acto. Toda a correspondencies sobre 
 qualque'r obje'cto. O n6sso juizo sobre tao importnte dis- 
 cussao. Algiimas reflexoes sobre este assiimpto. Propostas 
 a camara sobre finan(jas. A acfao sdbre as foras produc- 
 tivas da terra. Um troMdo sobre os limftes das fronteiras. 
 A prome"ssa de sdque sobre o Porto. As nossas observances 
 sobre a questao. Estudos sobre o Christianismo. Dois 
 artigos sobre as moe'das Portuguezas. Ella tinha audoriddde 
 superior sdbre a Peninsula. Supremacia sobre a Peninsula. 
 Supremacia sobre os outros. Um emprestador sobre penhor. 
 
 The conquests over the Spaniards. Information on all 
 necessary points. Watchfulness over this business. Our 
 correspondence on this subject. A few reflections on his con- 
 duct. A powerful influence on the public mind. The action 
 of the water on the stone. A lender of money on pledges. 
 He has entire supremacy over the minds of his followers. 
 Two articles on the Eastern question. The General had no 
 authority over his officers. The action of the water on the 
 u-alls of the city. My opinion on this subject. 
 
( 227 ) 
 
 LESSON CCXXVII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH "DB." 
 
 Accompanied, busy, distant. 
 
 Acompanhado, occupddo, dis- 
 
 tante. 
 
 Bordado, matizddo, tirado. 
 Capdz, digno, rico, dependente. 
 
 Indigena, facil, privddo, ce*go. 
 Proprio, sedento, inconsoldvel. 
 
 Bordered, decked, drawn. 
 Capable, worthy, rich, depen- 
 dent. 
 
 Native, easy, deprived, blind. 
 Proper, thirsting, inconsolable. 
 
 Acomparihdda de seu augusto esposo. A palmeira 4 in- 
 digena d'e"stas ilhas^ Plantas aromaticas prfiprias dos climas 
 da zona torrida. Uma roupa borddda de 6uro. Capdz de 
 dirigir. Banido <^'^sta camara. As noticias sao' destituidas 
 c?'interesse. Um tr6nco partido da drvore. ~d"ma idea 
 tirdda dos livros Komanos. digno de notar-se. Sedento 
 de vingan9a, Rico de desp6jos. Dependente da coroa. 
 prelado suspenso do officio pastoral. Privddo de ornato. 
 Esta planta 6 pr6pria da Ilha da Madeira. Aquelle distincto 
 senh6r 6 digno da n6ssa admiragao. 
 
 Accompanied "by models. Extracted from the best writers. 
 Occupied with graver studies. Deprived of your estimable 
 society. These letters are more easy to write. The imagi- 
 nation occupied with the principal object. Inconsolable for 
 the absence of Ulysses. A league distant from the sea. 
 Cares inseparable from the throne. The shepherdesses 
 crowned with laurel. Covered with confusion. He showed 
 himself indifferent to these successes. Territories covered 
 with woods. Deprived of sight. Blind with anger. Peopled 
 with Jews. 
 
( 228 ) 
 LESSON CCXXVIII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH "PARA.' 
 
 Bom, efficaz, proveitoso. 
 Preparado, destinado, com- 
 
 modo. 
 
 Essential, util, importante. 
 Necessario, obrigatorio, precise. 
 Pr6prio, conveniente, achado. 
 Satisfact6rio, sufficiente. 
 
 Good, effectual, profitable. 
 Prepared, destined, easy. 
 
 Essential, useful, important. 
 Necessary, binding, needful. 
 Proper, convenient, found. 
 Satisfactory, sufficient. 
 
 Prepdrddo pdra e*stas eventualidades. Notfcias uteis para 
 calculos e especiilagoes. E muito bom pdra a saiide. 01- 
 rigatfrria pdra as diias pdrtes. sta 6bra ^ra destindda pdra 
 a instrucgao do Diique. Locdes proprios pdra ellas. Sera 
 satisfactorio pdra mim participar. Essencidl pdra a dig- 
 nidade do governo. Auctoridade sufficiente pdra se declarar 
 superior. Tempo sufficiente pdra reflectir. As qualidades 
 precisas pdra a paz. Um dos meios niais efficdzes pdra con- 
 solidar. Este livrinho destinddo pdra o uso dos meninos 
 Portuguezes e Ingl^zes. 
 
 Advantageous conditions for the inhabitants. Good for 
 him. Prepared for those who had to fight. "Wood good 
 for building. Site suitable for a factory. An event whose 
 consequences were immense for the progress of civilisation. 
 Destined for the habitation. Not less important for the 
 interest. Our verse is sweet enough to give all the effects. 
 I must be prepared for these occasions. This climate is 
 very good for people with chest-disease. It is satisfactory 
 for me to say that I am pleased. The most effectual means 
 of saving him. 
 
( 229 ) 
 LESSON CCXXIX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES WITH " POR.' 
 
 Conhecido, distincto, celebre. 
 Povoddo, habitado, illiistre. 
 Cercado, banhddo, responsavel. 
 
 Disperso, perseguido. 
 
 Kegldo, conquistddo, escolhido. 
 
 Singular, notavel, famoso. 
 
 Known, distinguished, famed. 
 Peopled, inhabited, famous. 
 Surrounded, bathed, respon- 
 sible. 
 
 Scattered, persecuted. 
 Governed, conquered, chosen. 
 Singular, notable, famous. 
 
 Corihecida pela excellencia dos seus 61eos. A Hespanha 
 foi povodda por diias migraQoes. territorio c&rcddo pelo 
 oceano. Tr6ia foi tomdda pelos Gregos. Disperses pelo 
 paiz. Essa provincia ^ra regida por um legddo. Urn sftio 
 muito frequentddo pelos habitantes. Todos distindos pelo 
 me'rito pessoaL Os paizes banhddos pelo mar. Celebre pelo 
 importante cargo que, etc. Roulddo pelos piratas. Favo- 
 recido por e*sta circumstancia. Um p6vo singuldr por opinioes 
 religi6sas. Cofmbra, famosa por siia universidade. Epsom, 
 notdvel por suas aguas. 
 
 Sheffield, celebrated for its cutlery. Brighton, known for 
 its sea-baths. This region was inhabited by many barbarous 
 nations. The country was at last conquered by Charles the 
 Great. He was chosen successor to the crown. He escaped, 
 followed by Garcia. A stranger, but illustrious by blood. I 
 am responsible for these things. This cause aided by many 
 others. The state surrounded by the sea. Sebastopol was 
 taken by the allies. Waterloo was famous for its battle. 
 England was peopled by various races. Caldas, noted for 
 its warm baths. 
 
( 230 ) 
 
 LESSON CCXXX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH " EM." 
 
 Envolto, posto, convertido, la- 
 
 vado. 
 
 Dividido, interessado, atte"nto. 
 Inexoravel, sepultado, sito. 
 Util, fiel, destro, usddo, feliz. 
 Fundado, talhado, disfa^ddo. 
 Transformado, trocado, sub- 
 
 mergido. 
 
 Involved, placed, converted, 
 bathed. 
 
 Divided, interested, attentive. 
 
 Inexorable, buried, situated. 
 
 Useful, faithful, clever, used. 
 
 Founded, cut out, disguised. 
 
 Transformed, changed, sub- 
 merged. 
 
 Envolto em obsciira noite. Dividido em duas partes. Os 
 habitadores dive"rsos em racas, em costumes, em linguas. Os 
 prisioneiros foram postos em liberdade. Um pac6te embru- 
 Ihado em papdl pdrdo. Inexoravel em me condenmar. Mais 
 util na pratica. Fundado na impossibilidade. Minerva 
 transformada em Mentor. Submergido nas profundezas do 
 mar. Absorto em urn profiindo silencio. Talhado na rocha 
 viva. Juno disfargada em velha. Algiins convertidos em 
 p6rcos. Yulcano lavado em su6r. Interessado em o enganar. 
 Sepultddo nas ruinas. 
 
 The Egyptians divided into bands. Faithful in keeping 
 a secret. So attentive in listening to all. Men dexterous 
 in the construction of ships. A king skilled in war. Faith- 
 ful in his alliances. Rivalry converted into profound hate. 
 Involved in thick darkness. These men divided in two 
 parties. The soldier was set at liberty. The poor workman 
 was bathed in sweat. The soldiers were buried in the ruins 
 of the fortress. The boy was interested in finishing the 
 work. Useful in labours. Gaul was divided into three pro- 
 vinces. 
 
( 231 ) 
 
 LESSON 
 
 ADJECTIVES 
 
 Coberto,* cego, contente, satis- 
 
 felto. f 
 
 Compativel, tratavel, paralle'lo. 
 Associddo, identificddo, mis- 
 
 turddo. 
 
 Parecido, commensuraVel. 
 Casado, inquieto, humilde. 
 Curvado, armddo, conhecido. 
 
 CCXXXL 
 WITH "COM." 
 
 Covered, blind, content, satis- 
 fied. 
 
 Compatible, tractable, parallel. 
 Associated, identified, mixed. 
 
 Like, commensurate. 
 Married, restless, humble. 
 Bent, armed, known. . 
 
 Similhante estado nao 6 compativel com o progre'sso. A 
 Lusitania antiga acha-se associdda com Portugal. Um fllho 
 tao parecido com seu pae. Meneldu ^ra casddo com Helena. 
 Curvado com o peso dos fnictos. Pygmaliao cego com a 
 paixao que tinha por ^lla. Contente com poder salvdr a 
 vida. Tratavel com os sens visfnhos. Inquieto com os pro- 
 gre'ssos dos christaos. Os habitHntes identificddos com os 
 Romanos. Os indfgenas misturddos com as outras xi 
 Armddo * com armas prohibldas. Furioso com a resp6sta. 
 
 Not contented with making himself feared. The streets 
 parallel with the rivers. The sun covered with clouds. 
 Content with the wages. Charity is not compatible with 
 hatred. Punishment commensurate with crime. Good and 
 humble with all Vineyards mixed with orchards. The 
 height Icnown now by the name of Bairro-alto. Fleets 
 laden with spoils. Madeira, favoured with the best climate 
 in the world. He was associated with the Count in that 
 undertaking. They were in time mixed with the invaders. 
 The street was parallel with the river. 
 
 * Takes also de : " cob&to de tripos." 
 
( 232 ) 
 LESSON CCXXXII. 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING " DB," OF. 
 
 Dispor, deixar, gostdr, provar, 
 morrer. 
 
 Lembrar-se, esquecer-se, ausen- 
 tar-se. 
 
 Precisar, aproveitdr-se, depen- 
 ded. 
 
 Desesperar, cessar, sair, vir, 
 privar-se. 
 
 Dispose, leave, like, taste, try, 
 
 die. 
 Kemember, forget, absent one's 
 
 self. 
 Want, avails one's self, depend. 
 
 Despair, cease, go out, come, 
 deprive. 
 
 Disponlia 'do seu criado. Deixemo-nos de comprimentos. 
 Nao gosto de tantas cerem6nias. Morro de sede. Lembra- 
 se d 1 isso 1 Gosta de queijo ? Esqtteci-me do seu nome. 
 Ruderico se apossou da cor6a. Preciso das mlnhas botas. 
 Aproveitdr-me-hQi do seu offerecim^nto. fille 6 applaudido 
 de toda a gente. Kao se me dd d'isso. Elle amenta-se da 
 niinha casa. Ella apeia-se do cavallo. Isto ndsce da siia 
 negligencia. Acordo rf'um sonho. Ella cor a de vergonha. 
 Est6u encantddo d'isio. Isto nao depende de mim. Sits 
 tenta-SQ de trigo. Elle foge do perlgo. 
 
 I remember this. He has forgotten the name. He does 
 not like such forms. We like beef. I want a room. I shall 
 avail myself o/your offer. He wept for joy. He fled for 
 fear. I come from Lisbon. Overcome by pain. They 
 absented themselves from the house. I jumped off the 
 horse. What do you like to drink at dinner ? This filled 
 him with indignation. Forgetful of the obligations con- 
 tracted by the promise made to Alphonso. Try them both. 
 He enjoys good health. I am persuaded of the contrary. 
 Using the power. It is composed of ten, 
 
( 233 ) 
 LESSON CCXXXIIL 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING " SOBRE," UPON; " ENTRE," BETWEEN. 
 
 For, recair, lanQar, arrojar. 
 
 Conversar, tomdr, disputar, de- 
 
 liberar. 
 Apertdr, vigiar, discorddr, cha- 
 
 mar. 
 Distinguir, metter, luctdr, di- 
 
 vidir. 
 
 Put, fall, throw, hurl. 
 Converse, take, dispute, deli- 
 berate. 
 Tighten, watch, disagree, call. 
 
 Distinguish, put, struggle, di- 
 vide. 
 
 Conversou sdbre differentes mate'rias. Elle delibe'ra sobre 
 isto. Pcmdo sdbre o hombro a cruz vermelha. Esta accusa- 
 gao pdsa sdbre a mem6ria de Henrique. Lan^ar lima censiira 
 sev^ra sobre as leis. Discordamos sobre os meios. Arrojei- 
 me sdbre elle. As suspeitas tinham recaido sdbre o h6mem. 
 tlma monarchia repartMa entre os tres filhos. A cidade 
 fechada entre a bahia e o oceano. Apertado entre cabegos 
 ingremes. Ha p6uca differ^n9a e*ntre 4stas palavras. Cha- 
 mdr a atten9ao piiblica sdbre ^ste acto. !Nao pod^ndo tomar 
 sdbre si. 
 
 Struggling between remorse and love. They came to con- 
 sult him on almost all subjects. [Reflecting on this. The 
 invisible world exercises an immense influence over us. I am 
 not able to take upon myself the expense. The sword raised 
 above the head. Dividing amongst themselves the provinces 
 of the Koman empire. He threw himself on the foe. Sus- 
 picions have fallen upon him as the murderer of the Count. 
 He took the blame upon himself. Putting the poor old man 
 on his shoulder, he left the city. There is much difference 
 between the languages of Spain and Portugal. 
 
( 234 ) 
 LESSON CCXXXIV 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING " Alt? TO; "CONTRA," AGAINST. 
 
 Chegar, ir, pelejar, levar. 
 
 Alcanar. 
 
 Marchar, votdr, defender. 
 
 Murmurdr, peccar, protestdr. 
 
 Declamdr, defender. 
 
 Reach, go, war, carry. 
 
 Attain. 
 
 March, vote, defend. 
 
 Murmur, sin, protest. 
 
 Declaim, defend. 
 
 A devastacao chegou ate os districtos da Idanha. You ate 
 Coiinbra. Alexandre foi ate & India. E necessario pelejar 
 ate veneer. Levava ate mil soldados. March6u contra o 
 rel. Elles votaram cdntra o proje'cto. As folhas francezas 
 alcanfam ate 2 de Margo. Elle partiu pdra o Oriente. Nao 
 tem razao para murmurdr contra o amo. b6sque chega 
 ate o mar. A Providencia alcanfa ate as avezlnhas. Pe"cca 
 contra Deus. Elle defende a causa da liberdade contra os 
 tyrannos. orador declamou contra a guerra. 
 
 The English papers come down to the 16th of May. The 
 General set off for North America. The pupil had no reason 
 to murmur against the teacher. We must fight till we win. 
 Julius Caesar went as far as the river Thames. The rebels 
 marched against the emperor. The president declaimed 
 against the terms of the peace. Hof er defended the cause of 
 liberty against the tyrant. The sad destruction reached to 
 the very gates of the city. He sins against God in telling 
 lies. He set out for Balaclava in the steamer. He must 
 vote against the measure. The rebels marched against the 
 queen. 
 
( 235 ) 
 LESSON CCXXXY. 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING " FOR," FOR, BY. 
 
 Esperdr, designer, trabalhdr. 
 Pagdr, dar, agradecer, trocdr. 
 Pedir, perguntar, levdr, pro- 
 
 curdr. 
 
 Ir, haver, adoptdr, tomdr. 
 Arriscdr, tomdr, pugnar, passdr. 
 Vigiar, acudir, substituir. 
 
 Hope, designate, work. 
 Pay, give, thank, change. 
 Beg, ask or inquire, carry, look 
 
 for. 
 
 Go, hold, adopt, take. 
 Risk, take, fight, pass. 
 Watch, help, substitute. 
 
 Espere por mim. Quanto devo pagdr por isso 1 Quanto 
 pede por semana 1 K noite irei por siia casa. Espera elle 
 pela resposta ? Estou por isso. Fd$o por isso. Perguntei 
 pela saiide de V. S. Cornea por queimdr isto. V. S. 
 passdu pela minha casa ? Deite-&e por terra. A Galliza era 
 regida por diversos c6ndes. Tendo por fronteira. Arris- 
 odndo a vida pela monarchia. Ella vigidva pela seguran9a 
 da casa. Ir pelo mar. Quanto leva pela passdgem ? Dar- 
 Ihe-hei tres patdcas por estes. Fico-lhe agradeddo por 
 visita. 
 
 He waits for us. How much have we to pay for the 
 horses ? How much does he asJc a month ? To-morrow I 
 shall call at your house. He helps me. To substitute one 
 expression for another. He must wait for an answer. He 
 called at his house. Give him a dollar for the dog. He 
 risked his life for the country. He will throw himself on the 
 ground. You must watch for the safety of the ship. To 
 fight for the laws. We may begin by examining this ques- 
 tion. Praising him for the resolution. He,, designated him 
 by this title. The love he felt for Egilona. He passes for 
 a good man. 
 
( 236 ) 
 LESSON CCXXXYI. 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING " EM" IN, INTO, ON. 
 
 Entrdr, admittir, converter. 
 Empenhar-se, situar, influir. 
 Deitar, dividir, residir, con- 
 
 vertdr, achar. 
 
 Ganhar, introduzlr, envolver. 
 Escrevlr, viver, folgdr, encon- 
 
 trar. 
 
 Enter, admit to, convert into. 
 Engage in, situate, influence. 
 Throw in, on ; divide, reside, 
 
 convert, find. 
 Gain, introduce, involve. 
 "Write, live, rejoice, meet 
 
 Entre'mos n'esta mata. Veja no sen relogio. Pe*rco rfisso. 
 Deite o cha nas chfcaras. Ganho n'isso um dia. Est4 em 
 casa. Consinto n'isso. Nao p6sso dormfr em t^rra. Tra- 
 diiza isto em Inglez. Deu comsigo no chao. Dei no pensa- 
 m^nto do auctor. Isto ha de dar-lhe na cabea. Anda em 
 corpo. Est^ em pe\ Estou em diivida. Nao est em perigo. 
 v^lho est& na c^ma. Portugal abiinda em vfnhos. Con- 
 venho na proposta. EJla se desfaz em lagrimas. Pegou 
 n'nm pdu. Falh6u na empreza. Cafu no chao. Est&mos 
 no campo. 
 
 He entered the town. He beat John in the race. He 
 writes in good language. They enter into disputes. He had 
 been introduced into the court. Involved in the struggle 
 with Henry. The man seized a stick. He engaged in 
 an enterprise. He throws wood on the fire. He writes 
 with his own hand in the sand. Admitted to the court of 
 the king. His actions lie buried in profound darkness. A 
 monastery situated in Burgundy. A monk influenced the 
 affairs. To live in peace. He resided in Portugal. The 
 merchant rejoices in traffic. I shall be at home. It consists 
 in forming a new kingdom. 
 
( 237 ) 
 LESSON CCXXXYII. 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING "4," TO, AT. 
 
 Prohibir, pertencer, dar, refe- 
 
 rir, raandar. 
 
 Desagradar, custdr, bater, valer. 
 Conceded, entregdr, apear-se, 
 
 levar. 
 Voltar, ir, dirigir, unir-se. 
 
 Forbid, belong, give, refer, 
 
 send. 
 
 Displease, cost, knock, to assist. 
 Concede, deliver, alight, carry. 
 
 Go, return, address, unite. 
 
 Principfa-se a segar os trigos. Perguntemos ao cocheiro. 
 Conduza o senhor ao seu quarto. Chegado ao logar. A seT 
 assim. Est6u ds 6rdens de Y. S. Elle aspira d fama. ^ 
 navio se dirige ao p6rto. A lenha se rediiz a cinzas. Elle 
 ce*de aos s^us r6gos. Opponho-me a isso. Elle falta d sua 
 pal^vra. Elle se entr^ga ao prazer. Indo p6r sitio a San- 
 tarem. Igudl s6rte c6ube a Lisboa. A infanta foi entregue 
 a Kaymiindo. Prohibfndo e"ssas viagens aos Hespanhoes. 
 Voltando d Mauritania. Esta pertence d viiiva do conde. 
 
 This displeases the old prince. These triumphs cost the 
 Saracens rivers of blood. He dresses in the English mode. 
 I go to Lisbon. He applies to study. He laid siege to 
 Santarem. When do you set sail 1 Take this to the gentle- 
 man. I want to go to the opera. Take me to the bridge. 
 They knock at the door. Can you send it for me to No. 
 10? He withdraws his shoulders from the wheel. Ex- 
 posed to the sun. A people given to fishing. In order to 
 resist misfortunes. Carried to the last point. Deliver this 
 letter to the gentleman. 
 
( 238 ) 
 LESSON CCXXXYIII. 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING " COM," WITH. 
 
 Honrdr, estar, fallar, vestir. 
 Morrer, tremer, alegrar-se. 
 Contrastdr, congra$ar, concor- 
 
 dar. 
 Ter, calcular, cumprir, com- 
 
 petir. 
 
 Tratar, casdr, alliar-se, ligar. 
 Confundir, occupar, acabar. 
 
 Honour, be, speak, dress. 
 Die, tremble, rejoice. 
 Contrast, ingratiate, agree. 
 
 Have, calculate on, discharge, 
 
 compete. 
 
 Treat, marry, ally, bind. 
 Confound, busy, have done. 
 
 H6nre-me com as suas 6rdens. Estou com muita f6me. 
 Com quern falla V. S. ? Morro com calma. Tremendo 
 com frlo. Este pain^l contrasta com a abundancia. Irei ter 
 com V. S. 4 boca da noite. Queremos fazer contas com elle. 
 Elle est4 com cap6te. Cumprirei com o promettido. Est 
 com defliixo. Elle trdta-me com rigor. Nao p6sso competir 
 com elle. Disputei com elle acerca d'isso. Elle amea9ou-o 
 com siia vingan5a. Nao ciimpre com o seu dev^r. Atin6u 
 com o caminho. Occupado com gu^rras. Siia fflha casara 
 com Moniz. 
 
 He will honour them with his commands. He is very 
 hungry. With whom will you speak 1 The boy is trem- 
 bling with cold. Can I speak with the lady ? Let us have 
 done with this. He will fulfil his promise. The king 
 threatens her with his vengeance. The soldier discharges 
 his duty. His aunt is married to Mr. P. I am glad of it. 
 They disputed with the king. She has caught cold. My 
 teacher treats me with kindness. I agree uith him in this. 
 Marrying Alice. He calculated on war. I am dying with 
 heat. 
 
( 239 ) 
 
 LESSON CCXXXIX. 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING " PARA," FOR, TO, TOWARDS, 
 IN ORDER TO. 
 
 Ir, voltdr, partir, vir. 
 Buscdr, falt&r. 
 Ollidr, esta>, servir. 
 Deitdr, tender, deixar, reservar. 
 Armar, prestar, tirar. 
 , contribulr. 
 
 To go to, return, set out, come. 
 
 Search, fail. 
 
 Look, be, serve. 
 
 Throw, tend, leave, reserve. 
 
 Prepare, be good, draw. 
 
 Advance, contribute. 
 
 6lhe para mim. Deitemos os 61hos pdra stes compos. 
 Voltemos pdra casa. You pdra a esc61a. A que h6ras pdrte 
 o vapor pdra Londres ? Htntre pdra a lancha. quarto 
 deita pdra a riia. Isto nao presta pdra nada. Eu emigrei 
 de Portugdl pdra Inglate"rra. Os chafes tinham avan$ddo 
 pdra Caste'lla. Armddo pdra a conquista. Os reis buscavam- 
 no pdra julz das siias contendas. Vim pdra te ver. Estd 
 pdra o nascente. Est6u pdra partir. Vae pdra meia noite. 
 Eu tirareipdra mim. S6 faltdu um Stentor pdra tornar a 
 scejna completa. 
 
 Look this way. Look ye? He cast his eyes on these 
 fields. He returned home. The boy is going to school. At 
 what o'clock does the coach go to Lisbon ? He came to see 
 him. I am about to write. Bodies tend to the centre. 
 "Will you stay for dinner? We shall leave for another 
 opportunity. I have written to England. We reserve for 
 the conclusion of this article. It contributes to the discovery 
 of truth. He came to see you. The window of my room 
 looks on the street. The clock is good for nothing. I am 
 about to set off. When does the French steamer start for 
 Teneriffe? 
 
( 240 ) 
 LESSON CCXL. 
 
 VERBS INCLUDING PREPOSITIONS.* 
 
 Almocar, jantar, cear. 
 
 Vestfr, calcar. 
 
 Fallar, agradecer. 
 
 Subfr. 
 
 Mergulhar. 
 
 Aproveitar, ajustar, roubar. 
 
 Breakfast on, dine on, sup on. 
 
 Put on, put on (boots). 
 
 Speak of, thank for, avail of. 
 
 Go up. 
 
 Dive for. 
 
 Profit by, agree for, rob. 
 
 Falldmos artes, poesia, politico. Vestirei a mfaha casaca 
 n6va. Quer calpdr sapatos 1 Eu vesti este habito para isso. 
 O velho franciscano subiu os degraus do altar. Falldu-se 
 litteratura. que quer V. S. almoqdr? Niinca cafyou 
 esp6ras. Elles cdlfam-lhe muito bem. Qu4r almo$dr 6vos ] 
 Eu jantarei vit^lla amanha. Elle ceou peixe. Hei de vestir 
 as minhas calas n6vas. meu amigo /aZZa-me politica ? 
 h6mem mergulha pe"rolas. Aproveitei essa occasiao para . 
 Muito agradfyo a siia bondade. Ajustdndo a passagem a 
 quatro mil r^is por cada pess6a. 
 
 These men are fishing for pearls. I shall breakfast on beef 
 and bread. He will put on his new coat. I bargained for 
 the passage at four shillings each person. They spoke of 
 art, poetry, and history. They never put on spurs. The old 
 sailor dined on ducks and green peas. I shall avail myself 
 of this opportunity. The Marquis went up the steps of the 
 throne. I thank you for your politeness. You must put on 
 the stout boots. We shall dine on roast-beef to-day. The 
 boys were diving for pearls in the Ked Sea. 
 
 * These verbs govern the noun without an intervening preposition : 
 ," to breakfast on eggs. 
 
( 241 ) 
 LESSON CCXLI. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Quieto ! caluda ! i Softly ! hush ! 
 
 Ah ! apage ! sdfa ! Ah ! away ! off ! 
 
 6ra bem ! ora e"sta ! 6ra essa ! 
 Ai de vos ! 
 
 Pois b6m ! pois nao ! beTn ! 
 Ora veja ! asneira ! vae bonito ! 
 
 Very well ! good ! capital ! 
 Woe to you ! 
 Well ! of course ! well ! 
 Only see ! nonsense ! very fine ! 
 
 Oil desgra9ado de mim ! De joelhos ! Ai de n6s ! Oh / 
 es tu, me"u p6bre Claudio 1 Ah / senh6r, acudi-me ! Pois 
 nao f " Hum ! " exclam6u Fr. Joao, dando aos h6mbros. 
 Que tal / mas veja. Ora, grd$as a Deiis, foi-se ! Deus me 
 perdoe / Se morreu, paciencia ! Louvado seja Deus ! 
 Famdso f T6ma sentido ! Deus o permitta ! Misericordia / 
 Yalha-me Deus ! &ptimo / ' Obrigadissimo ! T6da a san- 
 tissima noite ! Justo ! Deus nos aciida ! Mas, avie-se ! 
 Asneira ! Almas bentas, valei-me ! Nada de grdgas ! Jus- 
 tamente ! Ah, muito bem ! Que admira9ao ! 
 
 I never closed an eye the whole blessed night / Blessed 
 spirits, save me ! Bless me ! what's the matter ? God 
 bless- me ! Keally ! Lord preserve us ! Lord help me ! Of 
 course ! Exactly so ! Very good ! Capital ! That's a good 
 one ! Oh, the rogue ! Come on ! Come along ! No doubt ! 
 Take care ! Certainly ! It is a pity ! Help ! help ! By no 
 means ! Why not ? We are lost ! God's will be done ! 
 Certainly not ! Thank God ! Famous ! It can't be helped ! 
 Undoubtedly ! Well then, speak out ! Oh, yes, sir. Off ! 
 Out ! Go away ! 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 OUTLINES OF PORTUGUESE GRAMMAR 
 
 AND 
 
 WORD-BUILDING. 
 
 HINTS ON WOKD-FORMATION. 
 
 A FEW weeks' careful study of the following rules, the result 
 of a long comparison, will enable the learner to acquire a 
 stock of several thousand terms, chiefly literary and scientific, 
 but many in every-day use. 
 
 I. Portuguese is one of the many dialects descending from 
 Latin, a sister of the Spanish, but no more a corruption of it 
 than Italian is. With the Latin stock a few Greek, Celtic, 
 and Gothic words have been preserved. Arabic terms were 
 introduced in the Middle Ages, and recent times have contri- 
 buted largely from French, English, and other languages. 
 Still, the mass of Portuguese is Latin, and our first hints are 
 therefore addressed to the Latin scholar. The changes by 
 which Latin becomes Portuguese are chiefly the following : 
 1. Suppression of cases, using prepositions instead of inflec- 
 tions. 2. Frequent suppression of the passive, simplification 
 of conjugation, and use of auxiliaries. 3. Use of the Latin 
 ablative as a Portuguese nominative. 4. Suppression of 
 neuter gender. 5. Slight changes in terminations. 6. Con- 
 tractions, transpositions, and suppressions in roots. 7. 
 Alteration in the quantity of syllables. 
 
 (1.) Many words are the same as in Latin. Those in a : 
 acacia, barba, barca, canna, casa, cra, de"a, e"cloga, fama, 
 
( 244 ) 
 
 gmma, h6ra, idea, juvenca, lingua, me*ta, n6ta, 6rbita, palma, 
 quadra, se"rra, te'rra, liva, vacca, zona. In or : amor, cantor, 
 delat6r, exterior, intercessor, professor, etc. In I: s61, sal, 
 c6nsul, me*!, f eL In x : appendix, index, calix. Altar, e"cho, 
 chaos, lexicon, etc. 
 
 (2.) Many retain the Greek and Latin prefixes unaltered : 
 apathfa^ aversao, odherir, araputar, ampMheatro, analyse, 
 anfepassar, artftpMa, op^stata, Mcolor, cafaracta, circum- 
 ferencia, cowjunccao, coT^radistinccao, depositor, didmetio, 
 distrahir, cZ^lacerar, educagao, earclusao, epttheto, extra- 
 judicial, hypercritico, hyp6ciita., wfringir, zWerc^pto, intro 
 duzir, tn^phora, o&edecer, ^ermittir, ^o^humo, prem&ttiro, 
 jprohibir, rescrever, re^roc^sso, swJjugar, swMerfiigio, super- 
 fluo, synodo, ^*a7i5formar, wZ^ramarino. Some of these are 
 modified (as in Latin and English) to suit the following 
 letter, e.g., ad becomes ac in occumular; con varies into co, 
 col, cog, etc. ; in changes into ig, il, im, etc. ; and so of ob, 
 sub, and syn. Des, as a Portuguese prefix, is equal to dis in 
 English : desarmar, disarm ; or un : c?esatacdr, untie. In 
 sometimes becomes em or en : inter, entre. Ex becomes es. 
 
 (3.) Many words modify the Latin root by prefixing a 
 letter abarbar, escorpiao, esphera, estatua. 
 
 By inserting farina, faririha; vino, viriho; speculum, 
 
 * 
 
 By rejecting sanctus, sdnto ; mecZius, meio ; aer, ar ; 
 cAarta, cdrta; tales, ides; canes, cdes ; camisia, camisa. 
 
 BY CHANGINa 
 
 an into ou attrum, ouro ; awdire, ouvir ; awtumnus, outono. 
 
 b v de&ere, dever ; ha&ere, haver ; ariore, drvore. 
 
 c g laco, Idgo ; lacrima, Mgrima ; secreto, segredo. 
 
 c i nocte, ndite ; lecto, Uito ; secta, seita. 
 
 c u doctor, doutor ; doctrina, doutrina. 
 
 c qu calens, quente ; crepare, quebrdr. 
 
 c z dicere, dizer ; f acere, fazer. 
 
 d j vic?eo, vejo ; desi6?ero, desejo. 
 
 d t co^urnix, codorniz. 
 
 e h linea, linlia; castanea, castdnha. 
 
( 245 ) 
 
 BY CHANGING 
 
 e into i esca, {sea; sentio, sinto ; equalis, igudl. 
 
 f ,, v pro/ectus, proveito. 
 
 fl ch jftamma, chdmma. 
 
 g j angrelus, dnjo ; spon^ia, esponja ; 0enu, joellio. 
 
 hy j Ayacinthus, yacinto. 
 
 i a caiu'stra, candstra. 
 
 i e spi'ssus, espesso; capital, cabeddl ; neve, neve. 
 
 is io nave's, navio. 
 
 j i major, maior ; pe/or, peior. 
 
 1 h cZamare, chamdr ; cZave, chdve. 
 
 1 r bZandus, brdndo; ob^igatio, obriga$ao. 
 
 li ,, i moZmo, moiriho. 
 
 li Ih fiZzo, filho ; muZz'er, mulher ! f oZz'a, folha. 
 
 n i arewa, areia ; avewa, aveia; catewa, cadfoa. 
 
 p b capra, cdbra; aperire, abrir ; o^erare, obrdr. 
 
 pi ch -jpZumbo, chumbo ; ^Zuvia, chtiva ; ^>Zeno, cheio. 
 
 CL n g a<?ua, dgua ; eg-ua, egua; se^ui, seguir. 
 
 t c malifta, malieia; men^io, menpao. 
 
 t d matferia, madeira ; vi#a, v^cZa / lafro, ladrao. 
 
 u o wnda, 6nda; triinco, trdnco ; stwpa, estopa. 
 
 x ,, z crua;, cruz ; lua;, luz ; ^x t paz ; fatuc, /6z, etc. 
 
 By altering the termination : 
 anis wfo ao cawt's, cao / panis, pdo. 
 
 anus ) - f ma?i?s, mao; sanus, sao; vanus, vao ; pagawws, 
 
 anum J \ pagao, gmnum, grao. 
 
 ana a \ana, Id; Id; cana, cd. 
 
 onus om bonus, bom; tonus, torn; sonus, som. 
 
 um. o f errwra, ferro ; templwm, templo ; solum, solo. 
 
 us ,, o annws, anno ; ventws, vento; mundws, mundo. 
 
 By cutting off the termination, as emblema, emblem : 
 am causaU's, causal; singulars, singuldr. 
 i\is fragihs, frdgil ; habiZ/5, hdbil ; utiZa's, titil. 
 n carmeTi, carme; nome7^, nome. 
 le mare, mdr ; amare, amar. 
 udus ciudus, cru ; audits, nu. 
 x cal#, col. 
 
( 246 ) 
 
 (4.) Many Portuguese nouns and adjectives are Latin 
 ablatives anno, baculo, calamo, discipulo, edicto, foco, 
 gre"mio, habito, idolo, juramento,.labio, medico, neg6cio, 6dio, 
 panno, quarto, refugio, sacco, t^po, lirso, vento, zelo : from 
 1st and 2nd decl. Similarly from the 3rd ave, carne, d6nte, 
 ^nte, f6nte, gente, her6e, ignorante, labe, marmSre, nave, 
 6rbe, ponte, quadriipede, s6rte, valle. Those of the 4th 
 change the abL u into o cornu, corno ; arco, porto, etc. In 
 the 5th acie, carie, efffgie, serie, and superficie are the only 
 illustrations. The exceptions are ablatives in ane, ano y 
 and one become oo, cane, coo ; gidno, grao ; opinion, opini- 
 do ; ono is om t as bono, bom ; ine, im, as fine, Jim ; ine, em, 
 as homine, homem. Others modify the root, e.g., regno, 
 reino; luna, Ha; ccelo, ceo; dolente, doente; pede, pe; 
 rete, rede ; lege, lei; rege, rei ; libro, livro. 
 
 (5.) Many words have undergone such changes that it is 
 sometimes difficult to recognise the original Latin anima, 
 dlma; auricula, orelha ; audire, ouvir ; bracchium, brdco; 
 capilli, calello ; caseus, queijo ; denarius, diriheiro ; ecclesia, 
 igreja; facere, fazer; genu, joelho ; lac, leite; magister, 
 mestre; nepos, neto ; oculus, 6lho ; puteus, poco; questus, 
 queixa; regula, regra; sinus, seio ; turbidus, ttirvo; umbra, 
 sdmbra; vesica, bexiga. 
 
 (6.) Many Latin words become Portuguese by modifying 
 the affix : 
 
 ans into ante amans, amdnte; tolerante. 
 
 antia dncia toleraw^'o, tolerdncia; vigilancia. 
 
 are ar amare, amdr. 
 
 arius ario adversaries, adversdrio. 
 
 ator ad6r senator, senador ; orad6r, pescad6r. 
 
 bilis vel B.ma.bilis, amdvel. 
 
 ens ent patens, pat^nte ; regente, decente. 
 
 entia encia scientia, sciencia; benevolencia. 
 
 ere er capere, caber ; saber. 
 
 icus ico pacift'cws, pacifico. 
 
 io ao success^, successao ; opiniao, religiao. 
 
 itas idade civihYos, civiliddde. 
 
( 247 ) 
 
 itas into idez rigiditas, xigidez. 
 
 tio cao natio, nacao; devojao. 
 
 um o templwm, tempHo ; beneffcio, feno. 
 
 us o active, activo ; adverse, barbaro, calvo. 
 
 II. The following observations will prove useful to the 
 English scholar : 
 
 (1.) Many words are exactly the same in both languages, 
 such as end in a, e, al, el, il, ul, ar, or, on, ude, idea, dip!6ma, 
 base, cone, animal, signal, cruel, civil, c6nsul, singular, suc- 
 cess6r, lexicon, longitude, etc.; the pronunciation alone 
 marks the difference. 
 
 (2.) Many become Portuguese by adding a letter, often a, 
 e, or o artist, artista ; part, parte ; moment, mom^nto ; or 
 by assuming a syllable, such as ar, er, ir abandon, abandon- 
 dr ; sell, vender ; applaud, applaudw*. 
 
 (3.) Many words in Portuguese, as in other languages, 
 consist of prefix, root, and affix, the second modified by the 
 first and third. The effect of a prefix is seen in cowformar, 
 deformar, awformar, frarcsformar, reformar ; and of affixes in 
 observer, observ(fc?o, observac?dr, observapao, observdwcm, 
 observa^on'o, observdw^e. The following digest must be care- 
 fully studied : 
 
 NOUNS OF 
 
 doing end in ao, Ida : exclusao, safrfa. 
 
 doer end in ad6r, or, eiro, a"nte, ico, ista : portador, f eitdr, 
 
 coch^Vo, negociaw^e, m^di'co, dentisfa. 
 done (state) end in &ncia, mento : abaixawewfo, toleidncia. 
 place end in ario, 6rio, 6uro, dda, ^to, ica: semin^no, 
 
 escript<5no, Ivvtida, l&zdneto, botica. 
 condition end in ez, ura, dade, eza, ela, or: mude^, gord^ra, 
 
 veiddde, bell&a, cliente?a. 
 instrument end in iro, ^ira, 6ura, ador, a: pimente'm?, 
 
 cafeteera, tesdwra, furac?or, harpa. 
 place for things end in al, ol, ar, ia, el, aculo : Funchd?, 
 
 pomb^Z, paioZ, pom^r, livrarla, grane?, recept<^c?/?o. 
 manner, creed, end in ismo : gallicCswo, catholictsmo, egoismo. 
 
( 248 ) 
 
 NOUNS OF 
 
 quantity, number, end in ame, ume, ada, agem, alha : 
 
 enxdme, legume, isuadda, iolhdgem, metidlha. 
 trees, plants, end in eira, &ro, 6ro : palmyra, pinh&ro, 
 
 sycamdro. 
 science and ar end in a, ia, la, lea, ura : algebra, astronoim'a, 
 
 hist6ria, architecture. 
 augmentation end in ao, az, asco, acho, ona : dinheirao, 
 
 villan<fe, penn^c^o, sabich6na. 
 diminution end in inho, ella, ete, ito, ilha, etc. : Tzp&zinho, 
 
 pageZ/a, bilhefe, pslito, baeti/Aa. 
 
 office, dignity, end in ado, ia : consulddo, condddo, baronta. 
 made of end in aa : palhdca, bag^a. 
 strokes in ada : panc^cfo, palm^a, chicoidda. 
 feminine end in a, ora, oa, eira, essa, eza, ina, etc.; iia, 
 
 senhdra, pavoa, lavadezm, condessa, foxyaeza, menina. 
 dweller in, native, end in ano, ez, ol, eo : Romdno, 
 
 HespanhoZ, Ilheo. 
 contempt end in ao, chao, ota, zarrao : ratoo, 
 
 janota, homenzarroo. 
 
 TABLE OF COKKESPOKDING TERMINATIONS. 
 
 English. Portuguese. EXAMPLES. 
 
 a a ide"a, panorama, magnesia, aur6ra. 
 
 able al vegetable, vegetal 
 
 able avel curable, curdvel ; favoravel, toleravel. 
 
 ability abilidade probability, probabilidade ; habilidade. 
 
 aceous aceo herbaceous, herbaceo. 
 
 {acio \ ' ... 
 
 f palace, palacio; preface, prefacio; pace, 
 ace f " . 
 aggo ) passo; grace, gra^a; race, ra^a. 
 
 acle aculo obstacle, obstaculo; oraculo, pinaculo. 
 act acto fact, facto ; acto, contacto, contracto. 
 
 ( acia ) primacy, primasia ; contumacia, f allacia, 
 
 ( asia J apostasla, 
 
 ad ada salad, salada ; nomad, n6mada. 
 
 ade ada grenade, grenada ; cruzdda, arcada. 
 
249 ) 
 
 English. Portuguese. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 age 
 
 age 
 
 aign 
 
 ain 
 
 ain 
 
 ain 
 
 al 
 
 al 
 
 ality 
 
 an 
 
 an 
 
 an 
 
 ance 
 
 ance 
 
 ane 
 
 agio 
 
 anha 
 
 ao 
 
 anha 
 
 anho 
 
 al 
 
 o 
 
 idade 
 
 &no 
 
 ao 
 
 o 
 
 ancia 
 
 anga 
 
 ano 
 
 ant (adj.) ante 
 ant (n.) nte 
 ant o 
 
 ant (adj.) ante 
 
 ar 
 
 ard 
 
 are 
 
 asm 
 
 ( asmo ) 
 I asma / 
 
 ar 
 
 ( arda 
 (ado 
 ardr 
 asmo 
 , asma 
 ate (v.) ar 
 ate' (adj.) ato, ado 
 ate (n.) ado 
 silent e e 
 e (n.) a 
 e (v.) er 
 e (v.) ir 
 e (v.) ar 
 e (n.) o 
 
 bility biliddde 
 ble vel 
 
 ble (n.) bula 
 
 image, imdgem ; passdgem, vantagem. 
 
 suffrage, suffrdgio. 
 
 campaign, camp&nha ; champanha. 
 
 captain, capitao; montao, grao. 
 
 mountain, montanha. 
 
 gain, gdnho. 
 
 filial, social, metal, mineral, original. 
 
 eternal, etrno ; muito, individuo. 
 
 nationality, nacionaliddde. 
 
 human, humano ; Romano, pelicano. 
 
 organ, 6rgao ; pagao, sacristao. 
 
 European, Europ^o; Indio, plebeo. 
 
 abundance, abundancia; fragr&ncia. 
 
 finance, finan^a ; danga, balanga. 
 
 profane, profano ; mundano, urb&no. 
 
 abundant, abundante ; importante. 
 
 assistant, assistente; defendente. 
 
 servant, s^rvo. 
 
 militant, militante ; emigrante. 
 
 solar, regular, altdr, tituldr. 
 
 drunkard, bebado 
 
 compare, comparer; prepardr. 
 
 enthusiasm, enthusiasmo; pleonasmo. 
 
 animate, animdr; perpetudr, fabricdr. 
 ornate, ornato; immediato, privado. 
 consulate, consulddo ; pontificado. 
 conclave, phrdse, c6ne, catdstrophe. 
 dame, ddma; fama, danga, Idnja, faca. 
 absolve, absolv^r ; dissolv^r, revolver, 
 assume, assumir ; dividir, resumir. 
 vote, votdr ; consoldr, admirar. 
 fume, fumo ; conciso, concr^to, m6do. 
 visibility, visibilidade ; risibiliddde. 
 admirable, admirdvel; visivel, terrivel. 
 fable, fdbula. 
 
( 250 ) 
 
 English. Portuguese. EXAMPLES. 
 
 ble (adj.) bre noble, n6bre. 
 
 ble (adj.) bil ignoble, ign6bil. 
 
 ce 
 
 ca 
 
 cha 
 
 ch 
 
 cious 
 cula,go, 
 
 culo 
 ct 
 d 
 
 dom 
 ect 
 
 ect e*cto 
 
 je-cto 
 I igido 
 eigao 
 eitor 
 
 cle 
 
 cto 
 do 
 ado 
 
 ado 
 
 ected 
 
 ection 
 ector 
 ed (from 
 
 ar) 
 
 ed(from) , 
 er&ir)} ldo 
 ( eiro 
 ( h&ro 
 ado 
 
 eer 
 
 el 
 
 el 
 
 ent 
 
 ent 
 
 er 
 
 er 
 
 er 
 
 ery 
 
 esce 
 
 la 
 dlo 
 
 ca (no.) music, musica ; arithme'tica, 16gica. 
 co (adj.) optic, optico ; lunatico, erratico. 
 co (no.) critic, critico; arco, pole"mico. 
 
 {cio, cia, ) preface, prefacio ; comme'rcio, silencio, 
 a / essencia, farga, forest. 
 
 epoch, e'pocha ; mondrcha, patriarcha. 
 loquacious, loquaz ; tenaz, fer6z. 
 
 particle, particula; artigo, espectaculo. 
 
 conflict, conflicto ; distincto, obj^cto. 
 liquid, liquido; m^thodo, pldcido. 
 dukedom, ducado; earldom, condado. 
 perfect, perf^ito ; effeito, respeito. 
 object, objecto; projdcto, aspe"cto. 
 
 (erected, er^cto ; corrected, corrigido ; re- 
 flectfda 
 
 perfection, perfeigao ; imperfei^ao. 
 elector, eleitor ; reit6r. 
 ( adapted, adaptddo ; venerado, reputado, 
 ( suffocado, separado. 
 ( converted, convertido ; concedido, divi- 
 \ dido. 
 
 ) engineer, engenhe"iro ; carabineiro, mos- 
 / queteiro, mulateiro. 
 refugee, refugiado. 
 guarantee, guarantia. 
 camel, camelo. 
 
 funnel, funil; barrfl, coronal 
 agent, agente; inconveniente. 
 ento convent, convento; armamento. 
 eiro banker, banqueiro ; lanceiro. 
 
 or, ador reformer, reformador. 
 o, e astronomer, astr6nomo; Iith6grapho. 
 
 eria artillery, artilherfa. 
 
 escer effervesce, eflfervesc^r. 
 
( 251 ) 
 
 English. Portuguese. EXAMPLES. 
 
 ess iz actress, actrfz; empress, imperatrfz. 
 
 ess e"ssa countess, condessa. 
 
 ess e*za baroness, baroneza ; duqueza, princ^za. 
 
 ess ira heiress, herdeira. 
 
 ess e"sso process, proce'sso ; exce"sso, successo. 
 
 et eta poet, poe"taj lanceta. 
 
 eur eza grandeur^ grandeza. 
 
 fy ficar purify, purificar; qualificar, edificar. 
 
 ge ja forge, fo"rja ; arrange, arranjar j 16ja. 
 
 ge gio college, colle"gio ; refugio, privil^gio. 
 
 hood ez widowhood, viuvez. 
 
 ia os effluvia, effliivios. 
 
 ian o theologian, the61ogo. 
 
 ic 6so majestic, magestoso. 
 
 ice icio sacrifice, sacriffcio, ediffcio, ofilcio. 
 
 ice io service, servi$o. 
 
 ice icia, ia police, poHcia ; noticia, malicia. 
 
 ice icho caprice, capricho. 
 
 ice eza avarice, avareza. 
 
 ics ica statics, statica; mathematica. 
 
 ier eiro cashier, caixeiro; financeiro, fusileiro. 
 
 iet i^to quiet, quie"to. 
 
 igue igar fatigue, fatigar. 
 
 ile il puerile, pueril ; f drtil, imbecil, d6cil. 
 
 ( ilhdr ) humiliate, humilhar : conciliate, con- 
 
 lhate {mar } ciliAr. 
 
 ime imo maritime, maritimo. 
 
 in em margin, margem; orfgem, vfrgem. 
 
 ine nho marine,^ marinho. 
 
 ine nha line, Hnha. 
 
 ine ina mine, mfaa ; disciplfna, machina. 
 
 ine ino divine, divino ; libertino, f eminmo. 
 
 ing ando dancing, dancando ; f ormando. 
 
 ing endo reading, 16ndo ; concedendo. 
 
 ing indo persuading, persuadindo j dividfndo. 
 
 ing ante during, durante. 
 
 ing 6nte 
 
( 252 ) 
 
 English. Portuguese. EXAMPLES. 
 
 ion lo dominion, dominio. 
 
 ion iao religion, religiao ; opiniao, centuriao. 
 
 ion nhao pavilion, pavilhao. 
 
 ion ao vision, visao ; divisao, explosao. 
 
 ious o perfidious, pe"rfido. 
 
 is e ellipsis, ellipse ; the'se. 
 
 isc isco disc, disco; obelisco. 
 
 ish. ir abolish, abolir ; brandir, finir, polir. 
 
 ish (adj.) ez English, Inglez ; Irish, Irlandez. 
 
 ish (dim.) inho, ado whitish, branquinho. 
 
 ism ismo paganism, paganismo; baptismo. 
 
 ist ista dentist, dentista ; economista, purista. 
 
 ist Xco botanist, botanico. 
 
 it ito decrepit, decr^pito; habito. 
 
 it ite limit, limite. 
 
 ite ita levite, levita; hyp6crita. 
 
 ite itio site, sitio. 
 
 ite ito definite, definitive; erudito, exquisito. 
 
 ited ido united, unido. 
 
 ity idade brevity, brevidade; santidade. 
 
 ity ez solidity, solidez; fluidez, rapidez. 
 
 ity eza nobility, nobreza. 
 
 ive ivo positive, positivo; fugitive, motive. 
 
 ize izar baptize, baptizar; immortalizdr. 
 
 k co & que frank, franco ; banco ; tank, tanque. 
 
 kin inho lambkin, cordeirinho. 
 
 le lo ample, amplo ; templo, exemplo. 
 
 le iilo title, titulo; discipulo. 
 
 let inho rivulet, rebeirinho. 
 
 liant h^nte brilliant, brilhante. 
 
 ling inho gosling, gansinho. 
 
 lock inho hillock, outeirinho. 
 
 ly (adv.) mente finally, finalmente; totalm^nte. 
 
 ( system, systema ; sympt6ma, emblema, 
 
 TH ma < _ . 
 
 ( drama. 
 
 me nio supreme, supremo; extremo. 
 
 mn mna column, cohimna. 
 
( 253 ) 
 
 English. Portuguese. EXAMPLES. 
 
 nee ncia ignorance, ignorancia; distancia. 
 
 nee n9a vigilance, vigilancia, differe^a. 
 
 ne ona zone, z6na. 
 
 ness ura fineness, finiira ; altiira, fresciira. 
 
 ness eza firmness, firm^za ; franqueza, 
 
 nt nta, nte affront, affronta; font, fonte. 
 
 o o canto, embdrgo. 
 
 on ao prison, prisao; dragao, galleao. 
 
 on ao sermon, sermao; salmao, prisao. 
 
 or or terror, horror, tremor, invent6r. 
 
 or ario proprietor, proprietario. 
 
 or o error, ^rro. 
 
 ose 6r impose, imp6r ; compor, suppor. 
 
 ose 6so verbose, verb6so. 
 
 ose osa prose, prosa. 
 
 ot 6ta, oto patriot, patri6ta ; pilot, pi!6to. 
 
 ous o various, vario ; contiguo, adventicio. 
 
 ous 6so generous, gener6so ; glorioso. 
 
 ph pho paragraph, pardgrapho. 
 
 ply plicar multiply, multiplicdr. 
 
 que co burlesque, burlesco; picturesco. 
 
 re ro, er centre, cntro ; sepiilchro, desdstre. 
 
 rious re illustrious, illdstre. 
 
 rn rno modern, mod^rno; interno. 
 
 rt rte fort, f6rte. 
 
 se so use, uso ; abuso, abstruse, vdso, vdrso. 
 
 ship ade friendship, amizdde. 
 
 ship ia lordship, senhoria; capitania. 
 
 some 6so toilsome, laborioso ; trabalh6so. 
 
 sque sco picturesque, picturesco ; burlesco. 
 
 t to alphabet, alphabet ; distfncto, quie"to. 
 
 te to remote, remoto ; v6to, absolute. 
 
 te ta note, nota. 
 
 ter tro barometer, barometro; therm6metro. 
 
 tion 9ao nation, naQao ; ra9ao, propor9ao. 
 
 tie tolo, tola apostle, ap6stolo ; epistle, epistola. 
 
 tie tello castle, castello. 
 
( 254 ) 
 
 English. Portuguese. EXAMPLES. 
 
 tor dor orator, orad6r ; cultivad6r, regulad6r. 
 
 ture duro mature, madiiro. 
 
 ty dao laxity, laxidao. 
 
 ube ubo cube, cubo. 
 
 uce uzir conduce, eonduzir; deduzfr, induzfr. 
 
 uct (v.) ir instruct, instruir. 
 
 uct (n.) ncta, ucto conduct, conducta, prodiicto. 
 
 ude Tide latitude, longitude, plenitude. 
 
 ude (v.) uir conclude, conclulr. 
 
 ude ao gratitude, gratidao; solidao. 
 
 ul ul consul. 
 
 ulse ulso impulse, impulse. 
 
 ult (v.) ultar consultar. 
 
 um o asylum, asylo ; delirio. 
 
 ure ura manufacture, manufacture, ; f ractiira. 
 
 / urno ) 
 
 * iurna J*.**- 
 
 us o apparatus, appare'lho ; ge"nio. 
 
 x xo complex, comple'xo j se"xo. 
 
 x xto context, contexto ; pretlxto, tSxto. 
 
 y !a academy, academia; economia, espia. 
 
 y la family, famQia ; mem6ria, hist6ria. 
 
 y io adversary, adversario; observat6rio. 
 
 y ea assembly, assemble"a. 
 
 y o destiny, destino. 
 
 ABSTRACT OF PRECEDING TABLE, 
 
 applicable to words in English and Portuguese having the 
 same Greek or Latin root : 
 
 1. Words'in a, al, ar, or, ude, are the same in both languages, 
 with few exceptions. 
 
 2. Words in ant, ent, add e. 
 
 3. Words in act, an, ect, ess, ic, id, il, ism, x, and xto, add 
 o fact, facto. 
 
 4. Words in on, ion, tion, sion, change these into ao, iao, 
 and cao prisao, religiao. 
 
 5. Words in cy, dy, ly, my, gy, ry, sy, change y into ia 
 ncy into ncia, and ice into icia. 
 
( 255 ) 
 
 6. Words in ce, ge, ary, ery, ory, change e and sy into io 
 palace, palacio. 
 
 7. Words in ane, ate, be, ete, ite, ote, ute, ene, ine, ive, 
 ire, se, etc., change e into o humane, humano. 
 
 8. Words in ch (hard), c, ist, ot, add a monarch, 
 monarcha. 
 
 9. Words in ity change ity into idade city, cidade. 
 
 10. Words in ade, ics, change the last letter into a. 
 
 11. Words in ous take oso; in ecus, eo; cious, z. 
 
 12. Words in us and um, change these into o. 
 
 13. Words in ate (verbs), change ate into ar; ing into 
 ando, endo, indo ; ed into ado, ido ; tor into dor. 
 
 ADJECTIVES 
 
 are sometimes roots or primitive words, as diiro, caro, 
 cavo; but more frequently derivatives, with the following 
 
 ADJECTIVES MEANING 
 
 acting : nte, 6nte ; f ulmiudnte, poidnte. 
 
 power to act : ivo, az ; aciivo, temfe. 
 
 acted on : ado, ido ; vasg(c?o, vesttcfo. 
 
 able to be : avel, ivel, uvel, atil, igo ; amdvel, visivel, soltivel, 
 
 poiidtil, levad^o. 
 belonging to : lino, ar, ario, ez, ico, il, ino ; paisawo, pol^r, 
 
 alimentan'o, portugue2J. 
 full of', ento, 6so, lirno, 6z, ^z; lamacettfo, ramoso, tacitwrwo, 
 
 atr6^, cortex. 
 
 made of-, eo ; aiireo, f^rreo. 
 having much of: lido ; Barbw^o, \anudo. 
 bearing, causing : f ero, fico ; f rondi/ero, pacf^co. 
 being : &nte, ^nte, ido ; consta?z^, dece?z^e, hum^c?o. 
 apt to be, going to : biindo ; furibiZwcfo, moiibundo. 
 like tending to : ado, idulo ; achumb&fo, advent^o, acidulo. 
 diminutive, fond of : inho, ino, zinho ; "bomiinho. 
 
 Adjectives in o become feminine by changing o into 
 a: activo, activa. Adverbs are formed by adding mente 
 
( 256 ) 
 
 to the feminine of adjectives, e.g., activamewfe. Diminu- 
 tives by putting mho, ino, or zinho, instead of o : boni- 
 tinho, pequemwo, grandezwz/w. These diminutives have often 
 the force of "ish" in English, as largM, blackM; but 
 far more frequently are expressive of endearment, like 
 "petit," in French; e.g., bonitinho means "pretty .little 
 dear," and rarely prettyM. 
 
 VEKBS 
 
 are primitive, as por ; and compound or derivative, as 
 impoT. Their terminations are of course significative, of 
 which the following are specimens : 
 do, act, be: ar, er, lr, 6r; apromptar, receber, impelKr, 
 
 suppor. 
 grow, become : ecer ; envelhecer, esclarecer, anoitecer, em- 
 
 branquecer. 
 do often, or habitually: ejar; gote;'^r, apedr^r, crave/^r, 
 
 trove/'^r, pade/(r. 
 
 act as, make like : ear ; pastore<r, pedante<r, pavone^r-se. 
 imitate, mimic : ezar ; af rancez^r, aportugue^r. 
 make be : izar, is4r, iUr ; f ertilt'ztfr, human^r, facik'Mr. 
 act in a small way : iscar, icar, igar ; chuvesc^r, bebemc^r, 
 
 choram^ar. 
 
 OUTLINES OF GRAMMAR* 
 
 L The ARTICLE is thus declined : 
 
 The sing. m. o ; /. a ; plur. m. os ;/. as. 
 
 of the do da dos das, comp. of de, of 
 
 to the ao d aos as, a, to 
 
 in the no na nos nas, em, in 
 
 by the pelo pela pelos pelas, por, by 
 
 A or an is um, uma ', of a, de um, de tima, ; to a, a um, 
 a uma, etc. 
 
 * For the table of norms ending in do, consult page xiii. of 
 Roquette's Dictionary in the grammatical part. 
 
( 257 ) 
 
 Examples. s61, a terra, a agua do mar, da barba, no 
 ar, na agua, a h6ra, pela lingua, na 6rbita, da terra, pelo pro-, 
 fessor, os navios, as h6ras, aos cantores, dos navios, as ide"as, 
 pelos professores, nos navios, pelas barbas. Um professor, 
 lima palma, de urn consul, a um pastor, de uma vacca, a urn a 
 ide"a, a casa do governador, a influencia da lingua. 
 
 II. The NoUN has no inflection for case; the objective 
 or accusative is preceded by the particle " a " when there is 
 danger of ambiguity : as, " Joao ama a Pedro," " Lobo nao 
 rnata a lobo." 
 
 Number. The following are the rules for the formation of 
 the plural : 
 
 Rule 1. A noun ending in a vowel takes s: filha, filhas; 
 vento, ventos; gru, griis. 
 
 Rule 2. A noun ending in a consonant (except I and m) 
 takes es : senhor, senhores ; colher, colhe'res ; inglez, inglezes ; 
 cor, cores ; paiz, paizes. 
 
 Rule 3. A noun ending in I drops it before taking es: 
 animal, animaes ; Ien9ol, Ien96e5 ; aziil, aziies. El and il be- 
 come eis : papeZ, papa's ; d6cz7, dbceis. " II" when accented, 
 becomes is : fustZ, fusis. Consul, cal, mal, and pensil follow 
 Rule 1 : consules, cales, males, pensiles. 
 
 Rule 4. A noun ending in m changes m into ns : h6mem 1 
 h6mefts; bom, bo?w; fim, iins-, algiim, algiiws; atiim, atuws. 
 
 Rule 5. Nouns in do form the plural in three ways : (1) 
 By adding s ; (2) by changing do into aes; (3) by changing 
 do into oes. No rule is so safe as lists 1. As maos, pagaos, 
 oregaos, 6rfaos, 6rgaos, s61aos, temporaos, vaos, zangaos. 2. 
 Allemaes, caes, capellaes, capitaes, Catalaes, charlataes, deaes, 
 ermitaes, escrivaes, guardiaes, massapaes, paes, sacristaes, 
 tabelliaes. 3. Ac^oes, confissoes, coracoes, and fully one 
 thousand more, being all the feminine nouns in do, cdo } and 
 too, except mdo and bencdo. Aldeao, anao, and villao take 
 aos or oes ; also, soldao and volcao, oes or aes. The first and 
 second lists are complete ; all other nouns in do come under 
 the third. 
 
 R 
 
( 258 ) 
 
 Some have no plural, Lisboa ; some no singular, cangdlhas, 
 anjirihos (when meaning a double thumb-screw) ; some 
 are the same in both numbers, pires, cdes, ourives, arrdes, 
 alferes, etc. 
 
 GENDER. The Portuguese language has two genders, mas- 
 culine and feminine. The grand general rule is, all nouns 
 ending in o are masculine ; all in a, feminine. Some special 
 rules follow : 
 
 Rule 1. Nouns in e, i, o, and u are masculine : cafe", pe, 
 lacre, leite, sangue, Hvro, alcalf, peru, and many others. 
 
 Exceptions. Chemin6, se", f6, face, alface, sede, parede, 
 vide, tarde, longitude, etc. ; fonte, fr6nte, ponte, arte, parte, 
 s6rte, f6me, carne, n6ite, febre, tosse, classe, chave, ne"ve, 
 s^ge, nao, av6, enx6, m6, tribu, and a few others of no 
 moment. 
 
 Rule 2. Nouns in Z, m, n, r, and z are masculine : sa, 
 h6mem, pesar, Idpis, narfe. 
 
 Exceptions. Cal, niivem, ordem, and those in gem, as 
 imagem; mulher, colh^r, cor, d6r, flor; paz, raiz, f6z, n6z, 
 v6z, cniz, liiz, and all in dez, e.g., timidez, etc. 
 
 Rule 3. Nouns in a, ao, ei, ode, ede, and ude are feminine : 
 as rainha, opiniao, lei, amizade, sede, virtiide. 
 
 Exceptions. Dia ; names of professions in ista, dentista ; 
 Greek nouns in a, diadema ; words in d, chd, alvara ; but 
 pd is feminine. 
 
 III. The ADJECTIVE forms its plural as the noun does, 
 and its feminine thus : 
 o becomes a : douto, douta ; novo, n6va. 
 ao d ; voo, va ; s0, sa. 
 ez, 61, 6r, u, and um add a/ inglez, ingleza; hespanh61a, 
 
 protectora, rnia, uma. 
 oso becomes osa : generoso, genexfisa. 
 
 e, 1, r, and z (except or, ol, and ez) do not change : bre"ve, 
 finaZ, visfve?, faci?, tenaz, cortez. 
 
 The Comparative and Superlative are formed by prefixing 
 mdis and o mdis : alto, mdis alto, o mdis alto. 
 
( 259 ) 
 
 Exceptions. Bom, melhor, 6ptimo; mao, pei6r, pe*ssimo; 
 grande, maior, maxirao; pequeno, men6r, minimo. Some 
 take the following : Issimo, as antfgo, antiqumzrao ; n6bre, 
 nobilissimo; fie"l, Melissimo. lllimo, as facil, facillimo ; 
 humilde, humillimo. ifirrimo, as agio, acem'mo; p6bre, 
 paupemwo, acerrimo and pobiissimo. 
 
 The following are irregular : Bom, boa ; mao, ma. 
 Commum is now invariable. 
 
 Examples of Nouns and Adjectives. As opinioes dos 
 capitaes. Os cora9oes dos animaes. As maos dos guardiaes. 
 As criizes dos Christaos. As margens dos ribeirinhos. O 
 gatinho do pastorinho. Panno Hespanh61. Uma fragata 
 Americana. Os generaes Kussos. Ylnho branco. Um 
 cavallo Arabe. Uma f^bre agiida. As b&as maneiras dos 
 officiaes superiores. Came crua. Um mdo jantar. Doutrina 
 sa. Ares saos. Homens amaveis. Senhoras Allemas. 
 Grandissima actividdde. Mais notavel. A maior affabili- 
 dade. A melh6r vida. men6r tempo. 
 
 The Numerals are Cardinals: um, dois, tr^s, quatro, 
 cinco, seis, s^te, oito, nove, d^z, 6nze, d6ze, treze, quatorze, 
 quinze, dezes^is, dezesdte, dez6ito, dezen6ve, vinte, vinte 
 um, trinta, quarenta, cinco^nta, sessenta, set^nta, oitenta, 
 noventa, cem, duzentos, trezentos, quatrocentos, quinhentos, 
 etc., mil, dois mil. Ordinals: primeiro, segundo, terceiro, 
 qudrto, quinto, sgxto, s^ptimo, oitavo, n6no, de"cimo, unde- 
 cimo, duodecimo, d^cimo-t^rcio, etc., vige*simo, vig^simo- 
 primeiro, trigesimo, quadrage"sirno, etc., cent^simo, mill^- 
 simo. 
 
 IV. The PRONOUNS have the following forms : 
 1. The Personal Pronouns are 
 
 1. . 2 3. m. 3. /. 
 
 eu, nos tu, v<5s 611e, elles dlla, dllas 
 
 de, a, para mim, n<5s ti, V(5s elle, glles dlla, ^llas, si 
 
 (ace. form) me, nos* te, vos* o, os a, as, se 
 
 * N<5s and v<5s, in the nominative and after prepositions, always have 
 the accent, and are pronounced as if n<5ss, voss ; but in the accusative 
 as if n5oz or ntiz, vboz or vttz. 
 
( 260 ) 
 
 The first line contains the nominative forms : /, we, etc. 
 The second, the forms used after prepositions, as a, de, por, 
 para, com, etc., contraction taking place only in d'elle 
 d'elles ; d'ella, d'ellas ; and commigo, comnosco, for com 
 mim, com nos. The third represents the forms equivalent 
 to accusatives or objectives, governed by active verbs. " It 
 is I " is " sfiu tu ; " " it is he," " e elle ; " it is said," " diz- 
 se. }> "Se,".used with a reflective verb, is equal to one, we, 
 they, people; like "on" in French, as " come-se" "one 
 eats ; " " bebe-se bom viriho aqui," " they drink good wine here." 
 
 2. Conjunctive Pronouns are joined to verbs o, him ; a, 
 her; os, them (m.) ; as, them (/.); se, himself, herself, 
 themselves; lhe t to him or her; Hies, to them. These 
 frequently combine with the Personal Pronouns, thus 
 m'o, or mo, it to me ; as "De-w'o," " Give it to me," refer- 
 ring to a masculine object ; de-m'a., if feminine ; de-m'os, if 
 masculine plural; de-m'&s, if feminine plural. The table 
 exhibits the possible combinations : 
 
 self, st-lo 
 fl-fo 
 
 sS-los 
 
 It(m.)to 
 
 me, m'e 
 
 thee, e'o 
 
 him, her, Wo 
 
 us, no-?o 
 
 you, vo-lo 
 
 It(/.)ta 
 
 m'a 
 
 , *' 
 
 , r lh?a> 
 
 ,, no-la 
 
 t;o-Za 
 
 Them \ 
 (m.) to f 
 
 } , m os 
 
 ^'o* 
 
 W<* 
 
 WO-Z(W 
 
 , , vo-los 
 
 Them ) 
 
 ,, m'as 
 
 r 
 
 M ' 
 
 ,, wo-Zos 
 
 ro-?s 
 
 Examples. Diga-me. Eu o digo. Elle ama. Pdga-we. 
 DQ-lhe o Hvro. De-lh'o. De-lhe a penna. De-lh'a. De- 
 2/ie os Hvros. De-lh'os. De-lhe as penna s. Dz-lh'as. Sem 
 wizm, d'^lla, de ti, d'ellas, para elle ; ''encha-o ; do-me um 
 c6po, p^a-Z^e lima v^la, metta-o no sacco, mande-<?s cedo. 
 Elle deu-m'o. lk deu-lh'os. A si. 
 
 Pronouns are further modified in combining with verbs ; 
 e.g., instead of " amar o," to love "him, the form becomes 
 " amgUo " or " amal-o ; " and so of the others amal-a, amal- 
 os, ama-Zos. Again, amamos-o becomes amdmo-Zo. Also, 
 for euphony, o, a, os, and as take n after third plural of the 
 verb adorarn-o becomes adoram-rco. 
 
( 261 ) 
 
 3. The Possessives are 
 
 Meu minha meus minhas my. 
 
 Teu tua teus tiias thy. 
 
 Sen siia seus siias his, her, its, their, your. 
 
 Nosso nossa nossos nossas our. 
 
 Vosso vossa vossos vossas your. 
 
 The possessive often requires an article : o meu Hvro, my 
 book ; a minha casa, my house ; but the article is not used 
 before persons : meu pae, m6u irmao, vossa senhoria, etc. 
 
 4. The Demonstratives 
 
 fiste e"sta dstes estas (isto) this, those. 
 fisse 6ssa esses e"ssas (isso) that, those. 
 Aquelle aquella aquelles aquellas (aquillo) that, those (yonder). 
 
 flute is exactly "this;" esse is "that" near; aquelle is 
 "that" yonder. They combine with outro, forming esf- 
 outrOj this other ; est'dutros, these others ; ess'outro, aquelT- 
 outro. 4 Isto is " this" used alone, Hke " ceci;" isto is " that" 
 like " cela." 
 
 Mesmo mesma mesmos mesmas self, same, very one. 
 a os as that, those 
 
 Mesmo is used thus : $u mesmo, I myself; elles mesmos, 
 they themselves. Also, o mesmo homem, the same man ; ao 
 mesmo tempo, at the same time. " 0" as a demonstrative, 
 is used thus : o que, he who ; also, o de, that of. All these 
 combine with de, as d'este, d'esta, d'estes, d'estas, d'isto ; 
 d'esse, d'dquelle; do mesmo, da mesma, dos mesmos, das 
 mesmas; do, da, etc., with em, as n'este, n'esta, n' estas, 
 n'isto; n'esse, n' aquelle, n'aquillo, no mesmo, no, na, etc. 
 
 Examples. ste livro, 4sta mesa, estes Hvros, 4stas m^sas ; 
 d'este cavallo, d'e"sta questao, d'^stes h6mens, d'estas mu- 
 Iheres ; a ^ste rapaz, a ^sta rapariga, a estes rapazes, a 4stas 
 raparigas ; n'este quarto, n'6sta cama, n'estes quartos, n^stas 
 camas; aquelle livro, aquella cdsa, aquelles Hvros, aquellas 
 
( 262 ) 
 
 casas; d'aquelle criado, d'aquella criada, d'aquelles criados, 
 d'aquellas criadas ; aquelle h6mem, aque"lla mulher, aquelles 
 h6mens, aquellas mulheres ; n'aquelle navio, n'aquella cama, 
 etc. No mesmo dia, isso mesmo, pela mesma razao, ella 
 mesma ; o niimero dos que , dois reinos, o do temCr, e o da 
 esper&nga, os do n6sso dia. (1 Cor. xv. 39). 
 
 5. The Relatives are 
 
 Que (invariable), who, which, that, whom. 
 
 O que, a que, os que, as que, what, which ; he, she, or those who. 
 
 Cujo, cuja, ctijos, cujas, whose. 
 
 Quern (invariable), whoever ; he or she who ; what. 
 
 O qua"!, a qual, os qua"es, as quaea, who, which ; the which. 
 
 " Que " is used with both genders, both numbers, with 
 verbs, and prepositions : " o que " is equal to that which, or 
 wJiat, in the phrase " what he says is true." It is declined like 
 o, a, do que, da que, etc. " Ciijo " (de quern) takes the pre- 
 position but no article, de cujo cavallo not do. " Quern " 
 has the force of who in the phrase "who steals my purse," or 
 the Latin "sunt qui;" it takes prepositions. " qual" is 
 used instead of que to prevent ambiguity, as lequel is in 
 French ; it is declined with the article, and takes the pre- 
 positions : do qual, da qual, dos quaes, das quaes ; no qual, 
 pelo qual, etc. 
 
 Examples. professor que falla, a criada que canta, os 
 pensamentos que sao vaos, estas palavras que dlgo. re!6gio 
 que tenho. A filha que elle ama, h6mem que vejo. A 
 casa em que ; as circumstancias em que ; a penna com que, o 
 neg6cio de que ; o homem estd certo do que diz. N6s di- 
 zemos o que sabemos. que tern a esp6sa ^ do esposo. Nao 
 sei o que ^. h6mem de cujo livro, etc. A mulher de cujo 
 relogio. rapaz de cujas maos, a ralnha de cujos cavallos. 
 D4 a quem te pe"de. C6mo quern tinha autoridade. Quern 
 n' elle ere nao e* condemnado. Somos quem somos. De 
 quem tern a h6nra de ser. Deos a quem havia crldo. Nao 
 sabla quem elle e*ra. (See also John vii. 25). Diante de 
 Deos, a quem havla crido, o qual da vida aos mo"rtos ; sua 
 
t 263 ) 
 
 grdga, a qual elle derramou ; os filhos entre os quaes vivemos ; 
 pelas quaes cousas ; pelo Evangelho do qual eu fui feito 
 ministro. (Col. ii. 3; Eph. iii. 12; iv. 16; Philem. 12; 
 2 Cor. xi. 29; Eom. ix. 20.) 
 
 6. The Interrogatives are 
 
 Que ? (invariable), what 1 
 
 Quern ? (invariable), who 1 whom 1 
 
 Cujo, ciija, cujos, cujas ? whose 1 (de quern ? is more usual). 
 
 Qual, quaes ? which 1 (i.e., which of two or more). 
 
 Examples. Que livros tern elle ? Que boas n6vas ha ? 
 Com que autoridade? Que riia e" esta? Que diremos? 
 Que diz a Escritura 1 ? Que distancia? Que h6ras sao? 
 Que que"r 1 A que fim 1 Quern e" 1 Quern me livrara 1 
 Quern nos separara ] Quern sdbe 1 De quern e" isto ? Com 
 quern falldu? De quern 6 ^sta imagem 1 ? De quern 6 elle 
 filho ? Quaes sao as ruas 1 Qual pois o ^,ma mais 1 Qual 
 mais facil? Qual 4 o caminho? Qual 6 o preo disto? 
 A qual dos sete 1 Qual d'elles ? Qual dos dois ? 
 
 7. The Indefinites are 
 
 Algu&m (ind.), somebody, any one ; muito, much, many ; pouco, 
 
 1 little, few ; tal, qual. 
 Algiim, some, any ; nenhiim, no, none ; qu^nto, how great, what; 
 
 tiido (ind.). 
 Ambos, both ; ninguSm (ind.), nobody ; qualquer, any, whatever ; 
 
 tanto, so great, so much, so many. 
 Cada (ind.), each (not every) ; outrem (ind.), others ; quemquer 
 
 ' (ind.), whatever ; uns, umas, some. 
 C^rto, a certain ; outro, another, other ; so, alone. 
 FuUno, such-a-one ; os mais, the rest ; todo, all (pi.), every. 
 
 Examples. Conhece Y. S. algdem ? Tern alguma queixa 
 contra alguem? alguns de v6ssos po^tas, algumas pessoas, 
 ambos gritaram, cada h6mem, cada casa, cada um, disse-me 
 c^rta pessoa, fulano diz, muito vinho, muita prudencia, 
 muitos h6mens, miiitas filhas, nenhum h6mem, nenhiima 
 casa, nenhtim de seus amigos, ningu^m Id esta, sem 6utrem 
 em casa, outro dia, nao ha 6utro meio, os mais fugiram, 
 
( 264 ) 
 
 p6uco tempo, pouca, agua, p6ucos, poucas pess6as, quanto 
 tempo, com quanta dor ! quantos trabalhos ! quantas noites ! 
 qualque"r h6mem sabe isso, quaes quer que sejam os perigos, 
 elle s6, e"lla s6, a s6 excepgao, todo (all} o anno, t6da a noite, 
 todos os dias (every), todas as noites, tal pae, tal lilho, taes 
 e taes c6usas, tal e qual, alguns dos quaes, elle e* tal qual 
 V. S. o tern conhecido, tudo ia bem, tanto dinheiro, vinte e 
 tantos, um ao outro, uns aos outros, uns e 6utros, uns doze 
 liomens, umas meias, um e outro. 
 
 V. VERBS. The Portuguese Verb is regular in its struc- 
 ture, and presents few difficulties to the Latin scholar. 
 Verbs are chiefly derived from nouns olho, olhar, ar, 
 arejar the root being modified by prefixes and affixes. 
 The peculiarities are 
 
 1. An inflected or personal infinitive, amar eu, amares tu, 
 amar elle, amarwos n6s, amarcfes v6s, amarm elles = my 
 loving, thy loving, his loving, etc. 
 
 2. The use of four auxiliaries ter, haver, ser, and estdr 
 and the remarkable distinction between ser, representing 
 a permanent, essential quality, and estdr, a temporary state 
 or circumstance. 
 
 3. Richness in compound tenses and idiomatic forms; 
 and singular combinations with pronouns, expressing deli- 
 cate shades of meaning : e.g., tenho or hei amado, tinha or 
 havia amado, five or houve arnado, etc. ; anddndo vendo, has 
 de amdr, ter sido amddo, tenho de ir, acdbo de ouvir, estd 
 para pedir, o cair da folha. Tenho que escrever, havemos de 
 nos divertir, estou a temer, escreuer-lhe-hei, te-lo-hd V. S. 
 aprendido. Deve-se abrir asjanellas, batei, e dbrir-se-vos-hd. 
 Pei*dodr-se-lhe-hd. Fa-lo-hei. 
 
 4. The Gerund * (present participle active) combines with 
 estdr to form progressive tenses in ndo, like the English ing : 
 e.g., estdu amdndo, I am loving. It is joined to nouns 
 (without undergoing inflection); e.g., a cabega naddndo 
 em sdngue. It is used absolutely, evitdndo expressoes bdixas. 
 
 * Constancio's nomenclature. 
 
( 265 ) 
 
 Often conveys a future contingent idea : havendo logdr, irei : 
 if I have time, I shall go. 
 
 5. The Supine * (past participle) in ddo or ido (for irregu- 
 lars, see p. 147), combines with ter and haver to form the 
 compound tenses of the active, and with ser and estdr, those 
 of the passive; in the first, invariable; in the second, in- 
 flected like an adjective. Elle 4 amado, ella 4 amada, elles 
 sao amddos, ellas sao amadas. It does not follow the French 
 construction (as it once did) in such phrases as "le livre 
 quej'aiemY/" "la lettre que j'ai eerite;" but remains in- 
 variable. It is often used like an ablative absolute (in- 
 flected) : chegddo o tempo, the time being come ; consultddos 
 os capitdes. Employed actively, as well as passively, as an 
 adjective: "cancddo" is tiring and "tiree?;" " esquecido" 
 " forgetful," and " forgotten" It is elliptically used without 
 the verb to be; e.g., susp&to de infe'cto," for " suspeito de 
 ser infe'cto," suspected of being infected. 
 
 6. Keflective, reciprocal, impersonal verbs and reflectives 
 as impersonate, are in constant use, the whole tendency of 
 the language being to employ the third person, like " on " 
 in French. They are, of course, connected with the appro- 
 priate pronouns, me, te, se, etc., except in the few cases 
 where the impersonal is pure : abstenho-me de beber, nao me 
 esquecerei. Often equivalent to the passive, sdbe-se, it is 
 known, divide-se a casa. Reciprocals are Englished by 
 " each other : " muito se querem os dois amigos. Impersonals 
 are reflective, as vde-se (one goes), chega-se, faz -se; or pure, 
 as vdle, chove, conv&m. 
 
 7. The Moods are nearly the same as in other languages. 
 No optative form, the defect being supplied by oxald, oxald 
 que eu tivesse, etc. The subjunctive is used (1.) When con- 
 tingency is in the second or subordinate clause : que'ro que elle 
 fdca isto. (2.) As a polite imperative: diya-lhe. (3.) In- 
 stead of the English infinitive ; dfga-lhe que suba, tell him 
 to come up. (4.) After words of need, duty, possibility, 
 etc. : 6preciso que eu vd. (5.) Often after verbs of doubt, 
 
 * Constancy's nomenclature. 
 
( 266 ) 
 
 fear, or emotion : espe*ro, desejo, estimo, receio, quero, 
 aconselho, r6go, pe*90, creio, temo, etc. Espe"ro que V. S. 
 esteja melh6r ; receio que terihdmos um verao quente ; duvfdo 
 que assim seja. (6.) After words and phrases indicating 
 purpose, para que, afim que ; or concession, ainda que, posto 
 que ; condition, se, no caso que, comtanto que, etc. ; para que 
 tome e"ste logar; afim que elle teriha bons examples. (7.) In 
 prayers, wishes, blessings, etc. : a graca seja com todos, paz 
 seja aos irmaos. 
 
 (Note. The Portuguese subjunctive is not always used 
 to express purpose, as it is in Latin after " ut ; " para with 
 the infinitive is generally used like " pour " in French, or 
 in old English "for to," as pdra fazgr isto. The great 
 distinction between the infinitive and the subjunctive in the 
 subordinate clause is, that the infinitive is to be used in 
 Portuguese when the verbs in loth clauses refer to the same 
 person. " Quero fazer isto," I wish to do that : the sub- 
 junctive in Portuguese, when the verbs refer to different 
 persons : " Quero que elle fdca Isto," I wish him to do that, 
 though translated by the infinitive in English.) 
 
 The conditional (potential or suppositive) affirms, depend- 
 ing on a previous doubt, whereas the subjunctive doubts, 
 depending on a previous affirmation : eu sairia, se o tempo 
 estivesse bom, I should go out, if the weather were good ; 
 quero que elle fdca. The infinitive is often used as a 
 noun : o cair da folha, the fall of the leaf ; o linico ser 
 humano, the only human being. 
 
 8. The Tenses require attention. The present in Portu- 
 guese is used as in English, but also often stands for a 
 future : vou ja, I shall go directly ; nao dou tanto, I shall 
 not give so much. The imperfect is not a past definite (as 
 given in most Portuguese grammars for Englishmen), but 
 a progressive tense, as eu lia quando elle entrou not I 
 read, or did read, but I was reading when he came in. 
 The preterite definite or perfect tense shows the definite act, 
 fallei, I spoke ; but it also represents the English compound 
 of the present when the act is definite ; thus, jantei, I have 
 
( 267 ) 
 
 dined ; o vapor chegou, the steamer has arrived; ja Ihe disse, 
 I have already told you. [Note this carefully.] The pre- 
 terite indefinite much as in English, tenho escripto tres ou 
 quatro cartas sem effeito, and so of the others. The future 
 indicative as in English ; but the future subjunctive in or, 
 er = to the English present (when used as a future), se vier, if 
 he comes : se o vapor chegdr, if the steamer arrives. The Por- 
 tuguese tense in dsse, esse, isse, generally called imperfect sub- 
 junctive, is hypothetical; sometimes past (after a past), elles 
 nao deram pr6vas que tivessem, etc., they did not give proof 
 that they had (as if it were " could have "), e c6mo estivessem 
 olhando para o ceo (Acts i. 10); sometimes future, se podesse 
 ser, if it could be ; se eu desse, if I were to give. The com- 
 pound forms follow the same usages : dira tudo o que tiver 
 ouvldo, he will say all he has heard, i.e., that he may or shall 
 have heard ; se elle me tivesse fallado, if he had spoken, i.e., 
 if he could have spoken. The pluperfect in ra, amara. 
 
 9. The persons are the same as in other languages, but the 
 usage is different. Where the English use the second plural 
 "you" in speaking to all, the Portuguese always use the 
 third person in speaking to superiors and equals, and often 
 in addressing inferiors ; e.g., " Como esta h6je 1 " is, literally, 
 "How does (he) to-day?" Hence, to prevent ambiguity, the 
 frequent necessity of putting V. E., V. S., or V. M. before 
 the verb the first, for Vfissa Excellencia, when speaking to 
 persons of rank or ladies; the second, "Fossa Senhoria, for 
 gentry and the middle-classes ; the third, V6ssa Mercd (pro- 
 nounced Vosmece), to workpeople and upper-servants; and 
 Vosse amongst intimate friends and to the lowest classes. 
 The pronouns personal, possessive, etc. must, of course, 
 all be in the third person : " Como esta seu irmao ? " How 
 is your brother? Hence "a stia casa" would mean "your 
 house," a casa dflle, "his house." Tu is used in prayer; 
 amongst friends, in families, to servants, and the poor. Vos 
 is employed in elevated style ; in sermons, lectures, addresses ; 
 " V6s, Senhor," to the king. When used for " tu," the verb is 
 
( 268 ) 
 
 plural, the adjective singular: v6?, minha filha, estaes louca." 
 In Portuguese novels (translated from a foreign language), 
 professing to represent people speaking as in real life, all the 
 dialogues are in " vos," instead of being in the third person 
 singular! The third person plural is spelled with em or 
 eem, ao or am. 
 
 10. Formation of Tenses. The student will master the 
 verbs with ease if he carefully notices the formation of the 
 tenses from the infinitive. (1.) In the first person, the personal 
 infinitive and the future subjunctive are the same as the present 
 infinitive, but are inflected, e.a., am-ar, am-ar, am-ar. (2.) 
 Present participle formed thus : am-ar, o,m-dndo ; past parti- 
 ciple, am-ar, am-ddo. (3.) Future, amar, amar-ei/ condi- 
 tional, am-ar, amar-Co. (4.) Pluperfect amar, amar-o. (5.) 
 Imperfect subjunctive, am-ar, am-dsse. (6.) Present indica- 
 tive, am-ar, am-o, and present subjunctive, am-ar, &me. 
 (7.) Imperfect indicative, am-ar, &m-dva, and perfect indica- 
 tive, am-ar, am-ei. 
 
 The correspondence of the tenses is extremely important. 
 In the indicative 1. The present and future may be followed 
 by any tense. 2. All the tenses may be followed by the 
 present in affirmations. 3. The perfect and imperfect are 
 followed by the imperfect when the action is not complete, 
 by the perfect when it is. In the subjunctive, the tense is 
 determined by the tense of the indicative verb that precedes 
 (1.) The present indicative is followed by the present subjunc- 
 tive when the second action is future ; by the perfect sub- 
 junctive when the action is complete; by the hypothetical 
 form in sse when the act is incomplete. (2.) The perfect 
 indicative and conditional are followed by the form in sse 
 when the act is future ; by the perfect subjunctive when it is 
 past. (3.) The future indicative takes the present subjunctive 
 and future subjunctive when the act is future ; the future 
 perfect subjunctive when the act is to have been done. In 
 the imperative, the governing or leading verb takes the in- 
 finitive, or present subjunctive with que. 
 
( 269 ) 
 
 In the conditional 1. The form in via takes after it the 
 form in sse. 2. The form in dm, in the first clause requires 
 the same form in the second. 3. The compound eu o "teria 
 avisado," in the first clause, requires "se elle m'a 
 pedldo " in the second. 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 eu h6i, I have t6nho, I have sou, I am 
 
 (always) 
 
 tu hds, thou hast tens, etc. es 
 
 elle ha, he has tern & 
 
 nos havemos, we t6mos s&nos 
 
 have 
 vos havis, you tendes sdis 
 
 have 
 elles hao, they 
 
 have 
 
 havia, had, was 
 
 estou, I am 
 
 (sometimes) 
 estas 
 esU 
 estamos 
 
 having 
 havias 
 havia 
 havia"mos 
 havieis 
 haviam 
 
 houve, had 
 
 houv^ste 
 
 houve 
 
 houvemos 
 
 houv^stes 
 
 houv^ram 
 
 t^m, or teem sao 
 
 estao 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 tinha, had, was era, was (al- 
 
 estdva, was 
 
 having ways) 
 tinhas ^ras 
 
 (then or there) 
 estavas 
 
 tinha era 
 
 estdva 
 
 tinh&mos ^rS,moa 
 
 estavSmos 
 
 tinheis 4reis 
 
 estdveis 
 
 tinham 4ram 
 
 estavam 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 tive, had fui, was (al- 
 
 estive, was 
 
 ways) 
 tive"ste foste 
 
 (then) 
 estiv^ste 
 
 t6ve foi 
 
 estive 
 
 tiv^mos fomos 
 
 estiv^mos 
 
 tiv^stes fostes 
 
 estiv^stes 
 
 tiv^ram forani 
 
 estiveram 
 
( 270 ) 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 houve"ra, had 
 had 
 houveras 
 houve>a 
 houv^rSmos 
 houvereis 
 houv4ram 
 
 tivera, had had 
 
 tiveras 
 tivdra 
 tiverSmos 
 tiv^reis 
 tive"ram 
 
 fora, had been 
 (always) 
 foras 
 fora 
 forSmos 
 foreis 
 foram 
 
 estiv^ra, had 
 been (then) 
 estive"ras 
 estiv^ra 
 estiv^rSmos 
 estiv^reis 
 estiv6ram 
 
 Future. 
 
 haver&i, shall 
 have 
 haver&s 
 havera 
 havermos 
 haverfcis 
 haverao 
 
 ter^i, shall have 
 
 teras 
 tera 
 tergmos 
 teris 
 terao 
 
 serei, shall be 
 (always) 
 seras 
 
 sera 
 seremos 
 serdis 
 serao 
 
 estarei, shall be 
 (then) 
 estaras 
 estara 
 estar^mos 
 estar^is 
 estarao 
 
 Future Conditional. 
 
 haveria 
 haverias 
 haveria 
 haveri&mos 
 haverieis 
 haveriam 
 
 teria 
 terias 
 terfa 
 teria'mos 
 terieis 
 teriam 
 
 seria 
 serias 
 seria 
 seri^mos 
 serieis 
 seriam 
 
 estaria 
 estarias 
 estaria 
 estariainos 
 estarieis 
 estariam 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 ha(tu) 
 havei (vos) 
 
 tern 
 tende 
 
 sede 
 
 esta 
 estae 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. 
 
 haja, have 
 hajas 
 haja 
 hajamos 
 hajaes 
 hajani 
 
 te"nha, have 
 t^nhas 
 tenha 
 tenh&mos 
 tenhdes 
 tenham 
 
 sja,be,may be est^ja, be, may be 
 sejas estejas 
 eeja esteja 
 sejamos estej^mos 
 sejdes estejdes 
 s^jam estejam 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 houve"sse, tivesse, should f osse, might be, estivesse, might 
 
 should have, or have, or had were be, were 
 
 houvesses [had tivesses fosses estivesses 
 
 houv^sse tivesse fosse estive"sse 
 
 houv^ssemos tiv^ssemos fossemos estivessemos 
 
 houvesseis tiv^sseis fosseis estivesseis 
 
 houvessem tiv6ssem fossem estivessem 
 
houve"r, shall 
 
 have 
 houveres 
 houver 
 houvermos 
 houv^rdes 
 houverem 
 
 have^r, to have 
 ter, to have 
 
 ( 271 ) 
 
 Future. 
 
 tiver, shall have for, shall be, 
 
 were 
 
 tive*res fores 
 
 tive"r for 
 
 tive"rmos formos 
 
 tive"rdes f6rdes 
 
 tiverem forem 
 
 estive"r, shall be, 
 
 were 
 estive"res 
 estiv^r 
 estivermos 
 estfv&rdes 
 estiv6rem 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 Impersonal. 
 
 ser, to be (always) 
 
 estar, to be (some time or place) 
 
 Personal. 
 
 haver eu, or houver, my having s6r 
 
 haveres tu 
 
 haver elle 
 
 hav^rmos nos 
 
 haverdes v6s 
 
 haverem elles 
 
 tares 
 
 ter 
 
 termoa 
 
 terdes 
 
 terem 
 
 havendo 
 
 havido 
 
 thy 
 
 his 
 
 our 
 
 your 
 
 their 
 
 my 
 
 thy 
 
 his 
 
 our 
 
 your 
 
 their 
 
 seres 
 ser 
 
 sermos 
 serdes 
 
 estdr 
 
 estdres 
 
 estdr 
 
 estdrmos 
 
 estdrdes 
 
 estarem 
 
 my being 
 thy 
 his 
 our 
 your 
 their 
 
 my 
 thy 
 his 
 
 our 
 
 
 
 
 your 
 their 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present 
 t^ndo se"ndo 
 
 Past. 
 tido sido 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 est&ndo 
 estddo 
 
 tenho havido . I have ha 
 tinhd I had , 
 terei I shall have , 
 tenhd I may have , 
 (se) tive"r if 1 have , 
 (se) tiv^sse if I had , 
 ter to have , 
 tendo having . 
 
 4 
 
 tenho tido 
 tinha 
 terei 
 tenha 
 tiv^r 
 tiv^sse 
 ter 
 tendo 
 
 I have had 
 I had 
 I shall have 
 I may have 
 if I have 
 if I had 
 to have 
 having 
 
( 272 ) 
 
 tenho sido 
 tinha 
 terei 
 tenha 
 tiver 
 tive"sse 
 
 tgndo 
 
 I have been 
 I had 
 I shall have 
 I may have 
 if I had 
 if I had 
 to have 
 having ., 
 
 tenho estado 
 tinha 
 terei 
 tenha 
 tivSr 
 tive"sse 
 ter 
 tendo ,, 
 
 I have been 
 I had 
 I shall have 
 I may have 
 if I have 
 if I had 
 to have 
 having 
 
 Observations. (1.) Hei t havia, etc., maybe used for tenho, 
 tinha, etc., throughout. (2.) Haver de and Ter de, followed 
 by the infinitive, form a complete series of compound tenses ; 
 e.g., Hei de ser, I have to be, or shall be ; Havia de s$r, I 
 had to be; Haverei de ser, I shall have to be, etc. (3.) 
 Estdr similarly combines with the present participle Estdu 
 sendo, I am being ; Estdva sendo, and so on. (4.) The com- 
 pound form, ter sido, unites with the participle of the verb 
 to compose the passive voice : Tenho sido amddo, ella tern 
 sido amdda, nos temos sido amddos, ellas tern sido amddas, 
 and so on, the sido invariable. 
 
 The Three Regular Conjugations, in ar, er, and ir ; and 
 the Verb P6r. 
 
 ponho, I put 
 P 5es 
 
 poe 
 pomos 
 
 p6ndes 
 poem 
 
 punha, was 
 
 putting 
 punhas 
 piinha 
 punhamos 
 piinheis 
 punhani 
 
 fallo, I speak 
 fdllas, thou 
 speakest 
 fdlla, he speaks 
 fallamos, we 
 speak 
 falldes, you 
 speak 
 fallam, they 
 speak 
 
 fallava, I was 
 speaking 
 falldvas 
 fallava 
 fallavamos 
 fallaveis 
 fallavam 
 
 INDICATIVB. 
 Present. 
 como, I eat dbro, I open 
 comes abres 
 
 i come abre 
 comemos abrimos 
 
 comeis abris 
 comem abrem 
 
 Imperfect. 
 comia, was eat- abria, was 
 ing opening 
 comias abrias 
 comia abria 
 comiamos abriamos 
 comieis abrieis 
 comiam abriam 
 
( 273 ) 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 fallei, spoke 
 
 comi, eat, ate abri, opened 
 
 piiz, put 
 
 falldste 
 
 come"ste abriste 
 
 pus^ste 
 
 fal!6u 
 
 com&u abriu 
 
 poz 
 
 fallamos 
 
 comemos abrimos 
 
 pusemos 
 
 falldstes 
 
 comestes abristes 
 
 pusestes 
 
 fallaram 
 
 comram abrlram 
 
 puseram 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 fallara, had 
 
 com^ra, had abrira, had 
 
 pusera, had put 
 
 spoken 
 falldras 
 
 eaten opened 
 comeras abriras 
 
 puseras 
 
 falldra 
 
 comera abrira 
 
 pusera 
 
 fall dram os 
 
 comeramos abriramos 
 
 puseramos 
 
 fallareis 
 
 comdreis abrireis 
 
 pusereis 
 
 fallaram 
 
 comeram abriram 
 
 puseram 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 fallar^i, shall 
 
 comerei, shall abrirei, shall 
 
 porei, shall put 
 
 speak 
 
 eat open 
 
 
 fallaras 
 
 comeras abriras 
 
 pords 
 
 fallard 
 
 comera abrira 
 
 pord 
 
 fallaremos 
 
 comeremos abrirmos 
 
 por^mos 
 
 fallareis 
 
 comereis abrireis 
 
 por^is 
 
 fallarao 
 
 comerao abrirao 
 
 porao 
 
 
 Conditioned. 
 
 
 fallaria, should 
 
 comeria, should abriria, should 
 
 poria, should 
 
 speak 
 
 eat open 
 
 put 
 
 fallarias 
 
 comerias abririas 
 
 porias 
 
 fallaria 
 
 comeria abriria 
 
 poria 
 
 fallariamos 
 
 comeriamos abririamos 
 
 poriamos 
 
 fallarieis 
 
 comerieis abririeis 
 
 porieis 
 
 fallariam 
 
 comeriam abririam 
 
 poriam 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 
 s. fdlla, speak 
 
 come, eat abre, open 
 
 p6e, put 
 
 p. fallde 
 
 comei abri 
 
 ponde 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present* 
 
 
 fdlle, speak 
 
 coma, eat dbra, open 
 
 ponha, put 
 
 fdlles 
 
 comas dbras 
 
 ponhas 
 
 fdlle 
 
 c6ma dbra 
 
 ponha 
 
 fallemos 
 
 comemos abramos 
 
 ponhamos 
 
 falleis 
 
 comaes abrdes 
 
 ponhaes 
 
 fdllem 
 
 comam dbram 
 
 ponham 
 
 * It is incorrect to translate the subjunctive present by 
 
 S 
 
 may. 
 
( 274 ) 
 
 Imperfect* 
 
 falldsse, spoke, comesse, eat, abrisee, opened, pose"sse, put 
 should speak should eat should open 
 
 fallasses 
 falldsse 
 fallassemos 
 fallasseis 
 fallarem 
 
 comesses abrisses 
 comesse abrisse 
 comessemos abrissemos 
 commesseis abrisseis 
 come"ssem abrissem 
 
 pose*sses 
 pos^sse 
 pos^ssemos 
 pos^sseis 
 posessem 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 (sg) fallacy I 
 speak 
 falldres 
 fallar 
 fallarmos 
 fallardes 
 fallarem 
 
 (se} corner, if I (se) abrir, if I 
 eat open 
 comeres abnres 
 comer abrir 
 comermos abrirmos 
 comerdes abrirdes 
 come'rem abrirem 
 
 (se)puz^r, if I 
 put 
 puzeres 
 puzer 
 puz^rmos 
 puzerdes 
 puz^rem 
 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 
 
 Impersonal. 
 
 
 fallar 
 
 corner abrir 
 
 p6r 
 
 
 Personal. 
 
 
 falldr eu 
 falldres tu 
 falldr elle 
 fallarmos n6s 
 fallardes vos 
 fallarem elles 
 
 my speaking abrir eu 
 thy abrires tu 
 his abrir e"lle 
 our aV>n'rmos n6s 
 your abrirdes v6s 
 their abrirem elles 
 
 my opening 
 
 his " 
 our 
 
 their " 
 
 comer eu 
 comeres tu 
 comer lle 
 comermos n6s 
 comerdes v6s 
 comerem elles 
 
 my eating p6r eu 
 thy pores tu 
 his p6r elle 
 our pormos n6s 
 your pordes vos 
 their porem elles 
 
 my putting 
 
 thy 
 his 
 our 
 
 their ^ 
 
 Its force can only be understood in a sentence : Diga-lhe que fdtte, tell 
 him to speak ; nao cdma, don't eat ; dbra a porta, open the door. 
 
 * Better called hypothetical, for it is so used ; e.g., Elle iria, se eu 
 fdttasse, he would go, if I spoke ; seria melhor se comesse, he would be 
 better if he ate, or would eat. 
 
( 275 ) 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Fallando, speaking ; comendo, eating ; abrindo, opening ; p6n- 
 do, putting. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Fallddo, spoken ; comido, eaten ; aberto, opened ; posto, put. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 (1.) Tenho fallddo, I have spoken ; tiriha fallddo, I had 
 spoken; terei fallddo, I shall have spoken; teriha fallddo, I 
 may have spoken ; se eu tiver fallddo, if I have spoken ; se 
 eu tivesse fallddo, if I had spoken; ter fallddo, to have 
 spoken ; tendo fallddo, having spoken ; and similarly of the 
 other conjugations. (2.) Forms with haver: Eei defalldr, 
 I have to speak, i.e., I shall speak ; havia de falldr, I had to 
 speak, and so on. (3.) Forms with ter: e.g., teiiho que 
 escrever, I have to write; and so on throughout the verb. 
 (4.) Forms with estar : estou falldndo, I am speaking ; estdu 
 para pedir, I am about to ask ; estou a comer, I am eating. 
 (5.) Passive form : S6u amddo, somos amados, etc. ; estdu 
 encantado ; and so on throughout. 
 
 - IEKEGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. Verbs in car change c into qu before e: ficar, fique, 
 tocdr, toquei. 
 
 2. Verbs in gar insert u between g and e : entregar, entre^- 
 gwe, cheg^r, chegwet. 
 
 3. The irregular participles, in verbs of the first conjuga- 
 tion are, chiefly, aceito for aceitado, entregue for entregado, 
 enxtito for enxugddo, mdrto for matado, pdgo for pagddo. 
 
( 276 ) 
 
 4. The irregular verbs are estdr and dar, the former 
 already given. The latter is regular in ddva, darei, daria, 
 ddndo t dado, and all compound tenses. 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 d6u d& da d&mos ddes dSo, give 
 
 Perfect Indicative. 
 dei de"ste deu de"mos destes de"ram, gave 
 
 Pluperfect Indicative. 
 dera de"ras dera de"ranios dereis de"ram, had given 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 de" des d demos deis deem, give, may give 
 
 Imperfect Subjunctive. 
 desse desses desse dessemos d^sseis de"ssem, might give 
 
 Future Subjunctive. 
 de"r d^res d^r d^rmos derdes derem, if give 
 
 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 Dar audi&icia, cor, espa50, g!6ria, lei, lugar, 6rdens, etc., 
 as in English; dar beneficio, privile"gio, melos, confer bene- 
 fits, etc. ; dar tratos, liva, produce, yield. Dar combines 
 with nouns thus : dar saltos, to leap ; gritos, to cry ; 
 salva, to salute. Dar de comer, de bebr, de vestir, to give 
 food, drink, clothing ; dar a entender, give to understand ; 
 dar em, strike ; sobre, attack ; pdra, face. Deu-se por 
 medico, gave out that he was a doctor ; dou-me bem aqul, I 
 am well here ; dou-me bem com elle, I am good friends with 
 him; demos que assim seja, admit it to be so; quern me 
 dera! how I desire ! nao te de cuidado, never mind. 
 
( 277 ) 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND 
 CONJUGATION.* 
 
 1. Verbs in ger change g into j in the present indicative 
 and subjunctive : abranger, abranjo, abranja. 
 
 2. Verbs in cer change c into p before o and a: descer, 
 deso, desga. 
 
 3. Verbs in oer change o into 6 before o and a : moer, 
 m6o, moa. 
 
 4. Perdfr changes d into c in the first person singular, 
 present indicative, and subjunctive : perder, pe"rco, perca. 
 
 5. The so-called participles are really adjectives: abso- 
 Itito, dbsorto, acceso, contradito, convicto, corrupto, defeso, 
 descripto, despeito, dito, eleito, escrfpto, feito, inctirso, inter- 
 rtipto, manteudo, mdrto, preso, quisto, resoMto, reteudo, 
 revisto, roto, visto, volto. (Those in italics have also regular 
 forms, usage determining the application, as in English, 
 absolved, absolute ; hung, hanged ; worked collar, wrought 
 iron.) 
 
 cres 
 
 cr6 
 
 crdes 
 
 Present. 
 
 crio, believe leio, read 
 
 les 
 IS 
 
 ledes 
 
 sei, know 
 sdbes 
 
 sabeis 
 
 v6jo, see 
 ves 
 vg 
 vedes 
 
 digo, say 
 
 dizes 
 
 diz 
 
 faco, do 
 
 fdzes 
 faz 
 
 p6sso, can 
 
 p6des 
 
 p6de 
 
 qu6ro,t want 
 que'res 
 
 trdgo, bring 
 
 trazes 
 
 trdz 
 
 valho 
 
 vdles 
 vale 
 
 to be worth $ 
 or to help 
 
 * For the table of all irregular past participles consult page xxviiL 
 of Eouquette's Dictionary in the grammatical part, 
 t Requerer makes require, requara. 
 $ In this sense has no imperative. 
 
( 278 ) 
 
 The other persons regular : emos, eis, em or eem. 
 
 Imperfect (was doing ; used to, would). 
 
 crla, was believ- fazia queria valia 
 
 ing lia trazia via 
 
 dizia podia sabia 
 
 Kegular throughout : fa, ias, fa, famos, feis, iao. 
 
 cri, believed 
 
 creste 
 
 creu 
 
 cremos 
 
 crestes 
 
 creram 
 
 disse 
 
 disseste 
 
 disse 
 
 disse"mos 
 
 disse"stes 
 
 disse"ram 
 
 fix 
 
 fez 
 
 fizemos 
 fizestes 
 nze"ram 
 
 crera 
 quiz6ra 
 
 crerei 
 quererei 
 
 creria 
 quereria 
 
 cr 
 crede 
 
 quer 
 querei 
 
 Perfect (d, did). 
 
 11 tr6uxe 
 
 leste trouze*ste 
 
 leu trouxe 
 
 l^mos trouxemos 
 
 lestes trouxestes 
 
 leram troux^ram 
 
 vi 
 
 viste 
 
 viu 
 
 vimos 
 
 vistes 
 viram 
 
 pude 
 piiddste 
 pode 
 pud^mos 
 
 puderam 
 
 quiz 
 
 quizeste 
 
 quiz 
 
 quiz^mos 
 
 quiz^stes 
 
 quizeram 
 
 soube 
 
 soubeste 
 
 s6ube 
 
 soubemos 
 
 soub^stes 
 
 souberam 
 
 vali 
 
 valeste 
 
 valeu 
 
 val^mos 
 
 valstes 
 
 val^ram 
 
 Pluperfect (had, would have), 
 dissera fizera l^ra 
 
 trouxe"ra . soubera valera 
 
 Future (shall, will). 
 dir6i farei lerei 
 
 trarei saberei valerei 
 
 pudera 
 vira (K.) 
 
 poderM 
 verei (K.) 
 
 Conditional (might, could, would, should), 
 diria faria leria poderia 
 
 traria Baberia Valeria veria (E.) 
 
 dize 
 diz^i 
 
 traze 
 trazei 
 
 Imperative. 
 faze 1^ 
 
 fazei lede 
 
 sabe 
 sabei 
 
 vale 
 valei 
 
 p6de 
 podei 
 
 vg 
 vede 
 
( 279 ) 
 
 creia 
 quira 
 
 diga 
 saiba 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 faa leia 
 
 traga valha 
 
 cr^sse 
 quizdsse 
 
 disseise 
 soube"sse 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 fiz^sse 16sse 
 trouxesse valess 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 crer 
 quize"r 
 
 diss^r 
 soube"r 
 
 fizer ler 
 trouxe"r valer 
 
 veja (R.) 
 
 podesse 
 visse (R.) 
 
 puder 
 vir 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 crendo 
 crido 
 
 querendo 
 querido 
 
 dizendo 
 dito 
 
 sabendo 
 sabido 
 
 faze-ndo 
 felto 
 
 trazdndo 
 trazido 
 
 lendo 
 lido 
 
 vaMndo 
 valido 
 
 pod^ndo 
 podido 
 
 vendo 
 
 visto 
 
 Caber (suit, jfa into) makes caibo, cabia, coube, c6ube~ra, caberla, 
 caiba, coub^sse, coub^r, cab^ndo, cabido. 
 
 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 1. Cr$r : de 14 ve, easily ; de boa mente, readily ; 
 a 61hos fechados, blindly. Eu o creio ! I believe you ! 
 Motive para , reason to . Nao creia isto, don't believe 
 that ; em, a, in. 
 
 2. Dizer : que sim, to say yes, assent; que nao, to 
 say no, refuse ; mal de, to speak evil of ; bem de, to 
 speak well of. Que que"r dizer isto 1 What does this mean ? 
 Quer dizer, that is to say. Diz-se, it is said. 
 
 3. Fazer : vir, rir, make come, laugh, etc. ; gastos, 
 spend ; fdz&r. de b6bo, play the fool ; pape"! de, play 
 the part of ; por chegar, try to arrive. Elle se faz siirdo, 
 he pretends. Faz lua, it is moonlight. 
 
 4. Ler: Nao sei ler, cannot read. P6de ler de cadeira, 
 he could lecture, he knows it well. Ler a cartilha a, to tell 
 one his faults. Leia devagar, read slowly. Leu o carte"!, he 
 read the challenge. 
 
( 280 ) 
 
 5. Poder ; P6de ser, may be, perhaps. Nao posso mais, 
 I can do no more. Sinto nao poder, I am sorry I cannot. 
 Ate" nao poder mais, till no more could be done. Nao posso 
 com isto, I can't lift it P6de-sQ fazer, it may be done. 
 
 6. Querer : bem a, wish well to ; mal a, wish harm 
 to ; lintes, prefer ; como quizer, as you please. Quanto 
 quer, what do you ask? Qtter queira, quer nao queira, 
 whether you will or no. 
 
 7. Saber : de c6r, know by heart ; sem eu o , without 
 my knowledge. Ninguem, que eu sdiba, no one that I know 
 of. Nao sdbe mentir, he cannot lie. Sdbe-se, it is known. 
 Yir a saber-se, become known. 
 
 8. Trazer ; por fo^a, bring by force ; mem6ria, bring 
 to mind ; na mem6ria, carry in the mind. Vnto trdz 
 chiiva, wind brings rain ; gue"rra, wage war ; orfgem, 
 descend ; vontade, wish. 
 
 9. Valer mais, to be icorth more. Nao vdle a pna, it is 
 not worth while. Nao vale nada, it is good for nothing. 
 Mais val, it is better to. Val tanto, it is worth so much. 
 Valdr-se de, avail one's self of. 
 
 10. Ver miindo, see the world ; vir, see what will come 
 of it ; at mais , good-bye ; fazr , show. Esta por , it 
 remains to be seen ; a meu ver, in my opinion ; f az que nao 
 ve, he pretends not to see. 
 
 11. Caber has no exact English equivalent; it means to 
 be contained in, to be held : e.g., vinho nao cdbe na garrafa, 
 literally, the wine is not contained in the bottle ; or, in Eng- 
 lish, the bottle will not hold the wine. Nao me cdbe, it does 
 not suit me. Nao cdbe e"rro, no room for error. com elle, 
 to suit, please him. 
 
( 281 ) 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. Verbs in gir change g into j before o and a: fiigir, 
 fujo ; tingir, tinjo. 
 
 2. Verbs in guir lose the u before o and a : seguir : sigo ; 
 distinguir, distfngo. 
 
 3. Verbs in entir and ertir, erir, edir, estir, change e into 
 i : sentir, sinto ; vestir, visto ; repetir, repito. 
 
 4. Verbs in udir, ulir, etc., change u into o in second and 
 third person singular, and third person plural, present indica- 
 tive, and in imperative : acudir, acddes ; ac6de, ac6dem, 
 ac6de tu. So all verbs in ir, with u before d, g, I, m, p, q, 
 s, and ss. 
 
 5. Dormfr makes durmo ; pedir, pe$o ; ouvir, od$o ; medfr, 
 
 6. The so-called participles are chiefly adjectives : aberto, 
 abstrado^ afflicto, asstimpto, avindo, coberto, comptilso, con- 
 cluso, contrdcto, desavindo, descoberto, digesto, directo, diviso, 
 encoberto, erecto, excltiso, exhdusto, izento, expulso, expresso, 
 extincto, frtto, impresso, incluso, inftiso, instrticto, oppresso, 
 reptilso, represso, submerso, stirto, tinto, vindo. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 vou, go 
 
 sirvo, serve 
 
 pc,o, ask 
 
 rio, laugh 
 
 vaes 
 
 serves 
 
 pedes 
 
 ris 
 
 vae 
 
 serve 
 
 pede 
 
 ri 
 
 vjimbs 
 
 servimos 
 
 pedimos 
 
 rimos 
 
 ides 
 
 servls 
 
 pedis 
 
 "rides 
 
 vao 
 
 6e"rvem 
 
 p^dem 
 
 riem 
 
 saio, go out 
 
 subo, go up 
 
 venho, come 
 
 
 sais, saes 
 
 s6bes 
 
 vena 
 
 
 sai, sae 
 
 s6be 
 
 vena 
 
 
 saimos 
 
 Bubimos 
 
 vlmos 
 
 
 sais 
 
 subis 
 
 vindes 
 
 
 s6bem vdm 
 
 Imperfect (was ing, was to , would ). 
 ia servla pedia ria 
 
 saia subia vinha 
 
( 282 ) 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 fiii 
 
 f6ste 
 
 foi 
 
 fomos 
 
 fostes 
 
 foram 
 
 sal 
 
 saiste 
 
 saiu 
 
 saimos 
 
 saistes 
 sairam 
 
 fora 
 
 saira 
 
 sair-ei, ia 
 
 vae 
 ide 
 sae 
 sal 
 
 servf pedi 
 serviste pediste 
 serviu pediu 
 servimos pedimos 
 servistes pedistes 
 Berviram pediram 
 
 ri 
 
 riste 
 riu 
 rimos 
 ristes 
 riram 
 
 subi vim 
 Bubiste vieste 
 subiu veiu 
 subimos viemos 
 Bubistes viestes ' 
 Bubiram vi^ram 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 servira pedira 
 subira vira 
 
 lira 
 
 Future and Conditional. 
 
 
 servir-ei, ia pedir-ei, ia 
 6ubir-ei, ia vir-ei, ia 
 
 rir-ei, ia 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 s^rve pede 
 servi pedi 
 sobe vem 
 sobi vinde 
 
 ri 
 ri 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 v sirva pea ria 
 
 sdia siiba venha 
 
 vas, etc., all regular (except v6s vades), as, a, amos, ais, ao 
 
 saisse 
 
 (se) for (if) 
 sair 
 
 subisse 
 servisse 
 
 servir 
 subir 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 pedlss< 
 
 vi^sse 
 
 Future. 
 pedir 
 
( 283 ) 
 
 Infinitive and Participles 
 
 ir servir pedir rir 
 
 indo servindo pedindo rindo 
 
 ido servido pedido rido 
 
 sair subir vir 
 
 salndo subindo vindo 
 
 saido subfdo vindo 
 
 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 Ir adi&nte, to go forward; atrdz delle, "behind him; 
 por pao, etc., for bread, etc. ; contra, against ; com 
 a torrente, with the stream. You buscar, / am going 
 to fetch. 
 
 la dizer, I was going to say. Vd ver, go and see. 
 Vd-se emb6ra, go away. 
 
 Sair a piiblico, to be made known. Sde a su pae, he is 
 like his father. Saird caro, it will cost you dear ; fora, to 
 go out (of the house). Ao sair do s61, at sunrise. Sdia o 
 que sair, come what may. 
 
 Servir o estado, the state ; urn amigo, a friend ; a 
 merce, return the kindness ; de, act as. Nao serve de nada, 
 is of no use. Sirva-se de mim, make use of me ; para que 
 se"rve , what's the use of ? 
 
 jSubir ao piilpito, mount the pulpit ; a uma arvore, 
 climb a tree. Sobe o fiimo, the smoke ascends', os dnjos 
 subindo, the angels ascending. Stiba, come up. F&9a fav6r 
 de subir, come up, please. 
 
 Pedir justiga, ask justice; perdao, pardon; pao, ash 
 for bread; o neg6cio pede cautela, the business requires 
 caution. Pedi-lhe por fav6r, I asked him as a favour. 
 
 Rir as gargalhadas, laugh heartily, horse-laugh; ate* 
 nao mais, his fill ; p6r-se a , burst out laughing. Rir-se 
 muito alto, laugh out; de, laugh at; comsigo mesmo, 
 have a quiet laugh. 
 
 Vir as maos, come to blows; ao pensamento, into 
 mind, occur to ; a pr6va, to the proof ; a saber-se, 
 to be known. Vieram cartas, letters have come. Vira 
 tempo em que, the time will come when. Vindo a noite, 
 
( 284 ) 
 
 night being come ; 16go que vier, as soon as he comes ; em 
 vindo a primave'ra, spring coming, or when spring comes. 
 G6sto que viesse (literally, I like he should come), I should 
 like him to come. 
 
 KEFLECTIYE VERBS. 
 
 These are conjugated throughout with the reflective 
 pronoun : 
 
 acho-me, I find myself atrevo-me, I venture 
 
 achas-te, thou findest thyself atreves-te, thou venturest 
 
 acha-se, he finds himself atre>e-se, he ventures 
 
 achamo*-nos, we find ourselves atrevemo*-nos, we venture 
 
 achaes-vos, you find yourselves atreveis-vos, you venture 
 
 acham-se, they find themselves atrevem-se, they venture 
 
 Reflective Verbs as Passives and Neuters. 
 
 The passive voice in Portuguese is much more frequently 
 represented by the annexed forms than hy the compound 
 forms with ser and estdr : e.g., " acham-se rosas" is, liter- 
 ally, " roses find themselves," but it means " roses are 
 found;" confirma-se a noticia, the news is confirmed; fdlla- 
 se, it is said; conta-se, it is related; nutre-se a alma, the 
 soul is nourished ; torna-se, it grows. 
 
 IMPERSONAL OR UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 These are chiefly the following : Acabou-se, it is done ; 
 bdsta, it is enough ; c6nsta, it is stated ; chove, it rains ; 
 convem, it suits ; cumpre, it is fitting ; nao faz c6nta, it 
 does not pay; gela, it freezes; ha, there is; importa, 
 it matters; neva, it snows; parece, it seems; relampeja, 
 it lightens; resta, it remains; succede, it happens; troveja, 
 
 * s omitted for euphony. 
 
( 285 ) 
 
 it thunders ; vdle, it is worth. These have the usual tenses : 
 e.g., ch6vej it" rains ; chovia, it was raining ; se chover, if it 
 rains ; and so on. The verb " haver " is the chief uniper- 
 sonal verb, and uses the third person singular throughout for 
 both singulars and plurals. Ha leite, there is milk; ha 
 6vos, there are eggs. Its participle does not vary : e.g., Se 
 tive'ssem havido flores, teria havido fnictos, if there had been 
 flowers, there would have been fruits. 
 
 COMBINED FORMS. 
 
 1. With pronouns : Dfga-ZAe, tell him; diga.-lhes, tell 
 them. Comprei-o para dar-ZA/o, I bought it to give it to 
 him. A penna e" boa, elle ra'a dara. Elle assent6u-se-Zfo ao 
 lado. Come'ga a turvar-se-me a cabea. 
 
 2. With pronouns and auxiliaries : Dax-me-has prazer, 
 you will give me pleasure. Coit&r-lhe-hemos uma talhada. 
 Sei-me-hia imposslvel. ~Ficai-lhe-hei muito obrigado. Con- 
 
 Escrever-?7ie-^ez amanha. 
 
 CONTRACTED FORMS. 
 
 1. The infinitive loses r in combining with the pronoun; 
 amar o, becomes ami-lo, amal-o ; ve-lo for v6r-o ; cre-lo for 
 crer-o ; abrapd-los. Nao p6de negd-lo. Te-lo-ha. 
 
 2. Some infinitives are further contracted : Fazer becomes 
 faze, far, and fa; e.g., /ar-me-hfa o favor /a-lo-hei com 
 prazer ; pensa-lo e faz&lo sao cousas differentes ; nao ^ pre- 
 cise dize^lo, (ieV-lhe-hei. 
 
 3. Qu^r is sometimes queZ, as quel-as jiistas, do you like 
 them a close fit ; hemos and hia, hiamos, in compounds are 
 contractions for havemos, havia, havlamos. 
 
 4. In reflective verbs the first person plural loses s before 
 nos, as achdmo-nos for achdmos-nos. 
 
 5. The third person plural makes the governed pronoun 
 take n for euphony; adoram-wo, for adoram-o; elles mata- 
 ram-m 
 
( 286 ) 
 
 ADYEEBS. 
 
 Adverbs of quality are chiefly derived from adjectives by 
 adding "mente" (equal to the English "fy")tothe ad J ec - 
 tive ; e.g. t habil, habilmSnte ; prudente, prudentemnte. If 
 the adjective has a feminine form, the affix "mente" is 
 appended : jiisto, justa, justamente. Example Bom makes 
 b6amente, but prefers bem ; mao takes mal, etc. Adverbs 
 are thus compared: cedo, mais cedo, o mais .cedo, soon, 
 sooner, soonest ; menos jiistamente, less justly. When two 
 adverbs in "mente" concur, the first "mente" is suppressed, 
 as " franca e lealmente fallando." 
 
 1. OF PLACE. 
 
 acol o h6mem estd acold, the man is over there, 
 
 yonder, 
 ahl ahi esta, there he is ; ahi mSsmo, just there ; d'ahi 
 
 a alguns dias, some days hence. 
 alem diem d'isso, besides that ; diem de que, besides ; 
 
 diem das suas forcas, beyond his strength, 
 ali, alii m6ra cdi, he lives there t yonder ; por ali, thai 
 
 way ; em d'aWi, thence ; para alii, thither, 
 aqu&n dquem do rio, this side of the river ; muito dquem 
 
 de, much below ; within, beneath, less than, 
 arrlba dlto arribasai, above ; de- dez, above ten ; 
 
 rio , up stream ; debaixo , from head to 
 
 foot, 
 atraz como dlsse , as I said above ; fica , he falls 
 
 behind ; deixar , to leave behind. 
 c4 ve"nha cd, come here ; d ca, give here ; cd e 14, 
 
 here and there ; ch6gue-se para cd, come nearer. 
 crca meio dia ou de, noon or about it ; a de mil, 
 
 about 1000 ; morto ou de, dead or almost, 
 d'ahi por diante, thence, from that place (more 
 
 used as adverb of time), 
 debaixo da mesa ; under the table. 
 
( 287 ) 
 
 dentro de casa, within doors ; ir para , go in ; da 
 
 cidade, in the city ; por , inside, 
 diante va , go on ; para , on, forwards ; ir por , 
 
 continue ; andar , precede, anticipate, 
 f 6ra out, not at home ; jantar , dine out ; esta , 
 
 he's out; gente de , company ; de si, 
 
 out of his senses. 
 14 there, in that place ; para , thither ; de , 
 
 thence ; em cima, up there ; em baixo, 
 
 down there. 
 longe niiiito , very far ; ao , far off ; da cidade, 
 
 far from town ; tao como, as far as. 
 onde queira, where you please ; de , whence ; para 
 
 , whither ; por , whereby. 
 pe"rto mora aquf , he lives near here ; mais , nearer; 
 
 de o fazer, near doing it ; de , nigh. 
 traz, tras para , back, backwards ; ir a de, to pursue ; 
 
 andar para , turn back, relapse, 
 aqui* esta aqui, he is here; aqui dentro, in here; 
 
 ft aqui, hence ; ate" aqui, thus far. 
 
 2. OF TIME. 
 ag6ra now: ate* , till now; ainda , just now ; de'sde 
 
 , henceforth ; , now now ; mesmo, 
 
 instantly, 
 afnda yet, still : elle nao veiu, he is not come yet ; 
 
 mais tmpo, still more time ; nao, not yet. 
 antes- de jantar, before dinner; do dia, before the 
 
 day ; de pagar, before paying, 
 avante passar , pass on ; ir , go on ; a 6bra vae , 
 
 the work goes on. 
 ce"do venha , come soon ; muito , very early; de 
 
 manna , early in the morning; tao , so early. 
 dep6is de jantar, after dinner ; o dia , the day after ; 
 
 disso, afterwards ; 16go , immediately, 
 entao then, at that time ; ate* , till then ; desde , since 
 
 then ; pois , well then, in this case. 
 
 * Aqui, where the speaker is ; ahi, where the one spoken to is ; alii, 
 where neither is. 
 
( 288 ) 
 
 hoje to day : em dfa, now-a-days, this day ; faz 
 
 um anno, a year to-day ; de em diante, from 
 to-day onwards. 
 
 j paguei, I have paid already ; vou , I am 
 
 going directly ; , quickly ; se v, it's 
 
 quite clear. 
 
 16go vou, I am going presently, by and by; que re- 
 
 ceber, as soon as you receive ; ate" , good-bye. 
 
 nunca never : mais, never more ; , jamais, never 
 
 more ; para mais, for ever. 
 
 quando when : ate" , till when ; mais, at most ; 
 menos, at least ; desde , since when. 
 
 hontem yesterday ; ante-hontem, the day before yester- 
 day. 
 
 sempre always, ever: para , for ever; para t6do , with- 
 out end ; que penso, every time I think. 
 
 3. QUANTITY. 
 
 cerca de quinhentos soldados, about five hundred 
 
 soldiers. 
 apnas tive tempo de, I hardly had time to ; 
 
 chegou fol elle vendido, he had scarcely come 
 
 when he was sold. 
 
 assas fico con ten te, I am sufficiently satisfied, 
 
 demais ^stas botas sao grandes , these boots are too 
 
 large, 
 mais vinho que cerveja, more wine than beer ; 
 
 p6uco ou menos, thereabouts, 
 menos frio, less cold ; ao , at least : nem mais 
 
 nem , neither more nor less. 
 mui agradavel, very pleasant, 
 
 miiito bom, very good ; nao , not much ; quando 
 
 , at most; apertado, too tight, 
 quao bello ! how beautiful ; tao formosa boa, as 
 
 fair as she is good, 
 quanto em mim f6r, as much as in me lies ; p6sso, 
 
 as much as I can ; em , while. 
 
 * Apenas is equal to Tiardly, when. 
 
( 289 ) 
 
 quasi diias h6ras, almost two o'clock ; o m6rto, 
 
 nearly dead. 
 seque"r nem , not even ; nem um s6, not even one ; 
 
 nem te"ve tempo de, he has not even had 
 
 time, 
 tao vae depre*ssa> he goes so fast ; rfco c6mo, so 
 
 rich as ; b6m ! so good ! 
 tanto melh6r, so much the better; monta, it 
 
 amounts to so much ; algum % a little. 
 
 4. QUALITY. 
 
 assfm so.- facamos , let us do so; s&ja, so be it; 
 
 , so so ; como, as soon as ; tanto , so 
 
 that, 
 bem well : iniiito , very well ; canta , he sings 
 
 well ; cheio, very full ; esta , all right ; 
 
 pduco, very little, 
 como how : assim , as, like, just as ; assim ! how 
 
 so ! se, as if ; doente esta, ill as he is. 
 nada elle nao me disse , he said nothing to me ; 
 
 menos, nothing less ; nao e* , it's nothing ! 
 nao no: o creio, I do not believe it ; 16 bem, he 
 
 does not read well ; digo que , I say no, or 
 
 rather : I say it's not so. 
 sini yes: cr&o que , I believe so; mas , but rather; 
 
 dar o , consent ; ag6ra , now indeed, 
 tavlez nao seja assim, perhaps it is not so; que 
 
 nao, perhaps not. 
 mal estou , I am ill; feito, iW-made; de para 
 
 pei6r, from bad to worse ; o viu, hardly had 
 
 he seen him. 
 
 porque nao vae 1 why don't you go ? nao qu^ro, be- 
 cause I won't ; sem , without cause, 
 ora um outro, now one, now the other ; vae ! 
 
 now go ! se"gue-se, now it follows. 
 
( 290 ) 
 
 PKEPOSITIONS. 
 
 1. Some prepositions govern words directly: e.g., pdra 
 mim, for me ; por mar, by sea ; pdra ver, in order to 
 see. 
 
 2. Some prepositions require a, de, etc. : tocante ao 
 assumpto, touching the subject; diante de mini, before 
 me. 
 
 3. The prepositions a, ate", c6m, c6ntra, de, m, para, 
 etc., por, s6bre, form complements to nouns, adjectives, and 
 verbs. 
 
 Nouns. Amor a, allianga com, o intento de, confianpa 
 &m, subscripcao pdra, prices por, tratada entre, conspire^ao 
 contra, reflexoes sdbre. 
 
 Adjectives. Exposto a, contente com, dfgno de, fie"! 
 em, pr6prio pdra, fam6so por, inse"rto sdbre, conspirado 
 contra, castello campeando sdbre o terreno, ingrato pdra 
 cdm elle. 
 
 Verbs. Chegar ate, pertencer a, gostar de, pensar em, 
 peccdr contra, contrastar com, distinguir entre, olhar pdra, 
 esperar por, conversdr sobre. 
 
 4. The same verb has different complements : e.g., dar d, 
 give to ; dar cdm, meet with ; dar em, strike ; dar pdra, face, 
 front ; dar sobre, rush on. 
 
 5. Prepositions intervene between the governing and 
 governed verb, when the verb expresses a definite act : acdbo 
 de escrever, continuo a l^r; but not when indefinite: devo 
 dizer, fdfo saber, etc. 
 
 6. The preposition is often in the verb, asjantdr peixe, to 
 dine on fish ; almocdr 6vos, breaTcfast on eggs ; calcdr b6tas, 
 put on boots ; vestir r6upa, put on linen ; agradecer Ihe o 
 Hvro, thank him for the book. 
 
 7. The safest rule is, at first, to follow the literal transla- 
 tion of the English prepositions, to, a; of, de ; with com ; 
 for, para; for, by, por. The dictionary and practice 
 
( 291 ) 
 
 will meet such, cases as, think of, pensar em; em extremo, 
 extremely. 
 
 8. Prepositions before infinitives, in Portuguese, are often 
 rendered by prepositions and participles in English : longe 
 de querer, far from wishing ; em visitdr os orphaos, in visiting 
 the orphans; comeou por queimdr o livro, he began by 
 burning the book ; motive para ficdr, reason for remaining ; 
 depois de eu ler a carta, after my reading the letter; sem 
 conhecdr, without knowing ; e depois de o terem examinado, 
 and after their having examined it. 
 
 9. Prepositions before infinitives are sometimes equal to 
 a finite verb : 6 preciso pelej&r ate veneer, we must fight till 
 we conquer. 
 
 10. Em governs the present participle, and is equal to 
 when, or as soon as : em-lhe morrendo seu pae, when his 
 father dies ; em sendo 2 h6ras, when it is two o'clock ; em eu 
 Undo b6a c&ma. Em acabdndo, irei. 
 
 1. SIMPLE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 a or a vou a Lisb6a, I go to Lisbon ; t^mpo, in time ; 
 
 sua vontade, at one's ease; pe*, on foot; 
 ingleza, in the English style ; dez vinte'ns, at 
 IQd. ; razao de, at the rate of ; vela, under 
 sail; proposito, by the by ; f6r$a de, by dint 
 of ; falsa f e", with treachery : a + a = &. 
 
 ate o natal, till Christmas ; amanha, till to- 
 
 morrow ; os mais vis, even the vilest ; 
 L6ndres, as far as London ; agora, till now ; 
 
 entao, till then. 
 
 c6m cortar uma faca, cut with a knife; estd 
 
 :medo, he is afraid; veneer, in conquer- 
 ing. 
 
 conforme trajar a estagao, dress according to the season ; 
 
 o uso, according to custom. 
 
 c&ntra against; o parecr do me'dico, against 
 
( 292 ) 
 
 the doctor's opinion; a noite, towards 
 night 
 
 de vein Franga, he comes from France; ponte- 
 
 pe"dra, stone -hridge ; boa rafa, of good 
 family ; amddo mim, loved ly me ; dia, 
 by day ; porta em porta, from door to 
 door ; vive"r peixe, live on fish ; menos 
 less than; 6 crr, it is to he believed; 
 e* belongs to; p6bre mim, poor me; o 
 bom do monge, the poor monk ; c6r by 
 heart; forms many phrases, de vagar, de 
 pressa, de graga, de v^ras, etc. 
 
 desde Paris ate" Londres, from Paris to London ; 
 
 as tres h6ras at6 as quatro, from three to 
 four o'clock ; entao, since then. 
 
 durante a gue"rra, during the war; tcklos os dias 
 da sua vida, during all the days of his life. 
 
 ap6s isso, after that ; correr d'elle, run after 
 
 him ; biisque paz, e va d'ella. 
 
 em vinho garrafa, wine in bottle ; casa, at 
 
 home ; gu^rra, in war ; de rua riia, from 
 street to street ; dormir te"rra, sleep on 
 land ; nao esta si, he's not in his senses. 
 Before a present participle equal to as soon 
 as : em chegando a cidade, as soon as he ar- 
 rives in the city ; no dia, in the day ; na h6ra, 
 in the hour; nos quartos, in the rooms; nas 
 camas, in the beds; n6ssa prociira, in search 
 of us;' jejiim, fasting. 
 
 ntre n6s, between ourselves; as 10 e 11 h6ras, 
 
 between 10 and 11 o'clock; maos, in hand; 
 
 tanto, mean- while ; um costume os fran- 
 ce~zes, a custom amongst the French ; o povo, 
 amongst the people. 
 
 1. Before persons, to or for : carta Joao, letter 
 for John ; isto 6 mim, this is for me ; elle, 
 for him. 
 
( 293 ) 
 
 2.* Before infinitives, in order to: trabalho 
 ganhar, I work to gain ; estudo chegar a ser 
 sabio. 
 
 3. Motion to a place : v6u a India, I am going 
 to India ; o ar, upwards ; o sul, to the 
 south. 
 
 4. Time, period : o dia segufnte,/or next day ; 
 hoje, for to-day ; ofim da semana, towards 
 the end of the week. 
 
 5. For (purpose) : nao pr^sta nada, good for 
 nothing; bom , good for; feito , made 
 for-. 
 
 6. About to : esta partir, he is about to start ; 
 chover, going to rain. 
 
 por, or 1. Done by: causado elle, caused ly him; 
 pelo tornado pelos gre'gos, taken by the Greeks. 
 
 2. Object : am6r de mim, for my sake ; fago 
 isso, I work for that ; trabalha dinh&ro, he 
 works for money. 
 
 3. Place: pelas ruas, in the streets; tdda a 
 Asia, throughout Asia; passarei Bira, I 
 shall go through Beira. 
 
 4. Means : ganhei o empenho, I got it by in- 
 terest ; e"sta carta vera, you will see by this 
 letter. 
 
 5. Manner : feito f6rca, done by force; ciijas 
 chdgas, by whose wounds. 
 
 6. Time : anno, per annum ; m^z, by the 
 month. 
 
 7. Value : menos de 4, for less than 4 ; 20 
 cento, 20 per cent. quanto, for how much. 
 
 8. Exchange : tr6ca vinho pao, he barters wine 
 for bread ; tanto cabe^a, so much a head. 
 
 9. Favour : intercedi Joao, I pleaded/or John ; 
 
 * Est6u para pagdr a c6nta, I am just going to pay the account ; a 
 cdnta estd por pagdr, the account is to oe paid, or, is not yet paid, or 
 -unpaid. 
 
( 294 ) 
 
 estou isso, I am for that ; estao ella, they 
 are for her. 
 
 10. In lieu of : padeceu n6s, suffered for us. 
 
 11. Equality : um vale muitos, one goes for 
 many ; olho olho, e dente dente, eye for 
 eye, and tooth for tooth. 
 
 12. As, for: ir consul, go as consul; meu 
 amigo, as my friend; morto, for dead; 
 tomar take for. 
 
 13. Before infinitive to be : a 6bra estd fazer, 
 the work is to be done. 
 
 14. Fetching : foi vlnho, he has gone for wine ; 
 v pelo me'dico, go for the doctor ; ir lenha, 
 go for wood. 
 
 15. As for: mim, ftco aqui, as for me, I stay 
 here ; com as maos por lavar, with wrcwashed 
 hands. 
 
 16. However : por d6uto que seja, however learned 
 he may be ; muito rico que seja, however rich 
 he may be ; bem que eu f ac.a, however well I 
 may do it. 
 
 17. Though : por ser p6bre, though poor. 
 
 18. Reason for : fam6so , famous for ; ver- 
 g6nha, for shame ; inveja, through envy. 
 
 segundo a carne, according to the flesh, 
 sem 1. amigos, without friends; vida, without 
 
 life ; cerem6nia, without ceremony. 
 
 2. (Before infinitive), querer, without wishing; 
 irmos, without our going. 
 
 3. (Present subjunctive) que tudo esteja 
 prompto without all being ready ; que o cha- 
 mem, unless they call him. 
 
 4. (Imperfect subjunctive), t6dos f6ram m6rtos, 
 sem que um so escapdsse, without one escaping. 
 
 sob a figiira de Mentor, under the form ; c6r de, 
 
 under colour of ; pena de ; Poncio Pilatos. 
 
 sobre a mesa, on the table ; n6ssas forgas, beyond 
 
( 295 ) 
 
 our strength ; estar , be above ; longa con- 
 sideraao, after ; reinar , reign over ; tomar 
 si, take on himself. 
 
 2, COMPOUND PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES. 
 
 a or a d cerca de"sta mate"ria, about this matter ; a-cima 
 
 delle, above him; ao pe della, near her; d 
 fdrca de br^os, by force of arms ; d maneira 
 de, like ; a pezdr de mim, in spite of me ; a 
 tempo, in time ; d parte, aside ; d pressa, in 
 haste ; a rios, in streams ; ao longe, at a dis- 
 tance; d siia vontade, at his ease; a pe", on 
 foot ; d espera delle, waiting for him ; a res- 
 >e#o dlsto, as to this ; ao Idngo da riia, along 
 the street ; atrdz da casa, behind the house ; d 
 fdlta de, for want of. 
 
 de debdixo da condigao, under the condition; de- 
 
 balde, in vain; debrugos, prostrate; de c6r, 
 by heart; de prop6sito, on purpose; de im- 
 proviso, suddenly ; devagdr, slowly ; depr^ssa, 
 quickly; de camlnho, at the same time; de 
 joelhos, on one's knees ; de b6tas, in boots ; 
 de luto, in mourning; de marinheiro, as a 
 sailor; de b6ca para baixo, mouth down- 
 wards ; de gatinhas, on all fours ; de repente, 
 suddenly ; estou de cima e elle debaixo, I am 
 above and he below ; de cima p^ra bdixo, over 
 and over. 
 
 em estd em Idixo, he is below ; em casa, at home ; 
 
 em cima da c&ma, on the bed; em cfma, 
 besides; em duvida, in doubt; em fim, in 
 fine ; em pe", on foot, up ; em bre" ve, shortly ; 
 em summa, in short ; em vivos, while living ; 
 em primeiro logar, in the first place; em 
 f rente do pre"gadc>r, before the preacher; em 
 tdrno do templo, round the church ; em logdr 
 delle, in his stead. 
 
( 296 ) 
 
 para pdra com os p6bres, towards the poor; pdra 
 
 commigo, towards me ; de mim pdra mim, as 
 to me ; pra baixo, downwards ; cima, 
 upwards ; dia~nte, foiwards ; traz, back- 
 wards / para la, that way ; para ca, this way. 
 
 por por amor de, for love of j atado >or traz, tied 
 
 behind ; por isso, therefore ; jpor cima da 
 cabe^a, above the head; por bdixo delle, 
 beneath him ; por turno, in turn ; por m6do 
 de dizer, so to speak ; por mar e por te'rra, 
 by sea and land; um por um, one by one; 
 dez por t6dos, ten in all ; por isso, therefore ; 
 por isso m6smo, for that very reason ; por 
 causa de, on account of, by reason of; por 
 baixo, underneath ; cima, above ; diante, 
 before ; detraz, behind ; dentro, within ; 
 f 6ra, without. 
 And many others, all more or less adverbial. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Some simply connect words, as conjunctives, conditional, 
 causal, etc. ; some require the indicative, some the subjunc- 
 tive; some the infinitive, some participles. 
 
 1. PURE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 e Joao e eu, John and I ; branco e preto, white 
 
 and black ; e que tnho eu com isso, and 
 
 what, etc. 
 mas but : ainda, but still ; antes, but on the 
 
 contrary ; comtiido, but for all that, 
 nem um outro, neither ; mais menos, 
 
 neither more nor less ; eu tao pouco, nor I. 
 
( 297 ) 
 
 on elle en, he or I ; rico ou p6bre, whether 
 
 rich or poor ; l&a ou escreva, whether 
 you read or write. 
 
 6ra dfgo eu, still I say, etc. ; veja, just see ; 
 
 havia homem, now there was a man. 
 p6is va, go then ; entao ? what then ? 
 
 bem, be it so ; sim, oh, of course (ironi- 
 cal) ; nao, most certainly. 
 
 porem Ment8r que temla, etc., howeve^ etc. ; 
 
 e* certo que, it is certain, however, 
 that. 
 
 que diz quer, he says that he wants, etc. ; 
 
 diga-lhe venha, tell him to come ; tenho 
 
 ir-me, I must go ; jantemos 4 tarde, 
 let us dine, for it is late ; menos , less 
 than. 
 
 quer publico particular, whether public or 
 
 private ; se , at least, at any rate ; 
 sim nao, all one, quite the same. 
 
 tambe*m eu s6u Francez, I too am a French- 
 
 man ; nao somnte, mas , not only, but 
 also. 
 
 todavia nao podia pagar o dinh&ro, nevertheless 
 
 he could not pay the money. 
 
 senSo nao tnho 6uro, I have nothing but gold ; 
 
 nao s6 not only, but also ; nao f az , 
 does nothing but . 
 
 2. CONJUNCTIONS WITH INDICATIVE. 
 
 d propor^ao que estuda apre'nde, as he studies he learns. 
 
 ainda que alguns dfzem, though some say. 
 
 c6mo e*ra de esperar, as was to be expected ; 
 
 rico elle 4, rich as he is ; falla quern 
 sabe, he speaks as one who knows. 
 
 de maneira que ambos estavam inquietos, so that both 
 were uneasy. 
 
( 298 ) 
 
 depois que isso aconteceu, after that happened. 
 
 de s6rte que nao posso ler, so that I can't read ; 
 
 parecfem anrfgos, so that they seemed 
 
 friends. 
 
 durante que eu retardava, while I was delaying, 
 
 em quanto eu fago, while I am doing. 
 
 16go que chegar, diga-me, as soon as he comes, tell 
 
 me. 
 
 por que nao sabfa, because he did not know, 
 
 se bem que nao fa90, though I do not make, 
 
 segiindo vejo, as far as I see ; dlzem, as they 
 
 say ; o que esta escripto, according to 
 
 what is written, 
 se basta me, ainda vlve, enough if he still 
 
 lives ; o vizir vae, if the V. goes, 
 se nao p6sso pagar, if I canwotf pay, etc. ; se 
 
 alnda o nao leu, if you have not read it. 
 visto que estes sao inferi6res, since these are in- 
 
 ferior. 
 
 3. CONJUNCTIONS WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 alnda que elle me reprehenda, though he chides 
 
 me. 
 
 amda qua~ndo assim f 6sse, even if it were so. 
 antes que vnha, before he comes ; acontece'ssem, 
 
 before they happened ; elles chegdssem, 
 
 before they should arrive, 
 ate* que me pdgue, till he pays me ; eu viva, as 
 
 long as I live. 
 
 a menos que elles me nao convidem, unless they in- 
 vite me; que elle estude, unless he 
 
 studies, 
 em que estive'sse escrfpto la, though it was written 
 
 there, 
 comtanto que o fa9am, provided that they do it ; me 
 
 nao faga mal, so that he does not hurt me. 
 
( 299 ) 
 
 caso que eu nao p6ssa pagar, in case I can't pay. 
 
 como seja for, be that as it may ; quer que 
 
 seja, however that may be ; se elle 14 
 
 nao esteja, as if he were not there, 
 para que se acabe, that it be finished ; vivel- 
 
 mos, that we may live, 
 posto que venha, nao irei, though he should come, 
 
 I won't go. 
 primeiro que isso acontega, sooner than that should 
 
 happen. 
 c6mo se eu f 6sse crianga, as if I were a child ; 
 
 fal!6u tivesse perdido o juizo, he spoke 
 
 as if he had lost his senses. 
 emb6ra censurem os crfticos, what though the 
 
 critics censure. 
 16go que V. S. receber esta carta as soon as you 
 
 get this letter. 
 no caso que V. S. esteja enganado, in case you may 
 
 be mistaken. 
 
 por bem que eu pode"sse, even if I could. 
 p6de ser que parta h6je, he perhaps goes to-day, 
 se elle pagar, if he pays ; quize"r, if you 
 
 like ; me d^r^ if you give me ; eu 
 
 estive*sse, if I were. 
 s6m que demos, without our giving ; fossem 
 
 ouvfdos, without their being heard. 
 A fim, que eu seja rico, that I may be rich ; vos 
 
 nao 6uc.a, that I may not hear you. 
 que diga-lhe me traga, tell him to bring 
 
 me ] nao faltam pess6as se appli- 
 
 quem, etc. 
 
 4. CONJUNCTIONS WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 a * ser assim, if it is so ; saber-se isso, 
 
 if this were known -, nao ser isso, out 
 for this. 
 * A is strictly a preposition, but has here a conjunctive force. 
 
( 300 ) 
 
 diem de 
 
 antes de 
 ate" 
 
 em vz de 
 
 como 
 conf 6rme 
 depois de 
 em lugar de 
 
 em quanto 
 quer-quer 
 
 16nge de 
 no caso de 
 sem 
 visto 
 
 apanhar o f nicto, cortou a arvore, be- 
 sides plucking the fruit, he cut the tree. 
 
 morrer, before dying. 
 
 nao poder mais, till he could do no 
 more. 
 
 o ajudar, instead of helping him ; de 
 fugir, instead of running away. 
 
 sei fazer, I know what to do. 
 
 eu achar a te"rra, as I find the country. 
 
 ler o livro, after reading the book. 
 
 escrever a carta, instead of writing the 
 letter. 
 
 durar o miindo, while the world lasts. 
 
 ch6va faa bom tempo, whether it 
 rains or is fine. 
 
 ser, far from being. 
 
 V. S. vir, in case of your coming. 
 
 ser religi6so, without being religious. 
 
 ser tao tarde, seeing it is so late. 
 
 INTERJECTIOXa 
 
 ai ! mu fllho, ah / my son ! que prazer ! 
 
 oh, what joy ! que desgrac,a ! what a 
 
 pity! 
 
 arre ! (a low word) oh! ah ! you rogue ! 
 
 ah ! irmao ! oh, my brother ! meu n6bre 
 
 amo ! ah, my noble master ! 
 apre ! (marks aversion) get away ! off ! the deuce ! 
 
 hang it ! 
 cia ! come on ! look sharp ! quick ! 
 
 f 6ra ! cao ! get out, dog ! out ! out ! 
 
 ola ! (calling) holla ! hoy ! 
 
 safa ! fora d'aqui ! be off ! out of this ! 
 
 ta ! ! ! hush ! hush ! 
 
 6ra ! sus ! on ! on ! 
 
 " Uhm" rosnou o cle"rigo, "Hum," muttered the priest. 
 
301 ) 
 
 INTEBJECTIONAL WORDS AND PHRASES. 
 
 affasta te, get out of the way ! be off ! 
 
 ai de mim ! woe is me ! oh, dear me ! 
 
 animo ! cheer up ! 
 
 aqui d'el rei ! gritou o h6mem ! " Help ! murder !" cried 
 
 the man. 
 
 avante! upa ! firm I ! ! 
 asneira 1 nonsense ! stuff ! 
 b&sta ! estou contente ! enough ! enough ! I 
 
 am satisfied. 
 
 caliida ! hush ! silence I 
 
 com effeito really ! 
 
 coitado ! do p6vo ! poor people I 
 
 cuidado 1 take care ! 
 
 coisas! fllha, tu dizes coisas! Child, don't talk 
 
 nonsense ! 
 
 de veras ! indeed ! 
 
 Deus nos aciida ! God help us ! o permitta ! 
 
 God grant it ! t'o pague ! may God 
 
 reward you ! 
 Deus gra9as a ! thank God ! me salve ! God 
 
 help me I me perd6e ! God forgive 
 
 me! 
 
 isso ! exactly 1 just so ! that's it ! 
 
 por, etc. piedade f for mercy's sake ! 
 
 que diivida ! why not 1 no doubt 1 of course ! 
 misericfadia ! brad6u o m6nge I "Mercy!" cried the 
 
 monk. 
 
 que ! gente I what people I 
 
 oxald que seja feliz t may you be happy ! 
 
 que vnha, oh, if he would come 1 
 6lhe ! f a9a Isto ! see, do this ! vnha cd ! I say, 
 
 come here ! 
 
 6ptimo ! capital ! very good ! 
 
 paciSncia ! no help for it 1 make the best of it 1 
 
( 302 ) 
 
 psio ! 6 Manuel, psio ! chega a falla ! Manuel, 
 
 hist t speak !* 
 qual ! what ! 
 
 por forga of course ! 
 
 silSncio ! silence ! 
 
 sentido ! take care ! look out I 
 
 truz ! truz ! truz ! truz ! 4 p6rta ; rap, rap, rap, at 
 
 the door. 
 
 valha-me Deus, God help me ! 
 
 viva ! long live, etc., ; good morning ! how do 
 
 you do ? 
 seja, etc. pela saude de V. S., God bless you ! 
 
 Deus queira que , God grant it may 
 
 le so! 
 vamos come along ! go on 1 
 
 * The Portuguese always prefix 6 in calling any one : " psio " and 
 " olha " are commonly used to attract attention, like " Heh," / say, in 
 English. 
 
 THE END. 
 
 PRINTED BY BALLANTYNE, HANSON AND CO. 
 EDINBURGH AND LONDON. 
 
A CATALOGUE 
 
 OF 
 
 DICTIONARIES, GRAMMARS, READING-BOOKS 
 
 AND OTHER IMPORTANT WORKS 
 
 OF THE PRINCIPAL 
 
 EUROPEAN LANGUAGES, 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 TRUBNER & CO., 
 57 & 59 LUDGATE HILL, LONDON, E.G. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 PACK 
 
 PAGE 
 
 ALBANIAN . . 
 
 i 
 
 GREEK MODERN . u 
 
 ROUMANIAN . 
 
 13 
 
 ANGLO-SAXON . 
 
 i 
 
 HUNGARIAN . . .u 
 
 RUSSIAN . 
 
 13 
 
 BASQUE . . . 
 
 2 
 
 INTERNATIONAL 
 
 SERBIAN . . 
 
 14 
 
 DANO-NORWEGIAN 
 
 2 
 
 LANGUAGES . .11 
 
 SPANISH . . 
 
 . 14 
 
 DUTCH 
 
 . 
 
 2 
 
 ITALIAN . . . .11 
 
 SWEDISH . . 
 
 IS 
 
 ENGLISH 
 
 , 
 
 2 
 
 LATIN .... 12 
 
 TECHNICAL D 
 
 10- 
 
 FRENCH 
 
 > 
 
 5 
 
 NORWEGIAN see 
 
 TIONARIES 
 
 J S 
 
 FRISIAN 
 
 t 
 
 9 
 
 DANO-NORWEGIAN. 
 
 TURKISH . . 
 
 . 16 
 
 GERMAN 
 
 
 9 
 
 POLISH .... 12 
 
 WELSH . . 
 
 . 16 
 
 GOTHIC 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 PORTUGUESE. .13 
 
 
 ALBANIAN. 
 
 GRAMMAIRE ALBANAISE & 1'Usage de ceux qui desirent Apprendre 
 cette Langue sans 1'Aide d'un Maitre. Par P. W. Crown 8vo, c'oth, 
 pp. viii. and 170. 1887. Price 79. 6c!. 
 
 ANGLO-SAXON. 
 
 HARRISON and BASKERVILL. A HANDY DICTIONARY OF ANGLO- 
 SAXON POETRY. Based on Groschopp's Grein. Edited, Revised, and 
 Corrected, with Grammatical Appendix, List of Irregular Verbs, and 
 Brief Etymological Features. By JAMES A. HARRISON, Professor of 
 English and Modern Languages in Washington and Lee University, 
 Virginia ; and W. M. BASKERVILL, Ph.D. Lips., Professor of Bullish 
 Language and Literature in Vanderbilt University, Nashville, Ten. 
 Square 8vo, cloth, pp. 318. 1 886. Price I2s. 
 
 MARCH. A COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF THE ANGLO SAXON LAN- 
 GUAGE; in which its forms are illustrated by those of the Sanskrit, 
 Greek, Latin, Gothic, Old Saxon, Old Friesic, Old Norse, and Old 
 High-German. By FRANCIS A. MARCH, LL.D. Demy 8vo, cloth, 
 pp. xi. and 253. 1877. Price IOS. 
 
 MARCH. INTRODUCTION TO ANGLO-SAXON. An Anglo-Saxon Reader. 
 With Philological Notes, a Brief Grammar, and a Vocabulary. By 
 FRANCIS A. MARCH, LL.D. 8vo, cloth, pp. viii. and 166. 1870. 
 Price 78. 61. 
 
A Catalogue of Important Works 
 
 BASK. GRAMMAR OF THE ANGLO-SAXON TONGUE, from the Danish 
 of Erasmus Rask. By BENJAMIX THORPE. Third Edition, corrected 
 and improved, with Plate. Post Svo, cloth, pp. vi. and 191. 1879. 
 Price 53. 6d. 
 
 WRIGHT. ANGLO-SAXON AND OLD ENGLISH VOCABULARIES. By 
 THOMAS WEIGHT, M.A., F.S.A., Hon. M.R.S.L. Illustrating the 
 Condition and Manners of our Forefathers, as well as the History of 
 the forms of Elementary Education, and of the Languages Spoken in 
 this Island from the Tenth Century to the Fifteenth. Second Edition, 
 Edited and Collated by RICHARD PAUL WULCKER. Two vols. demy 
 8vo, pp. xx.~4o8, and iv.~486, cloth. 1884. 28s. 
 
 BASQUE. 
 
 VAN EYS. -OUTLINES OF BASQUE GRAMMAR. By W. J. VAN EYS. 
 Crown Svo, cloth, pp. xii. and 52. 1883. Price 33. 6d. 
 
 DANO-NORWEGIAN. 
 
 *BOJESEN. A GUIDE TO THE DANISH LANGUAGE. Designed for English 
 
 Students. By Mrs. MARIA BOJESEN. I2mo,cl.,pp. 250. 1863. Price 55. 
 LARSEN. DANISH-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. By L. LARSEN. Crown 
 
 Svo, cloth, pp. 646. 1880. Price 73. 6d. 
 *OTTE. -DANO-NORWEGIAN GRAMMAR: A Manual for Students of 
 
 Danish, based on the Ollendorffian System of teaching Languages, 
 
 and adapted for self- instruction. By E. C. OTTE. Second Edition. 
 
 Crown Svo, cloth, pp. xix. and 337. 1884. Price 73. 6d. 
 
 Key to ditto. Orown Svo, cloth, pp. 84. Price 33. 
 *OTTE. SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF THE DANISH LANGUAGE. By E. 
 
 C. OTTE. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. viii. and 66. 1884. Price 2s. 6d. 
 ROSING. ENGLISH-DANISH DICTIONARY. By S. ROSING. Crown Svo, 
 
 cloth, pp. 722. 1883. Price 8s. 6d. 
 
 DUTCH. 
 
 *AHN. A CONCISE GRAMMAR OF THE DUTCH LANGUAGE, with Selec- 
 tions from the Best Authors in Prose and Poetry. After Dr. F. AHN'S 
 Method. Fourth Edition, thoroughly Revised and Enlarged. By Dr. 
 J. M. HOOGVLIET and Dr. KERN (of Leiden). I2mo, pp. viii. and 168, 
 cloth. 1877. Price 35. 6d. 
 
 KRAMERS. NEW POCKET DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH-DUTCH AND 
 DUTCH-ENGLISH LANGUAGES. Containing also in the First Part 
 Pronunciation, and a Vocabulary of Proper Names, Geographical and 
 Historical. By J. KRAMERS, i6rno, cl., pp. xiv. & 714. 1876. Price 43. 
 
 PICARD. A NEW POCKET DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH-DUTCH AND 
 DUTCH-ENGLISH LANGUAGES. Remodelled and corrected from the 
 Best Authorities. By A. PICARD. Fifth Edition, i6mo, cloth, 
 pp. xiv. and 1 1 86. 1877. Price IDS. 
 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 * ANDERSON.- PRACTICAL MERCANTILE CORRESPONDENCE. A Collec- 
 tion of Modern Letters of Business, with Notes, Critical and Expla- 
 natory, and an Appendix, containing a Dictionary of Commercial 
 Technicalities, pro forma Invoices, Account Sales, Bills of Lading, and 
 Bills of Exchange ; also an Explanation of the German Chain Rule. 
 Twenty-seventh Edition, revised and enlarged. By "WILLIAM ANDERSON. 
 I2mo, pp. xxxii. and 280. cloth. Price 33. 6d. 
 
on Modern European Languages. 3 
 
 BELL. SOUNDS AND THEIR RELATIONS. A Complete Manual of 
 Universal Alphabets, Illustrated by means of Visible Speech ; and 
 Exhibiting the Pronunciation of English, in Various Styles, and of 
 other Languages and Dialects. By A. MELVILLE BELL, F.E.I.S., &c. 
 4to, cloth, pp. viii. and 1 02. 1 88 1. Price, 73. 6d. 
 
 BZLL. THE FAULTS OF SPEECH; a Self-Corrector and Teachers' 
 Manual. By A. MELVILLE BELL, F.E.I.S. iSmo, cloth, pp. vi. and 
 65. 1880. Price 28. 6d. 
 
 BELL. THE PRINCIPLES OF ELOCUTION, with Exercises and Notations 
 for Pronunciation, Intonation, Emphasis, Gesture, and Emotional 
 Expression. By A. MELVILLE BELL, F.E.I.S., &c. Fourth Revised 
 and Enlarged Edition. 1 2mo, cloth, pp. 243. 1878. Price 7s. 6d. 
 
 BELL. VISIBLE SPEECH. The Science of Universal Alphabetics; or, 
 Self-Interpreting Physiological Letters for the Writing of all Lan- 
 guages in One Alphabet. Illustrated by Tables, Diagrams and 
 Examples. By A. MELVILLE BELL, F.E.I.S., &c. 4to, cloth, pp. 126. 
 1867. Price l, 53. 
 
 BELL. ENGLISH VISIBLE SPEECH FOR THE MILLION for Communi- 
 cating the Exact Pronunciation ot the Language to Native and 
 Foreign Learners, and for Teaching Children and Illiterate Adults to 
 Read in a few days. By A. MELVILLE BELL, F.E.I.S., &c. 4to, 
 paper, pp. 16. 1867. Price 2s. 
 
 FURNIVALL. EDUCATION IN EARLY ENGLAND. Some Notes used as 
 Forewords to a Collection of Treatises on "Manners and Meals in 
 Olden Times," for the Early English Text Society. By FREDERICK 
 J. FURNIVALL, M.A. 8vo, paper, pp. 4 and Ixxiv. 1867. Price is. 
 
 GALLOWAY. EDUCATION: SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL; or, How the 
 Inductive Sciences are Taught, and How they Ought to be Taught. 
 ByR. GALLOWAY, F.C.S. 8vo, cl., pp. xvi. & 462. 1881. Price ios. 6d. 
 
 GOULD. GOOD ENGLISH ; or, Popular Errors in Language. By 
 EDWARD S. GOULD. New Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. ix. and 
 214. 1880. Price 6s. 
 
 HALL. ON ENGLISH ADJECTIVES IN -ABLE, with Special Reference 
 to RELIABLE. By FITZEDWARD HALL, C.E., M.A., Hon. D.C.L., 
 Oxon. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. viii. and 238. 1877. Price 73. 6d. 
 
 HALL. MODERN ENGLISH. By FITZEDWARD HALL, M.A., Hon. D.C.L., 
 Oxon. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. xvi. and 394. 1873. Price ios. 6d. 
 
 HARLEY. THE SIMPLIFICATION OF ENGLISH SPELLING, specially 
 adapted to the Rising Generation. An Easy Way of Saving Time in 
 Writing, Printing, and Reading. By Dr. GEORGE HARLKY, F.R.S., 
 FC.S. 8vo, cloth, pp. 128. 1877. Price 23. 6d. 
 
 HYMANS. PUPIL versus TEACHER. Letters from a Teacher to a 
 Teacher. By M. HYMANS. i8mo, cloth, pp. 92. 1875. Price 2s. 
 
 INMAN. HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH ALPHABET. A Paper read before 
 the Liverpool Literary and Philosophical Society. By T. INMAN, 
 M.D. Svo, paper, pp. 36. 1872. Price is. 
 
 JENKINS. VEST-POCKET LEXICON. An English Dictionary of all 
 except Familiar Words, including the principal Scientific and Technical 
 Terms, and Foreign Moneys, Weights and Measures ; omitting what 
 everybody knows, and containing what everybody wants to know and 
 cannot readily find. By JABEZ JENKINS. 641, cloth, pp. 563. 
 1879. Price is. 6d. 
 
A Catalogue of Important Works 
 
 MANNING. -AN INQUIRY INTO THE CHARACTER AND ORIGIN OF THE 
 POSSESSIVE AUGMENT in English and in Cognate Dialects. By the 
 late JAMES MANNING, Q.A.S., Recorder of Oxford. 8vo, paper, 
 pp. iv. and 90. 1864. Price 2s. 
 
 NEWMAN. THE ILIAD OF HOMER, faithfully Translated into Un- 
 rhymed English Metre. By F. W. NEWMAN. Royal 8vo, cloth, 
 pp. xvi. and 384. 1871. Price IDS. 6d. 
 
 PARRY. A SHORT CHAPTER ON LETTER-CHANGE, with Examples. 
 Being chiefly an attempt to reduce in a simple manner the principal 
 classical and cognate words to their primitive meanings. By J. 
 PARRY, B.A., formerly Scholar of Corpus Christ! College, Cambridge. 
 Fcap. 8vo, pp. 1 6, wrapper. 1884. Price is. 
 
 PLUMPTRE. -KING'S COLLEGE LECTURES ON ELOCUTION; or, The 
 Physiology and Culture of Voice and Speech, and the Expression of 
 the Emotions by Language, Countenance and Gesture. To which is 
 added a Special Lecture on the Causes and Cure of the Impediments 
 of Speech. Being the Substance of the Introductory Course of 
 Lectures annually delivered by CHARLES JOHN PLUMPTRE, Lecturer 
 on Public Reading and Speaking at King's College, London, in the 
 Evening Classes Department. Dedicated by permission to H. R. H. 
 the Prince of Wales. Fourth and greatly enlarged Illustrated Edition. 
 8vo, cloth, pp. xvi. and 494. 1883. Price 15$. 
 
 PLUMPTRE. -THE RIGHT MODE OF RESPIRATION, in Regard to Speech, 
 Song, and Health. By CHARLES JOHN PLUMPTRE, Author of " King's 
 College Lectures on Elocution," of which this forms Lecture VI. 
 Demy 8vo, pp. iv.-i6, wrapper, is. 
 
 RUNDALL. A SHORT AND EASY WAY TO WRITE ENGLISH AS SPOKEN. 
 By J. B. RUNDALL, Certificated Member of the London Shorthand 
 Writers' Association. Price 6d. 
 
 SPRUNER. HISTORICO-GEOGRAPHICAL HAND-ATLAS. By Dr. KARL 
 VON SPRUNER. Third Edition. Twenty-seven Coloured Maps. 
 Oblong cloth. 1872. Price 153. 
 
 TURNER. THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. A Concise History of the Eng- 
 lish Language, with a Glossary showing the Derivation and Pronun- 
 ciation of the English Words. By ROGER TURNER. In German and 
 English on opposite Pages. l8mo, pp. viii.-8o, sewed. 1884. Price 
 is. 6d. 
 
 UNGER. SHORT CUT TO READING. The Child's First Book of Lessons. 
 Part L By W. H. UNGER. Seventh Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
 pp. 32. 1878. Price 5d. In folio sheets, pp. 44. Sets A to D, lod. each ; 
 set E, 8d. Complete, 43. SEQUEL to Part I. and Part II. Sixth Edition. 
 Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 64. 1877. Price 6d. Parts I. and II. in One 
 Volume. Third Edition. Demy 8 vo, cloth, pp. 76. 1873. Price is. 6d. 
 
 UNGER. CONTINUOUS SUPPLEMENTARY WRITING MODELS, designed, 
 to impart not only a Good Business Hand, but Correctness in Tran- 
 scribing. By W. H. UNGER. New Edition. Oblong 8vo, stiff 
 covers, pp. 44. Price 6d. 
 
 UNGER. THE STUDENTS BLUE BOOK. Being Selections from Official 
 Correspondence, Reports, &c. ; for Exercises in Reading and Copying 
 Manuscripts, Writing, Orthography, Punctuation, Dictation, Precis^ 
 Indexing, and Digesting, and Tabulating Accounts and Returns, 
 Compiled by W. H. LINGER. Folio, paper, pp. 100. 1875. Price 2s. 
 
on Modern European Languages. 
 
 UNGER. TWO HUNDRED TESTS IN ENGLISH ORTHOGRAPHY, or Word 
 Dictations. Compiled by W. H. UNGER. Fcap. 8vo ; cloth, pp. vi. 
 and 200. 1877. Price is. 6d. ; interleaved, 2s. 6d. 
 
 UNGER. THE SCRIPT PRIMER. By which one of the Remaining 
 Difficulties of Children is entirely removed in the First Stages, and, as 
 a consequence, a considerable saving of time will be effected. In Two 
 Parts. By W. H. UXGER. Part I. I2mo, cloth, pp. xv. and 44. 
 1879. Price 5d. Part II. i2ino, cloth, pp. 59. 1879. Price Sd. 
 
 UNGER. PRELIMINARY WORD DICTATIONS ON THE RULES FOR 
 SPELLING. By W. H. U.XGER. i8mo, cloth, pp. 44. Price 4d.; 
 interleaved, 6d. 
 
 WEDGWOOD. THE PRINCIPLES OF GEOMETRICAL DEMONSTRATION, 
 reduced from the Original Conception of Space and Form. By H. 
 WEDGWOOD, M.A. I2tno, cloth, pp. 48. 1844. Price 2s. 
 
 WEDGWOOD. ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE UNDERSTANDING. By 
 H. WEDGWOOD, M.A. i2mo, cloth, pp. 133. 1848. Price 33. 
 
 WEDGWOOD. THE GEOMETRY OF THE THREE FIRST BOOKS OF 
 EUCLID. By Direct Proof from Definitions alone. By H. WEDGWOOD, 
 M.A. I2ino, cloth, pp. 104. 1856. Price 33. 
 
 WEDGWOOD. ON THE ORIGIN OF LANGUAGE. By H. WEDGWOOD, 
 M.A. I2mo, cloth, pp. 165. 1866. Price 33. 6d. 
 
 WEDGWOOD. A DICTIONARY OF ENGLISH ETYMOLOGY. By H. 
 WEDGWOOD, M.A. Third Edition, revised and enlarged. With Intro- 
 duction on the Origin of Language. 8vo, cloth, pp. Ixxii. and 746. 
 1878. Price /i, is. 
 
 WEDGWOOD. CONTESTED ETYMOLOGIES IN THE DICTIONARY OF 
 THE REV. W. W. SKEAT. By H. WEDGWOOD. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
 pp. viii.-i94. 1882. Price 53. 
 
 WIEBE. THE PARADISE OF CHILDHOOD. A Manual for Self-Instruc- 
 tion in Friederich Froebel's Educational Principles, and a Practical 
 Guide to Kinder-Gartners. By EDWAUD WIEBE. With Seventy-four 
 Plates of Illustrations. 4to, paper, pp. iv.-83. 1869. Price 73. 6d. 
 
 WITHERS. THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE SPELLED AS PRONOUNCED, 
 with Enlarged Alphabet of Forty Letters, a Letter for each Distinct 
 Element in the Language. By G. WIIHERS. Svo, paper, pp. 77. 
 1874. Price is. 
 
 FRENCH. 
 
 *AHN. NEW, PRACTICAL, AND EASY METHOD OF LEARNING THE 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE. By Dr. F. AHN T . First Course. I2mo, cloth, 
 pp. 114. Price is. 6d. Second Course. I2mo, cloth, pp. 170. Price 
 is. 6d. The Two Courses in i vol. 121110, cloth. 1879. Price 33. 
 
 *AHN.-NEW, PRACTICAL, AND EASY METHOD OF LEARNING THE 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE. Third Course, containing a French Reader, 
 with Notes and Vocabulary. By H. W. EHRLICH. 121110, cloth, 
 pp. viii. and 125. 1877. Price is. 6d. 
 
 *ARAGO. LES ARISTOCRATIES. A Comedy in Verse. By ETIENNE 
 ARAGO. Edited, with English Notes and Notice on Etienne Arago, 
 by the Rev. P. H. E. BRETTE, B.D., Head-Master of the French 
 School, Christ's Hospital, Examiner in the University of London. 
 I2mo, cloth, pp. xiii. and 235. 1869. Price 48. 
 
A Catalogue of Important Worlds 
 
 ASPLET. THE COMPLETE FRENCH COURSE. Part n. Containing all 
 the Rules of French Syntax, Irregular Verbs. Adjectives, and Verb?, 
 together with Extracts from the Best Authors. By GEORGES C. 
 AEPLET, French Master, Frome. I2mo, cloth, pp. xviiL and 276. 
 1880. Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 *AUGIER. DIANE. A Drama in Verse. By ^MTT.T; AUGIER. Edited, 
 with English Notes and Notice on Augier, by THEODORE KARCHER, 
 LL.B., of the Royal Military Academy and the University of London. 
 I2mo, cloth, pp. xiii. and 145. 1867. Price 28. 6d. 
 
 BARANOWSKL VADE-MECUM DE LA LANGUE FRANCAISE. Redige" 
 d'apres les Dictionnaires classiques avec les Exemples de Bonnes 
 Locutions que donne 1'Academie Francaise, on qu'on trouve dans les 
 ouvrages des plus celebres auteurs. Par J. J. BAEAKOWSKI, avec 
 rapprobation de M. E. LITTRE, Senateur, &c. 32mo, cloth, pp. X.-223. 
 1879. Price 2s. 6d. ; morocco, 33. 6d.; morocco tuck, 48. 
 
 *BARRIERE AND CAPENDU. LES FAUX BONSHOMMES. A Comedy. By 
 THEODORE BABRIERE and ERNEST CAPENDU. Edited, with English 
 Notes and Notice on Barriere, by Professor CH. CASSAL, LL.D., of Uni- 
 versity College, London. I2mo, cloth, pp. xvL and 304, 1868. Price 43. 
 
 BELLOWS. TOUS LES VERBES. Conjugutions of all the Verbs in the 
 French and English Languages. By Jons BELLOWS. Revised by 
 Professor BELJAME. B.A., LL.B., and GEORGE R STRICKLAND, late 
 Assistant French Master, Royal Naval School, London. Also a New 
 Table of Equivalent Values of French and English Money, Weights, 
 and Measures. 32mo, sewed, pp. 32. 1867. Price is. 
 
 BELLOWS. DICTIONARY FOR THE POCKET. French and English- 
 English and French, Both divisions on same page. By JOHN 
 BELLOWS. Masculine and Feminine Words shown by distinguishirg 
 Types, Conjugations of all the Verbs, Liaison marked'in French Part, 
 and Hints to Aid Pronunciation, together with Tables and Maps. 
 Revised by ALEXANDRE BELJAME, M.A. Second Edition. 32010, 
 roan tuck, pp. 608. 1880. Price los. 6d. ; morocco tuck, 12s. 6d. 
 
 BRETTE and THOMAS. FRENCH EXAMINATION PAPERS, set at the 
 University of London from 1839 to January 1888. Arranged and 
 edited by the Rev. P. B. ERNEST BRETTE, B.D., Officier de 
 Flnstraction Publique (Univ. of France) ; Head Master of the French 
 School, Christ's Hospital, London; Examiner in the University of 
 London ; at Eton College, &c., &c. ; and FERDINAND THOMAS, B.A., 
 B.Sc., Late Assistant Examiner in the University of London. 
 
 Sold Separately. 
 PART I. MATRICULATION , AKD THE GEXERAL EXAMIX ATIOS FOB WOMEX. 
 
 Price 33. 6d. KEY TO PART L Price 5& 
 
 In the Key all the Extracts from the Writings of French Authors are 
 translated into English, and all the Questions on Grammar, Idiom, and 
 Elementary Etymology are fully answered. 
 
 PAET IT. FIRST B. A. (or INTERMEDIATE is ARTS and B. A. PASS EXAMINA- 
 TIONS) ; Examinations for Honours (Intermediate in Arts and B.A.) ; 
 and for Certificates of Higher Proficiency M. A. (Branch IV.), and 
 D.Litt, Examinations. Price 73. 
 
 The KEY TO PART U. will be divided into Two Divisions, 
 and will shortly be published. 
 
on Modern European Languages. 
 
 C ASS AL. -GLOSSARY OF IDIOMS, GALLICISMS, and other Difficulties 
 contained in the Senior Course of the Modern French Reader. With 
 Short Notices of the most important French Writers and Historical or 
 Literary Characters, and Hints as to the Works to be Read or 
 Studied. By CHARLES CASSAL, LL.D. I2nv>, cloth, pp. viii. and 104. 
 1880. Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 *EHRLICH. FEENCH READER. With Notes and Vocabulary. By H. W. 
 EHRLICH. I2ruo, limp cloth, pp. viii. and 125. 1877. Price is. 6(3. 
 
 FRUSTON. ECHO FRANCAIS. A Practical Guide to French Conversa- 
 tion. By F. DE LA FRUSTON. With a Complete Vocabulary. Second 
 Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 120 and 71. 1878. Price 33. 
 
 *KARCHER. QUESTIONNAIRE FRANCAIS. Questions on French Gram- 
 mar, Idiomatic Difficulties, and Militai'y Expressions. By THEODORE 
 KARCHER, LL.B. Fourth Edition, greatly enlarged. Crown 8vo, 
 cloth, pp. viii. and 215. 1879. Price 49. 6d. ; interleaved with 
 writing paper, 5 s - 6d. 
 
 *LE-BRUN.- MATERIALS FOR TRANSLATING FROM ENGLISH INTO 
 FRENCH. Being a Short Essay on Translation, followed by a Gradu- 
 ated Selection in Prose and Verse. By L. LE-BRUN. Sixth Edition. 
 Revised and corrected by HENRI VAN LAUN. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
 pp. xii. and 204. 1882. Pr'ce 43. 6d. 
 
 *LITTLE FRENCH READER (The). Extracted from " The Modern French 
 Reader." Edited by Professor C. CASSAL, LL.B., and Professor T. 
 KARCHER, LL.B. With a New System of Conjugating the French 
 Verbs, by Professor CASSAL. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
 pp. 112. 1884. Price 2s. 
 
 MANESCA. THE SERIAL AND ORAL METHOD OF TEACHING LAN- 
 GUAGES. Adapted to the French. By L. MANESCA. New Edition, 
 carefully revised. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. xxviii. and 535. Price 73. 6d. 
 
 *MARMONTEL. BELISAIRE. Par J. F. MARMONTEL. With Introduc- 
 tion by the Rev. P. H. E. BRETTE and Professors CASSAL and 
 KARCHER. Nouvelle Edition, 12010, cloth, pp. xii. and 123. 1867. 
 Price 2'. 6d. 
 
 *MODERN FRENCH READER (The). PROSE. Junior Course. Edited by 
 C. CASSAL, LL.D., and THEODORE KARCHER, LL.B. Seventh Edition. 
 Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. xiv. and 224. 1881. Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 *MODERN FRENCH READER (The). PROSE. Senior Course. Edited by 
 C. CASSAL, LL.D., and THEODORE KARCHER, LL.B. Third Edition. 
 Crown 8vo,cl., pp. xi. & 418. 1880. Price 43. With Glossary. Price 6s. 
 
 NOIRIT. A FRENCH COURSE IN TEN LESSONS. By JULES NOIRIT, 
 B.A. Lessons I. -IV. Crown Svo, limp cloth, pp. xiv. and 80. 
 1870. Price is. 6d. 
 
 NOIRIT. FAENCH GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS for the Use of Gentle- 
 men Preparing for the Army, Civil Service, Oxford Examinations, 
 &c., &c. By JULES NOIRIT. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. 62. 1870. 
 Price is.; interleaved, is. 6d. 
 
 NOTLEY. COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF THE FRENCH, ITALIAN, 
 SPANISH, AND PORTUGUESE LANGUAGES. With a Copious Vocabulary. 
 By EDWIN A. NOTLEY. Oblong 12 mo, cloth, pp. xv. and 396. 1868. 
 Price 73. 6d. 
 
A Catalogue of Important Works 
 
 NUGENT'S IMPROVED FRENCH AND ENGLISH AND ENGLISH AND 
 FRENCH POCKET DICTIONARY. Par SMITH. 241110, cloth, pp. xSxii. 
 aud 320, and 488. 1875. Price 33. 
 
 PICK. PRACTICAL METHOD OF ACQUIRING THE FRENCH LAN- 
 GUAGE. By Dr. E. PICK. Second Edition. i8mo, cloth, pp. xi. and 
 124. 1876. Price is. 6d. 
 
 *PON3ARD. CHARLOTTE CORD AY. A Tragedy. By F. PONSARD. 
 
 Edited, with English Notes and Notice on Ponsard, by Professor C. 
 CASSAL, LL.D. Third Edition. I2mo, cloth, pp. xi. and 133. 1871. 
 Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 *PONSARD. L'HONNEUR ET L' ARGENT. A Comedy. By F. PONSARD. 
 
 Edited, with English Notes and Memoir of Ponsard, by Professor C. 
 CASSAL, LL.D. Second Edition. I2ino, cloth, pp. xvi. and 171. 
 1869. Price 33. 6d. 
 
 ROCHE. FRENCH GRAMMAR for the Us 3 of English Students, adopted 
 for the Public Schools by the Imperial Council of Public Instruction. 
 By A. EOCHE. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. xii. and 176. 1869. Price 33. 
 
 ROCHE. PROSE AND POETBY. Select Pieces from the Best English 
 Authors, for Reading, Composition, and Translation. By A. ROCHE. 
 Second Edition. Fcap. 8vo, cl., pp. viii. and 226. 1872. Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 RUNDALL. METHODE RAPIDE ET FACILE D'ECRIRE LE FRANC AIS 
 COMME os LE PARLE. Par J. B. RUNDALL. Price 6d. 
 
 *THEATRE FRANCAIS MODERNE. A Selection of Modern French Plays. 
 Edited by the Rev. P. H. E. BRETTK, B.D. ; C. CASSAL, LL.D. j and 
 TH. KARCHER, LL.B. 
 
 First Series, in I vol. crown 8vo, cloth. Price 63. Containing 
 CHARLOTTE CORDAT. A Tragedy. By F. PONSARD. Edited, 
 with English Notes and Notice on Ponsard, by Professor C. 
 CASSAL, LL.D. 
 
 DIANE. A Drama in Verse. By EMILE AUGIEB. Edited, with 
 English Notes and Notice on Augier, by TH. KARCHER, LL.B. 
 LE VOYAGE A DIEPPE. A Comedy in Prose. By WAFFLARD and 
 FULGENCE. Edited, with English Notes, by the Rev. P. H. E. 
 BRETTE, B.D. 
 Second Series, crown 8vo, cloth. Price 6s. Containing 
 
 MOLIERE. A Drama in Prose. By GEORGE SAND. Edited, with 
 
 English Notes and Notice of George Sand, byTn. KARCHER, LL.B. 
 
 LES ARISTOCRATIES. A Comedy in Verse. By^EiiENNE ABAGO. 
 
 Edited, with English Notes and Notice of Etienne Arago, by 
 
 the Rev. P. H. E. BRETTE, B.D. 
 
 Third Series, crown 8vo, cloth. Price 6s. Containing 
 LES FAUX BONSHOMMES. A Comedy. By THEODORE BARRIERS 
 and ERNEST CAPENDU. Edited, with English Notes and 
 Xotice on Barriere, by Professor C. CASSAL, LL.D. 
 L'HONNEUR ET L' ARGENT. A Comedy. By F. PONSARD. Edited, 
 with English Notes and Memoir of Ponsard, by Professor C. 
 CASSAL, LL.D. 
 
on Modern European Languages. 
 
 *VAN LAUN. GRAMMAR OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. In Three 
 Parts. Parts I. and II. Accidence and Syntax. By H. VAN LAUN. 
 Nineteenth Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 151 and 120. 1880. 
 Price 43. Part III. Exercises. Eighteenth Edition. Crown 8vo, 
 cloth, pp. xii. and 285. 1880. Price 33. 6d. 
 
 *WAFFLARD AND FULGENCE. LE VOYAGE A DIEPPE. A Comedy in 
 Prose. By MM. WAFFLARD and FULGENCE. Edited, with English 
 Notes, by the Rev. P. H. E. BRETTE, B.D. Second Edition, revised, 
 with an Index to the Notes. I2mo 3 cloth, pp. 107. 1870. Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 WELLER. AN IMPROVED DICTIONARY. English and French, and 
 French and English, including Technical, Scientific, Legal, Com- 
 mercial, Naval, and Military Terms, Vocabularies of Engineering, 
 &c., Railway Terms, Steam Navigation, Geographical Names, Ancient 
 Mythology, Classical Antiquity, and Christian Names in present use. 
 By E. WELLER. Third Edition. Royal 8vo 3 cloth, pp. 384 and 340. 
 1864. Price 73. 6d. 
 
 WENDLING. LE VERBE. A Complete Treatise on French Conjugation. 
 By EMILE WENDLING, B.A. Second Thousand. 8vo, cloth, pp. 71. 
 1875. Price is. 6d. 
 
 "FRISIAN. 
 
 CUMMINS. GRAMMAR OF THE OLD FRIESIC LANGUAGE. By A. H. 
 CUMMINS, A.M. Crown 8vo, pp. 128, cloth. 1887. Price 6s. 
 
 GERMAN. 
 
 * AHN. -PRACTICAL GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, with a 
 
 Grammatical Index and Glossary of all the German Words. By Dr. F. 
 AHN. A New Edition, containing numerous Additions, Alterations, 
 and Improvements. By DAWSON W. TURNER, D.C.L., and Prof. F. 
 L. WEINMANN. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. cxi . and 430. 1878. Price 35. 6d. 
 
 * AHN. NEW, PRACTICAL, AND EASY METHOD OF LEARNING THE 
 
 GERMAN LANGUAGE. By Dr. F. AHN. First and Second Course, in i 
 volume, I2ino, cloth, pp. 86 and I2O. 1880. Price 33. 
 KEY to Ditto. I2mo, sewed, pp. 40. Price 8d. 
 
 *AHN. -MANUAL OF GERMAN CONVERSATION, or Vade Mecum for Eng- 
 LISH TRAVELLERS. By Dr. F. AHN. Second Edition. I2mo, cloth, 
 pp. x. and 137. 1875. Price is. 6d. 
 
 *APEL. PROSE SPECIMENS FOR TRANSLATION INTO GERMAN, with 
 copious Vocabularies. By H. APEL. I2mo, cloth, pp. viii. and 246, 
 1862. Price 43. 6d. 
 
 *BENDIX. DER VETTER. Comedy in Three Acts. By Roderich Benedix. 
 With Grammatical and Explanatory Notes by F. WEINMANN, German 
 Master at the Royal Institution School, Liverpool, and G. ZIMMERMANN, 
 Teacher of Modern Languages. I2mo, cloth, pp. 126. 1863. Price 
 
 28. 6d. 
 
 BOLIA. THE GERMAN CALIGRAPHIST. Copies for German Hand- 
 writing. By C. BOLIA. Obi. fcap. 4to, sewed, pp. 6. Price is. 
 
 DUSAR. GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE ; with Exercises. By 
 P. FRIEDRICH DUSAR, First German Master in the Military Depart- 
 ment of Cheltenham College. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
 pp. viii. and 207. 1879. Price 45. 6d. 
 
io A Catalogue of Important Works 
 
 DUSAR. GRAMMATICAL COURSE OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 By P. FEIEDBICH DUSAR. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. x. 
 and 134. 1877. Price 33. 6d. 
 
 FRIEDRICH. PROGRESSIVE GERMAN READER. With Copious Notes 
 to the First Part. By P. FRIEDRICH. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 
 cloth, pp. vii. and 190. 1876. Price 48. 6d. 
 
 *FROZMBLING. GRADUATED GERMAN READER. Consisting of a Selec- 
 tion from the most Popular Writers, arranged progressively ; with a 
 complete Vocabulary for the First Part. By FRIEDRICH OTTO 
 FRCEMBLING, Ph.D. Eighth Edition. I2mo, cloth, pp. viii. and 306. 
 1879. Price 33. 6d. 
 
 *FR(EMBLING. GRADUATED EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION INTO 
 GERMAN. Consisting of Extracts from the best English Authors, 
 arranged progressively ; with an Appendix, containing Idiomatic 
 Notes. By FRIEDRICH OTTO FRCEMBLING, Ph.D., Principal German 
 Master at the City of London School. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. xiv. and 
 322. With Notes, pp. 66. 1867. Price 48. 6d. Without Notes, 48. 
 
 LANGE.- GERMAN PROSE WRITING. Comprising English Passages for 
 Translation into German. Selected from Examination Papers of the 
 University of London, the College of Preceptors, London, and the 
 Royal Military Academy, Woolwich, arranged progressively, with 
 Notes and Theoretical as well as Practical Treatises on Themes for the 
 Writing of Essays. By F. K. W. LANGE, Ph.D., Assistant German 
 Master, Royal Academy, Woolwich ; Examiner, Royal College of Pre- 
 ceptors, London. Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and 176, cloth. 1881. Price 4?. 
 
 LANGE. GERM ANIA. A German Reading-Book, arranged Progressively. 
 By FRANZ K. W. LANGE, Ph.D. Part I. Anthology of German 
 Prose and Poetry, with Vocabulary and Biographical Notes. 8vo, 
 cloth, pp. xvi. and 216. 1881. Price 33. 6d. Part II. Essays on 
 German History and Institutions. With Notes. 8vo, cloth, pp. 124. 
 Parts I. and II. together. 1881. Price 53. 6d. 
 
 LANGE. GERMAN GRAMMAR PRACTICE. By F. K. W. LANGE, Ph.D., 
 &c. Crown Svo, pp. viii. and 64, cloth. 1882. Price is. 6d. 
 
 LANGE. COLLOQUIAL GERMAN GRAMMAR. With Special Reference to 
 the Anglo-Saxon Element in the English Language. By F. K. W. LANGE, 
 Ph.D., &c. Crown Svo, pp. xxxii. and 380, cloth. 1882. Price 43. 6<1. 
 
 RUNDALL. KURZE UND LEICHTE WEISE DEUTSCH ZU SCHREIBEN 
 wie man es Spricht. Von J. B. Rundall. Price 6d. 
 
 WOLFRAM. DEUTSCHES ECHO. The German Echo. A Faithful Mirror 
 of German Conversation. By LUDWIG WOLFRAM. With a Vocabulary, 
 by HENRY P. SKELTON. Sixth Revised Edition. Crown Svo, cloth, 
 pp. 128 and 69. 1879. Price 33. 
 
 GOTHIC. 
 
 SKEAT. MOZSO-GOTHIC GLOSSARY, with an Introduction, an Outline 
 of Mceso-Gothic Grammar, and a List of Anglo-Saxon and Old and 
 Modern English Words etymologically connected with Moaso-Gothic. 
 By the Rev. W. W. SKEAT. Svo, cloth. 1868. Price 93. 
 
on Modern European Languages. 1 1 
 
 GREEK-MODERN. 
 
 CONTOPOULOS. A LEXICON OF MODERN GREEK -ENGLISH AND 
 
 ENGLISH MODERN GREEK. By N. CONTOPOULOS. Part I. Modern 
 
 Greek-English. Part II. English Modern Greek. In 2 vols. 8vo, 
 
 cloth, pp. 460 and 582. 1877. Price 273. 
 CONTOPOULOS. HANDBOOK OF ENGLISH AND GREEK DIALOGUES 
 
 AND CORRESPONDENCE, with a Short Guide to the Antiquities of Athens. 
 
 By N. CONTOPOULOS. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 238. Price 2s. 6d. 
 *GELDART. A GUIDE TO MODERN GREEK. By E. M. GELDART, M.A. 
 
 Post 8vo, cloth, pp. xii. and 274. 1883. Price 73. 6d. KEY, cloth, 
 
 pp. 28, price as. 6d. 
 *GELDART. SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF MODERN GREEK. By E. M. 
 
 GELDART, M.A. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 68. 1883. Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 LASCARIDES. A COMPREHENSIVE PHRASEOLOGICAL ENGLISH- 
 ANCIENT AND MODERN GREEK LEXICON. Founded upon a Manuscript 
 of G. P. LASCARIDES, Esq., and compiled by L. MYRIANTHEUS, Ph.D. 
 Two vols., cloth, fcap. 8vo, pp. xii. and 1338. 1883. Price i, los. 
 
 HUNGARIAN. 
 
 *SINGER. A SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF THE HUNGARIAN LANGUAGE. 
 By IGNATIUS SINGER, of Buda-Pesth. Crown 8vo, pp. vi. and 88, 
 cloth. 1882. Price 43. 6d. 
 
 INTERNATIONAL LANGUAGES. 
 
 BELL. WORLD ENGLISH THE UNIVERSAL LANGUAGE. By ALEXANDER 
 MELVILLE BELL, Author of "Visible Speech," &c. Royal 8vo, pp. 
 34, wrappers. 1888. Price is. 
 
 BELL. -HANDBOOK OF WORLD ENGLISH. By ALEXANDER MELVILLE 
 BELL, Author of "Visible Speech," &c. Demy 8vo, pp. 38, wrappers, 
 cloth back. 1888. Price is. 
 
 HENDERSON. LINGUA : An International Language for Purposes of 
 Commerce and Science. By GEORGE J. HENDERSON. General Out- 
 lines. Fcap. 8vo, paper, pp. 126. Price is. 
 
 SPRAGUE. THE INTERNATIONAL LANGUAGE. HANDBOOK OF VOLA- 
 PUK. By CHARLES E. SPRAGUE, Member of the Academy of 
 Volapiik, President of the Institute of Accounts, U.S. Crown 8vo, 
 cloth, pp. viii. and 119. Price 53. 
 
 ITALIAN. 
 
 *AHN. NEW, PRACTICAL, AND EASY METHOD OF LEARNING THE 
 ITALIAN LANGUAGE. By Dr. F. AHN. First and Second Course. 
 Thirteenth Issue. I2mo, cloth, pp. iv. and 198. 1886. Price 33. 6d. 
 
 CAMERINI. L'ECO ITALIANO. A Practical Guide to Italian Conversa- 
 tion. By EUGENE CAMERINI. With a Complete Vocabulary. Second 
 Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. viii., 128, and 98. 1871. Price 43. 6d. 
 
12 A Catalogue of Important Works 
 
 LAN ARI. COLLECTION OF ITALIAN AND ENGLISH DIALOGUES ON 
 GENERAL SUBJECTS. For the Use of those Desirous of Speaking the 
 Italian Language Correctly. Preceded by a Brief Treatise on the 
 Pronunciation of the same. By A. LAN ARI. I2tno, cloth, pp. viii. 
 and 199. Price 35. 6s. 
 
 MILLHOUSE. -MANUAL OF ITALIAN CONVERSATION, for the Use of 
 Schools and Travellers. By JOHN MILLHOUSE. New Edition. i8mo, 
 cloth, pp. 126. 1879. Price 2s. 
 
 MILLHOUSE. NEW ENGLISH AND ITALIAN PRONOUNCING AND 
 EXPLANATORY DICTIONARY. By JOHN MILLHOUSE. Vol. I. English- 
 Italian. Vol. II. Italian-English. Sixth Edition. 2 vols. square 
 8vo, cloth, pp. 654 and 740. 1887. Price 123. 
 
 NOTLEY. COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF THE FRENCH, ITALIAN, 
 SPANISH, AND PORTUGUESE LANGUAGES. With a Copious Vocabulary. 
 By EDWIN A. NOTLEY. Oblong I2ino, cloth, pp. xv. and 396. 1868. 
 Price ;s. 6d. 
 
 TOSCANI. ITALIAN CONVERSATIONAL COURSE. A New Method of 
 Teaching the Italian Language, both Theoretically and Practically. 
 By GIOVANNI TOSCANI, late Professor of the Italian Language and 
 Literature in Queen's College, London, &c. Fifth Edition. I2mo 
 cloth, pp. xiv. and 300. 1 880. Price 55. 
 
 TOSCANI. ITALIAN READING COURSE. Comprehending Specimens in 
 Prose and Poetry of the most distinguished Italian Writers, with 
 Biographical Notices, Explanatory Notes, and Rules on Prosody. By 
 G. TOSCANI. I2mo, cloth, pp. xii. and 160. With Table of Verbs. 
 1875. Price 43. 6d. 
 
 LATIN. 
 
 *IHNE. LATIN GRAMMAR FOR BEGINNERS, on Ann's System. By 
 
 W. H. IHNE, late Principal of Carlton Terrace School, Liverpool. 
 
 Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. vi. and 184. 1864. Price 33. 
 LEWIS. JUVENALIS SATIRJE. With a Literal English Prose Transla- 
 tion and Notes. By J. D. LEWIS, M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge. 
 
 Second Edition. 2 vols. 8vo, cloth, pp. xii. and 230 and 400. 1882. 
 
 Price 128. 
 LEWIS. THE LETTERS OF PLINY THE YOUNGER. Translated by 
 
 J. D. LEWIS, M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge. Post 8vo, cloth, 
 
 pp. vii. and 390. 1879. Price 55. 
 NEWMAN. HIAWATHA. Rendered into Latin. With Abridgment. By 
 
 F. W. NEWMAN. i2mo, sewed, pp. vii. and no. 1862. Price 2s. 6d. 
 NEWMAN. TRANSLATIONS OF ENGLISH POETRY INTO LATIN VERSE. 
 
 Designed as Part of a New Method of Instructing in Latin. By F. W. 
 
 NEWMAN. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. xiv. and 202. 1868. Price 6s. 
 
 POLISH. 
 
 BARANOWSKX SLOWNIK POLSKO-ANGIELSKI OPRACOWANY. Przez 
 J. J. BARANOWSKIEGO, 6 Podsekretarza Banku Polskiego, w Wars- 
 zawie. (Polish-English Lexicon. With Grammatical Rules in Polish.) 
 l6mo, cloth, pp. 403. Price 1 23. 
 
on Modern European Languages. 1 3 
 
 BARANOWSKI.- ANGLO-POLISH LEXICON. By J. J. BARANOWSKI, 
 formerly Under-Secretary to the Bank of Poland, in Warsaw. (With 
 Grammatical Rules in English, and a Second Part, containing Dia- 
 logues, Bills of Exchange, Receipts, Letters, &c. ; English and Polish 
 Proverbs, &c.) i6mo, cloth, pp. vii. 400 and 90. Price 128. 
 
 *MORFILL.- SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF THE POLISH LANGUAGE. By 
 VV. R. MOUFILL,M.A. Or. 8vo, pp. viii.-64, cloth. 1884. Price 3s.6d. 
 
 PORTUGUESE. 
 
 * ANDERSON AND TUGMAN. MERCANTILE CORRESPONDENCE. Con- 
 taining a Collection of Commercial Letters in Portuguese and English, 
 with their Translation on opposite pages, for the Use of Business Men 
 and of Students in either of the Languages, treating in Modern Style of 
 the System of Business in the principal Commercial Cities of the World. 
 Accompanied by pro forma Accounts, Sales, Invoices, Bills of Lading, 
 Drafts, &c. With an Introduction and Copious Notes. By WILLIAM 
 ANDERSON and JAMES E. TUGMAN. I2mo, cloth, pp. xi. and 193. 
 1867. Price 6s. 
 
 BENSABAT. NOVO DICCIONARIO INGLEZ-PORTCTGUEZ. Composte 
 sobre os Diccionarios de Johnson, Webster, Grand, Richardson, &c., 
 e as Obras especiales de uma e outra Lingua por JACOB BENSABAT. 
 8vo, sheep, pp. xvi. and 1596. 1883. Price ji, IDS. 
 
 *D'ORSEY. PRACTICAL GRAMMAR OF PORTUGUESE AND ENGLISH. 
 Exhibiting in a Series of Exercises, in Double Translation, the Idiom- 
 atic Structure of both Languages, as now written and spoken. By the 
 Rev. ALEXANDER J. D. D'ORSEY, B.D., of Corpus Christi College, 
 Cambridge, and Lecturer on Public Reading and Speaking at King's 
 College, London. Fourth Edition. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. viii. and 302. 
 1887. Price 7s. 
 
 *D'ORSEY. COLLOQUIAL PORTUGUESE ; or, Words and Phrases of Every- 
 day Life. Compiled from Dictation and Conversation. For the Use 
 of English Tourists in Portugal, Brazil, Madeira, and the Azores. 
 With a Brief Collection of Epistolary Phrases. By the Rev. A. J. D. 
 D'ORSEY. Fourth Edition, enlarged. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. viii. and 
 126. 1886. Price 33. 6d. 
 
 NOTLEY. COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF THE FRENCH, ITALIAN, 
 SPANISH, AND PORTUGUESE LANGUAGES. With a Copious Vocabulary. 
 By EDWIN A. NOTLEY. Oblong I2mo, cloth, pp. xv. and 396. 1868. 
 Price 73. 6d. 
 
 ROUMANIAN. 
 
 *TORCEANU. SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF THE ROUMANIAN LANGUAGE. 
 By R. TORCEANU. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. viii. and 72. 1884. Price 53. 
 
 RUSSIAN. 
 
 ALEXANDROW. COMPLETE ENGLISH-RUSSIAN AND RUSSIAN-ENG- 
 LISH DICTIONARY. By A. ALEXANDROW. 2 vols. demy Svo, cloth, pp. 
 x. and 734 and iv. and 1076. 1879 and 1885. Price 2. 
 
 FREETH. A CONDENSED RUSSIAN GRAMMAR for the Use of Staff- 
 Officers and Others. By F. FREETH, B.A., late Classical Scholar of 
 Emmanuel College, Cambridge. Crown Svo, pp. iv.~75, cloth. .1886. 
 Price y. 6d. 
 
14 A Catalogue of Important Works 
 
 MAKAROFF. DICTIONNAIRE FRANCAIS-RUSSE ET RUSSE-FRANCAIS. 
 Complet. Compose par N. P. MAKAROFF. Honore par 1'Academie 
 des Sciences d'une Mention Honorable, approuv^ par les Comites 
 Scientifiques et adopte dans les Etablissements d'Instruction. 2 vols. 
 in four parts. Super royal 8vo, wrapper. 1884. Price 308. 
 
 *RIOLA. HOW TO LEARN RUSSIAN. A Manual for Students of Russian, 
 based upon the Ollendorffian System of Teaching Languages, and 
 adapted for Self-Instruction. By HENRY RIOLA, Teacher of the 
 Russian Language. With a Preface by W. R. S. RALSTON, M.A. 
 Third Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. x. and 567. 1887. Price I2s. 
 KEY to Ditto. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 126. Price 53. 
 
 *RIOLA. -GRADUATED RUSSIAN READER, with a Vocabulary of all the 
 Russian Words contained in it By HENRY RIOLA. Crown 8vo, 
 cloth, pp. viii. and 314. 1879. Price IDS. 6d. 
 
 THOMPSON. DIALOGUES, RUSSIAN AND ENGLISH. Compiled by 
 A. R. Thompson, some time Lecturer of the English Language in the 
 University of St. Vladimir, Kieff. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. iv. and 132. 
 1882. Price 53. 
 
 SERBIAN. 
 
 MORFILL. SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF THE SERBIAN LANGUAGE. By 
 W. R. MORFILL, M.A. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. viii. and 72. 1887. 
 Price 4s. 6d. 
 
 SPANISH, 
 
 *BUTLER. THE SPANISH TEACHER AND COLLOQUIAL PHRASE-BOOK. 
 An Easy and Agreeable Method of acquiring a Speaking Knowledge 
 of the Spanish Language. By FRANCIS BUTLER. i8mo, half-roan, 
 pp. xvi. and 240. 1870. Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 *CARRENO. METODO PARA APRENDER A LEER, escribir y hablar el 
 Ingles segun el sistema de Ollendorff, con un tratado de pronunciation 
 al principio y un Apendice importante al fin, que sirve de comple- 
 mento a la obra. Por RAMON PALENZUELA Y JUAN DE LA CARRENO. 
 Nueva Edicion, con una Pronunciacion Figurada segun un Sistema 
 Fonografico, por ROBERT GOODACRE. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. iv. and 
 496. 1876. Price 7s. 6d. 
 
 KEY to Ditto. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. in. Price 43. 
 
 HARTZENBUSCH AND LEMMING. ECO DE MADRID. A Practical 
 Gu'de to Spanish Conversation. By J. E. HARTZENBDSCH and H. 
 LEMMING. Third Edition. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. xii., 144, and 84. 
 1877. Price 5s. 
 
 NOTLEY. COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF THE FRENCH, ITALIAN 
 SPANISH, AND PORTUGUESE LANGUAGES. With a Copious Vocabulary. 
 By EDWIN A. NOTLEY. Oblong I2mo, cloth, pp. xv. and 396. 1868. 
 Price 7s. 6d. 
 
 *SIMONNE. METODO PARA APRENDER A LEER, escribir y hablar el 
 Frances, segun el verdadero sistema de Ollendorff; ordenado en lec- 
 uio.nes progresivas, consistiendo de ejercicios oralesy escritos ; enrique- 
 cido de la pronunciacion figurada como se estila en la conversacion ; y 
 de un Apendice abrazando las reglas de la sintdxis, la formacion de los 
 verbos regulares, y la conjugacion de los irregulares. Por TEODORO 
 SIMONNE, Professor de Lenguas. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. 342. 1876 
 Price 6s. 
 
 KEY to Ditto. Crown Svo, cloth, pp. 80. Price 35. 6d. 
 
on Modern European Languages. 1 5 
 
 * VELASQUEZ AND SIMONNE. -NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, 
 
 WRITE, AND SPEAK THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. Adapted to Ollendorff's 
 System. By M. VELASQUEZ and J. SIMONNE. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 
 558. 1880. Price 6s. 
 
 KEY to Ditto. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 174. Price 48. 
 
 VELASQUEZ. DICTIONARY OF THE SPANISH AND ENGLISH LAN- 
 GUAGES. For the Use of Learners and Travellers. By M. VELASQUEZ 
 DE LA CADENA. In Two Parts. I. Spanish-English ; II. English- 
 Spanish. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. viii. and 846. 1878. Price 73. 6d. 
 
 VELASQUEZ. PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY OF THE SPANISH AND 
 ENGLISH LANGUAGES. Composed from the Dictionaries of the Spanish 
 Academy, Terreros, and Salvd, and Webster, Worcester, and Walker. 
 In Two Parts. I. Spanish-English ; II. English-Spanish. By M. 
 VELASQUEZ DE LA CADENA. Roy. 8vo, cloth, pp. xvi., 675, xv., and 
 604. 1880. Price ;i, 43. 
 
 *VELASQUEZ.-NEW SPANISH READER. Passages from the most 
 approved authors, in Prose and Verse. Arranged in progressive order, 
 with Vocabulary. By M. VELASQUEZ DE LA CADENA. Crown 8vo, 
 cloth, pp. 352. 1880. Price 6s. 
 
 * VELASQUEZ. AN EASY INTRODUCTION TO SPANISH CONVERSATION, 
 
 containing all that is necessary to make a rapid progress in it. Par- 
 ticularly designed for persons who have little time to study, or are 
 their own instructors. By M. VELASQUEZ DE LA CADENA. New 
 Edition, revised and enlarged. I2mo, cloth, pp. viii. and 139. 1863. 
 Price 28. 6d. 
 
 SWEDISH. 
 
 OMAN. SVENSK - ENGELSK HAND - ORDBOK. (Swedish-English Dic- 
 tionary.) By F. E. OMAN. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. iv. and 470. 1872. 
 Price 8s. 
 
 *OTTE. SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF THE SWEDISH LANGUAGE. By E. 
 C. OTTE. Crown 8vo, pp. xii.-7o, cloth. 1884. Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 TECHNICAL DICTIONARIES. 
 
 EGER. TECHNOLOGICAL DICTIONARY IN THE ENGLISH AND GERMAN 
 LANGUAGES. Edited by GUSTAV EGER, Professor of the Polytechnic 
 School of Darmstadt, and Sworn Translator of the Grand Ducal 
 Ministerial Departments. Technically revised and enlarged by OTTO 
 BUANDES, Chemist. 2 vols., royal 8vo, cloth, pp, viii. and 712, and 
 pp. viii. and 970. 1884. i, 7. 
 
 KARMARSCH. TECHNOLOGICAL DICTIONARY OF THE TERMS EM- 
 PLOYED IN THE ARTS AND SCIENCES; Architecture, Civil, Military, 
 and Naval ; Civil Engineering ; Mechanics ; Machine Making ; 
 Shipbuilding and Navigation ; Metallurgy ; Artillery ; Mathematics ; 
 Physics ; Chemistry ; Mineralogy, &c. With a Preface by Dr. K. 
 KARMARSCH. Third Edition. 3 vols. 
 
 Vol. I. German-English-French. 8vo, cloth, pp. 646. Price I2s. 
 
 Vol. II. English-German-French. 8vo, cloth, pp. 666. Price I2s. 
 
 Vol. III. French- German-English. 8vo, cloth, pp. 618. Price 153. 
 
1 6 A Catalogue of Important Works. 
 
 KARMARSCH.-A POCKET DICTIONARY OF TECHNICAL TERMS USED 
 IN ARTS AND MANUFACTURES. English-German-French, Deutsch- 
 Englisch-Franzosisch, Francais-Allemand-Anglais. Abridged from 
 the above. With the addition of Commercial Terms. 3 vols. sq. 
 I2mo, cloth. Price I2s. 
 
 VEITELLE. MERCANTILE DICTIONARY. A Complete Vocabulary of 
 the Technicalities of Commercial Correspondence, Names of Articles 
 of Trade, and Marine Term?, in English, Spanish, and French ; with 
 Geographical Names, Business Letters, and Tables of the Abbrevia- 
 tions in Common Use in the three Languages. By I. DE VEITELLE. 
 Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 303. Price 73. 6d. 
 
 TURKISH. 
 
 ARNOLD. SIMPLE TRANSLITERAL GRAMMAR OF THE TURKISH 
 LANGUAGE. Compiled from Various Sources. With Dialogues and 
 Vocabulary. By Sir EDWIN ARNOLD, M.A., C.S.I., F.K.G.S. i8mo, 
 cloth, pp. 80. 1877. Price 28. 6d. 
 
 HOPKINS. ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR OF THE TURKISH LANGUAGE. 
 With a few Easy Exercises. By F. L. HOPKINS, M.A., Fellow and 
 Tutor of Trinity Hall, Cambridge. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 48. 1877. 
 Price 35. 6d. 
 
 REDHOUSE. THE TURKISH VADE-MECUM OF OTTOMAN COLLOQUIAL 
 LANGUAGE: Containing a Concise Ottoman Grammar ; a Carefully 
 Selected Vocabulary, Alphabetically Arranged, in Two Parts, English 
 and Turkish, and Turkish and English ; also a Few Familiar Dialogues 
 and Naval and Military Terms. The whole in English Charade; s, the 
 Pronunciation being fully indicated. By J. W. EEDHOUSE, M.R.A.S. 
 Third Edition. Fourth Thousand. 32rno, cloth, pp. viii. and 368. 
 1882. Price 6s. 
 
 *REDHOUSE. A SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF THE OTTOMAN TURKISH 
 LANGUAGE. By J. W. REDHOUSE, M.RA.S. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
 pp. xii. and 204. 1884, Price IDS. 6d. 
 
 REDHOUSE. A TURKISH AND ENGLISH LEXICON. Showing in Eng- 
 lish the Signification of the Turkish Terms. By J. W. REDHOUSE, 
 M.R A.S. Parts I. to III. Imperial 8vo, paper covers, pp. 960. 
 1884-85. Price 273. 
 
 WELSH. 
 
 EVANS. A DICTIONARY OF THE WELSH LANGUAGE. By the Rev. 
 D. SILVAN EVANS, B.D., Rector of Llanwrin, Machynlleth, North 
 Wales. Part I., A AWYS. Royal 8vo, paper, pp. 420. Price 
 IOS. 6d. Part II., B BYW. Royal Svo, paper, pp. 192. Price 53. 
 
 LONDON : TRUBNER & Co., 57 & 59 LUDGATE HILL. 
 
 PRINTED BY BALLANTYNE, HANSON AND CO. 
 
 .EDINBURGH AND LONDON. ./ 
 
 1000 21/2/89 D. 
 
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUEL THE PENALTY 
 WILL INCREASE TO 5O CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
 DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 
 
 OCT10WWA. 
 
 
 MAR 8 tG43 
 
 
 
 
 MAR 25 1943 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 WAV 21 1943 
 
 
 AUG 19 1943 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 WAY 7 1*~-1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 LD 21-100m-7,'40 (6936s) 
 
VB 02692 
 
 "895 
 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY